Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)
Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)
Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)
CONTENTS PAGE
VOLUME 1 of 2
Appendices
Specifications
CONTENTS PAGE
VOLUME 1 of 2 (CONT’D)
Reference Documents
VOLUME 2 of 2
At
For
Tender Documents
(Main Contract)
(Volume 1 )
(e) Specifications
2. Tenderer is required to make a payment for tender deposit as stated in the letter of
invitation to tender or email for the invitation to tender. The tender deposit will be
refunded in full to all unsuccessful tenderer who have submitted a bona fide tender
and returned the documents and drawings complete, in good condition and with all
drawings unmarked.
3. The tender deposit of the successful tenderer will not be refunded. The amount will be
used to defray the cost of drawings and printing charges of the Employer and/or
Consultants.
4. The Tender Documents shall be submitted at two (2) locations and shall be
properly and fully completed, signed and sealed in an envelope marked at the top
left-hand corner:
1a) three (3) thumb drives of completed tender submissions (i.e., PRICE &
QUALITY document);
1b) One (1) original, two (2) duplicate hard copies of the Form Of Tender A and B,
and Final Summaries For Tender A and B; properly and fully completed and
signed
1c) two (2) thumb drives of “Quality Documents WITHOUT PRICE” including the
Technical data; and clearly label “Quality Documents Without Price
Address to:-
and to be submitted not later than the date/time stated in the letter of invitation to
tender.
and to be submitted not later than the date/time stated in the letter of invitation to
tender.
6. The Tenderer must submit a tender based on the completion time as stipulated by
the Employer in the Form of Tender under Basic Tender ‘A’ as specified. The
Tenderer may in addition, submit Alternative Tender ‘B’ based on Tenderer’s own
set time for completion. The proposed period of completion shall not be more than
the Base Tender A’s period.
7. The Form of Tender and Appendices, Schedule of Prices, Final Summary, Schedule of
Rates, Technical datas must be filled in and completed, wherever applicable.
9. The Tenderer shall examine and read the Tender Documents to satisfy himself that
there are no discrepancies in or divergences in any of the Tender Documents. In the
event that the Tenderer has found any discrepancy or divergence, Tenderer shall
immediately request clarification from the Architect at least FIVE (5) days before
the Closing Date and Time and any bid submitted by the Tenderer shall be deemed
on the basis of such clarification. Failure by the Tenderer to raise any discrepancies
or divergences before tender submission shall result in the Tenderer being deemed
to have waived the right to rely on such discrepancy and/or divergence in its favour.
10. The Tenderer must submit with the tender a preliminary programme for the
completion of the whole of the Works for Basic Tender ‘A’ and a separate
programme for Alternative Tender ‘B’.
11. The Tenderers are required to submit following “Quality documents” in the same
sequence and same numberings as listed below, with clear page breaks for each of
items:-
1) Completed projects no less than S$30 million for past 3 years (i.e. Oct
2019 – Oct 2022)
8) Construction Programme
12) Site Team Organization Chart – to submit the CV of the P.M with
minimum 10 years of relevant local experience and other site staffs, all
have minimum relevant local experience of at least 5 years.
13. The tenders shall be valid for a period of ninety (90) days from the final date for
submission of tenders.
14. The Tenderer shall bear all expenses incurred by them in the preparation of their
tenders.
15. The Tenderer shall include in the tender price for all samples that may be requested
or directed by the Architect.
16. The Tenderer shall submit manufacturer’s catalogues, samples and relevant data
together with the tender.
17. The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender and/or alternative
tender and no reason will be given for rejecting any tender.
19. Confidentiality
19.1 The Tenderer shall maintain in strict confidence the following information
(collectively, “Confidential Information”):
19.2 Pursuant to the clause above, the Tenderer shall not without the prior
written consent of Employer:
- Use any portion of such Confidential Information for any purpose other
than to prepare its Tender Proposal or its response to queries from
Employer; and/or
- Disclose any portion of such Confidential Information to any person or
entity other than its officers or employees, agents or contractors who
reasonably needs to have access to the Confidential Information to allow
the Tenderer to prepare its Tender Proposal.
19.3 The Tenderer shall procure that all recipients of any part of the Confidential
Information that the Tenderer discloses pursuant to Clause 19.2, shall not
disclose the Confidential Information to any other party whatsoever.
19.4 Employer may require the Tenderer to return any materials, documents or
information provided by Employer in relation to the Tender, or to certify the
destruction of such materials, documents or information, and the Tenderer
shall comply with such requests.
19.5 The obligations of the Tenderer with respect to Confidential Information shall
survive the termination of this Agreement and shall remain in effect
perpetually, except to the extent that:
- the Tenderer is able to prove that prior to receipt from Employer, it had
received such Confidential Information from a third party lawfully
possessing and lawfully entitled to disclose such information; or
19.6 The Tenderer hereby acknowledges and agrees that a breach of its obligations
under this Clause 19 will give rise to irreparable injury to Employer which
cannot be adequately compensated for by damages. Employer is therefore
entitled, in addition to all other remedies available to it, to injunctive and
other equitable relief without necessity to post a bond to prevent a breach of
and/or to secure the enforcement of this Clause 19.
The Tender Sum including all rates and prices submitted by the Tenderer in his
tender shall be exclusive of any Goods and Services Tax (hereinafter referred to as
“GST”) which may become payable under the Goods and Services Tax Act.
Any GST which may become payable on taxable goods and services supplied under
the Contract shall be separately paid by the Employer to the Tenderer as and when
such tax becomes payable.
For the purpose of this clause unless the Tenderer has separately declared in the
Form of Tender that he is a non-taxable person within the meaning stipulated in the
Goods and Services Tax Act, the Tenderer shall be deemed to be a taxable person
under the said Act.
If the Tenderer has declared himself to be a non-taxable person under the Goods
and Services Tax Act in his Tender, any subsequent GST which may become payable
as a result of the Tenderer becoming taxable under the said Act, due to any reason
whatsoever, shall be fully borne by the Tenderer and not separately paid by the
Employer to the Tenderer.
21. All queries from the Tenderer shall be in writing or shall be emailed in editable soft
copy and PDF copy; not later than 5 days before the tender closing to the office of:-
Email: [email protected]
Attention: Mr. Cheng Tee Teck
Email: [email protected]
Attention: Ms. Jasmine Quek\Ms. Yan Shi Min
Email: [email protected] /
[email protected]/
[email protected]
Attn: Mr. Alvin Sung / Mr. Fung Yuan Zhi/ Mr. Chong Soon Teck
Tender Documents
For
At
For
To :
Gentlemen,
1. Having examined the Tender Drawings and read the Tender Documents for the
above-named Works, and having familiarised ourselves with the Site, we hereby
offer to construct, complete and maintain the whole of the said Works in conformity
with the said Tender Drawings and Tender Documents as follows:-
The whole of the Works to be completed within a period of Eighteen (18) months
from the Commencement Date, and,
[Note: Alternative Tender B’s proposed period must be less than Basic
Tender A period”]
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/1
Form of Tender (Cont'd)
2. We understand that parts of the Works are covered by Prime Cost (PC) Sums in
the Schedule of Prices and if our tender is accepted we undertake (subject to the
rights of objection under Clause 29 of the Conditions of Contract) to execute Sub-
Contract Agreements with the Nominated Sub-Contractors.
In the event that a Sub-Contractor is engaged by the Employer prior to the award
of this contract to carry out works which are the subject of a PC Sum in the
Schedule of Prices, we undertake (subject to the rights of objection under Clause
29 of the Conditions of Contract) to execute a Novation Agreement with the
Employer and the Designated Sub-Contractor in terms exactly similar to the
specimen attached hereto as Appendix FT/J and thereafter to execute a Sub-
Contract Agreement with the said Designed Sub-Contractor.
3. We agree that should any discrepancy occur between the amount written in words
and in figures entered upon the Form of Tender, the amount written in words will
be used.
If there is any discrepancy between the tender sum inserted in the Form of Tender
and the sum stated in the other parts of the document, the sum stated in the Form
of Tender shall be taken as correct.
5. The tender sums are firm prices and shall not be subject to any adjustment for any
reasons whatsoever save only in the event of variation instructions issued by the
Superintending Officer pursuant to the Conditions of Contract.
6. We undertake to commence the Works within Seven (7) days from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance and to complete the whole of the Works within the period
stated in this Form of Tender.
7. We agree to abide by these Tenders for a period of ninety (90) days from the final
date fixed for submission of Tenders and they shall remain binding upon us and
may be accepted at any time before the end of that period.
8. We confirm that all specified materials and requirements are included in the
tender.
9. We agree to the Liquidated Damages for the late completion of the Works at the rate
of S$12,000.00 per calendar day for period during which the Works remain
incomplete.
10. We understand that storage space on site is limited. We have allowed in our
Tender for all reasonable additional expense incurred in storing and protecting
undelivered Goods off site and insuring them against loss and damage however
caused from the time the Goods are stored until delivery to site.
11. If our Tender is accepted, we will provide within fourteen (14) days from the day
of the Letter of Acceptance a Performance Bond in the form of a Banker’s
Guarantee under the terms exactly as the specimen appended hereto from a Bank
(to be approved by the Employer) in a sum equal to ten (10) per cent of the
accepted Tender Sum for the due performance of the Contract. The expense of
providing the said Bond shall be borne by us.
Egg Farm- Main Contract
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/2
12. We understand that you are at liberty to accept any of the Tenders submitted by
us and you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender that you may
receive.
13. We agree that you reserve the right to accept this tender in whole or parts and we
shall not claim for any loss of profit or interest or any other cost against you for
omission or acceptance of such works.
14. Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed, this Tender
together with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding Contract
between us.
15. *Declaration of a Taxable/Non-Taxable Person under the Goods and Services Tax Act
Signature : ..................................................
in the capacity of
(Address)
(Address)
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/3
Appendices
APPENDIX FT/A
The Contractor's obligation is not limited to the provision of the Plant listed above. Should the
Architect consider it necessary for the Contractor to provide additional plant to expedite the Works,
the Contractor shall do so at no extra cost to the Employer.
.............................................................................................................................................
...
.............................................................................................................................................
...
(In Block Capital)
..................................... Address:.......................................................
Signature of Witness
....................................................................
....................................................................
..........................................................
....................................................................
Name of Witness
Where work cannot properly be measured and valued the Contractor shall be allowed daywork
rates as inserted in Tables I, II and III of this Schedule.
All daywork rates shall deem to include design and Consultants' Fees.
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table I are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(a) The amount of wages actually paid to the employee when carrying out dayworks.
(b) Central Provident Fund contribution and/or Government levy on foreign workers, payroll
tax and contribution to Skills Development Fund as applicable.
Overtime is defined as any time worked on Sundays or Public Holidays or any time worked
outside the following normal working hours:-
The Rates of payment for working overtime will be calculated on the following basis:-
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table II are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(d) All other costs and expenses relating to the materials used.
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table III are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(a) Use of Contractor's own or hired mechanically operated plant for the time engaged on
daywork.
(c) Maintenance.
Rates for plant are to exclude labour rates in respect of drivers and operatives (which are
provided in Table I).
Payment for mechanically operated plant will be made only for such time as the plant is engaged
upon daywork operations and shall exclude mobilisation time, standing time and demobilisation
time.
Overheads and profit are to be included in the rates inserted by the Contractor in respect of
labour, materials and plant in Table I, II and III respectively.
The terms "overheads" is deemed to include inter alia all of the following costs and charges:-
(c) Compliance with all Government and Statutory rules and regulations.
(i) Insurances.
(j) Use, repair and maintenance of small tools, non-mechanically operated plant, erected
scaffolding, staging and trestles.
(k) Storage facilities and the like that may be in general use on the site.
TABLE I - LABOUR
Labourer - Male
Labourer - Female
Concretor
Steel bender
Bricklayer/Mason
Drainlayer
Roofer
Carpenter
Joiner
Steelworker
Welder
Plasterer
Tiler
Plumber
Electrician
Glazier
Painter
Driver
Mechanic
TABLE II - MATERIALS
Cement 50 kg bag
Cement tonne
20mm aggregate m3
25mm ditto m3
38mm ditto m3
6mm diameter kg
9 or 10mm diameter kg
13mm diameter kg
16mm diameter kg
9 or 10mm diameter kg
13mm diameter kg
16mm diameter kg
20mm ditto kg
22mm ditto kg
25mm ditto kg
28mm ditto kg
32mm ditto kg
The Contractor is to enter the size or capacity of plant he proposes to have on site, where not
stated.
- (Ditto) ..... m³
- ditto ..... mm
- ditto ..... mm
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
.......................................... .....................................................
Signature and Company Stamp Signature of Witness
.......................................... .....................................................
Name of Signatory in Block Letter Name of Witness in Block Letter
.......................................... .....................................................
.......................................... .....................................................
Notwithstanding any contrary provisions stipulated in the Conditions of Contract, the Tenderer
shall comply and submit his pricing details in accordance with this Schedule of Breakdown of
Rates. Such breakdown of rates shall be used as a basis for valuation of variations.
Every rate shall include for the provision of all materials delivered to site including cutting and
waste, unloading, storage, packing, carriage and cartage, hoisting, all labour for fabricating,
setting, fitting and fixing in position, protecting, use of tools, plant and machinery where
applicable, supervision, establishment charges, profit and any other expense and everything else
necessary for the due and proper completion of each item.
The total rate or price as inserted by the Tenderer below shall be the same as the rate or price
for the same item as priced in the Schedule of Rates.
For the avoidance of doubt, where there is a change of materials or specifications or addition of
any new items, the level of overhead and profit of any such change will be based on the
average percentage of similar work items in the same category as shown in this Schedule of
Breakdown of Rates.
Item Unit Material Wastage Labour Plant & Overhead Total Rate
Cost Machinery and Profit
(if any)
S$ S$ S$ S$ S$ S$
........................................................ .........................................................
Signature and Company Stamp Signature of Witness
........................................................ ..........................................................
Name of Signatory in Block Letter Name of Witness in Block Letter
........................................................ ..........................................................
........................................................ ..........................................................
Project Manager
Structural Engineer
M & E Engineer
Architectural Coordinator
BIM Manager
BIM Coordinator
Safety Officer
Foremen
Contractor's obligation is not limited to the provision of the site staff listed above.
.......................................................... .............................................
Signature of Contractor Signature of Witness
........................................................ .............................................
......................................................... .............................................
To :
(Name of Employer)
2. Should you notify us in writing, at any time prior to the expiry of this Guarantee, by
notice purporting to be signed for and on your behalf that you require payment to be
made of the whole or any part of the Guaranteed Sum, we irrevocably and
unconditionally agree to pay the same to you immediately on demand without
further reference to the Contractor and notwithstanding any dispute or difference
which may have arisen under the Contract or any instruction which may be given to
us by the Contractor not to pay the same.
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/E/1
APPENDIX FT/E
or
or
but that we shall be entitled to and shall rely upon any written demand by you
hereunder.
5. We agree that our liability hereunder shall not be discharged, affected or impaired in
any way by reason of any modification, amendment or variation in or to any of the
conditions or provisions of the Contract or the Contract Works (including, if
necessary the remedying by others of work not in accordance with this Contract) or
by reason of any breach or breaches of the Contract by the Contractor, whether the
same are made with or without our knowledge or consent. We further agree that no
invalidity in the Contract nor its avoidance, suspension or termination shall
discharge, affect or impair our liability hereunder and that no waiver, compromise,
indulgence or forbearance, whether as to time, payment, performance or any other
matter afforded by you to the Contractor under the Contract, shall discharge, affect
or impair our liability hereunder.
6. We confirm that our liability hereunder shall be a continuing liability and that this
Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect (for the duration of the Contract
Period inclusive of the Maintenance period specified in the Contract) until …………………
(the “Expiry Date”) and shall be automatically renewed for successive periods of one
year unless we have given three months notice sent to you by registered mail prior
to the Expiry Date of the current Guarantee or renewed Guarantee of our intention
not to renew whereupon the current Guarantee or renewed Guarantee shall
automatically expire on the last day of the current Guarantee year or renewed
Guarantee year (the “Termination Date”).
7. This Guarantee shall expire as to any undrawn portion of the Guaranteed Sum at the
close of banking business on the Expiry Date. Notification of demand for payment
may be presented to us at any time prior to expiry. "Undrawn portion" shall mean
the Guaranteed Sum less the aggregate amount which shall have been the subject
of notification by you of your demand for payment as hereinbefore provided.
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/E/2
APPENDIX FT/E
8. Notwithstanding the foregoing, claims presented by the Employer within (3) three
months after the expiry of this Guarantee shall be valid and binding upon us.
9. This Guarantee shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of
Singapore and we hereby agree to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the
Courts of Singapore.
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/E/3
APPENDIX FT/F
WHEREAS:-
1. By an agreement made between the Employer and the Contractor dated the day of
.............................. 20 ....... (hereinafter called "the Contract") the Employer has engaged
the Contractor to construct, complete and maintain
................................................................................................ (hereinafter called "the
Works").
2. The Contractor has agreed to warrant and indemnify the Employer, in the manner
hereinafter appearing, against any defects in the workmanship, quality of materials,
watertightness or failure in the Works.
1. In the event of any failure or defects (as shall be determined by the Employer) in the
workmanship, quality of materials, installation, watertightness or deterioration appearing in
the Works, the Contractor shall forthwith upon notice from the Employer and within such
time as the Employer may direct, effect remedial works to the defective area or areas and
shall make good to the absolute satisfaction of the Employer all damages to surface finishes
including but not limited to plaster, painting, panelling, tiling and other similar works,
mechanical, electrical or other installations or other property arising directly or indirectly out
of the said failure or defects.
2. In the event that remedial works undertaken by the Contractor prove ineffective as
determined by the Employer whose decision shall be final and conclusive, or are not to the
satisfaction of the Employer, the Contractor shall effect such additional works in such a
manner and within such time as the Employer may direct and shall carry out all tests as
directed by the Employer until all the defects have been remedied to the absolute
satisfaction of the Employer.
3. Should the Contractor fail to perform its obligations under Clauses 1 and 2 above within the
time directed by the Employer or in the absence of such direction, within a reasonable
period, the Employer shall be entitled to remedy the said defects and the Contractor shall
forthwith on demand reimburse the Employer all costs and expenses incurred by the
Employer for making good the said defects including reimbursements by the Contractor of all
consequential damages and all legal costs on a Solicitor and Client basis incurred by the
Employer in enforcing this Clause.
4. All costs and expenses arising out of the performance of the obligations under this Warranty
and Indemnity shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
5. The giving of time or the neglect or forbearance of the Employer in requiring or enforcing its
rights under this Warranty and Indemnity or other indulgence to the Contractor shall not in
any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor and the rights of the Employer
under this Warranty and Indemnity.
6. This Warranty and Indemnity shall be freely assignable by the Employer to any party
(hereinafter called "the Assignee") and after such assignment, the Contractor shall perform
all its obligations under this Warranty and Indemnity as if the Assignee had been the party to
whom this Warranty and Indemnity was given instead of the Employer.
7. Any notice or demand required to be made shall be sufficiently given if served by hand or
sent by registered post to the aforesaid address of the Contractor or such address specified
by it and shall be deemed to be received at the time when it would have been delivered in
the ordinary course of post.
IT IS HEREBY EXPRESSLY AGREED hereto that this Warranty and Indemnity shall be
valid for the period of ................ (..........) years from the date of completion of the Works
and will expire on .................................................................... (date).
This Warranty and Indemnity shall have full force and effect notwithstanding any limitation
or termination of the Contractor's liability and/or responsibility under the Contract.
This Warranty and Indemnity is in addition to and without prejudice to any other rights and
remedies which the Employer may have against the Contractor or any other person whether
in contract, tort or otherwise.
This Warranty and Indemnity shall be construed in accordance with the laws of of the
Republic Singapore and the Contractor hereby submits to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of
the courts of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF
THIS DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY is given on the .............. day of
..................... 20........... by …........................................................ having its registered
office at
……...................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called "the Contractor" which term shall include its assigns and successors in
title) of the first part, and .......................................................…………………………….. having
its registered office at ……………………..
........................................................................…….. (hereinafter called "the Sub-
Contractor" which term shall include its assigns and successors in title) of the second part in
favour of ………………....................................................................................……..
(hereinafter called "the Employer" which term shall include its assigns and successors in
title).
Whereas
(3) The Contractor and the Sub-Contractor have agreed to warrant in favour of and
indemnify the Employer, in the manner hereinafter appearing, against
......................…..............….............................................................................
……………... in the Sub-Contract Works (which forms part of the Works).
NOW THIS DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY WITNESS that the
Contractor and the Sub-Contractor hereby undertake jointly and severally as follows
:-
2. In the event that remedial works undertaken by the Contractor and/or Sub-
Contractor prove ineffective as determined by the Employer whose decision
shall be final and conclusive, or are not to the satisfaction of the Employer,
the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor shall effect such additional works in
such a manner and within such time as the Employer may direct and shall
carry out all tests as directed by the Employer until all the defects have been
remedied to the absolute satisfaction of the Employer.
4. All costs and expenses arising out of the performance of the obligations
under this Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall be borne solely by the
Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor.
6. This Joint Warranty and Indemnity may be assigned by the Employer to any
party (hereinafter called "the Assignee") and after such assignment, the
Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor shall perform all its obligations under this
Joint Warranty and Indemnity as if the Assignee had been the party to
whom this Joint Warranty and Indemnity was given instead of the Employer.
IT IS HEREBY EXPRESSLY AGREED hereto that this Joint Warranty and Indemnity
shall be valid for the period of ............................... (......) years from the date of
completion of the Works as stated in the Completion Certificate and will expire on
...................................... (date).
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall have full force and effect notwithstanding
any limitation or termination of the Contractor's and/or Sub-Contractor's liability
and/or responsibility under the Contract and/or Sub-Contract.
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity is in addition to and without prejudice to any
other rights and remedies which the Employer may have against the Contractor
and/or Sub-Contractor or any other person whether in contract, tort or otherwise,
the said rights and remedies of which shall not be limited by the duration of the
Deed.
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall be construed in accordance with the laws of
Singapore and the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor hereby submits to the non-
exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Singapore.
............................................................ ......................................................
. Name & Signature of Director
Name & Signature of Director
............................................................ ......................................................
. Name & Signature
Name & Signature of Director/Company Secretary
of Director/Company Secretary
who are duly authorised to execute this Deed of Joint Warranty and Indemnity .
Employer
Dear Sirs
Project title
The Employment Of Foreign Manpower Act (Cap. 91a) / Immigration Act (Cap.133)
Written Undertaking
We hereby declare and confirm that we have complied and shall continue to comply with the
provisions of the Employment of Foreign Manpower Act. (Cap.91A) and/or the Immigration Act
(Cap.133).
In the course of performing our contractual obligation as Contractor, we shall exercise due
diligence in ensuring that neither the Company, our contractors or sub-contractors have in their
employed person/persons in contravention to the Employment of Foreign Manpower Act (Cap.
91A) nor are they harbouring or employing any person who had acted in contravention of the
provisions of the Immigration Act (Cap. 133).
Yours faithfully
...................................................
CONTRACTOR
cc
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
Please indicate clearly below your compliance in the format given below and tick the appropriate
box. For non or partial compliance, please indicate which clause you are not in agreement with
and provide your explanatory notes in the ‘remarks’ column.
*Only the following symbols shall be used to indicate due compliance or otherwise:
(Note: If you are fully compliance to the tender requirements and terms and conditions, please
state “Fully Compliance to Tender Requirements” and a blank Form return is not acceptable.)
.......................................................... ..............................................
Signature of Contractor Signature of Witness
........................................................ ..............................................
......................................................... ..............................................
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
WHEREAS :
1. The Employer has entered into an agreement with the Sub-Contractor for the
___________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called "the Sub-Contract"). Under the terms of the Sub-Contract, the
Sub-Contractor has agreed inter alia that upon the award of the Main Contract (as
referred to in Recital 2 hereunder):
(a) the Main Contractor shall assume the rights, interests and obligations of the
Employer under the Sub-Contract.
(b) the Sub-Contractor shall execute this Agreement releasing and discharging
the Employer from the further performance of the Sub-Contract.
2. The Employer has entered into an agreement with the Main Contractor to
__________________________________________________________________,
(hereinafter called "the Main Contract"). Under the terms of the Main Contract, the
Main Contractor has agreed inter alia to execute this Agreement undertaking to
perform and observe the Sub-Contract and be bound by the terms thereof in all
respects as if the Main Contractor had been a party to the Sub-Contract.
3. The Employer desires to be released and discharged from the further performance of
the Sub-Contract.
(Project\22\2216\MC\B\TD) FT/J/1
Appendix FT/J
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED that in consideration of the premises and in pursuance of the
Main Contract and the Sub-Contract:
1. The Main Contractor hereby undertakes to perform and observe the Sub-Contract as
from the date hereof and to be bound by the terms thereof in all respects as if the
Main Contractor had been a party to the Sub-Contract in place of the Employer.
2. The Sub-Contractor hereby releases and discharges the Employer from the further
performance of the Sub-Contract as from the date hereof and all claims and
demands whatsoever in respect thereof and agrees to accept the liability of the Main
Contractor to perform and observe the Sub-Contract in lieu of the liability of the
Employer and agrees to be bound by the terms of the Sub-Contract in every way as
if the Main Contractor had been named in the Sub-Contract as a party thereto in
place of the Employer.
(Project\22\2216\MC\B\TD) FT/J/2
Appendix FT/J
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
AS WITNESS our hands the day and year first above written
SIGNED
by (Name of Signatory)
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Employer
.................................................................
SIGNED
by (Name of Signatory)
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Main Contractor
.................................................................
SIGNED
by (Name of Signatory)
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Sub-Contractor
.................................................................
(Project\22\2216\MC\B\TD) FT/J/3
Appendix to the Conditions of Contract
SIA Building Contract 2016 Without Quantities, 1' Edition
APPENDIX
Clause
© Copyright by SIA 68
SIA Building Contract 2016 Without Quantities, 1' Edition
Clause
AREA OR EXTENT OF SITE 10(1) As Shown on Drawings
* If necessary by reference to Contract Drawings or numbered clause of Contract Specifications or other Contract Document
© Copyright by SIA 69
SIA Building Contract 2016 Without Quantities, 1' Edition
Clause
PERIOD FOR ALLOWANCE FOR DEFECTS 27(3) As per Contract
(If none stated, 84 days from the date of issue of the Schedule of
Defects.)
© Copyright by SIA 70
SIA Building Contract 2016 Without Quantities, 1' Edition
Clause
2. $
3. $
*Delete as appropriate.
© Copyright by SIA 71
Amendments to Articles and Conditions of Building Contract
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
The Articles of Agreement and Conditions of Contract have been amended and
agreed between the parties as follows:
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT
2. TYPE OF CONTRACT
3. ARCHITECT
8. PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Sub-clause 8(1)(a)
Insert the words “or to be inferred from” after “in” in the first line.
9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Sub-clause 9(1)(e)
Insert the words “by the Contractor” after “priced” in the first line.
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for the duration
of the Works inclusive of the Maintenance Period as stipulated in the
Contract or until the issuing of the Maintenance Certificate by the
Architect, whichever is the later.”
Delete the words “original scope of work” from the second line and replace
with “Works.”.
Insert the words “to works both within and outside the boundary of the site”
after “Variations” in the first line.
Sub-clause 12(4)(e)(iv)
Delete the words "plus 15%” from the third line and replace with “plus
10%”.
73
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
“The Contractor shall maintain in the joint names of the Employer and the
Contractor insurances for such amounts of indemnity as may be specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents in respect of any damage, expense,
liability, loss, claim or proceedings which the Employer may incur or
sustain due to injury or damage of any kind to property real or personal
(including property of the Employer but not the Works themselves) arising
out of or in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the Works and
caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of
support or lowering of ground water excepting damage :
Sub-clause 20(1)(b)
Delete the words "full value, plus the percentage of the value of works
required to bring the works to the state prior to the occurrence of the
insured incident and the amount named in the Appendix to cover
professional fees" from third line and replace with "full reinstatement value
thereof (plus Goods and Services Tax and the respective percentages named
in the Appendix hereto to cover professional fees)".
Sub-clause 20(1)(c)
“The Contractor shall keep such work, materials or goods so insured until
completion of the whole of the Works under Clause 22(2) of these
Conditions, notwithstanding any Phased or Stage Completion or Partial
Occupation by the Employer.”
74
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
23(2) Grounds
26(4) Certification
Sub-clause 26(4)(d)(iii)
27 MAINTENANCE
Sub-clause 27(1)(a)
“The Maintenance Period for the whole of the Works stated in the Appendix
hereto shall commence upon the issue of the Completion Certificate under
Clause 22(2) or 25 of these Conditions in respect of the last Phase of the
Works to be completed.”
Sub-clause 27(1)(b)(i)
75
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
Sub-clause 31(2)(b)(i)
Delete the words “7 days” from second line and replace with “21 days”.
Sub-clause 31(7)(a)
Insert the words “for the last phase of the Works” after “Certificate” in the
third line.
Delete the words “within and inclusive of the 25th to 28th calendar day of
each calendar month” from second line and replace with “on the last day of
each calendar month following the month in which the contract is made”.
76
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
“This Contract does not create or purport to create any right under the
Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 2001 or any subsequent
amendment thereto, which is enforceable by any person or party who or
which is not a party to this Contract. Any person or party who or which is
not a party to this Contract shall have no right under such Act or
subsequent amendment thereto, to enforce or enjoy the benefit of any of
the terms and conditions herein."
44. PUBLICITY
45. RELATIONSHIP
77
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
“The Contractor shall not, in any case whatsoever, be entitled to claim for
any indirect or consequential losses, including but not limited to loss of
profit, interest on capital employed and financing charges, from the
Employer.”
78
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
List of Architectural General and Particular Specification
Structural Specification
S/No. Description Reference
1 Demolition and site clearance C1-10
2 Condition Survey and Monitoring C1-20
3 General Earthworks_Excavation and Filling C2-20
4 Sheetpiling C2-30
5 Instrucmentation and Monitoring C2-50
6 Concrete Construction Generally C3-10
7 Reinforcement C3-20
8 Formwork and Falsework C3-30
10 Designed Joints C3-40
11 Water-Resistance to Concrete C3-50
12 Precast Concrete Works C3-60
13 Concrete Repair C3-80
14 Driven Piling C4-20
15 Pile Testing C4-30
16 Structural Steelwork C5-10
17 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork C5-20
18 Building Sewers Construction C6-10
19 Building Drain Construction C6-20
20 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways C7-10
21 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways C7-20
22 Road Ancillaries C7-30
Structural Specifications
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 Standards and Regulations
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.5 Definition
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor’s Design
2.2 Falsework
2.3 Ground Movements and Vibrations
2.4 Noise Nuisance
2.5 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Survey
4.2 Demolition Methods
4.3 Precautions Against Uncontrolled Collapse
4.4 Safety Measures
4.5 Temporary Structures
4.6 Excavation
4.7 Adjoining Properties
4.8 Partly Demolished Structures
4.9 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
4.10 Removal of Asbestos Material
4.11 Precautions against Vibrations and Concussion
4.12 Site Drainage
4.13 Unknown Hazards
4.14 Open Basements
4.15 Filling of Basements
4.16 Reinstatement and Making Good to Disturbed Areas
4.17 Completion
4.18 Preparation for Cultivation with Turfing
4.19 Other Particular Requirement
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section C1/10 of
NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses
noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with those in C1/10 with the same
clause title.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for works involving the demolition of existing buildings
and other structures and general site clearance.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted.
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become obsolete,
refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant clauses.
SS 557:2.10 Code of Practice for Demolition
BS 6187 Code of Practice for Demolition
BS 5228: Part 1 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites – Code of
practice for basic information and procedures for noise and vibration
control
BS 5395: Part 1 Stairs, ladders and walkways - Code of practice for the design
construction and maintenance of straight stairs and winders
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
BS 5607 Code of practice for safe use of explosives in the construction industry
BS EN 12811-1 Code of practice for access and working scaffolds and special 2003
scaffold structures in steel
BS 5974 Temporary installed suspended scaffolds and access equipment (partially
superseded by BS EN 1808)
SS 580:2012 Formwork Code of practice
BS EN 1808 Safety requirements on suspended access equipment - design
calculations, stability criteria, construction - tests
Propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground movement
and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
1.4.3 Supervision
1.4.3.1 Demolition
Engage a full-time competent supervisor with appropriate demolition experience to supervise
the work strictly in accordance with the directions of the engaged Professional Engineer.
A competent supervisor shall have sufficient professional or technical training, knowledge
and actual experience to enable them to:
a. carry out their assigned duties at the level of responsibility allocated to them
b. understand fully any potential hazards related to the work under consideration.
c. detect any technical defects or omissions in that work, recognize any implications for
health and safety caused by those defects or omissions.
d. be able to specify a remedial action to mitigate those implications.
1.4.4 Qualifications
Provide evidence of past experience for all personnel to the SO for acceptance prior to
commencement of the Works.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Obtain from the SO and verify available information relevant to the following:
a. existing site surveys
b. existing services
c. existing building on the site
d. site investigation
Carry out additional investigation or request from the authorities to ensure that adequate
information is available to carry out the works.
Allow for conditions peculiar to the site and all other matters affecting the proposed Work and
allow as necessary for the types of materials to be excavated.
Prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a condition survey to adjacent
buildings in accordance with the requirements of section C1-20 “Condition Survey and
Monitoring”. Submit all records to the SO and adjacent property owners where directed.
Keep a copy of the survey report on site ready for inspection.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads, footpaths etc.,
where applicable, together with the mains and services from the time of taking possession of the
site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep clear of mud
and debris.
1.4.9.1 General
Do not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted
principles of safe and sound practice.
Ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. Maintain all safety provisions
properly and do not remove any specific equipment etc without the written acceptance
of the SO.
Ensure that all personnel take necessary and sufficient safety precautions
Submit the proposed alignments and levels of temporary access roads to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
Maintain all necessary temporary access roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
Divert and reinstate the permanent drainage system.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Provide temporary access stairways and walkways in compliance with BS 5395: Part 1,
particularly with respect to minimum headroom and clearance, both vertically and perpendicular
to the plane of the stairs.
1.4.13.1 General
Erect protective hoarding, safety netting/catch platform or other structures to ensure public
safety prior to starting demolition works.
Provide, erect and maintain a continuous hoarding around the entire contract boundary
prior to commencement of the works.
Erect the hoarding at not less than 300mm away from any permanent structure such as
footway, drain, pipeline, etc. unless otherwise agreed.
1.4.13.2 Type of Hoarding
The types of hoardings to be erected depend on the building locality and the demolition zone. In
general, the categories of hoarding shall be as follows: Category A: Protective hoarding for use
where footway is needed; Category B: Protective hoarding for use where footway is not needed;
Category C: Protective hoarding erected on carriageway; Category D: Scaffold hoarding shall
be minimum 6.8metres high where the distance between the building edge and the hoarding is
less than 1½ times the height of the building;
Category E: Metal hoarding shall be minimum 2metres high where the distance between the
building edge and the hoarding is more than 1½ times the height of the building.
Refer to PSD for the category of hoarding required for the project. The category of hoarding
required for this project is Category A.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
hoarding.
Dispose all debris at NEA approved tips. Take special care to prevent debris from site being
carried or blown onto surrounding areas. Clean vehicle wheels before the vehicle leaves site.
1.4.16 Rubbish
Take all reasonable steps to minimise waste production on site
Dispose rubbish and unwanted non-hazardous materials at NEA approved tips and keep the
site clean and tidy. Remove all rubbish, dirt and residues from voids and cavities before filling
or closing in.
Sort and dispose of recyclable material at an NEA approved Material Recycling Facility where
applicable. Retain waste transfer documentation on site.
1.4.18.1 General
Avoid damage to existing structures, pavements and properties. Reinstate and make good any
damage caused by or as a result of the Works. Reinstatement and making good shall also
include all affected fixtures, fittings and finishes.
1.4.18.2 Consents
If it is found necessary to break up existing pavement, road, footpath, etc for purposes
as required in the Contract, notify the SO accordingly prior to commencement of
Works.
If work is to be carried out on public roads, obtain permission from LTA.
1.4.19 Security
Adequately safeguard the site, products, materials, plants and any existing buildings affected
by the Works from theft.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Engage a pest control operator who is registered with the BCA under the Work Head for Pest
Control to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the site.
Submit the name of the pest control operator and proof of BCA registration to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
Pest control and surveillance programme shall comply with the requirements of the NEA as the
following:
a. Submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme to the Environmental Health
Office, NEA prior to commencement of the work.
b. Maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of pest control and surveillance
that have been carried out. Make site register available for inspection by the SO.
c. Take all necessary measures to prevent the site (including vacant flats where relevant)
from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors.
d. Carry out site checks at least once a week to detect and remove breeding and harbouring
grounds.
1.4.21.1 General
Take all reasonable precautions to prevent pollution of the site and the general environment
including streams and waterways. If pollution occurs, inform the appropriate authorities and
the SO immediately and provide them with all relevant information.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent personal injury, death and damage to the Works or
other properties from fire. Comply with FSSB’s requirement for Fire Prevention on Construction
Sites.
Carry out a complete topographical survey of the site upon completion of the works indicating
levels of ground and remaining structures and services, and other ground features remaining
on site.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the SO. Refer to the General
Requirements section, clause 1.4.10 for guidance.
1.5 Definition
a. Temporary Works All construction works that are not part of the Permanent
Works but are required in order to complete the Permanent
Works
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2 Falsework
2.2.1 Foundations
Foundations for false work shall be suitable to sustain the calculated maximum loads without
failure or unacceptable settlement.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Comply with all the provisions under the latest Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice
for Railway Protection and the Guide to Carrying Out Restricted Activities within Railway
Protection and Safety Zones for the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone
and railway safety zone.
3.1 Falsework
Do not use the prohibited equipment and methods as scheduled in the PSD. Do not use the
prohibited equipment and methods as scheduled below:
a. NA
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Survey
Prior to the commencement of the Works, verify all available information. Carry out a detailed
visual survey and examination of the physical condition and structural stability of the building(s)
to be demolished and other surrounding buildings.
Take photographs where necessary.
Carry out a further survey and examination of the structures on completion of the Works.
4.4.1 Sequence
Demolish buildings and other structures in the reverse order to that of their construction. The
order of demolition for buildings should be progressive level-by- level, having regard to the
type of construction.
4.4.2 Debris
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
In cases when demolished material is allowed to fall freely externally, provide a covered
hoarding with catch fan. In other cases, use chutes or skips.
Prior to demolition of walls, sections of the floors should be removed by hand demolition
to facilitate the free fall of debris.
4.6 Excavation
Refer to Section C2-20 ‘General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)’, Clause 4.2.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Leave partly demolished structures in a stable condition with adequate temporary supports
at each stage to prevent risk of uncontrolled collapse.
Prevent access of unauthorised persons to partly demolished structure(s).
4.9 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
Undertake an independent survey to ascertain the presence, location, extent and nature of
asbestos materials in the buildings.
Report immediately to the SO any suspected asbestos materials discovered during demolition.
Avoid disturbing such materials.
Agree with the SO safe methods for removal.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
4.10.2 Regulations
Undertake all asbestos removal work in strict accordance to the “Guidelines on Handling
Asbestos Materials” and “Code of Practice for Handling of Asbestos Materials” issued by
the Occupational Health Department (OHD), Ministry of Manpower (MOM).
In general, notify the Chief Inspector of Factories at least 28 days prior to
commencement of the work in accordance to the Factories Act (Asbestos)
Regulations, and Factories (Asbestos) (Amendment) Regulations.
Submit X-ray examination report of the workers prior to commencement of the work to the
OHD, MOM.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
4.16.1 Services
Temporarily disconnect and/or divert all affected services prior to the commencement of Works
and reinstate immediately upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
Reinstate and make good the affected Works and services in such a manner that upon
substantial completion they shall be in as good order and condition as they were at the
commencement of the contract.
4.17 Completion
Clean all rubbish, debris and surplus materials and leave the whole site clean and tidy.
Complete to the required final condition of the site as described in the PSD.
Comply with other project specific requirements or restrictions for the works as described in the
PSD if any.
Comply with other project specific requirements or restrictions for the works as described below:
a. No noisy works during school examination period
b. Refer to NIA report
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Design Submission
Method Statements
Site Management
Site Layout Plan
Survey Report
Scaffolding/ falsework Inspection
Proposals for Monitoring MRT Structures for Vibration
Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety
Zone
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
5.1.8 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
Not applicable.
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for SO’s acceptance prior to starting work.
Version 1.0
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
As-built Survey
After the completion of the demolition works, engage a registered Surveyor to carry out a site
survey of the site and immediate surround.
Submit copies of the survey plan as directed by the SO showing at least information such as:
a. level of ground and structures
b. existing structures known, both above and below ground
c. existing services
d. demarcation of property boundaries
e. reserved zones as required by the authorities
f. street furniture, drainage systems, etc
g. existing trees in accordance to NParks requirements
h. additional information as scheduled in the PSD
a. Nil
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
CONTENTS
Page
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 The Survey 6
2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 8
4.1 Working Method 8
4.2 Photographic Record 8
4.3 Installation of Instrumentation 8
4.4 Crack Survey 8
4.5 Level Survey 8
4.6 Reflector Targets 9
4.7 Plumb Survey 9
4.8 Record of Defects 9
4.9 Reading of Crackmeters and Tiltmeters 9
4.10 Readings of Vibration Sensors 9
4.11 Monitoring Records 9
4.12 Reinstatement 9
2
Version1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for the condition survey and monitoring of
buildings, services and other structures within the area of influence of other
construction works. The survey may be carried out prior to and / or after the execution
of the other construction works.
It applies generally to buildings and structures that could be affected by works such
as:
a. Demolition
b. Piling
c. Earthworks
The requirements for instrumentation for monitoring are given in section C2-50
“Instrumentation and Monitoring”.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C1-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C1-20 with the same clause title.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
1.5 Definitions
a. Trigger Value The value of movement or vibration detected as
reaching the “Alert” or “Work Suspension” level as
defined below.
b. Alert Level The value of movement or vibration detected at
which the frequency of readings is reviewed and the
instrumentation checked.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
3.1 Instrumentation
For general requirements of the instrumentation and monitoring works refer to
Section C2-50.
3.2 Camera
Use camera capable of producing digital records of the survey unless otherwise
agreed with the SO.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
4. WORKMANSHIP
CRACK SCHEDULE
Crack No. & Location1 Width2 Comments3
Nil NA NA
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
4.12 Reinstatement
Reinstate all affected or damaged areas to the acceptance of the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
5.1 Submissions
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
5.3.1 General
Submit two copies of preliminary records of the installation of each instrument within
24 hours from the time of installation of each instrument.
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from the SO
within seven days of completion of installation of each instrument.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
5.3.4.1 Frequency
Based on the factual information received, submit interpretative reports of monitoring
results at intervals as specified in the PSD.
Based on the factual information received, submit interpretative reports of monitoring
results at intervals of 7 days.
When established trends indicate potential problems then such areas of concern shall
be re-appraised at intervals consistent with the data collection and reports issued
accordingly as required.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 2
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions 8
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
2.1 General 9
2.2 Temporary Earth Retaining Supports 9
2.3 Slope Stability 9
2.4 Filling Works for Embankment 9
2.5 Ground Movements and Vibrations 10
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Granular fill materials 11
3.2 Special Fill Material 12
3.3 Rock Fill 13
3.4 Hardcore 13
3.5 Classification of Materials 13
3.6 Materials with Excessive Moisture Content 13
3.7 Blinding to Fill 13
3.8 Geotextile Sheet 14
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 Preparatory Work 16
4.2 Excavation: Generally 17
4.3 Excavations: Pits and Trenches 18
4.4 Excavations: Cuttings and Slopes 20
4.5 Excavation: Rock Blasting 20
4.6 Filling: Generally 21
4.7 Filling: Compaction of Fill 22
4.8 Filling: Fill Adjacent to Bridge Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls 26
4.9 Filling: Embankments and Fill Slopes 28
4.10 Hardcore Under Concrete Slabs 29
4.11 Use of Geotextile Sheet 29
4.12 Preparation for Cultivation with Spot and Close Turfing 30
4.13 Accuracy and Tolerance 30
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the following general earthworks items for
building works:
a. Excavation
b. Filling
c. Site-won and imported fill materials
d. Rock-fill
This Document is supplementary to section C2-20 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN1997 Geotechnical Design
SS CP 18 Earthworks.
SS 31 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete
SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
Other Standards
BS EN 1537 Execution of special geotechnical work – Ground anchors
BS 812 Part 111 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of ten
percent fines values (TFV)
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
b. Prepare a response plan in the event that the temporary works do not perform as
expected in the design.
c. Prepare and submit all design including drawings to the SO for review and the
authorities where applicable.
Take into account of the design requirements as specified in clause 2 below.
Submit the CV of the PE to the SO for acceptance.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Verify information on contamination identified or believed to be present on site.
In the event that contamination is either positively identified or suspected, draw to the
attention of all personnel working on site together with the need to take any
precautionary measures in handling contaminated materials, groundwater and
obnoxious vapours from the ground.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
1.4.10 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
1.4.14 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully
with Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
b. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
1.5 Definitions
a. Accredited The Testing Laboratory shall mean an organisation or
testing laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory
laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) and fully equipped to carry
out all tests and checks required by the Specification.
b. Topsoil Soil which by its nutrient content is capable of supporting the
growth of vegetation.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 General
Carry out the earthworks in accordance with BS 8000 Pt 1 and SS CP 18.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
3. MATERIALS
3.1.1 Type 1
Fill materials of this category shall consist of any combination of:
a. Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock)
b. Crushed concrete
c. Crushed (non-expansive) slag
d. Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale
e. Natural sand
3.1.2 Type 2
Fill materials of this category shall consist of any combination of:
a. Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock)
b. Crushed concrete
c. Crushed (non-expansive) slag
d. Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale
e. Natural gravel
f. Natural sand
3.1.3 Gradation
The particle size distribution, determined in accordance with BS 1377-2, shall be
within the grading limits below:
Table 3.1.3 Gradation of Granular Fill Materials
Type 1 Type 2
75 mm 100 100
20 mm 60 - 100 60 - 100
10 mm 40 - 70 40 - 100
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
5 mm 25 - 45 25 - 85
600 micron 8 - 22 8 - 45
75 micron 0 - 10 0 - 10
3.1.4.1 Type 1
The material shall be transported, laid and compacted without drying out or
segregation.
3.1.4.2 Type 2
The material shall be transported, laid and compacted at a moisture content within
the range 1% above to 2% below the optimum moisture content determined in
compliance with BS 5835 and without drying out or segregation.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
3.4 Hardcore
Hardcore shall consist of any combination of the above, together with broken brick
free from plaster, dust, loam, wood, rubbish or organic materials. All pieces shall be
less than 75 mm in any direction.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
a. Grade 15 concrete or
b. Sufficient sand, fine gravel or other approved fine material applied to fill interstices
and moistened as necessary before final rolling to provide a flat, close smooth
surface.
Sand for blinding shall meet the requirements of SS 31 Table 6, Type C or M.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 General
Carry out at least the following in preparing the site for excavation or fill. Confirm the
extent of work before proceeding:
a. Break out old foundations, beds, drains, etc. Seal off drain ends and remove
contaminated earth. Backfill as necessary.
b. Remove existing fences, gates, walls, roads, paved areas and other site features
as required.
c. Remove trees, shrubs and hedges as shown on the drawings. Cut down, grub up
main roots and fill voids. Dispose of all wood using methods approved by the
Authorities.
d. Clear site of rubbish and vegetation. Grub up and dispose of large roots.
e. Remove unwanted materials from site.
4.1.3 Topsoil
Remove all Top Soil to full depth (including turf) from the areas of cuttings and
embankments, and other areas shown on the drawings. Remove topsoil also from
existing embankments required to receive additional fill and from areas of new
ditches and watercourses.
Stockpile all removed top soil for re-use, where practical.
Remove the top soil in accordance with BS 3882.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.2.1.1 General
Arrange for the rapid dispersal of water shed on to the site from any source. Where
practicable, discharge the water into the permanent outfall for the drainage system.
Provide adequate means for trapping silt on temporary systems discharging into
permanent drainage systems.
4.2.2 Dewatering
4.2.2.1 General
Groundwater control and drawdown shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 4
and in accordance with agreed methods.
The dewatering method chosen shall ensure the stability of the excavation and the
safety of nearby structures.
Assess the effects of dewatering settlement on structures, services and land in the
vicinity to the acceptance of the SO.
Do not place excavated material adjacent to the excavation, unless the additional
surcharge from such placement has been considered in the design.
4.3.1 General
Ensure the sides of pits and trenches remain stable at all times.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.3.6 Spoil
Remove all surplus spoil immediately on excavation and keep re-usable material tidy
at all times.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.4.2 Undulations
In all cuttings, whether in earth or rock, undulations in the general plane of the slope
will not be permitted.
4.4.4 Drainage
Ensure the working areas are adequately drained throughout the period of
construction.
4.4.5 Benching
Unless otherwise specified, when cutting through any material subject to fretting,
provide a 900mm wide horizontal bench at a height of 600mm above the table drain.
Slope the cut surface at both ends of the bench in accordance with Clause 4.4.6.
In cutting earth overlaying rock, which is required to be cut to a slope steeper than
1:2, provide a 900mm wide horizontal bench at the interface and slope the rock and
earth surfaces in accordance with Clause 4.4.6.
4.5.1 General
Should rock be met in the course of excavation, remove it by approved means, which
may include blasting.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.5.3.1 General
When blasting is proposed, determine the danger zone likely to be created and
ensure that no damage is caused to persons or property on or off site.
Provide full details as to the steps and precautionary measures to be taken to safeguard
the surrounding properties.
Prior to commencing blasting operations, submit a written report listing any existing
defects in the structures in the zone which may be affected, supported by photographs
where necessary, to the SO.
4.6.1 General
Filling works shall include the preparation, placing and compaction of Suitable
Material at specified areas.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.7.1 General
All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition.
Upon completion and before overlaying, the surface of the layer shall be free from
ridges, cracks, loose material, potholes, ruts or other defects. Rectify such defects to
the full thickness of the layer before overlaying.
Before commencing any filling, test each class of material to be compacted by an
acceptable laboratory to establish the maximum value of the dry density that can be
achieved and the optimum moisture content for compaction. Test in accordance with
BS 1377 test no. 13.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
I. The depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least
depth of layer.
II. The number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the
greatest number of passes.
Disregard the above assessment when a lighter type of plant is used to provide some
preliminary compaction only to assist the use of heavier plant.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.8 Filling: Fill Adjacent to Bridge Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
Place the larger stones adjacent to the weep-holes and the smaller particles behind
and above the larger layer.
Unless otherwise specified, the filter drain shall:
a. Have a width of 300mm.
b. Extend horizontally across the whole width of the structures.
c. Cover every weephole vertically by at least 300mm.
4.8.4 Compaction
Place fill in horizontal layers of thickness and compact using the appropriate plant in
compliance with Clause 4.7.2.
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
The degree of compaction shall be at least 95% of the maximum dry density
achievable of the material.
Do not use heavy compaction equipment close to the back of the wall.
4.9.1 Material
Ensure Suitable Materials are being used for embankment fill, including materials
which may be initially wetter than specified but become Suitable after drying. For
capping layers ensure specified material including topsoil are placed to a
consolidated thickness below the formation level.
4.9.3.2 Finishing
Fill surface voids with broken fragments before the next layer is placed.
Thoroughly blind the top surface and side slopes of embankments with approved fine
graded material to seal the surface.
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
areas of shallow filling where the ground level is within 300 mm of formation level,
bring up and maintain the surface level at least 300 mm above formation level.
Make good any damage caused to the subgrade.
4.9.6.1 Form the slope faces of embankments by overfilling, cutting back and
trimming neatly to the determined profile. The formed slopes shall achieve
the stability as required by Clause 2.3.
4.9.6.4 At 1.2m below the embankment surface, no point on the completed slope
shall vary from the required face by more than150mm measured at right
angles to the slope. At greater than 1.2m below the surface, no point on
the completed slope shall vary by more than 300mm.
4.11.1 General
a. Protect from exposure to light, except for a maximum of 5 hours during laying.
Protect from all materials listed as potentially deleterious by the manufacturer.
b. Before commencing laying, remove humps and sharp projections from the ground
and fill hollows. Do not stretch or bridge the geotextile over irregularities and
ensure that the specified lap is maintained.
c. Take care to avoid damage to geotextile by vehicles, plant or by tipping material
from excessive height. Do not allow construction traffic over geotextiles until
covered by the full thickness of fill.
d. Temporarily weight edges of sheet with fill and lay a maximum of 15m of
geotextile before covering to prevent uplift. Place fill as soon as possible after
laying and within a maximum of 24 hours.
e. Place geotextile patches over tears with minimum lap of 300mm beyond extent of
damage and cover immediately to retain in place.
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
4.11.2 Jointing
Propose and comply with one of the following methods of jointing:
a. 300mm overlap - Overlaps to be 300 to 1000mm, with the wider overlap
necessary on very soft subgrades to allow for movement when trafficked by
vehicles. Overlaps to be weighted down immediately with small amounts of
aggregate.
b. Single stitched prayer seam with high tenacity polyester thread – Carry out
sewing with portable stitching machines using high tenacity polyester or
polyester/cotton thread in a single or double stitch to form a prayer seam
configuration. A single line stitch is generally adequate.
c. Single welt with two rows of staggered, corrosion resistant staples – Carry out
stapling on welted seams with two rows of staggered, corrosion resistant,
staples.
4.13.1 General
Comply with SS CP 18 except where noted below.
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
5.1 Submissions
5.1.4.1 General
Before commencement of Work, submit details of proposals for supporting the sides
of all excavation which have slopes steeper than 1:2, or less if poor conditions exist,
or exceeding 1.5 m in depth which will be formed during the course of the work.
Provide adequate information to justify the adequacy of his proposals, if so
requested.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 Design Verification 8
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 8
2.3 Actual Penetration Depth 9
2.4 Water Retention 9
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Steel Grade 10
3.2 Sheet Pile Coating 10
3.3 Fabricated Sheet Piles 10
3.4 Clutch Sealant 10
3.5 Installation Equipment 10
3.6 Reuse of Sheet Piles 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Marking and Storage 11
4.2 Clutch Sealant 11
4.3 Handling and Installation 11
4.4 Jetting 11
4.5 Length of Sheet Piles 12
4.6 Forming Holes in Sheet Piles 12
4.7 Cutting and Welding 12
4.8 Walings and Tie Rods 12
4.9 Installation Tolerances 13
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of the following types of
embedded retaining walls:
C2-30-1: Diaphragm Wall
C2-30-2: Sheet Piling
C2-30-3: Contiguous Bored Pile Walls and Secant Pile Walls
The walls may be used solely to form embedded retaining walls resisting principally
horizontal loads, or also to support vertical loads.
This sub-section covers the requirements for sheet pile walls.
This document is supplementary to section C2-30-2 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1997 Geotechnical design
SS CP 8 Use of manual metal arc-welding in the steel building construction
SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
SS 187 Qualification test for manual metal-arc welders
Other Standards
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
1.4.1.2 Prepare a response plan in the event that the temporary or permanent
strutting elements do not perform as expected in the design in controlling
the wall deflection. Ensure the response plan is feasible in considering the
construction sequence and site restraints.
1.4.1.3 Prepare and submit all design and construction sequence, including
drawings endorsed by the PE to the SO for review and the authorities
where applicable.
1.4.1.4 Propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control
ground movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
Take into account of the design requirements as set out in Clause 2.1 below.
Submit the CV of the PE to the SO for acceptance.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
1.4.11 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
1.4.15 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully
with Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
g. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
h. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
3. MATERIALS
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Marking
Mark each sheet pile with its grade.
4.1.2 Storage
Store sheet piles of different grades separately.
4.3.1 Handling
Ensure the interlocks are clean and undistorted.
Avoid any significant damage to the sheet piles and their coatings during all lifting,
handling and pitching operations.
4.3.2 Installation
a. Provide 24 hours notice prior to the commencement of installation.
b. Guide all sheet piles and hold in position with temporary gates. Ensure all sheet
piles are properly interlocked.
c. Provide adequate support and restraint to the free length of sheet pile at all
stages during the installation process.
d. Install the end sheet piles in advance of the intermediate sheet piles. Avoid
excessive lead of the end sheet piles ahead of the general panel level.
e. Select plant to suit the ground conditions and type of sheet pile. Submit details.
f. Position the sheet pile installation equipment so that it is aligned with the axis of
the sheet pile as closely as possible.
g. Install sheet piles to the specified level or level of resistance.
h. In hard ground, cease installation at practical refusal or if the sheet pile is visibly
damaged.
i. Where the sheet pile has not reached the specified level propose how problems
will be dealt with.
4.4 Jetting
Where jetting is used to assist sheet pile installation in cohesionless soil ensure that
this does not affect:
a. The performance of the sheet piles
b. The stability of surrounding structures
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
SO’s acceptance. Where settlement is expected to occur place the ties inside a tube
such that the tube will settle with the ground but the tie remain in the correct position.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
5.1 Submissions
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
5.2.1 Inspection
Allow the SO to inspect and test at any stage of the fabrication.
Ensure that adequate notice is given to the SO when the fabrication processes can
be inspected or tests can be witnessed.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 Standards and Regulations
1.4 Trade Preambles
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Quality of Instrumentation
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.2 Instrument Reading and Records
4.3 Inclinometers (Manual Read)
4.4 In-place Inclinometers (Remote Read)
4.5 Extensometers
4.6 Deep Levelling Datum
4.7 Piezometers
4.8 Strain Gauges
4.9 Vibration Monitoring Device
4.10 Tell-Tales
4.11 Markers, Crackmeters and Tiltmeters
4.12 Inspection of Adjacent Property
4.13 Completion
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
The schedule of instrumentation and monitoring for the project is indicated in the
drawings and clause 3.1 below.
Based on the information issue, propose and submit the following to the SO for
acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Select suitable make and model of the instrumentation for the project.
1.4.1.2 Develop methods and details of the instrumentation installation and monitoring.
1.4.1.3 Propose suitable schedule for the monitoring reading and records.
1.4.6 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with Code of
Practice for Railway Protection.
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3. MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Use items that are extinguishable non-metallic and emit no toxic fumes in the event of
fire.
3.3.1 General
Inclinometers are to take the form of an access tube with four keyways (in pairs at
right angles), which shall be grouted in to a borehole. The orientation of the keyways to
be such that they are parallel to and perpendicular to the orientation of any tunnel,
excavation or wall or otherwise as accepted by the SO.
3.3.3 Probe
The probe used to have the following:
a. A wheel base of 500mm.
b. A measurement range of 53° or greater from vertical.
±
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
balance accelerometer within the probe shall respond to changes in alignment, which
shall be displayed on a portable readout unit.
3.3.7 Tubing
Inclinometer tube to be slotted plastic of 75 mm internal diameter that is pre-grouted
into a minimum 100 mm diameter borehole.
Tubing to be of uniform section and free of twist in manufacture and shall not twist
during installation.
3.4.1 General
The orientation of the keyways to be parallel to and perpendicular to the orientation of
any tunnel, excavation or wall or otherwise as accepted by the SO.
3.4.2 Sensor
Resolution of the sensor to be 0.04mm/m or better and the measuring range to be at least
±10°. The precision of the sensor to be ±0.1mm per m. The allowable maximum gauge
length to be 3m.
The operating temperature range to be -20° to 50° Celsius and the compensated
temperature range to be 0 to 45° Celsius.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
3.5.1 General
Use magnetic extensometers in the form of a series of magnetic rings (“spider
magnets”) fixed into a maximum 150mm diameter borehole with plastic tubing of
nominal 75mm minimum internal diameter allowing access to the magnetic points for
the measurement of settlement.
3.6.1 General
Use rod extensometers in the form of a rod anchored at the remote end of the
borehole passing into a plastic tube fixed in a reference collar at the open end of the
hole.
3.6.3 Materials
Rods to be fabricated from stainless steel. The grade of steel rod shall suit the
environment and duration of the project. Make provision for threading the anchor
points onto the rod.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Measure relative movement between the end anchor and the reference collar by an
automated measurement device (an electrical transducer) registering on the free end of
the rod and by manual means using a system to the acceptance of the SO.
Extend the reading range beyond that of the measurement device by a range
adjustment device fitted at the reference collar.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Where more accurate levelling is required provide more precise instrument to the
accuracy as set out in the PSD.
Where more accurate levelling is required provide more precise instrument to the
accuracy as set out below:
Instrument Accuracy (mm)
3.10 Piezometers
3.10.1Casagrande Piezometers
3.10.1.1 Tube
The standpipe shall be of unplasticised Polyvinylchloride (uPVC), to BS 3506 (1969)
Class 6, of nominal diameter 19mm and supplied in lengths of 3m.
The tube shall be connected at its lower end by suitable PVC fitting to a piezometer
tip.
3.10.1.2 Filter
Clean sand between grading limits 1200 and 210 microns.
3.10.1.3 Tip
Porous ceramic element or rigid uPVC perforated pipe having an expanded
Polystyrene lining moulded to form an inner tube of not less than 13mm bore retained
in position by a moulded flange as approved, of minimum length 150mm and
minimum diameter 35mm, protected by uPVC fittings. Permeability to be
approximately 3 x 10-4 m/s.
If permeability test is to be carried out in piezometer, the filter tip shall be increased to
at least 900mm in length.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
The combined accuracy of the instrument and the readout device to be within 1.0 % of ±
3.13 Tell-Tales
Type and specification of tell-tales to be to manufacturer’s recommendation and to
SO’s acceptance.
Tell tales to generally comprise of two clear plastic overlapping plates, one marked with
a millimetre scale the other with a cross-hair marking to allow reading on two axis.
If the position of tell-tale is out of general sight, it shall be readable without
obstruction.
3.16.1 General
Vibrating wire strain gauges to have the following characteristics:
a. Strain range 2500 x 10-6 m/m
b. Accuracy ±3.0 x10-6 m/m
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Shield signal cable with flexible polyurethane jacket. Temperature rated minimum
ranges 0° Celsius to 80 Celsius and to be compatible with the environment in which
the gauges are installed.
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.2 Storage
Securely store all equipment and installation accessories prior to installation where
they will not suffer physical damage or damage arising from excessive moisture,
extremes of temperature or any adverse conditions.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
When planning for suitable methods and schedule for the monitorng, take account on the
general restrictions on movements and levels of vibration for the adjacent buildings as set
out below, unless otherwise agreed or indicated in the respective work specifications:
Restrictions on movements and levels of vibration for adjacent buildings
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Produce plots of deformation, stress, raw data readings against time together with
plots of temperature and humidity, or other data as directed when relevant.
4.3.1 General
All inclinometer tubing and instrumentation shall be resistant to aggressive/adverse
substances in the ground and shall conform to the requirements for sub-surface
installations.
4.3.2 Installation
Insert a slotted plastic inclinometer tube of minimum 60mm internal diameter into a
minimum 100mm diameter borehole or a steel duct of at least 150 mm cast into any
pile or wall.
Withdraw any temporary casing used during boring/drilling at the time of grouting the
inclinometer tubing. Embed the toe of inclinometer into hard stratum below which the
ground movement is negligible. Prior to installation, propose the installation level for
acceptance of the SO.
4.3.3 Tubing
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the required
borehole length. Cap the base of the tube.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout-and dirt-
tight
.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus using a
bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the tubing from rotation
while being lowered.
4.4.1 General
Ensure all inclinometer tubing and instrumentation to be resistant to aggressive/adverse
substances in the ground and conform to the requirements for sub-surface installations.
Ensure that the in-place inclinometer is capable of providing continuous, unattended
monitoring data.
4.4.2 Installation
Insert a slotted plastic inclinometer tube of 75 mm internal diameter into a minimum
100mm diameter borehole or a steel duct of at least 150 mm cast into any pile or wall.
Any temporary casing used during boring/drilling shall be withdrawn at the time of
grouting the inclinometer tubing. Embed the toe of inclinometer into hard stratum
below which the ground movement is negligible. Prior installation, propose the
installation level for the acceptance of the SO.
4.4.3 Tubing
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the required
borehole length.
Cap the base of the tube.
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout- and dirt-
tight.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus using a
bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the tubing from rotation
while being lowered.
4.4.4 Sensor
Install the biaxially electrolevels at spacing acceptable to the SO and connect with a
rod to give a fixed gauge length. At the end of the sensor and the gauge extension fit
a spring loaded wheel assembly. Do not use sensors mounted on sleds. Check that
the spacing of sensor is no greater than 3 m.
4.5 Extensometers
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Isolate each rod Individually by its own plastic sleeve and grout the complete
assembly in place, fixing the anchors to the ground but allowing free movement of
each rod within its sleeve.
Ensure a single reference housing receives all of the rods from a drill hole and
provide protection to the reference head and measurement device.
4.5.2.2 Survey point
Fix a level survey point to the top of the reference head of the extensometer to allow
precise levelling back to a datum.
Determine the lengths of rods using the level of the ground at the hole location. For
grout used for backfilling, use bentonite/cement mix with just sufficient water to allow
it to be tremied to the bottom of the holes.
4.6.1 Installation
Install a 300mm diameter casing not less than 300 mm into firm ground. Install the
250 mm diameter casing not less than 1500mm beneath the 300mm casing and fill
with water cement grout that is just pumpable. Ensure the founding depth of deep
levelling datum to be such that the founding strata is not affected by the construction
activity.
4.6.2 Protection
Protect the top of the Deep Levelling Datum by a manhole cover and by a surface
protection barrier to the acceptance of the SO.
4.7 Piezometers
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
In placing the sand, ensure that no sand adheres to the soil in the sides of an unlined
hole. Where there is water in a hole, allow sufficient time for all the sand to settle, and
take measurements of the upper surface of the sand from time to time to ensure this.
Record the final elevation of the top of the sand.
4.7.7 Records
Keep accurate records of the depths of the piezometers, sand surrounds and seals,
and record readings at each stage of the installation. For push-in piezometers, record
the increase in pore pressure as well as dissipation using a data logger.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Attach the bars at two locations only to limit the bending induced in the bars changes
by less than 50με.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
and source shall then be used to monitor other selected struts in place of load cells.
The locations of struts required strain gauges are shown in the drawings.
4.10 Tell-Tales
Fix the overlapping plates securely so that a gap of not greater than 1 mm separates
them at the start of monitoring and so that the cross-hairs are zeroed. Record the
location, orientation and plate separation for each telltale on the reading sheets.
Monitor and record the levels of ground survey and building settlement points
throughout the duration of the Works, using a precise level and staff accurate to
0.5mm or better.
4.13 Completion
Remove all specialist monitoring and make good all installations to the satisfaction of
the SO upon completion of the monitoring, or at other such times if accepted by the
SO.
5.1 Submissions
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
mode of operation, the measuring range and the degrees of accuracy of the
equipment.
5.1.6 Calculations
Provide calculations to convert raw output to processed data for all instrumentation.
Provide a sample calculation with appropriate data listings to the SO, endorsed by the
Instrumentation Engineer.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
5.3.1 General
Submit two copies of preliminary records of the installation of each instrument within
24 hours from the time of installation of each instrument.
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from the SO
within seven days of completion of installation of each instrument.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
Interpretative Reports shall include a summary plot of all instrumented lines or points which
indicate a trend (including historical data where appropriate) that could result in a trigger
level being exceeded and any instrumented line or point in which a trigger level has been
exceeded. Submit recommendations for any protective measures or actions that are
necessary.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Concrete Mix and Concreting Process 5
2.2 Control on Shrinkage and Temperature Effects 5
2.3 Construction Loads 5
2.4 Noise Nuisance 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Cement 6
3.2 Fine Aggregates 6
3.3 Coarse Aggregates 6
3.4 Water 7
3.5 Admixtures 7
3.6 Concrete Mix Constituents 7
3.7 Ready-Mix Concrete Plant 9
3.8 Surface Hardener 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Transportation of Concrete 10
4.2 Inserts 10
4.3 Placing and Compaction 10
4.4 Kickers 10
4.5 Construction Joints 10
4.6 Concreting in Hot Weather 11
4.7 Pours with Temperature Control 11
4.8 Protection from Rain 11
4.9 Formed Finishes 11
4.10 Unformed Finishes 12
4.11 Curing and Protection 13
4.12 Accuracy of Construction 13
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for the use of structural quality concrete in
plain, reinforced or prestressed structures. Relevant requirements may also be
adopted for non-structural concrete, for example in external works. For particular
requirements of specialists works such as prestressing and pre-cast, refer to the
other respective sections.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-10 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-10 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and
fillers
SS 78 Testing concrete
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
SS 289 Concrete
Part 1 Guide to specifying concrete
Part 2 Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3 Specifications for the procedures to be used in producing and
transporting concrete
Part 4 Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling,
testing and assessing compliance of concrete
SS 320 Concrete admixtures
BS EN 1008 Mixing water for concrete, specification for sampling, testing and
assessing the suitability of water
BS 4027 Sulfate-resisting Portland cement
BS 5606 Guide to Accuracy in Building
EN 197-1 Cement
Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for
common cements
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Cement
3.2.1 Testing
In accordance with SS 73.
3.2.2 Grading
Based on sieve analysis as described in SS 31 and SS 73, and to be within the limits
of one of the grading zones described in the standards subject to a tolerance of 5%.
3.3.1 Size
Not to exceed 40mm for lean and mass concrete.
Not to exceed 20mm for reinforced concrete.
To be graded down to a size retained on a 5mm mesh.
3.3.2 Grading
To be in accordance with SS 31 and SS 73. Aggregates not complying with SS 31 not
to be used.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
3.4 Water
All water used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout, for cleaning out formwork and
for curing to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution or suspension.
If taken from a source other than the Public Utilities Board, test in accordance with BS
EN 1008.
3.5 Admixtures
To comply with the requirements of SS 289: Part 1, Clause 4.4 (Admixtures).
Acceptance of admixtures will only be made upon provision of satisfactory information
relating to name, type, dosage and justification for use.
Includes adjustment for acidity (yes/no) 1[1] (yes/no) (yes/no) (yes/no) (yes/no)
6 Cement type(s) or combinations conforming to
SS 26 PC PC PC PC
SS 477 PBFC PBFC PBFC PBFC
BS EN 197-1 PPFAC PPFAC PPFAC PPFAC
BS 4027 SRPC SRPC SRPC SRPC
BS EN 197-1[2] PLC PLC PLC PLC
Others
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
12 Workability
Slump (mm) 75 75 75 75
Compacting factor
Vebe (s)
Flow (mm)
1) Choose class 1, 2,3,4A or 4B. The purchaser should ensure that the sulphate class specified
accounts for the modifications required in tables 7c and 7d of SS 289: Part 1: 2000 where
appropriate. If the classification includes an adjustment for acidity (see table 7d of SS 289: Part 1:
2000), this should be specified in item 5.
2) Reference should be made to clause 4.2.4 of SS 289: Part 1: 2000 before specifying this cement.
3) Where a sulfate class is ringed and no preference for a cement type is indicated, the minimum
cement content and maximum free water/cement ration for the cement type to be used should be
in accordance with table 7a of Ss 289: Part 1: 2000.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
3.6.5 Sulphates
Take precautions to restrict the amount of sulphate in the proposed concrete, in
accordance with SS 289: Part 1, Clause 5.2.3 (Sulphates in concrete).
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2 Inserts
Ensure that any cast-in inserts are securely fixed prior to placing concrete.
4.4 Kickers
Kickers to be monolithic with the slab, of sound construction and not less than
100mm high.
Where kickerless construction is specified on the drawings, form horizontal
construction joints for walls and columns without kickers taking guidance from the
British Cement Association Guide: Kickerless Construction, Ref. 47.023, 1988.
Ensure robustness of the chosen method of construction and cast a sample wall and
column panel for the SO’s approval.
4.5.1 General
Position and form joints such as to suit the structure and to avoid distress to the
structure.
Unless otherwise agreed with the SO limit pour sizes to as given in the following
table:
Max. Area Max. Dimension (m)
CONSTRUCTION (m²)
Water-resisting walls 25 5
Water-resisting slabs 100 10
Slabs with major restraint at both ends 100 13
Slabs with major restraint at one end 250 20
only
Slabs with little restraint in any direction 500 30
Walls 40 10
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
Prepare a sample of the specified formed finishes at the start of the Contract for SO’s
acceptance, and to be kept and used as a reference throughout the duration of the
Contract.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
4.11.1 Curing
Cure the surface of the concrete to avoid premature drying-out. Methods of curing to
be in accordance with SS CP 65: Part 1, Clause 6.2.3.3 (Methods) and as agreed
with the SO.
Commence curing immediately after compaction: protection from radiation to be in
place within 30 minutes of final tamping.
Curing membranes to be compatible with any finishes to be applied subsequently.
Cure for not less than 3 days after casting.
4.11.2 Protection
Protect the structure against damage.
Propose methods for the repair of any damage occurring and make good subject to
the agreement of the SO.
Note that the tolerances given here are not cumulative. Carry out regular checks on
the accuracy of the structure and if a part of the structure is found to be out of
tolerance, propose any remedial work required.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
4.12.5.1 Foundations
Permitted deviation for position on plan of any element of the foundation relative to
the intended position = ± 30 mm.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
Height m mm
Up to and including 1.5 5
Over 1.5 up to and including 2.5 10
Over 2.5 up to and including 4 15
Over 4 up to and including 8 20
Over 8 20 + 1mm per metre or part over 8m (to
a maximum of 50mm)
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
Specified camber mm mm
Up to and including 20 ± 5
Over 20, up to and including 40 ± 10
Over 40 ± 15
= Permitted up to 3 mm.
Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment. Permitted
deviation from specified position as follows:
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
Pre-set wall bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment. Permitted
deviation from specified position as follows:
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
5.2 Inspection
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
C3-20 Reinforcement
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Detail Reinforcement Drawings and Workshop Drawings 5
2.2 Bar schedule 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Reinforcement 6
3.2 Welded Fabric Reinforcement 6
3.3 Couplers 6
3.4 Spacers 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 Storage 7
4.2 Cutting, Bending and Fixing 7
4.3 Tying and Welding of Reinforcement 7
4.4 Surface Condition 7
4.5 Cages for Precast Units 7
4.6 Cover 8
4.7 Ground Bearing Slabs 8
4.8 Laps 8
4.9 Anchorages 8
4.10 Exposed Reinforcement 8
4.11 Accuracy 8
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for bars and welded fabric reinforcements
used in reinforced concrete elements.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-20 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 2 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
Part 1 Plain bars (steel grade 300)
Part 2 Ribbed bars (steel grade 500)
Part 3 Plain and ribbed bars (steel grades 250 and 460)
SS 18 Cold-reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete and the
manufacture of welded fabric
SS 32 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
Part 1 Steel grades 300 and 500
Part 2 Steel grade 485
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
SS CP 83 Construction computer-aided design (CAD)
SS 117 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
Other Standards
BS 6744 Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in concrete –
requirements and test methods
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
BS EN ISO
Metal arc welding of steel for concrete reinforcement
17660-1:2006
BS 8666 Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel
reinforcement for concrete
BS ISO 14654 Epoxy-coated steel for the reinforcement of concrete
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Reinforcement
3.3 Couplers
Performance requirements of couplers shall be in compliance with CIRIA Report 92.
Carry out installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation,
subject to acceptance by the SO.
3.4 Spacers
Detail, supply and fix all spacers, in accordance with SS CP 65:Part 1, Clause 7.3.
Seek SO’s acceptance for spacers where the concrete will be exposed subsequently.
Mortar spacers to have durability and strength characteristics not less than the
surrounding concrete.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Storage
Store reinforcement clear of the ground, and protect from mud, oil and other
substances that may adversely affect its use in the works.
Deliver and store steel fabric in flat.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
4.6 Cover
Maintain concrete cover to reinforcement as shown on reinforcement drawings.
Ensure that the actual cover to all reinforcement is not less than the nominal cover
minus 5 mm.
Before concreting, check thoroughly that the specified cover dimensions have been
obtained.
4.8 Laps
Lap reinforcement as shown on the drawings unless otherwise agreed with the SO.
Where laps required are not shown in the drawings, propose suitable location for
SO’s acceptance. Comply with the requirements of SS CP 65: Part 1, Clause 3.12.8.
4.9 Anchorages
Protect all steel parts from corrosion and keep all threaded parts protected until used.
Keep all devices free from any coating or contamination.
Anchorages, including buried dead anchorages, shall be fixed with due regard to
cover requirements for corrosion resistance and fire protection.
4.11 Accuracy
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
5.1 Submissions
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 3
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Design Requirements 5
2.2 Formwork Use 5
2.3 Cambers 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Formwork Material 6
3.2 Permanent Formwork 6
3.3 Release Agents 6
3.4 Formwork Ties 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 Formwork 7
4.2 System Forms 7
4.3 Formwork Ties 7
4.4 Block Outs and Cast-in Items 7
4.5 Striking 8
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the general requirements for falsework and formwork used for
structural concrete works except precasting mould, which is covered in section C3-
60.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-30 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-30 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore standards
SS 580:2012 Formwork Code of Practice
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of reinforced concrete buildings
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.3 Cambers
Unless otherwise indicated, provide cambers to the structural elements as indicated
in the PSD if any.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following cambers to the structural elements:
Element Location Pre-camber (mm or % span)
Beams
Slabs
Cantilevers
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
3. MATERIALS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Formwork
4.1.2 Joints
Seal all joints in formwork to avoid leakage of grout and staining of concrete surfaces.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
4.5 Striking
4.5.1 Support
Provide support for the concrete in the required position until it has gained adequate
strength. Determine the strength of concrete required to support its own weight and
any construction loads, without short- or long-term distress, and propose for SO’s
acceptance.
4.5.2 Striking
Unless otherwise agreed with the SO, allow for the minimum period as follows before
striking the formworks:
Minimum period before striking
Location (surface temperature of concrete
not less than 16°C)
Vertical formwork to columns, walls and
1 day
beams
Slab soffits (props undisturbed) 3 days
Props to slab 7 days
Beam soffits (props undisturbed) 7 days
Props to beams 9 days
If earlier striking time is desired, proposed for SO’s acceptance, giving due
consideration to the concrete strength at the time of removal, the ambient conditions
and the curing and protection of the concrete when the formwork has been removed.
4.5.3 Sequence
Propose and agree with the SO, the sequence of propping/re-propping and
backpropping through the structure. Ensure that there are no damaging effects on the
permanent structure.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
5.1 Submissions
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Contractor’s proposal 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Movement Joint System and Fillers 6
3.2 Joint Waterproofing Material 6
3.3 Dowel System 7
3.4 Sheet Membrane for Sliding Joints 7
3.5 Crack inducers 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 Forming Joints 9
4.2 Construction Joints 9
4.3 Workmanship for Joint Waterproofing 9
4.4 Crack-inducing Grooves 9
4.5 Bottom of Slab Crack Inducers 10
4.6 Inserted Strip Crack Inducers 10
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for designed settlement and expansion
joints in concrete structures. It also covers crack induced construction joints. For
general requirements of normal construction joints refer to Section C3-10 (Concrete
Construction Generally).
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-40 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-40 with the same clause title.
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 560 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
BS 6093 Code of Practice for design of joints and jointing in building construction
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
Refer to the following technical for guidance in carrying out the works.
a. CIRIA Report 146 Design and construction of joints in concrete structures
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
The type of designed joints and locations are indicated in the drawings. Engage
qualified and experienced personnel to propose the following for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Suitable joint materials including joint fillers and waterproofing element
etc. to comply with the performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1
below.
1.4.1.2 Details and construction method to install the joint materials as proposed.
Deliver to site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store
where directed, additional joint materials for minor replacement or repairs in the near
future, as listed in the PSD.
Provide spare materials as listed below:
Item Quantity
Joint filler
Joint sealant
Sealant backer rod
1.4.3 Warranty
Warrant all design joints for a minimum period as specified in the PSD, in accordance
with contract conditions against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant all designed joints for a minimum period of 5 years, in accordance with
contract conditions against all defects from the date of completion.
No item.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
When carrying out the proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take account of the
following requirements and provide manufacturer’s data to confirm suitability:
Satisfy the required characteristics of the joints as set out in the PSD.
Satisfy the required characteristics of the joints as set out below:
1. Joint type designation:
2. Type of joint
3. Characteristics Requirements
Movement: Vertical
Movement: Horizontal
Watertightness (Tick if req’d)
Fire-rating
2.1.2 Durability
Ensure the joints achieve the required design life as set out in the PSD.
Ensure the joints achieve the required design life of 10 years.
When a proprietary product is specified, verify and submit evidence that the product
will satisfy the performance requirements as above. In case that the desired
performance of the selected product cannot be verified, notify the SO and propose
alternative product for acceptance.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
3. MATERIALS
Refer to PSD for selected proprietary products for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project:
Item Product manufacturer Particular quality
and model requirements (if any)
Waterstops
Sealants
Gaskets
Baffles
Primer
Preformed sealing strips
3.2.1 Waterstops
3.2.3 Primer
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
Refer to PSD for the type of sliding dowel system selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project
Item Product manufacturer and model
Sliding dowel system
To be grade 250, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other
deleterious substances.
To SS 32, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other deleterious
substances.
Refer to PSD for the product selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project
Item Product manufacturer and model
Sheet Membrane for Sliding Joints
Refer to PSD for the product selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project:
Item Product manufacturer Particular quality
and model requirements (if any)
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
Refer to PSD for the product selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project:
Item Product manufacturer Particular quality
and model requirements (if any)
Inserted crack inducer
Refer to the drawings and PSD for the required dimension of the grooves if any.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Accuracy
Position and form joints accurately, straight, well-aligned and truly vertical or
horizontal or parallel with setting out lines of the building. Construct the joint within
an acceptable tolerance of 2mm unless otherwise specified.
4.1.3 Modifications
Prevent concrete entering joints or penetrating compressible joint fillers and making
movement joints ineffective.
Do not place concrete simultaneously on both sides of movement joints.
Propose suitable joint location and detail for SO’s acceptance. Take note of any
desired location that may be indicated in the drawings. Refer to Section C3-10,
clause 4.5.
4.3.1 Sealants
Insert temporary strips into the fully compacted concrete. Compact and level the slab
along the strips. Remove strips.
If the type of aggregate so permits, saw grooves in the top surface of the slab
sufficiently early (within 24 hours of casting slab) to prevent random cracking.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
Fully compact and level the concrete, insert steel T bar and withdraw to form void.
Carefully insert strip to accurate line and level, then re-compact and re-level slab.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
5.1 Submission
For all materials proposed, submit certificate from manufacturers showing evidence
of compliance with the specified quality requirements.
Cover all joint systems and materials in the maintenance manual to be submitted
before handing over.
5.1.5 Warranty
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-40 Designed Joints
Submit samples of all joint system and materials for SO’s acceptance prior to
ordering of the material. Identify and label the samples appropriately.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Watertightness
For joints specified as watertight, test all joints after installation with a spraying hose
for watertightness.
If there is any leakage, dampness and presence of seepage water, propose and carry
out rectification or replacement to the SO’s acceptance.
For joints specified with fire rating requirements, submit certificate or evidence
demonstrating compliance with FSSB requirements. If certificate is not available,
submit samples of the materials to FSSB for testing to obtain the certification.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Design Input Requirements 6
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Materials Compatibility 8
3.2 Damp-proof Membranes 8
3.3 Tanking Membranes 8
3.4 Waterproofing Admixtures 9
3.5 Waterstops 9
3.6 Injection System 10
3.7 Chemical/cement Grout 10
3.8 Materials for Joints 10
3.9 Waterproof Renders 11
3.10 Formwork Ties 11
4. WORKMANSHIP 12
4.1 Construction Loads 12
4.2 Storage 12
4.3 Protection 12
4.4 Pour Sizes 12
4.5 Fixing Formwork 12
4.6 Pipe Penetrations 12
4.7 Temporary Propping 12
4.8 Inspection 12
4.9 Repairs 12
4.10 Waterstops 13
4.11 Bonded Membrane Systems 13
4.12 Liquid Membranes 14
4.13 Pressure Grouting 14
4.14 Workmanship for Joints 14
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers primarily the requirements of waterproofing for below ground in-
situ concrete structures to exclude water. It may be adapted to cover the concrete
element of water retaining structures e.g. tanks and swimming pools. For
waterproofing applied as surface finish to such structures refer to Architectural
specifications.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-50 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-50 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
SS CP 81 Precast concrete slab and wall panels
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of reinforced concrete buildings
Other Standards
BS 2782 Methods of testing plastics
BS 3177 Method for determining the permeability to water vapour of
flexible sheet materials used for packaging
BS 6213 Guide to the selection of construction sealants
BS 8102 Code of practice for protection of structures against water from
the ground
ASTM D638-02 Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
1.4.3 Warranty
Provide a warranty for a period of 10 years in accordance with contract conditions for
the entire waterproofing system including all components and accessories.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Durability
Refer to PSD for the required design life of the waterproofing system.
The waterproofing system is to achieve a design life of 50 years.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
3. MATERIALS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
3.3.2.1 Components
Provide a system comprising a primer and one or more layers of a two-component
liquid applied Elastomeric membrane.
3.3.3 Primer
For bituminous membrane, use a bituminous primer in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5 Waterstops
All waterstops to be capable of providing hydrostatic resistance appropriate to the
structure and joint in which they are installed.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
Use Hydrophilic waterstops provided with a delay coating that retards the onset of
expansion so as to prevent premature expansion prior to concrete casting.
3.6.1 Resin
Use flexible aqua-reactive injection resin which is chemically resistant and will
produce an expanded closed-cell foam on contact with water.
Provide details of the proposed product to the SO for agreement prior to starting
work.
3.6.2 Hoses
Shall be tough, flexible and chemically inert, and capable of re-injection at a later date
if further leakage occurs.
3.8.2 Gaskets
Use natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special
properties, such as resistance to oils, are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics
materials have to be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
3.8.5 Baffles
Comply with Table 3.1 of SS CP 81.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2 Storage
Keep all materials clean and dry, avoid damage and use strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.3 Protection
Apply protection to materials in accordance with the accepted proposals given in the
Method Statement.
4.8 Inspection
Carry out jointly with the SO before backfilling or covering up to identify defects which
may lead to water penetration. Carry out further joint inspection to identify any water
penetration after backfilling and when any ground water has returned to normal level.
4.9 Repairs
Where concrete shows signs of leakage or damp patches, submit proposals,
including details of proposed materials and methods of application, for rectification to
the SO. Comply with BS8102 Clause 8.8 and 8.9.
Ensure that all repair materials are compatible with materials used in the original
construction.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
4.10 Waterstops
Use waterstops in all construction and movement joints in concrete specified as water
resistant unless otherwise noted and agreed with the SO.
Obtain the agreement of the SO for the methods to be used to maintain the
waterstops in position and to avoid damage during concreting and formwork removal.
4.11.1 Finishes
The finishes shall meet the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. In general,
provide the following minimum conditions:
a. Prepare slabs to receive a waterproof membrane to a U3 finish as defined in
section C3-10, clause 4.10.3.
b. For vertical surfaces provide a Type A finish as defined in section C3-10, clause
4.9.1, and where necessary, grind to remove arrises and fill locally with mortar
using a steel trowel to produce a smooth finish.
4.11.2 Application
Lay primer and membrane strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
including length and location of laps.
4.11.4 Protection
Provide protection as soon as possible after laying by boards or other material to the
agreement of the SO, in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4.11.5 Continuity
Ensure that there is continuity of waterproofing at all junctions within the structure and
provide explicit details showing how this will be achieved.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
4.12.1 Temperature
Generally, apply at temperature less than 35°C unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer.
4.14.2 Gaskets
Apply in accordance with clause 3.4 of SS CP 81.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Tender
Submit details of the proposed waterproofing system and supporting documents like
method statement, material testing results, samples, maintenance procedure during
and after the warranty period, and track record with the tender submission for SO’s
review and acceptance.
5.1.5 Details
Submit coordinated details for acceptance including the following:
a. Junctions between roof/base slabs and external walls.
b. Pipe penetrations through external walls.
c. Junctions between base slab and piles/king posts.
5.1.8 Warranty
Submit the warranty for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and References 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief 6
2.2 Fabrication 6
2.3 Erection 7
2.4 Joints and Connections 7
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Moulds 8
3.2 Concrete 8
3.3 Reinforcement 8
3.4 Prestressing Components 8
3.5 Structural Steel Components 8
3.6 Non-Shrink Grout 8
3.7 Mortar 9
3.8 Permanent Inserts or Fixings 9
3.9 Waterproofing 9
3.10 Jointing 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Fabrication 11
4.2 Storage 13
4.3 Erection 14
4.4 Site Construction 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers requirements for the contractor’s design, fabrication, handling,
storage, transportation and erection of structural precast concrete elements, including
elements used in composite structures.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-60 of NPQS. All modifications and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-60 with the same clause title.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
SS CP 81 Precast concrete slab and wall panels
SS 26 Ordinary Portland Cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2 Fabrication
Ensure the precast concrete elements are fabricated in a manner that when erected
and all connections in place the design intent of the overall structure is achieved.
Incorporate the requirements of all other trades whose work requires blockouts,
recesses, notches, embedded metals or any other items.
Ensure that exposed concrete surfaces of the precast concrete elements are smooth,
free from honeycomb and unacceptable bubble holes.
In general ensure that the workmanship requirements as set out in the CONQUAS
Quality Standards for Precast Components are met.
Ensure that the specified architectural finishes requirements as indicated in the
design drawings or as scheduled in the PSD are achieved.
Ensure that the specified architectural finishes requirements as indicated in the
design drawings or as scheduled at the various locations below are achieved:
Location Type of finish Particular Proprietary
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
requirements product
(thickness etc.) specified (if any)
2.3 Erection
Erect the precast concrete elements at the designated location in accordance with the
design intention. Any deviation is to be within the acceptable tolerance limit as
specified in clause 4.3.3 below.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Moulds
Ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and
dimensions of the precast concrete elements to be fabricated.
Design the moulds to prevent damage to the concrete from the following at all stages,
during concreting, curing and demoulding:
b. restraint as the concrete shrinks
c. stripping operation when the precast concrete elements are lifted from the mould
d. dimensional changes due to demoulding of precast concrete elements
Use rubber lining with sufficient rigidity and consistency to allow repeated use for
achieving a consistent quality of patterned finish.
Use high quality rubber mat to SO’s acceptance for carrying the tiles of precast
concrete elements with tile finish.
Self-vibrating moulds may be used subject to satisfactory demonstration of the
component quality achieved in terms of compaction and surface finish using the mix
proposed for the fabrication of the elements.
3.2 Concrete
Refer to section C3-10 “Concrete Construction Generally”, clause 3.0 for general
requirements for material of concrete.
For material requirements in ferrocement products refer to section C3-90-1.
3.3 Reinforcement
Refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0 for general requirements for
material of reinforcement.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
3.7 Mortar
Mortar for non-structural bedding of precast concrete elements is to be made of sand,
cement and water in proportions by volume of:
a. 1 part of portland cement to SS 26
b. 2 parts of sand to SS 31
Determine the quantity of water required to achieve a mix suitable for jointing details
shown on the drawings. Do not add other ingredients without the SO’s acceptance.
Mortar designated as dry-pack for non-structural bedding of precast concrete
elements is to be of such a consistency that it can be properly compacted by
ramming.
3.9 Waterproofing
Refer to section C3-50 “Water-resistance to Concrete Structures, clause 3.0 for
general requirements of material for concrete waterproofing.
3.9.1 Sealant
Refer to section C3-50 “Water-resistance to Concrete Structures”, clause 3.8.1. Use
suitable backer rod at joints where sealant is required for waterproofing.
3.10 Jointing
3.10.1 General
Refer to SS CP 65: Part 1: Clause 5.3 (Structural Connections Between Precast
Concrete Units).
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
3.10.3 Welding
Refer to section C3-20, clause 4.3.3 for welding of reinforcement and section C5-10,
clause 4.5 and clause 5.0 for welding of structural steel components.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
4.1.1 Moulds
Seal all mould joints as necessary to prevent leakage of cement paste or mortar.
4.1.2 Reinforcement
4.1.2.1 General
Refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 4.0, for general requirements for
workmanship of reinforcement.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement detail drawings
to provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover and required fit
within the mould are achieved.
4.1.3 Concreting
Refer to section C3-10, clause 4.0 for general requirements of workmanship for
concreting.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
4.1.5.2 Timing
Commence steam curing after the concrete attains its initial set. Prevent surface
drying by means of a coating of membrane curing compound or otherwise agreed
with the SO during the period between placement of concrete and application of
steam.
4.1.5.3 Temperature
The temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements is not to exceed 65° C
(175° F) when measured close to the surface of the elements.
4.1.5.4 Rate of ambient temperature
Increase the temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements uniformly at a
rate of approximately 20° C per hour (40° F per hour) until it reaches the maximum
temperature stated above.
4.1.5.5 Rate of cooling
Take adequate precautions to prevent the elements being damaged by an excessive
rate of cooling. Rate of cooling is to be less than 20° C per hour.
4.1.6 Finishes
For surfaces with specified architectural finishes such as plain finish, patterned finish,
tile finish, etc., agree the method of production with the SO and comply with the
recommendations from the product supplier of the finishes.
For surfaces to structural elements, refer to section C3-10, clause 4.9 for general
workmanship requirements to surface finishes.
For exposed surface ensure the requirements from CONQUAS quality standards for
exposed surface (Precast Components) are met.
Repair minor defects in accordance with the method in clause 6.6 of SS CP 81.
4.1.7 Demoulding
For elements cast under factory conditions determine the minimum period before
removing the formwork/mould on the basis of the assessed compressive strength of
the component. The concrete strength at demoulding is to be minimum 10 N/mm² or
higher if required by design.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
4.1.9 Lifting/handling
Do not lift any component from the mould on which it was cast, before the concrete
has attained its design demoulding strength.
Determine the need for any additional reinforcement and inserts or fixings that may
be necessary for lifting or handling the elements until they are incorporated into the
structure.
Handle and transport the precast concrete elements taking into account their shapes
and design to avoid excessive stresses or damages in the elements. Place paddings
at the contact points between the tie down rope and the precast concrete elements.
Lift the precast concrete elements only at appropriate points shown in the fabrication/
erection shop drawings.
Make provisions for any temporary supports and make good any inserts or fixings,
holes, etc. used for lifting or handling or temporary bracing/supports.
4.1.11 Marking
Clearly mark each item before delivery in accordance with the drawing to indicate its
weight, location and orientation in the structure so as to facilitate correct delivery and
erection. All marks are not to be easily removed. Position all marks at the concrete
surface that can be easily viewed.
4.2 Storage
Ensure that large enough storage spaces are provided for the elements with
adequate room for lifting equipment and delivery truck to manoeuvre. Store the
elements on firm supports clear of the ground.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
Ensure that the ground is clean, hard, level and well drained to prevent warp, bowing,
chipping, cracking, discoloration, staining or soiling of the precast concrete elements.
Provide the SO with proposals for storage. Issue storage instructions for all precast
concrete elements, defining the storage position, the allowable support points, the
maximum height of any stack and any protective measures required.
Protect the component faces to be exposed in the finished construction from
mechanical damage, dirt, staining, rust marks and other disfiguration. Also, protect
the elements to prevent breakage and staining.
4.3 Erection
4.3.2 Erection
Ensure that any precast concrete items to be incorporated into the structure are kept
stable in the erected position until the items can safely carry the construction loads
without distress.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
4.4.1 Falsework
Provide suitable falsework support and temporary bracings for the erected precast
concrete elements in accordance with the contractor’s design. Refer also to section
C3-30 “Formwork and Falsework”, clause 4.0 for general requirement of the
falsework.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5.1 Submissions
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5.1.3.4 Mould
a. Type of mould
b. Marking identification
c. Date of casting
d. Method of vibration
e. Surface treatment
f. Method of curing
g. Minimum concrete age for demoulding
5.1.3.5 Lifting/Handling
a. Minimum concrete age for lifting/handling
b. Additional reinforcement for lifting/handling stress
c. Method of lifting/handling
d. Device for lifting/handling
e. Location of lifting/handling device
f. Details for lifting/handling device
g. Equipment for lifting/handling
5.1.3.6 Storage
a. Ground preparation
b. Supporting frame
c. Safety features
5.1.3.7 Transportation
a. Supporting frame
b. Wedging to cushion the base of precast concrete elements
c. Tie down detail
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5.1.3.8 Erection
a. Erection sequence
b. Size of backers/shims
c. Laying of bedding
d. Device for temporary props/bracing
e. Details for temporary supports/bracing
f. Details for protection
g. Method of positioning, propping and installation
5.1.3.9 Connections
a. Details
b. Preparation
c. Grouting
d. Grout mix design
e. Temporary shims
5.1.3.10 Repairs
a. Method of repairs
5.1.3.11 Finishes
a. Method of achieving the specified surface finishes
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5.4 Records
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
5.5 Tests
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standard 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal 5
2.2 Quality of the Works 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Cement 6
3.2 Aggregates 6
3.3 Water 6
3.4 Polymer Based Admixtures 6
3.5 Proprietary Concrete Repair Mortars 6
3.6 Surface Coatings 7
3.7 Reinforcement 7
3.8 Mixes for Rendering Mortar 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 General Requirements 9
4.2 Preparatory Works 9
4.3 Cutting Back of Defective Areas 10
4.4 Restoration of Reinforcement 11
4.5 Final Surface Preparation 12
4.6 Batching, Mixing and Transportation 13
4.7 Repair by Local Patching 14
4.8 Repair by Rendering 15
4.9 Repair by Pressure Grouting with Pre-packed Aggregate 16
4.10 Repair of cracks by Epoxy Resin Injection 16
4.11 Repair by Sprayed Concrete 17
4.12 Surface Coatings 17
4.13 Defective Areas 17
4.14 Reinstatement of Inserts, Fixings and Fittings 18
4.15 Health and Safety 18
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the repair to concrete surface or cracks by
patching or injection using cementitious, polymer-based and epoxy repair materials.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C3-80 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C3-80 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standard
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
SS 78 Testing concrete
Part A1: Method of sampling fresh concrete on site
Part A2: Method for determination of slump
Part A8: Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete
Part A11: Method of normal curing of test specimens (27°C method)
Part A16: Method for determination of compressive strength of
concrete cubes
Part A20: Method for determination of the compressive strength of
concrete cores
Other Standards
BS 5262 Code of practice for external rendered finishes
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
1.4.2 Qualifications
All repairs and associated works are of a specialist nature and are to be undertaken
and supervised by appropriately experienced personnel. Provide evidence of past
experience to the SO prior to commencement of the Works.
1.4.4 Warranty
The repair works have been specified to preserve the integrity of the structure.
Warrant the works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period as
specified in the PSD against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant the Works for a minimum period of 10 years against all defects from the date
of completion.
1.5 Definitions
a. Bagging In’ Coat A coat provided for the purpose of filling blowholes to
cleaned or grit-blasted concrete to obtain an even surface.
b. Levelling/Fairing A coat provided for the purpose of giving a uniform finish to
Coat the surface of repaired and un-repaired concrete. It may be
trowelled or roller applied.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Cement
Use Ordinary or Rapid-Hardening Portland cement complying with SS 26 and
supplied in sealed bags.
3.2 Aggregates
3.2.1 General
All aggregates are to be clean and free from salts and deleterious matter. Carry out
tests to establish suitability.
3.3 Water
Use potable water supplied by PUB unless otherwise agreed.
Product
Characteristics
Compressive
strength: MPa
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
3.5.3 Shelf-life
Use materials in the order in which they are received on site. Observe the
manufacturer’s instructions with regard to use of materials after opening and/or
mixing.
3.7 Reinforcement
For general material requirement refer to C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Methods
Submit for SO’s acceptance and adopt methods of repairs in accordance with the
recommendations of the material manufacturer and as set out in this section.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
d. In the case of concrete that has been exposed to fire, remove all concrete
subjected to temperatures above +300°C. If the resulting exposed concrete
contains chlorides, comply also with item c above.
e. Clean the concrete surface by air blasting following mechanical removal.
f. Take care to carry out concrete removal without damage to the reinforcement or
the remaining concrete.
g. Use only hand operated pneumatic hammers unless otherwise agreed.
h. For edges of a cut out section, form an inward sloping angle of approximately 45°
from the adjoining external surface.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
Do not leave the bars exposed for more than two days after cleaning. Unless
otherwise agreed, do not use rust inhibitors.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
4.5.4 Wetness
Before applying the repair compounds or coatings ensure that the surface conditions
and the weather are suitable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
Do not carry out repair work if any of the following conditions prevail:
a. The base concrete is saturated.
b. The surface to be repaired, including any previous applications of repair
compound, is damp.
c. During periods of drizzle or rainfall unless the area to be worked is adequately
protected.
4.6.2 Mixing
4.6.2.1 General
Clean all equipment used for mixing to be free of deleterious substances such as
lime, plaster, organic matter and dirt.
Mix adequate quantities of materials accounting for the volumes of the repair areas,
the procedures of application and the life of the mix. Do not reconstitute or re-work
the mixes.
Mix the constituents of resin-based compounds for priming, strictly to manufacturer's
recommendations.
Mix the constituents of cementitious based primers, mortars or concrete in
accordance with good practice and strictly in accordance with the admixture
manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not hand-mix mortar or concrete on a spot board or similar for batch yields
exceeding 0.015m³ unless otherwise agreed.
Mix in batches to comply with the limits of yield recommended by the mixer
manufacturer.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
4.6.2.2 Renders
Unless otherwise agreed, combine constituents for renders in a trough type mixer.
4.6.2.3 Cleaning
Clean all equipment used for mixing thoroughly after each batch is discharged.
4.6.3 Transportation
Mix small batches at the point of application. Transport all other mix loads to the point
of application in such a manner as to avoid delay, segregation or other harmful
effects.
4.7.1 General
Ensure that the applications of the repair compounds, including the requirements for
priming, thickness of coats, time periods between successive coats and the methods
of application comply with recommendations from the manufacturer.
For cementitious repair compounds, ensure the surface of the repair zone is wet but
not saturated, and remove any surplus water before work begins.
4.7.2 Priming
Apply priming coats thoroughly into all hollows and crevices in the prepared surface
and around the projecting reinforcement. Prime the reinforcing bars as the filling
coats built up.
Overlay priming coats as soon as they become tacky and will not lift from the repair
surface if touched. If at any time the primer completely dries out before overlaying,
re-prepare and re-prime the repair surface.
4.7.3 Filling
Apply filling coats in layers not exceeding 15mm thick. Thoroughly work and compact
each layer into the repair zone and around or between reinforcing bars.
Apply successive layers as soon as the preceding coat has become sufficiently stiff to
support the weight of the additional layer but is still adequately tacky to provide
bonding. If at any time the last layer applied completely dries out before over-laying,
re-prepare the surface.
4.7.4 Finishing
Apply finishing coats to not less than 5mm thick. Level off or profile and adjust the
colour and texture to match the adjacent original concrete.
Reinstate exposed aggregate finishes by coating the back of each individual stone
with primer and, when it is tacky, bed it firmly into the plastic final filling coat.
Profile moulded or sculptured features to match the original works. Submit to the SO
for acceptance methods of forming. Provide support to the features until they have
cured sufficiently to support their own weight.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
4.8.1 General
In general comply with BS 5262 for methods and procedures, modify where
necessary in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations if any.
4.8.4 Priming
4.8.4.1 Priming coats
Work thoroughly over the surface and into all hollows and crevices.
Overlay priming coats as soon as they become tacky and will not lift from the surface
if touched. If at any time the priming completely dries out before overlaying re-
prepare and re-prime the surface.
4.8.4.2 Rendering Coats
Apply in accordance with the following:
Thickness per coat (mm)
Type of coat Number of coats
For modified render For plain renders
Undercoat 1 9 12
- 1 - 8
Finishing 1 6 5
Total 3 15 25
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
Place each coat and compact by trowel, scrape with a straight edge to give a level,
uniform thickness.
Apply the coats by either:
a. Cure the undercoat and scratch the surface for keying further coats. Thoroughly
brush the surface to remove all loose material and wet before applying
successive coats or
b. Apply successive coats as soon as the preceding coat has become sufficiently
stiff to support the weight of the additional coat but is still adequately tacky to
provide bonding. If at any time the last coat applied completely dries out before
over-coating, re-prepare the surface.
4.8.5 Finishing
Apply as directed, either:
a. Compact and float the finishing coat to give a dense, smooth finish free from
trowel marks; or
b. Immediately after compacting the finishing coat, provide a textured finish.
4.10.1 Preparation
Drill and insert injection ports along the crack at spacing and depth as recommended
by the manufacturer.
Seal all surfaces of cracks by accepted taping material and methods.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
4.10.2 Injection
Inject Epoxy compound into prepared ports under pressure using appropriate
equipment.
Commence injection at the lower entry port and continue until epoxy compound
appears in the adjacent entry port.
Lock off the first port. Continue from port to port until the entire crack is filled.
4.10.3 Finish
Remove temporary seal and excess epoxy.
Clean surface adjacent to repair and blend finish.
4.12.1 General
Mix and use coatings strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Do not thin or dilute in excess of the recommendations.
4.12.3 Application
Apply coatings to thickness as indicated in the PSD.
Apply coatings to the following thickness:
Apply each coat in a single pass and allow to cure fully before applying subsequent
coats.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
5.1 Submission
5.1.2 Warranty
Submit the warranty for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
Maintain the accepted sample panels unaltered and protected for reference during
the course of the works.
5.3 Tests
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standard and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions 7
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 Requirements for Design Verification 8
2.2 Performance Criteria for Piles Under Test 8
2.3 Driving Requirement 9
2.4 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 9
2.5 Noise Nuisance 10
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Pile Sections and Pile Dimensions 11
3.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles Including Spun Piles 11
3.3 Steel Piles 12
3.4 Treated Timber Piles 13
3.5 Proprietary Micropiles 15
3.6 Pile Shoes and Toes 15
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 Fabrication of Piles: Concrete Piles 16
4.2 Fabrication of Piles: Steel Piles 16
4.3 Handling and Pitching of Driven Piles 17
4.4 Installation and Driving 18
4.5 Welding 20
4.6 Damaged Piles 20
4.7 Tolerances 21
4.8 Pile Heads 21
4.9 Non-Performance of Working Piles 22
4.10 Noise and Disturbance 22
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of driven piles, including the
use of the following pile types:
a. Precast Concrete piles including Spun Piles
b. Steel Piles
c. Treated Timber Piles
d. Composite Micro-piles
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C4-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this documents take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic
wood preservatives
SS 187 Qualification test for manual metal-arc welders
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
1.4.11 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
1.4.15 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
b. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
1.5 Definitions
a. Pile The term ‘coating’ includes the primer and the number of other
Coating coats specified.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3. MATERIALS
3.2.1 Concrete
Refer to Section C3-10, clause 3.0 for general requirement of concrete.
3.2.2 Reinforcement
3.2.2.1 General
Refer to section C3-20, clause 3.0 for general requirement of reinforcement and
section C3-70, clause 3.0 for requirement of prestress elements.
Ensure all precast concrete piles supplied are reinforced in accordance to the design.
The minimum number of longitudinal bars provided is to be four in rectangular piles
and six in circular or hexagonal piles. Minimum bar size is to be 12 mm.
Total cross sectional area of reinforcement is not to be less than 1% of the cross
section of the pile. Incorporate adequate reinforcement for lifting and handling
purposes.
3.2.3 Spacers
Check that spacers are designed and manufactured using materials, which will not
lead to reinforcement corrosion or spalling of the concrete cover.
3.2.4 Formwork
3.2.4.1 General
Refer to Section C3-60, clause 3.1 for general requirement of precast
mould/formwork.
Ensure formwork is clean, robust and constructed such as to prevent grout loss or
loss of aggregate during casting and to ensure the production of uniform sections.
When the sides of adjacent piles are used as formwork, use an accepted method to
prevent adhesion between concrete surfaces.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3.3.2 Welding
All welding for fabrication of steel piles and accessories are to be in accordance with
section C5-10 “ Structural Steelwork”, clause 4.5.
3.4.1 General
Timber piles are to comply with SS CP 1 and SS CP 7 in terms of classification and
strength, and are to be pressure treated with approved chemical preservative in
accordance with SS 72.
The piles are to be free from defects which may affect their strength and durability.
3.4.2 Species
All square sawn timber piles are to be Kempas or Keruing unless otherwise specified
or agreed.
3.4.3 Grading
Grading is to be in accordance with Malaysian Grading Rules by qualified timber
grading agents registered with Malaysian Timber Industry Board. Comply with the
following grading limits:
3.4.3.1 Knots
The size of knots is not to exceed one-quarter the width of the face or edge on which
they appear, and not be grouped closer than one knot per 1 metre of the length of the
pile. Unsound knots are not permitted.
3.4.3.2 Wane
Wane is to be allowed on one edge only and the total width of wane on its adjacent
faces is not to exceed:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3.4.3.3 Curvature
In piles up to 6 metres in length, maximum deviation is not to exceed 25 mm, ie the
longitudinal curvature is to fall within 25 mm of the centre line of the pile. In piles over
6 metres long, maximum deviation is not to exceed 35 mm.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
A sample boring taken from any part of any treated pile is to demonstrate evidence of
continuous and substantially even penetration of the preservation for the full depth of
the treated zone.
Submit a treatment certificate for every consignment of piles delivered. Provide
details of charge number, average dry salt retention, and the number and sizes of
piles supplied.
All timber piles delivered to site are to bear marks from approved labs certifying the
standard attained for treatment or otherwise tested at random at SO’s direction.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1.1 Curing
Unless otherwise agreed, the piles are to be cured for the period as below.
Type of Cement Minimum Period from Time of Casting
Strike Side End of Wet Lift from Drive
Shutters Curing Casting Bed
Sulphate 12 hours 4 days 10 days 28 days
Resisting
Portland Cement
Rapid-Hardening 12 hours 3 days 7 days 10 days
Portland Cement
Do not lift piles from the casting bed until sufficient concrete strength has developed
to allow handling to take place without causing damage. Assess this on the basis of
the results of the concrete cube tests and the type of cement and admixtures used,
and provide a proposed level for acceptance.
When accelerated curing is used, the curing procedure is to SO’s acceptance and
must not cause deleterious effects to the pile. Allow not less than four hours from the
completion of casting before raising the temperature. Control rates of heating and
cooling in accordance with section C3-60, clause 4.1.5.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.3.1 Handling
Do not lift piles by slinging from other than accepted lifting holes or points. For each
section, clearly mark the lifting points.
Ensure that all piles within a stack are in groups of the same length and placed on
accepted supports.
Carry out handling, transporting and pitching of piles in a manner that avoid damage
to piles and their coatings.
4.3.2 Pitching
Before the commencement of driving, check each pile and the leaders or guides of
the pile frame for correct rake or plumb and maintain the rake or plumb during driving.
During the driving operation ensure the centre of the monkey or hydraulic ram does
not deviate more than 40 mm off the centre of the pile being driven.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.4.1 General
Install each pile to a penetration as indicated in the drawings or as adjusted as a
result of the design verification check supported by accepted set records.
Ensure the equipment set up and installation procedures are in conformance with SS
CP 4.
4.4.3.2 Depth
Drive each pile continuously until the specified depth or accepted set has been
reached. Acceptable set is indicated in the PSD. Do not suspend driving without
approval. Demonstrate that the rate of penetration prior to the cessation of driving will
be substantially re-established on its resumption.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
b. Anti-Splitting Plates: Fit the piles with an approved anti-splitting plate at the butt
and toe to protect against brooming or splitting during driving.
4.4.3.8 Obstruction
In the event of encountering obstructions below ground level during piling operations,
inform the SO immediately for further directions.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.4.6 Preboring
Adopt pre-boring to assist pile installation only with permission.
Pitch the pile into a hole pre-bored to the depth and diameter as agreed with the SO.
Record the details of the pre-boring depth and diameter.
4.4.7 Jetting
Adopt jetting to assist pile installation only with permission. Propose details for the
jetting operations to SO’s acceptance before commencing. Do not carry out jetting
over the last 3m of penetration.
4.5 Welding
All welding are to conform to the requirement in section C5-10 “Structural Steelwork”,
clause 4.5. Ensure that all welding are carried out by a certified welder.
When welding the splice joints during driving, allow a minimum cooling time of 30
minutes for welds before continuing any driving work.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.7 Tolerances
4.7.3 Verticality
For vertical piles, the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the
vertical is 1 in 75.
4.7.4 Rake
For raked piles, set and maintain the piling rig to attain the required rake. The
maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
Take care to avoid shattering or damaging the rest of the pile. Cut away any cracked
or defective concrete and made good with new concrete properly bonded to the old to
provide a full and sound section to the cut-off level.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.1 Submissions
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.2.1 General
Provide the SO with test certificates, analysis and mill certificates. Ensure that
adequate notice is given to the SO to inspect the process or test.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.3 Tests
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.5 Records
Keep piling records with the following information and submit copies as directed in
good time to the SO. Note any unexpected boring conditions in the record.
a. Contract and site information
b. Pile reference number (location)
c. Pile type
d. Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
e. Hammer weight
f. Hammer drop height
g. Temporary Compression
h. Re-drives Achieved
i. Final Set Achieved
j. Length of preformed pile
k. Date and time of installation
l. Date of pile casting
m. Length and details of reinforcement
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
n. Concrete mix
o. Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
p. Cut off level
q. Depth from Cut off level to pile toe
r. Toe level
s. Depth from working level to Cut off level
t. All information regarding obstructions/delays and other Interruptions to the
sequence of work
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 4
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions 7
3.0 EQUIPMENT 10
3.1 Calibration 10
3.2 Static Load Test 10
3.3 Osterberg Cell Load Test Equipment 10
3.4 Dynamic Load Test Equipment 11
3.5 Sonic Logging Equipment 11
3.6 Vibration Test Equipment 11
3.7 Modified Shock Test Equipment 11
3.8 Simple Shock Test Equipment 12
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 13
4.1 Schedule of Tests 13
4.2 Construction of Preliminary Test Pile 13
4.3 Load Testing: General 14
4.4 Load Test: Static Load Test Procedures 18
4.5 Load Test: Osterberg Load Test 21
4.6 Load Test: Lateral Load Test 21
4.7 Load Test: Dynamic Test 22
4.8 Integrity Tests: Proof Coring 23
4.9 Integrity Test: Non Destructive Tests (NDT) 24
4.10 Protection of Testing Equipment 26
4.11 Noise and Disturbance 26
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the load and integrity testing of bored and
driven piles.
This document is supplementary to section C4-30 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the
SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are
the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
Other Standards
ASTM D1143 Standard test method for piles under static axial compressive load
(ASTM, D1995)
BS 8008 Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction
and descent of machine-bored shafts for piling and other
purposes.
In the event that the standards or Codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.4.12 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations, notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent
of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
1.4.12.1 Marking of Bores
Ensure that when the pile head is unattended the bore is clearly marked and fenced off
at all times.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.5 Definitions
The load which may be safely applied to a pile
1.5.1 Allowable Load
after taking into account its ultimate bearing
capacity, negative skin friction, pile spacing,
overall bearing capacity of the ground below
and allowable settlement.
A pile designed to resist compressive axial
1.5.2 Compression
force, which would cause it to penetrate
Pile
further into the ground.
A test in which the pile is extracted from its
1.5.3 Constant Rate
position as installed in the soil at a constant
of Uplift (CRU)
speed while the force applied at the top of the
Test
pile to maintain the rate of uplift is
continuously measured. The force/uplift
relationship obtained does not represent an
equilibrium condition between the extractive
force and the uplift.
The dead weight structure used in a loading
1.5.4 Kentledge
test.
A loading test in which each increment of load
1.5.5 Maintained
is held constant either for a defined period of
Load Test
time or until the rate of movement (settlement
or uplift) falls to a specified value.
The computation of the mechanical
1.5.6 Modified Shock
admittance of a pile as a function of frequency
Testing (MST)
by Fourier transform of the signal received by
a velocity transducer following a single
hammer blow to the head of the pile.
A pile installed before the commencement of
1.5.7 Preliminary
the main piling works or specific part of the
Test Pile
works for the purpose of establishing the
suitability of the chosen type of pile and for
confirming its design, dimensions, bearing
capacity and installation method. Preliminary
piles are not expected to be incorporated into
the permanent works unless otherwise
directed.
Coring of the pile shaft from the top of the pile.
1.5.8 Proof Coring
A load applied to a selected working pile to
1.5.9 Working Test
confirm that it is suitable for the load at the
Load
settlement specified. A working test load
should not normally exceed 200% of the
specified working load on a pile.
An arrangement of kentledge, piles, anchors
1.5.10 Reaction
or rafts that provides a resistance against
System
which the pile is tested.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
3.0 EQUIPMENT
3.1 Calibration
Ensure all testing equipment and gauges used for pile load tests or integrity tests are
calibrated before and after each test by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
All test equipments are to be calibrated at a maximum of six months interval and
calibrations are to remain valid for 2 months at the time of being used for the tests.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
h. Data logger
i. Air driven or hand operated hydraulic pump
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
For the purpose of establishing the number of tests required, the percentages given in
the schedule relate to the total number of working piles on a contract. Round up part
number of tests calculated based on the total number of piles.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Ensure the pile head and/or cap is concentric with the test pile; check that the joint
between the cap and the pile is not weaker than the pile.
Make sufficient clear space under any part of the cap projecting beyond the section of
the pile so that, at the maximum expected settlement, load is not transmitted to the
ground except through the pile.
4.2.4.2 Tension Test.
For a pile that is tested in tension, provide means for transmitting the test load axially to
the pile. Construct the connection between the pile and the loading equipment with
strength equal to the maximum load which is to be applied to the pile during the test with
an appropriate factor of safety on the structural design.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Place the dial gauges in diametrically opposed positions and equidistant from the pile
axis. The dial gauges are to enable readings to be made up to within an accuracy of 0.1
mm. Use a scale ruler and levelling device to provide an independent measurement of
the pile head movement.
Protect the reference frame from the weather.
4.3.5.5 Other Methods
Details of any other method for measuring the movement of pile heads may be
submitted for acceptance.
4.3.5.6 Calibration of Dial Gauges
Calibrate the dial gauge used for the measurement of load by a SINGLAS accredited
laboratory to the accuracy as required.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Following each application of load, hold the load for not less than the period shown or
until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down. Calculate the rate
of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement
versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on
reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals
between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the
application of the increment of the load.
Continue testing until the maximum test load has been reached or when the settlement
exceeds 10% of the pile diameter.
Following each application of an increment of load, hold the load for not less than the
period shown or until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down.
Calculate the rate of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values
of settlement versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table.
For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on
reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals
between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the
application of the increment of the load.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.4.4 Combined Working Load Test and Constant Rate of Uplift (CRU) or
Constant Rate of Penetration (CRP) Test
When required, carry out a Working Load Test by maintained loading prior to a CRU or
CRP Test.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Check that the horizontal lateral load on the pile head is parallel to a pair of strain
gauges already installed in the pile. Identify piles into which the inclinometer tube is
required and submit to the SO for acceptance not less than 72 hours before the pile is
concreted.
The testing procedures are to be the same as that for static load tests except that only
one load cycle is required with each load increment to be held for 1 hour (mm) until the
ultimate lateral load capacity or 300mm pile top deflection, whichever occurs first.
Monitor the strain gauges in the pile at every load step.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
material. Remove any loose material from the pile head to expose sound concrete, and
ensure the head is horizontal over its complete cross-section.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.8.1.2 In Soil/Rock
Requirements for cores are:
a. 100% Total Core Recovery.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
f. Lower one probe to the base of a 50 mm diameter tube while lower the other to the
same depth in the 100 mm diameter tube. While the former probe is held in position,
lower the latter probe into the cored hole to its lower limit. Obtain a record of the
received signal delay time as a function of the depth of the second probe. Repeat
this process with the first probe in all available tubes.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.1.1 Proposals
Submit the following proposals for SO’s acceptance prior to commencing any work:
a. Proposals to deal with noise and vibration.
b. The proposed testing sequence and programme including the anticipated time
required for installation of the preliminary test piles.
c. Details of the proposed temporary support and reaction system where needed.
Including design of Kentledge and other reaction piles. All design to be endorsed by
PE.
d. Details of any safety provision.
e. Details of the equipment to be used for the tests.
f. Details of the action that would be taken to stabilise an excavation during the
progress of a pile test.
g. CVs of personnel involved.
h. Method statement of loading arrangement and testing procedure.
i. Method statement of the Installation of instrumentations.
j. Method statement for dynamic load test.
k. Method statement for integrity tests.
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.2.1 Records
Submit the following documents for SO’s review at least 7 days prior to the
commencement of any preliminary pile testing.
a. Boring and concreting records of the preliminary pile
b. Results of concrete cube tests of preliminary pile
c. Details of the steel reinforcement cage, including depth and length of the
reinforcement laps
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
g. deduced static load deflection behaviour of the pile at the head and toe
h. assumptions made in the analysis
i. limitations of the method
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.6.4 Report
Prepare and submit a report for each pile tested. The report is to contain the following
information:
a. contract number and name
b. pile location plan
c. pile reference number
d. pile size and depth
e. working load
f. date on which the pile was constructed
g. cube strengths of pile concrete
h. date on which the pile was tested
i. identification of supervisor
j. identification of analyser
k. the originals or clear copies of the photographic records
l. a record of the mechanical admittance of the pile
m. an interpretation of each record
n. a review of any anomalies in terms of influence of poor materials or workmanship
during pile construction.
5.6.4.1 Interpretation
Report the following information:
a. velocity of sound in concrete, appropriate to the strength of the pile
34
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.6.4.2 Defects
Report any deviation from the record to be expected from a pile constructed entirely of
sound concrete and without defect. In the report, indicate the nature, location and
severity of the defect and recommend further testing if necessary. Where directed,
evaluate the implication of the existence of the defect on the performance of the pile.
35
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Technical Reference 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
1.5 Definitions 8
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
2.1 Design Brief 9
2.2 Loading During Construction 9
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Steel Sections/Elements 10
3.2 Welding Consumables 11
3.3 Fasteners 11
3.4 Profiled Steel Decking 12
3.5 Protective Finishes 12
3.6 Grout 12
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Storage and Handling 14
4.3 Fabrication 14
4.4 Bolting 16
4.5 Welding 18
4.6 Permitted Deviations (PDs) of Fabrication 21
4.7 Erection 28
4.8 Permitted Deviations (PDs) in Erection 29
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the fabrication and erection of normal
structural steelwork in buildings. It does not cover the use of stainless steel in special
structures.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C5-10 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C5-10 with the same clause title.
1.3.1 Standard
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 470 Hot-finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural
steels
Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
SS 503 Cold formed welded steel structural hollow sections
Part 1 : Technical delivery requirements
Part 2 : Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
Other Standards
ANSI/AWS Structural welding code. Steel
D1.1-02
ASTM E165 Standard test method for liquid penetrant examination
ASTM E709 Standard guide for magnetic particle examination
ASTM E747 Controlling quality of radiographic testing using wire penetrameters
BS EN ISO 898- Mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel.
1 Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
BS EN 10024 Hot rolled taper flange I sections. Tolerances on shape and dimensions
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery
conditions
BS EN 10029 Tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates
3mm thick or above
BS EN 10051 Specification for continuously hot-rolled uncoated plate, sheet and strip of
non-alloy and alloy steels. Tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10113 Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels
Part 1: General delivery conditions
Part 2: Delivery conditions for normalised/ normalised rolled steels
Part 3: Delivery conditions for thermomechanical rolled steels
BS EN 10137 Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steel in the
quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened conditions
Part 1: General delivery conditions
Part 2: Delivery conditions for quenched and tempered steels
Part 3: Delivery condition for precipitation-hardened steels
BS EN 10155 Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance.
Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10163 Specification for delivery requirement for surface condition of hot rolled
steel plates, wide flats and sections
Part 1: General requirements
Part 2: Plates and wide flats
Part 3: Sections
BS EN 10210 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural
steels
Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
BS EN 10219 Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
steels
BS EN 10279 Hot rolled steel channels. Tolerances on shape, dimension and mass
BS EN 10034 Structural steel I and H section. Tolerance on shape and dimensions
BS EN 10055 Hot rolled steel equal flange tees with radiused root and toes. Dimensions
and tolerances on shape and dimensions.
BS EN 10056-1 Structural steel equal and unequal leg angles. Dimensions
BS EN 10056-2 Specification for structural steel equal and unequal leg angles. Tolerances
on shape and dimensions
BS 4-1 Structural steel sections. Specification for hot rolled sections
BS 2583 Podger spanners
BS 3692: ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts – specification
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts – specification
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
BS 4395 High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for
structural engineering (metric series)
BS 4429 Specification for rigging screws and turnbuckles for general engineering
lifting purposes and pipe hanger applications
BS 4604 Use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork (metric series)
BS 4921 Specification for sherardised coatings on iron and steel
BS 4933 ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws with
hexagon nuts
BS 5531 Code of practice for safety in erecting structural frames
BS EN 1993 Design of steel structures
Part1
Engage a PE (civil) to develop the design of the connections based on the structural
design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Temporary Works
Engage a PE to plan, design and supervise any necessary temporary supports to
ensure the structural steelwork is stable throughout the construction, paying attention
to the safe erection of structural steelwork in accordance with BS 5531.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
1.4.3 Qualifications
1.4.3.1 Steel Fabricators
Engage steel fabricators who are accredited under the Structural Steel Fabricators
Accreditation Scheme of the Singapore Structural Steel Society for the fabrication
works.
Refer to the PSD for the required grade of the fabricator.
The required grade of steel fabricator is S4 and above.
1.4.3.2 Supervisors
All structural steelwork and associated works are to be undertaken and supervised by
appropriately experienced personnel. Provide evidence of personnel’s past
experience and certificate to the SO for acceptance prior to commencement of the
Works.
1.4.3.3 Welder Qualification
Submit evidence of welders’ competence to the to undertake the specified work.
The welders are to be tested to meet the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 4
Part C. The welder’s test is to be conducted and certificates are to be issued by the
Independent Inspection and Testing Agency.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
records.
4. Pre-inspection meeting and audit of fabricator facilities/plants
5. Review of material test certificates/records, verify or inspect
materials and witness pre-treatment processes, if any
6. Witness cutting/edge joint preparations, verify joint geometry
and inspect fit-up condition
7. Verify that welding processes are carried out in accordance
with the approved welding procedures, codes/standards and
relevant documents
8. Perform visual inspection and verify dimensional records
9. Select weld joints for testing & witness non-destructive testing
and assess all results
10. Witness blasting & galvanising processes
11. Inspect painting and galvanising works
12. Identify & verify completed structural members and witness the
handling of these members onto lorry/truck for delivery to site
13. Inspect delivered structural members for damage due to
handling and transportation
14. Inspect the assembly of structural members at erection site
prior to welding
15. Verify all welding procedure and welder qualification records at
site
16. Witness procedure trial of stud welding process
17. Inspect all welds & bolt tightening
18. Select weld for testing and witness site NDT
19 Inspect all remaining site painting and witness repairing of all
protective treatment works
20. Witness fireproofing mock-up test as well as laboratory tests
21. Witness and inspect the application of fireproofing works
22. Final inspection of all structural members
23. Review all documents and records including but not limited to
the following:
- Dimensional
- Procedures
- Testing
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
b. Any instruments or other equipment required checking the accuracy and quality
of the works.
1.5 Definitions
a. Design Drawings showing the dimensioned layout of the steel
Drawings structure with the size and material grades of all members,
the forces to be developed in their connections and any
cambers etc, from which shop drawings are made.
b. Shop Drawings showing all necessary information to fabricate the
Drawings structural steelwork, including the piece markings with the
location in the structure.
c. Reaming Forming, shaping, tapering, or enlarging a hole with a reamer.
d. Faying Surfaces which are tightly or closely fitted.
Surfaces
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
3. MATERIALS
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
For hot rolled sections, if there are surface imperfections and defects as classified in
BS EN 10163-3 Clause 4 (Requirements) revealed during surface preparation, rectify
the surface in accordance to BS EN 10163-3 Clause 5 (Repair Procedures).
For hot rolled hollow sections, rectify the surface imperfections and defects revealed
during surface preparation in accordance to BS EN 10210-1 Clause 6.8 (Surface
Condition).
3.3 Fasteners
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
3.6 Grout
Grout is to comply with BS 5950-2 Section 2.5.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
Grout around anchor bolts under base plates and between steel plates and concrete
surface is to have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 40 N/mm2.
Proprietary grouts are not to contain high alumina cement.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.1 Traceability
All steel elements are to be identified and traceable to the manufacturer’s
material/mill test certificates.
4.1.2 Marking
Mark all pieces so that they can be identified at all stages of fabrication.
Mark completed components in locations that will not be covered up by other material
after erection to avoid confusion.
Hard stamping may be used other than where specified in the PSD.
Keep areas of steelwork free of all markings where so required on the Drawings.
4.2.2 Storage
Adequately support steel clear of the ground. Keep clean and do not allow water to
accumulate on components. Protect steel against corrosion.
Ensure individual piece markings are visible when members are stacked.
4.2.3 Handling
Plan and carry out bundling, packing, handling and transport in a manner designed to
prevent permanent distortion to the steelwork and minimise damage to any protective
coating.
4.3 Fabrication
Prepare and comply with proper fabrication procedures to SO’s acceptance, to
ensure achievement of the desired quality.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4.3.1 Cutting
Comply with BS 5950-2 Clause 3.3 (Cutting).
Cut and shape steel by sawing, shearing, cropping, nibbling, plasma or laser cutting
and thermal or flame cutting.
Thermal cutting are not permitted.
4.3.1.1 Hand Flame Cutting
Use only where it is impractical to use machine flame cutting.
4.3.1.2 Flame Cut Edges
Flame-cut edges that are free from significant irregularities require no further
treatment other than dressing as specified in 4.3.3(Dressing).
4.3.2 Holing
Comply with BS 5950-2 Clause 3.4 (Holing).
4.3.2.1 Forming
Drill, punch, plasma or laser cut and thermal or flame cut round holes for fasteners.
Thermal holing or full size hole punching are not permitted at the areas indicated in
the PSD.
Thermal holing are not permitted:
4.3.2.2 Matching
Ensure all matching holes are formed such that fasteners can be inserted freely
through the assembled members at right angles to the contact faces.
Drifting to align holes may be used provided it neither enlarges nor distorts the holes.
4.3.2.3 Drilling through Multiple Thickness
Tightly clamp the separate parts before drilling and remove any burrs after separating
the parts.
4.3.2.4 Punching Full Size
Punching of full size holes is permitted when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. The tolerance on distortion of the punched hole does not exceed that specified;
b. The holes are free of burrs which would prevent solid seating of the parts when
tightened;
c. The thickness of the material is not greater than 30mm, nor greater than the
diameter of the hole being punched;
d. In spliced connections when the holes in mating surfaces are punched in the
same direction and the splice plates marked to show the assembly faces, if
packed separately.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4.3.3 Dressing
4.3.3.1 Removal of Burrs
Dress cut edges or holes to remove dross, burrs, irregularities and protruding edges.
If holes are drilled through components that are clamped together not intended to be
separated after drilling, removal of burrs is not required.
4.3.3.2 Dressing of Sharp Edges
Dress all sharp edges.
A 90° rolled, sheared or machined cut edge requires no further treatment.
4.4 Bolting
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4.5 Welding
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4.5.4 Assembly
4.5.4.1 Fit-up
Fit up joints to the dimensional accuracy in accordance with the following:
a. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.9 (Fillet Weld Requirement) for Fillet Welding
b. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.11 (Common Requirements of Partial and Complete
Joint Penetration Groove Welds) and Clause 3.12 (Partial Joint Penetration
Requirements) for Partial Penetration Butt Welding.
c. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.11 (Common Requirements of Partial and Complete
Joint Penetration Groove Welds and Clause 3.13 (Complete Joint Penetration
Requirements) for Partial Penetration Butt Welding.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
D = D/300
= D/1000
90°
D
Plan or Elevation
4.6.1.4 Straightness
PD of a member from a straight line drawn between adjacent points of subsequent
effective lateral restraint = 3mm or L/1000, whichever is greater, where L is the
distance between restraints.
= L/1000 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
4.6.1.5 Camber
PD from specified or proposed camber at mid-length = 6mm or L/1000, whichever is
greater, where L is the length of the member.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
Deviation
L
Deviation = L/1000 or 6mm
whichever is the greater
4.6.1.6 Length
PD after cutting, measured on the centre line of the section or on the corner of angles
= 2mm.
L±
= 2mm
= 3mm
= 2mm
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
= D/10 or 1mm
whichever is the greater
= t/10
4.6.2.5 Flatness
Gaps in joints that depend on contact bearing when assembled during fabrication are
not to exceed 0.75mm and are to be less than 0.25mm over 50% of the length of
contact of the section.
=0.75mm
D±
= 4mm
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
Bw ±
B w or B n < 300
= 3mm
_ 300
B w or B n >
= 5mm
Bn ±
B Flange width
= B / 100 or 3mm
whichever is
the greater
b
= 5mm
±
4.6.3.5 Flanges
For flange width B, PD on out of flatness = B/100 or 3mm, whichever is greater.
B Flange width
= B/100 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= 1mm
4.6.3.7 Length
PD on length on centre line = ± 3mm.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
L±
= 3mm
= L/1000 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
Deviation
L
Deviation = L/1000 or 6mm
whichever is the greater
= d/150 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= D/300 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
= d/500 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= d/250 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
B ±
f
B ±
w
B or B w < 300
f
= 3mm
_ 300
B or B w >
f
= 5mm
4.6.4.2 Squareness
PD on squareness measured at diaphragm positions = D/300, where D is section
depth.
= D/300
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
= w/150 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= L / 1000 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= d / 500 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
= d / 250 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
4.6.4.6 Length
PD on length measured on centre line = ± 3mm.
L±
= 3mm
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
Deviation
4.7 Erection
4.7.1 General
Prepare and comply with proper erection procedures to SO’s acceptance, to ensure
achievement of the desired quality and safety, paying attention to site conditions,
constraints and restrictions.
4.7.4 Alignment
Align each part of the structure as soon as practicable after erection. Do not make
permanent connections between members until the structure has been sufficiently
aligned, levelled, plumbed and temporarily connected so that members will not be
displaced during subsequent erection or alignment of the remainder of the structure.
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
4.7.9 Grouting
Carry out grouting in accordance with BS 5950-2 Clause 6.3.
Do not carry out grouting under column base plates until a sufficient portion of the
structure has been aligned, levelled, plumbed and adequately braced.
Immediately before grouting, clean the space under the column base plates to be free
of all extraneous matter.
Prepare, mix and place proprietary grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
25 mm minimum
clearance at top
of concrete
4.8.2.3 Bolts or Bolt Groups Cast into Walls (No Allowance for Adjustment)
a. End of bolt: +45/-5mm.
b. Bolt centroid: ±3mm position in plan and elevation.
+ 45 mm
= - 5 mm bolt level
= ± 3 mm
position in plan
and elevation
= 10mm
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
H H
= ± H/600 or 5 mm
whichever is greater
Max = ± 25mm
h = storey
height
h = ± h/600 or 5 mm
whichever is greater
H = 50mm maximum
= 10 mm
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
= (D / 1000) + 1 mm
= ± 10mm
= ± 5mm
= ± 5mm
Floor
Level
h<3m, = 5mm
h<3m, = h/600
e. PD of beam relative to adjacent beam above or below = 5mm for h < 3m and
h/600 for h 3m, where h = storey height in m.
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
H
c
= ± Hc /1000 or 5mm
whichever is greater
Max = ± 25mm
= ± 10mm
= 0.5mm
= 1mm
Generic profile
deck may span
either direction
= ± 10mm
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
34
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
5.1 Submission
35
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
5.1.5 Programme
Provide a detailed programme to show the planned timing of the various items of
work to be done within time as directed by the SO, including:
a. Preparation and submission of construction information
b. Order and delivery of materials
c. Fabrication
d. Application of protective coatings
e. Transportation to site
f. Erection
Include in the programme, the time required for all procedural trials, inspection and
testing, and trial assemblies.
36
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
permitted PD if any, connection and assembly details, and protective works applied if
any.
5.3 Inspection
37
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
Examples: Examples:
Fillet Welds
Examples:
Frequency 20% (site welds 100% but longitudinal welds 1.0m in each 10m or part
thereof)
UT / RT As directed by SO
38
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-10 Structural Steelwork
If ultrasonic testing is impractical, for example when the plate thickness is less than
8mm, use radiographic testing in accordance with the procedure and technique given
in ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 6 Part E.
39
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
1.5 Definitions 6
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 7
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief 7
3. MATERIALS 9
3.1 Proprietary Products 9
3.2 Paint Coating Materials 9
3.3 Hot-Dip Galvanising Materials 9
3.4 Sealants 9
3.5 Fireproofing Materials 9
3.6 Compatibility of Products 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 General 11
4.2 Surface Preparation 11
4.3 Hot Dip Galvanising 12
4.4 Sprayed-on Metal Coatings 12
4.5 Paint Coatings 13
4.6 Application of Thin Film Intumescent Paints 14
4.7 Sprayed-on Fireproofing 14
4.8 Dry Lining 16
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the protection of structural steelwork against
corrosion and fire.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C5-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C5-20 with the same clause title
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
ASTM E859 Standard test method for air erosion of sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRMs)
applied to structural members
ASTM E937 Standard test method for corrosion of steel by sprayed fire-resistive material
(SFRM) applied to structural members
ANSI / UL Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
263
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
1.4.2 Qualifications
All protective works and associated works are to be undertaken and supervised by
experienced personnel. Provide evidence of personnel’s past experience and
certificate to the SO for acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
1.4.7 Warranty
Warrant the Works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period as
specified in the PSD against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant the Works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period of 10
years against all defects from the date of completion.
For the sprayed-on fireproofing, warrant that the materials will not flake, dust,
delaminate or erode.
1.5 Definitions
a. DFT Dry Film Thickness (local
thickness of a sprayed metal or
galvanised coating).
b. Intumescent Types of fire-retardant paint that
Paint protect the substrates to which
they are applied.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Durability
Account for the required durability range indicated in the PSD.
Account for the required durability range of: 5 to 10 years for the protective system.
Assess the level of coating failure before the first major maintenance in accordance
with EN ISO 12944.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
3. MATERIALS
3.4 Sealants
Comply with BS 6213.
Refer to the PSD for proprietary product selected for the project if any.
Use the following product or approved equivalent for sealing all gaps and connections
where required.
Item Product manufacturer and model
Gap Sealants
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project
Item Product manufacturer and model
Intumescent Paints
a. Board Lining: Comply with ASTM E119, ANSI/UL 263, BS 476-8 or BS 476-21.
b. Material Wrapping
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
4.3.1 Procedures
Carry out galvanising in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 Annex A to D.
Where higher strength steels are to be galvanised, propose for SO’s acceptance,
suitable precautions to minimise the risk of critical welds cracking.
4.4.1 Procedures
Apply aluminium or zinc sprayed coatings to the surface in accordance with SS 37
(aluminium) and BS EN 22063 (zinc).
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
4.5.1 General
Apply the designated system in layers according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
a. Procedural trials are held on representative samples of the work, in which the
primer is applied before welding, and the soundness of the fastening can be
demonstrated.
b. Weldable paint is specified.
4.7.2 Application
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of material and
condition of substrate in each case.
Obtain details from the manufacturer, conditions not fully covered by the printed
recommendations and record in writing any oral recommendations received.
Copy any such recommendations to the SO and the manufacturer.
4.7.3 Equipment
Use spray equipment recommended by the manufacturer including equipment used
for measuring, mixing and auxiliary equipment such as air compressors.
4.7.4 Thickness
Extend full thickness of the material over the entire substrate such that it is covered in
a monolithic blanket of uniform fine texture.
Check the thickness of the sprayed-on material with a single point gauge or a site
thickness indicator.
Where required by the manufacturer to meet FSSB's approval, tamp the surface of
the freshly sprayed-on fireproofing to provide a smooth texture of the required
thickness.
The average thickness recorded for each the location is not to be less than that
required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
4.7.6 Sealer
Apply sealer to sprayed-on fireproofed surfaces to prevent flaking, dusting,
delaminating or erosion of the sprayed-on material in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations.
Sealer material is to be as furnished by the manufacturer and is to be tested as part
of the required fire rating assembly.
4.7.8 Application
4.7.8.1 General
Prior to starting work, cover all adjoining finished surfaces with a layer of heavy
polyethylene film in a manner that precludes the subsequent dispersal of sprayed-on
particles.
The covering is to remain in place until work of sprayed-on fireproofing is completed.
4.7.8.2 Protection to Personnel
During spraying operations, provide necessary protection to persons in the vicinity
against harm and/or injury and to protect against health hazards from exposure of the
sprayed-on fireproofing. Comply with requirements from the authorities where
applicable and take at least the following precautions:
a. Before the start of spraying operations, clean and clear the floor of the area of all
objects, material and equipment other than that employed in the application of the
fireproofing.
b. Enclose the area of the floor to be fireproofed with plastic or plastic-coated
tarpaulins in a manner, which is to preclude the escape of material from the
enclosure.
c. Sweep up wet material, which has fallen to the floor and place in a suitable
container marked for legal disposal off the Site.
d. After drying, thoroughly vacuum the floors and enclosure before its removal.
Dispose off the bags in a safe manner, which disallows escape of the material.
4.7.9 Patching
Do all patching, cutting, and repairing of damaged or unsatisfactory sprayed-on
fireproofing or improper application of sprayed-on fireproofing as directed by the SO.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
5.1 Submission
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
Support the proposed thickness by accepted test reports, which verify that it will
provide the specified fire resistance.
Submit shop drawings on the thickness schedule with the endorsement of an
approved specialist.
5.1.3.2 FSSB’s approval
Submit FSSB’s approval on the fire protection materials to be used to the SO.
5.1.3.3 Accredited Laboratory Report
Submit test data report from an accredited laboratory to confirm that:
a. The fire protection system meets fire rating and performance in accordance with
ASTM E119, ANSI/UL 263, BS 476-8 or BS 476-21.
b. The fire protection materials contain no asbestos or free crystalline silica.
c. There is no flaking, dusting, delaminating or erosion to the fire protection
materials after sealer is applied.
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit warranty from the manufacturers of the works upon completion.
Prepare the reference areas where the corrosive stresses are representative for the
structure on each important constituent element of the structure as follows:
a. Surface preparation
b. Application of each of the specified coatings including thickness of each coat
Obtain acceptance for each step of preparation and application prior to
commencement of the actual operation.
Record details the accepted reference areas accurately.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
5.2.3 Samples
Submit samples and manufacturer's recommendation for each type of product to the
SO for acceptance within directed time frame.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 9
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 9
2.3 Noise Nuisance 10
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Concrete 11
3.2 Brickworks 11
3.3 Reinforcements 11
3.4 Pipes 12
3.5 Ground Material 12
3.6 Sewer Manholes 13
3.7 Piles 13
3.8 Trench Supports 14
3.9 Paving 14
3.10 Accessories 14
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 General 16
4.2 Setting-out 16
4.3 Excavation 16
4.4 Embedment and Support 17
4.5 Pipework Installation 19
4.6 Sewer Joints and Connections 21
4.7 Manholes and Inspection Chambers 21
4.8 Backfill and Reinstatement 22
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of minor sewer works in
building projects as part of external works. It does not cover major sewer and
treatment plant works in infrastructure development, which are undertaken by the
Public Utilities Board. Refer to specification issued by the Sewerage department for
such works.
The section covers the civil engineering aspects of the construction of sewers outside
of buildings, such as setting out, earthworks, concreting, piling and ground monitoring
etc. For requirements of piping works, pumps, vents and system testing etc., as well
as sanitary works within the building, refer to Mechanical specifications.
This Document is supplementary to section C6-10 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
of the performance requirement as set out in clause 2.1 and submit the proposals to
the SO for acceptance.
1.4.1.2 Design for Temporary Works
Engage a PE (Civil) to design and supervise the temporary works (if necessary) and
precautionary measures including temporary slope, retaining structures, temporary
trench supports and control of ground water etc. for the stability of the works.
Submit the design to the SO for acceptance and to the Authority where applicable.
1.4.1.3 Assessment on Effects of Ground Movement
Carry out a Building Damage Assessment on the effects of ground movement to the
neighbouring properties due to the works, for the purpose of establishing suitable
values for ‘Alert’ and “Work Suspension’ levels for monitoring. Submit to SO with
endorsement from a PE.
1.4.1.4 Temporary Diversion of Services
Propose schemes and details for the temporary diversion of existing above ground or
underground services to facilitate the works.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
1.4.9 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
1.4.17 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
b. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Concrete
For general requirements of concrete refer to section C3-10, clause 3.0.
Unless otherwise specified in the PSD, use Ordinary Portland cement for all concrete
works.
When required as indicated in the drawings, Granolithic concrete is to consist of one
part cement, two parts of sand and three parts of 5mm single sized aggregate
complying with BS EN 1610, Table B15.
3.2 Brickworks
3.2.1 Brick
Common bricks is to be of standard size, even shape, hard, well burnt, and machine
made pressed bricks with true arrises to SO’s acceptance.
Engineering bricks are to be obtained from accepted manufacturers and are to be
hand selected so that they will in general conform to SS 103 with a minimum average
compressive strength not less than 31 N/mm2. They are to be sound, hard, square
made, well burnt throughout, regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean
arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shell or other extraneous matter and other
defects.
3.2.2 Sand
The sand for cement mortar etc. is to be fine sand complying with BS 1200.
3.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcements”, clause 3.0.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
The sleeves for dowel bars used in expansion joints are to be of an approved design
to cover 50 mm to 75 mm of the dowel, with a closed end and with a suitable stop to
hold the end of the bar at least 25 mm from the closed end of the sleeve. Sleeves
are to be designed such that they will not collapse during construction. The sleeves
are to fit the dowel bar tightly and the closed end is to be watertight.
Propose details of the sleeves for SO’s acceptance.
3.4 Pipes
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
graded and lie within the grading limits tabulated below. The particle size is to be
determined in accordance with BS 1377.
Gradation of Sub-base Materials
BS Sieve Size % by Weight Passing
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
10 mm 45 - 100
5 mm 25 - 85
600 m 8 - 45
75 m 0 - 10
3.5.2 Hardcore
Hardcore are to consist of broken stone, brick, or other approved hard material. They
are to be free from clay, dust and other deleterious matter and are not to contain
pieces exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge.
3.7 Piles
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
3.8.1 Timber
All timber used for timbering of excavation or shoring are to be of adequate section
and quality. Timber used in trenches to support the face of the excavations must be
at least Medium Hardwood as in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules for
Malaysian Timbers.
The timber used in shuttering must be of sound, well seasoned timber and free from
shakes, twists or other defects. Plywood lining for shuttering must be of an approved
thickness and type of timber, resin bonded and water repellent.
Timber used in carpentry and joinery must be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free
from defects. The timber is to have a straight uniform grain and be of an approved
species for each purpose.
3.8.1.1 Timber Preservative
All timber hardboard etc. to be permanently incorporated into the works are to be
pressure impregnated with an approved preservative. The preservative are to be of a
type resistant to all forms of rot, termite and insect attack.
3.8.2 Steel
Refer to section C5-10, clause 3.1 for general requirement of structural steel.
Refer to section C2-30-2, clause 3.0 for general requirement of steel sheet piles.
3.9 Paving
For paving on driveways and footways refer to section C7-20, clause 3.0.
For finishing on concrete slab refer to architectural specifications.
3.10 Accessories
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
Where otherwise indicated, the rungs are to be of alloy H30 in the form of HE 30 TF
to BS 1474 and the stringers are to be of alloy N5 in the form of NE 5m to BS 1474.
3.10.2 Step-Iron
Step-irons are to comply with BS 1247.
3.10.3 Handrailing
Provide standard safety railings for all open drains more than 1.0m deep. The safety
railings are to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage if the
drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department.
Where otherwise indicated, handrailings are to be made from welded hot dipped
galvanised mild steel tube of 30mm internal diameter, complying with SS 17. Fittings
for handrail are to comply with BS 1740.
3.10.4 Paint
Obtain all paints including primers and undercoats as ready mixed for use from
accepted manufacturers. All paintings are to comply with the Code of Practice on
Surface Water Drainage if the drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage
Department.
Tints and shades (including undercoats) are to SO’s selection and acceptance.
Unless otherwise indicated, priming paints for structural steel and cast iron are to
comply with SS 494. Priming paints for zinc or aluminium surfaces are to be
approved zinc chromate priming paint. Oil-based undercoat and finishing paints are
to be similar to SS7 and SS34 but the pigments are to exclude white lead.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
In planning and executing the works, be guided by the requirements as set out in BS
EN 1610. Comply also with the relevant requirements of PUB’s Code of Practice on
Sewerage and Sanitary works.
4.2 Setting-out
Before any work commences, set out the pipe conduit trace. Mark centre of manholes
by a peg whose location is tied to 3 pegs situated outside the working area for
verification after excavation.
Mark the centre line of the pipe conduit with sight rails painted black and white, use
boning rods to give the distance from the sight rails to the invert of the pipe conduit.
Boning rods are to be designed to show the pipeline invert level below the site rails.
Note that for the lengths of the pipelines which are curved in plan or in elevation the
curve is to be achieved by deflecting the pipes at joints.
Maintain the setting out of the line of the pipelines not less than 500 metre in advance
of pipe-laying.
When excavation is complete, drive wooden pegs into the formation at not more than
5 metre centres and adjust the level of each peg to the proposed pipe conduit invert
by the use of the sight rails and boning rods.
Check and verify the setting out before pipe laying and backfilling works.
4.3 Excavation
4.3.1 General
Comply with the workmanship requirements in section C2-20, clause 4.3. Take note
of other particular requirements as below.
Ensure the excavation works are carried out in accordance with Part XII Excavation
Work of the Factories Act, 1973 (Act 6 of 1973); and The Building Operations and
Works of Engineering Construction Regulations, 1977.
4.3.2 Trenching
Excavate trenches to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and beds as
specified in the drawings.
Form the excavation with vertical sides or such slopes as agreed with the SO.
Cut and trim the formations of the excavations to the exact lines, levels and depths
required; Manually excavate the final 150mm only immediately before pipe laying.
Where a concrete or granular bed or surround is required, excavate to the overall
dimensions of the bed or surround with vertical sides and no undercutting.
Where pipes are to be laid on rock formation take the excavation down to 100mm
below bedding level over the width of the trench and re-fill with granular material or
concrete as directed.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
Remove soft spots from the bottom of trenches. Re-fill and compact to formation level
with accepted material. Re-fill voids resulted from over-excavation below formation
level in the same manner.
4.3.2.1 Supports for Trenches
All excavations is to be supported and secured in accordance with accepted design to
ensure the proper execution of the works and to prevent any settlement of the
adjoining ground or structures. Plan the works with the object of minimizing the
amount of excavation open at any time.
Use systems of timbering including poling boards, runner or steel trench sheeting
according to the ground conditions. Ensure the support system will prevent the loss of
ground during excavation and that backfilling can be carried out as required, leaving
no voids.
Timber, sheeting, piling, struts, walings and bracings may only be left in the
excavations if so directed.
Keep all trenches sufficiently dry so as not to affect the quality of the permanent
works.
4.3.2.2 Trench Widths
Excavate the trench in minimum width necessary but giving due consideration for the
bedding, laying, aligning and jointing of the pipes and with allowance for timbering,
shuttering or other necessary temporary work.
Unless otherwise agreed, control trench width in accordance with clause 6.2.2 of BS
EN 1610 “Minimum Trench Width”.
4.3.2.3 Trench Levels
All trenches are to be in straight lines both in alignment and gradient between
manholes, rodding eyes, access chambers etc. Changes of direction are only to be
where shown in the drawings.
4.4.1 Piling
4.4.1.1 Bakau Piling
Where shown in the drawings or when the excavated formation is assessed to be
unable to support the works without undue settlement, drive Bakau piles as directed
to improve the support capacity.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
Drive test piles as necessary or as directed to establish the stability of the ground
below formation level, as well as to establish an indicative value for the set and
number of blows based on the weight of the Monkey in order to achieve the required
improvement to the ground stability.
Drive Bakau piles straight in positions. Where necessary join piles to form lengths
longer than those naturally available. Ensure such joints will firmly secure the two
sections and bring the pile ends into close contact for driving.
On completion of driving, saw off all the pile heads to the required level. Trim the
excavation from around the piles and clean the pile heads free of clay and other soils.
4.4.1.2 Other Pile Types
Where the loads, conditions or water table are unsuitable for the use of Bakau piling,
or where indicated in the drawings, use alternative method and types of piling
including Precast RC piles and Tanalised timber piles. Refer to section C4-20, clause
4.4 for driving requirements.
Submit full details of the type of piling, load testing, sets proposals etc. for SO’s
acceptance before the work commences.
4.4.2 Bedding
4.4.2.1 Concrete Bed, Haunching & Surround
When a concrete bed and surround is required, excavate the trench to the exact
dimensions required. Where soft conditions occur in the trench, lay 50mm thick
Grade 10 concrete blinding at a level below the specified thickness of concrete bed.
Extend the blinding to the full width of the trench. Where wet conditions are
encountered, provide sub-drains and granular material below the concrete mat or
surround as directed.
Place the concrete in the surround right against the side of the trench excavation.
When directed either omit timber from the base of the trench or pull up the timbering
as the concrete is placed.
Carry out the bedding and pipe laying in such manner that pipes are laid with the
whole of the barrel of the pipe bedded on concrete still sufficiently plastic to permit
adjustment of level and packing under the barrel of the pipe.
Clean the exposed set concrete forming the bed and place the remaining concrete
surround steadily and evenly on both sides of the pipe. Do not place concrete around
the pipes until the pipe joints have been inspected and approved. Ensure proper
compaction.
Form a complete vertical break in the bed and surround at the flexible joints where
detailed and at approximately every four pipes or 6 metre whichever is less. Form the
joint by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibreboard, timber or
other approved material. The break in the concrete is to be flush with the face of the
socket extending not less than 25mm along the barrel of the pipe adjoining. Where
the concrete bed is required to be reinforced all reinforcement are to stop on either
side of the joint.
4.4.2.2 Granular Bed & Surround
When a granular bed or surround is required excavate as per concrete surround.
Place the material carefully in shallow layers to the full width of the trench and
compact thoroughly by hand or approved mechanical tampers. Add water to the
granular material to obtain an optimum moisture content for compaction.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
Ensure the pipes are laid evenly on the barrel at the required level without hollows or
voids under the pipe. Where holes are left in the bedding for pipe jointing take
particular care to ensure proper filling of the holes after pipe testing.
4.5.1 General
4.5.1.1 Alignments and Levels
Before commencing pipe laying, check the position and levels of the sewer line. All
pipes are to be laid in straight lines both in direction and gradient between manholes,
rodding eyes, access chambers etc. Provide bends only where shown in the
drawings.
4.5.1.2 Tolerance
The allowable tolerance on invert levels is to be ±5mm, provided that the as-laid
gradient of the pipe does not vary by more than 10% from required and provided that
the relative level differences between pipes in an individual installation are
maintained.
Setting out on plan is to be within ±5mm.
4.5.1.3 Drains Through Structure & Manhole Walls
Provide two flexible joints where the pipeline is built into and supported by a structure
or a manhole/inspection chamber, position the joints at 150mm and 750mm from the
face of the structure.
4.5.1.4 Drains Below Structure
Where the top of a pipe of less than 150mm diameter is within 300mm below the
underside of a concrete slab or footing, the pipe is to be bedded and surrounded in
150mm of concrete.
4.5.1.5 Pipe Ends
All ends of pipe runs left open are to be temporarily fitted with propriety end caps as
supplied by the pipe manufacturer. Where these are not available, use expanding
stoppers.
4.5.1.6 Floatation
Take adequate precautions to prevent flotation of the pipeline.
4.5.1.7 Protection
*Protect all sewers laid in open trenches and backfill with approved materials.
Depending on the ground conditions and the type of the sewer material used, lay the
sewer in accordance to 4 main section types, viz. Type ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’ and ‘D’. The
details of these sections can be found in Sewerage Department (PUB)’s Standard
Drawings. Submit proposals for SO’s acceptance.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
4.7.1 General
Construct all manholes and inspection chambers including accessories to the
standard details issued by the sewerage department.
Provide benching finish in 25mm granolithic rendering in two courses.
Install manhole covers on frames securely bedded in 1:3 cement mortar on the
manhole walls. Tolerance for the manhole cover level is to be 5mm low.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
4.8.1 Backfill
4.8.1.1 Backfill Material
Backfill with approved material re-cycled from the excavation or imported as agreed
otherwise.
4.8.1.2 Placement
Ensure the initial layer of backfill is free from stones and other undesirable material.
Carefully place the initial layer under and around pipes and compact in thin layers
using hand tools, up to at least 300mm above the top of the pipe or special surround.
Deposit filling above the initial layer in layers not exceeding 300mm loose depth, and
compact to a dry density not less than that of the adjoining soil.
Withdraw trench supports ahead of the layer to be filled, take care to keep the sides
of the trenches stable and fill all the spaces left by the withdrawn supports.
Use mechanical tempers for compaction only when there is a minimum of 450mm of
material above the crown of the pipe, ensure the appliance is suitable for the
conditions and will not damage or displace the pipes.
Under carriageways and where directed, backfill trenches with 40mm all-in gravel
aggregate to Table B17 of BS EN 1610. Lower the first 300mm into the trench in
skips and thoroughly hand punned. Fill and power ram the remaining depth in 300mm
layers, water in when necessary to ensure maximum compaction for the full depth of
the filling.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
5.1 Submission
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
5.2 Testing
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
level by more than 0.40l/m², the manhole is regarded as satisfactory. Should the
drop in level be more than 25mm, locate and repair the leakage.
For manholes constructed below the ground water table, close all outlet pipes by
means of expanding stoppers. After a period of 30 minutes if water has entered the
manhole at a rate of 0.40l/m² or more, the manhole is regarded as unsatisfactory.
Locate and repair the leakage.
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 9
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 9
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 9
2.3 Noise Nuisance 10
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Concrete 11
3.2 Brickworks 11
3.3 Reinforcements 11
3.4 Formwork and Shuttering 12
3.5 Pipes 12
3.6 Water-Resistance Elements 13
3.7 Ground Material 13
3.8 Piles 14
3.9 Trench Supports 14
3.10 Geotextiles 14
3.11 Paving 15
3.12 Accessories 15
4. WORKMANSHIP 17
4.1 General 17
4.2 Setting-out 17
4.3 Excavation 17
4.4 Embedment and Support 17
4.5 Drain Construction 18
4.6 Silt Traps and Sumps 19
4.7 Backfill and Reinstatement 19
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of external drains in building
projects as part of external works in the vicinity of a building compound or within an
estate development. It does not cover major drainage projects in infrastructure
development, which are undertaken by the Public Utilities Board. Refer to
specification issued by the PUB Drainage Department for such works.
This section covers the construction of open channel or box drains and culverts.
This Document is supplementary to section C6-20 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 2 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 7 Paint-Finishing, gloss enamel
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
ASTM D4632 Standard test method for grab breaking load and elongation of
geotextiles
ASTM D5261 Standard test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
In the event that contamination is either positively identified or suspected, draw to the
attention of all personnel working on site together with the need to take any
precautionary measures in handling contaminated materials, groundwater and
obnoxious vapours from the ground.
1.4.9 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
1.4.14 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
b. The vibration generated by the works in MRT structures not to exceed a peak
particle velocity of 15mm/s.
c. Unless otherwise directed, refer to Section C2-50, Clause 4.2.2 for general
restrictions on ground movements and vibration limits for adjacent structures
where relevant.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Concrete
For general requirements of concrete refer to section C3-10, clause 3.0.
Unless otherwise specified in the PSD, use Ordinary Portland cement for all concrete
works.
3.2 Brickworks
3.2.1 Brick
Common bricks is to be of standard size, even shape, hard, well burnt, and machine
made pressed bricks with true arrises to SO’s acceptance.
Engineering bricks are to be obtained from accepted manufacturers and are to be
hand selected so that they will in general conform to SS 103 with a minimum average
compressive strength not less than 31 N/mm2. They are to be sound, hard, square
made, well burnt throughout, regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean
arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shell or other extraneous matter and other
defects.
3.2.2 Sand
The sand for cement mortar etc. is to be fine sand complying with BS 1200.
3.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
The sleeves for dowel bars used in expansion joints are to be of an approved design
to cover 50 mm to 75 mm of the dowel, with a closed end and with a suitable stop to
hold the end of the bar at least 25 mm from the closed end of the sleeve. Sleeves
are to be designed such that they will not collapse during construction. The sleeves
are to fit the dowel bar tightly and the closed end is to be watertight.
Propose details of the sleeves for SO’s acceptance.
3.5 Pipes
All materials used for sub-soil drains are to conform to the following requirements:
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
3.7.2 Hardcore
Hardcore are to consist of broken stone, brick, or other approved hard material. They
are to be free from clay, dust and other deleterious matter and are not to contain
pieces exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
3.8 Piles
3.9.1 Timber
All timber used for timbering of excavation or shoring are to be of adequate section
and quality. Timber used in trenches to support the face of the excavations must be
at least Medium Hardwood as in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules for
Malaysian Timbers.
The timber used in shuttering must be of sound, well seasoned timber and free from
shakes, twists or other defects. Plywood lining for shuttering must be of an approved
thickness and type of timber, resin bonded and water repellent.
Timber used in carpentry and joinery must be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free
from defects. The timber is to have a straight uniform grain and be of an approved
species for each purpose.
3.9.1.1 Timber Preservative
All timber hardboard etc. to be permanently incorporated into the works are to be
pressure impregnated with an approved preservative. The preservative are to be of a
type resistant to all forms of rot, termite and insect attack.
3.9.2 Steel
Refer to section C5-10, clause 3.1 for general requirement of structural steel.
Refer to section C2-30-2, clause 3.0 for general requirement of steel sheet piles.
3.10 Geotextiles
Unless otherwise agreed, geotextiles are to be non-woven and to be made of
Polypropylene, Polyethylene, Polyester or a combination of these materials.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
Geotextiles are not to be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and to be resistant
to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
Where the geotextiles serve a separation or reinforcement function, use class A
geotextiles. Where the geotextiles serve a filtration function, use class B geotextiles.
The requirements for class A and class B geotextiles are as tabulated below:
Physical Properties of Geotextiles
Class of Geotextile
Physical Property Specification
Class A Class B
3.11 Paving
For paving on driveways and footways refer to section C7-20, clause 3.0.
For finishing on concrete slab refer to architectural specifications.
3.12 Accessories
3.12.1 Gratings
Unless otherwise specified, Gratings for both pedestrian and vehicular traffic are to
be galvanised mild steel in compliance with the standard details as set out in PUB
Drainage Department’s Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
3.12.4 Step-Iron
Step-irons are to comply with BS 1247.
3.12.5 Handrailing
Provide standard safety railings for all open drains more than 1.0m deep. The safety
railings are to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage if the
drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department.
Where otherwise indicated, handrailings are to be made from welded hot dipped
galvanised mild steel tube of 30mm internal diameter, complying with SS 17. Fittings
for handrail are to comply with BS 1740.
3.12.6 Paint
Obtain all paints including primers and undercoats as ready mixed for use from
accepted manufacturers. All paintings are to comply with the Code of Practice on
Surface Water Drainage if the drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage
Department.
Tints and shades (including undercoats) are to SO’s selection and acceptance.
Where otherwise indicated, priming paints for structural steel and cast iron are to
comply with SS 494. Priming paints for zinc or aluminium surfaces are to be
approved zinc chromate priming paint. Oil-based undercoat and finishing paints are
to be similar to SS7 and SS34 but the pigments are to exclude white lead.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
In planning and executing the works, be guided by the requirements as set out in BS
EN 1610. Comply also with the relevant requirements of PUB Drainage Department’s
Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
4.2 Setting-out
Before any work commences, set out and mark the centreline of the drain line by
pegs.
Verify and confirm the levels and alignment of the drain line before excavation.
4.3 Excavation
4.3.1 General
Comply with the workmanship requirements in section C2-20, clause 4.3 for
excavation. Take note of other particular requirements as below.
Ensure the excavation is carried out in accordance with the Factories Act, and The
Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations.
4.3.2 Trenching
Refer to section C6-10, clause 4.3.2.
4.4.1 Piling
4.4.1.1 Bakau Piling
Where shown in the drawings or when the excavated formation is assessed to be
unable to support the works without undue settlement, drive bakau piles as directed
to improve the support capacity.
Drive test piles as necessary or as directed to establish the stability of the ground
below formation level, as well as to establish an indicative value for the set and
number of blows based on the weight of the hammering equipment in order to
achieve the required improvement to the ground stability.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
Drive bakau piles straight in positions. Where necessary join piles to form lengths
longer than those naturally available. Ensure such joints will firmly secure the two
sections and bring the pile ends into close contact for driving.
On completion of driving, saw off all the pile heads to the required level. Trim the
excavation from around the piles and clean the pile heads free of clay and other soils.
4.4.1.2 Other Pile Types
Where the loads, conditions or water table are unsuitable for the use of Bakau piling,
or where indicated in the drawings, use alternative method and types of piling
including Precast RC piles and Tanalised timber piles. Refer to section C4-20, clause
4.4 for driving requirements.
Submit full details of the type of piling, load testing, sets proposals etc. for SO’s
acceptance before the work commences.
4.5.3 Cascades
Where the natural slope of the ground falls steeply longitudinally or where indicated in
the drawings, provide cascade steps of minimum 75mm high, formed with Grade 30
concrete to the required levels and finish smooth on exposed surface.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
4.5.6 Weepholes
Provide weepholes with accepted uPVC pipes without any bend or sag.
Provide granular material and geotextile wrapping as required before backfilling of the
drain surrounding.
4.5.7 Gratings
Propose and comply with suitable method to secure the gratings on the drain slab.
4.7.1 Backfill
4.7.1.1 Backfill Material
Backfill with approved material re-cycled from the excavation or imported as agreed
otherwise. Refer to section C6-10, clause 4.8 for general requirements.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
5.1 Submission
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Technical References 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definition 7
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 8
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 8
2.3 Noise Nuisance 9
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Subgrade Soil 10
3.2 Sub-bases 10
3.3 Bases 11
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Services 14
4.2 Setting-out 14
4.3 Subgrade 15
4.4 Sub-bases and Bases 15
4.5 Paving 17
4.6 Surface Regularity and Rectification 17
4.7 Use Of Surfaces by Vehicular Traffic 19
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of roads and driveways in
building projects as part of external works or as estate roads for circulation within an
estate development to be handed over to LTA for maintenance. It does not cover
public road-works from major arterials (expressways) to local access roads, which are
undertaken by or for the LTA. Refer to the LTA’s Material and Workmanship
Specifications for such works.
The section covers general construction requirements such as setting out, tolerances,
sub-grade, sub-base and bases. For requirements of paving refer to section C7-20
and for ancillaries refer to section C7-30.
This Document is supplementary to section C7-10 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
Other Standards
BS 1377 Soils for civil engineering purposes
BS 5835: Part 1 Recommendations for testing of aggregates. Compatibility test for
graded aggregates
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
EN ISO 9864 Geosynthetics-Test method for the determination of mass per unit
area of geotextiles and geotexttiles related productstextiles -
Determination of mass per unit area
BS EN ISO Geotextiles - Wide-width tensile test
10319
ASTM D2950 Standard test method for density of bituminous concrete in place by
nuclear methods
ASTM D4533 Standard test method for trapezoidal tearing strength of geotextiles
ASTM D4595 Standard test method for tensile properties of geotextiles by the
wide-width strip method
ASTM D4632 Standard test method for grab breaking load and elongation of
geotextiles
ASTM D5261 Standard test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
values for ‘Alert’ and “Work Suspension’ levels for monitoring. Submit to SO with
endorsement from a PE.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Verify information on contamination identified or believed to be present on site.
In the event that contamination is either positively identified or suspected, draw to the
attention of all personnel working on site together with the need to take any
precautionary measures in handling contaminated materials, groundwater and
obnoxious vapours from the ground.
1.4.9 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
Incorporate the maintenance of the road works against long term residue settlement
where required as indicated in the PSD.
1.4.15 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
b. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
1.5 Definition
a. Subgrade The layer immediately below formation level on
which the sub-base is laid.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
3. MATERIALS
3.2 Sub-bases
Sub-base materials are to be natural sand, crushed rock or crushed concrete or other
accepted granular material that are well graded and lie within the grading limits
tabulated below. The particle size is to be determined in accordance with BS 1377.
Gradation of Sub-base Materials
BS Sieve Size % by Weight Passing
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
10 mm 45 - 100
5 mm 25 - 85
600 m 8 - 45
75 m 0 - 10
The material passing the 425m sieve, when tested in accordance with BS 1377, is
to have a plasticity index of less than 6. If 10% or less of the material is retained on
the 20mm sieve, the fraction that passes is to satisfy the soaked CBR value of 30%
when tested in accordance with BS 1377, using the dynamic compaction method with
a 4.5 kg rammer at the specific density and moisture content likely to be achieved in
the field.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
3.3 Bases
3.3.1.1 Aggregate
Aggregates are to consist of graded crushed, clean and hard angular aggregate
complying with the requirements of SS 31 and conforming to the gradation tabulated
below:
Gradation of Crushed Granite Aggregate
Aggregates BS Sieve Size % by Weight Passing
50 mm 100
37.5 mm 95-100
Coarse Aggregate 20 mm 60-80
10 mm 40-60
5 mm 25-45
Fine Aggregate 2.36 mm 15-35
425 m 6-18
3.3.1.2 Water
Water used for mixing is to be clean and substantially free from detrimental impurities
such as oil, salts, acids, alkali and vegetable substance.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
Provide fine aggregate screenings obtained from hard, strong granular graded
material of 19mm size and smaller, composed of crushed stone, gravel or sand that
can be used to infill the interstices among the coarse aggregate in the base after
laying.
3.3.4 Geotextiles
Unless otherwise agreed, geotextiles are to be non-woven and are to be made of
Polypropylene, Polyethylene, Polyester or a combination of these materials.
Geotextiles are not to be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and are to be
resistant to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
Where the geotextiles serve a separation or reinforcement function, class A
geotextiles are to be used. Where the geotextiles serve a filtration function, class B
geotextiles are to be used. The requirements for class A and class B geotextiles are
as tabulated below:
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
Class A Class B
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Services
Before work on pavement above formation level commences all ducts, drains, and
other works beneath the road are to be completed and backfilled.
4.2 Setting-out
4.2.1 Demarcation
Demarcate all setting-out works on site by masonry nails or wooden pegs, where
appropriate, at 30m intervals along the straight and 5 - 30m intervals along the curves
as tabulated below:
Chord Intervals for Setting-out Curves
Radius of Curve Chord Intervals
R < 600 m 5m
600 m < R < 900 m 10 m
900 m < R < 1800 m 15 m
1800 m < R 30 m
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.3 Subgrade
4.3.4 Compaction
Comply with the requirements as set out in Section C2-20 “General Earthworks
(Excavation and Filling)”, clause 4.7.
4.4.2 Mixing
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.4.4 Compacting
Compact the sub-base and base material in layers of not more than 200 mm thick as
soon as possible after deposition. The depth of each compacted layer is to be
compatible with the compaction plant used and in accordance with the requirements
tabulated below:
Compaction Requirements for Granular and Cement-Bound Granular Materials
Type of Category Number of Passes
Compactio < 100mm < 150mm < 225mm
n Plant per layer per layer per layer
Smooth- Force per 100mm width
Wheeled 2.6 kN - 5.2 kN 16 Unsuitable Unsuitable
roller more than 5.2 kN 8 16 Unsuitable
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.5 Paving
Refer to section C7-20, clause 4.0.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
pavements, the negative tolerance is not permitted in conjunction with the positive
permitted tolerance for the surface of the base course, if the thickness of the wearing
course is reduced by more than 10 mm.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
5.1 Submission
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
5.2 Tests
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
The in-situ field density of the compacted layer is to be not less than 95% as a
percentage of the maximum dry density. Determine both densities in accordance with
BS 1377, with the former using the sand replacement method (large pouring
cylinder), and the latter using the 4.5kg rammer method (soils with some course
gravel-size particle). Carry out at least 3 in-situ field test for every 500 m2 or less of
surface area of each compacted layer. Remove and replace with suitable material any
layer that fails to meet the density requirement represented by each in-situ field test.
Subject to the SO’s acceptance, the in-situ field density may alternatively be
determined with nuclear device in accordance with ASTM D2950. The maximum
density is to be the average density of 3 laboratory compacted specimens. Take the
in-situ percentage level of compaction with respect to this maximum density. In the
event that the nuclear device shows an in-situ percentage level of compaction above
100%, modify the maximum density for that particular test to the maximum in-situ
density measured.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 7
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 7
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 8
3.2 Rigid In-situ Concrete Pavements 11
3.3 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Blocks 13
3.4 Precast Concrete Kerbs 13
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavings 14
4.3 Rigid Insitu Concrete Pavement 17
4.4 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Block Pavings 21
4.5 Precast Concrete Kerbs 22
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of paved finishes for estate
roads, driveways and footways within a building development. It covers three main
types of pavings, namely:
a. Asphaltic Concrete Pavings
b. Rigid insitu concrete slab
c. Precast concrete Flags and Clay or Concrete interlocking block pavings
For tiled finishes and grass blocks refer to architectural specifications.
The paving is to be laid on base and/or sub-base constructed in compliance with
section C7-10 and the design drawings. For requirements of sub-grade, sub-base or
base refer to section C7-10 “Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and
Footways”,
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C7-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C7-20 with the same clause title.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 2 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 31 Aggregates from natural source for concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and
fillers
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
SS 78 Testing concrete
Part A1: Method of sampling fresh concrete on site
Part A2: Method for determination of slump
Part A8: Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete
Part A11: Method of normal curing of test specimens (27°C method)
Part A16: Method for determination of compressive strength of
concrete cubes
Part A20: Method for determination of the compressive strength of
concrete cores
SS 85 Bitumen emulsion for road construction
SS 86 Method of sampling and testing bitumen
Other Standards
BS 594 Part 1: Hot rolled Asphalt for roads and other paved areas.
Specification for constituent materials and Asphalt mixtures
BS 1521 Waterproof building papers
BS 2499 Part 1: Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavement.
Specification for joint sealants
BS 5212 Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavement
BS 6717 Precast, unreinforced concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test
methods
BS 7263 Part 1: Precast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and
quadrants. Precast, unreinforced concrete paving flags and
complementary fittings. Requirements and test method
BS 7533 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone or concrete pavers
Part 1: Guide for the structural design of heavy duty pavements
constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete paving blocks
Part 2: Guide for the structural design of lightly trafficked pavements
constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete paving blocks
Part 3: Code of practice for laying precast concrete paving blocks
and clay pavers for flexible pavements
Part 4: Code of practice for the construction of pavements of precast
concrete flags or natural stone slabs
ASTM C29 Standard test method for bulk density (unit weight) and voids in
aggregate
ASTM C88 Standard test method for soundness of aggregates by use of sodium
sulfate or magnesium sulfate
ASTM C131 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of small size
coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles
machine
ASTM C171 Standard specification for sheet materials for curing concrete
ASTM C309 Standard specification for liquid membrane-forming compounds for
curing concrete
ASTM C535 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of large size
coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles
machine
ASTM D242 Standard specification for mineral filler for bituminous paving
mixtures
ASTM D5581 Standard test method for resistance to plastic flow of bituminous
mixtures using Marshall apparatus
ASTM D1752 Standard specification for preformed sponge rubber and cork
expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
3. MATERIALS
3.1.1 General
Asphaltic concrete paving is to consist of a mixture of graded mineral aggregate and
Asphaltic binder, laid with a bitumen binding course and compacted on a prepared
base as the wearing course in conformity with the design requirements of alignment,
level and dimensions.
3.1.2 Aggregates
Aggregates are to consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel or crushed slag with or
without sand or other inert finely divided mineral aggregate. The components of the
aggregates is to be classified as follows:
Aggregate Classification
Aggregates Requirement
Coarse Aggregate Retained on BS 3.2mm sieve
Fine Aggregate Passed BS 3.2mm sieve and retained
on 75 m sieve
Mineral Filler Passed BS 75 m sieve
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
c. Meet the soundness and wear requirements as specified for coarse aggregate.
The fine aggregate with any blended filler is to have a plasticity index not greater than
6, and a liquid limit of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4318, and in addition have a silt content of not greater than 0.3% of the total weight
when tested in accordance with SS73.
Natural sand, when added to produce the desired gradation or to increase the
workability or compactibility of the mixture is to be limited to 15% by weight to obtain
optimum pavement properties.
3.1.2.3 Filler
Filler, in addition to those naturally present in the aggregate, is to meet the
requirements of ASTM D242.
Tests on residue SS 86
from distillation test
Penetration at 0.1 mm 60 200 SS 86
250C 100g, 5s
Ductility at 25 0C, 5 cm 40 - SS 86
cm/min
Solubility in % weight 97 - SS 86
Trichloroethylene
3.1.4 Bitumen
Bitumen is to be / have:
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
a. Petroleum bitumen of 60/70 penetration grade. No mineral matter other than that
naturally contained in such bitumen is to be present.
b. Homogeneous, free from water and not foam when heated to 175°C.
c. Conform to the requirements tabulated below:
Requirements for Bitumen
Property Unit 60/70 Method of
Penetration Testing
Grade
Min Max
Penetrating at 250C 0.1 mm 60 70 SS 86
100g, 5s
0
Flash Point, Cleveland C 232 - SS 86
Open Cup
Ductility at 250C, 5 cm cm 100 - SS 86
per min
Solubility in % weight 99 - SS 86
trichloroethylene
Thin-film oven test, 3.2 SS 86
mm, 1630C, 5 hrs
c) Ductility of residue at cm 50 - SS 86
250C, 5 cm per min
0
d) Softening Point, Ring C 47 56 SS 86
and Ball
e) Specific Gravity at 25 - 1.0 1.11 SS 86
0
C
3.1.5 Admixture
Agree with the SO any admixture to be added to the Asphaltic Concrete mix.
3.1.6 Water
Water used in diluting the bitumen emulsion or wetting the wheels of rollers is to be
clean, fresh and free from organic or inorganic matter in solution or suspension in
such amounts that may impair the strength and durability of the Asphaltic Concrete.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
3.2.1 Concrete
Comply with the requirements in Section C3-10, clause 3.0.
For roads and driveways, coarse aggregates are to additionally comply with ASTM
C131 Or ASTM C535 as appropriate for abrasion resistance.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
3.2.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20, clause 3.0.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.2 Setting-out
Refer to Section C7-10 Clause 4.2 (Setting-out).
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
Where a manhole cover is lower than the premix surface, provide a wooden frame to
demarcate its position so that it can be recognised and raised subsequently. Prior to
commencement of work, inspect the site to distinguish and indicate by paint on the
road kerb or footpath, the types of manholes and distance of it from the indicated
point.
Prior to the laying of the Asphaltic concrete, apply a suitable prime coat/tack coat of
cationic bitumen of rapid setting type to all surfaces receiving the Asphalt paving
including all manholes, kerbs, channels and other projections against which Asphalt
paving is to be laid. Spray the prime coat/tack coat of bitumen emulsion at rates of
1.14 litre/m² and 0.54 litre/m² for aggregate base course surface and premix surface
respectively.
Allow a period of not less than 10 minutes ‘to break’ before Asphalt concrete can be
laid.
4.2.4 Transporting
Plan the transport to ensure continuity of supply of Asphalt concrete. Use canvas
cover to protect the mix from the weather regardless of the ambient temperature or
haul distance. Transport the mix from the mixing plant without delay to prevent
segregation. Ensure the temperature of any batch does not fall below the specified
laying temperature at discharge into the spreader. Minimise the use of dust, coated
dust, oil or water to facilitate discharge. If contamination of the mixture occurred,
clean the vehicle thoroughly before being used again.
4.2.5 Laying
4.2.5.1 Asphaltic Concrete Finisher
The bituminous paver is to be capable of spreading and finishing courses of the plant
mix materials in lane widths, to the specified thickness at various rates of travel
consistent with the rate of delivery and the type of Asphalt mixture to be laid. The
receiving hopper is to have sufficient capacity for a uniform spreading operation,
which produce a surface finish without tearing, shoving or grazing the surface.
For lengths of road in excess of 500m, the paver is to be equipped and operated with
an automatic level control system e.g. wire sensor, sensor shoe etc. Submit details
for SO’s acceptance.
4.2.5.2 Laying Temperature
The temperature of the hot-mix Asphalt in the spreader hopper is to be 130°C to
140ºC at the time of spreading. If the hot-mix on arrival at the site is above 140º,
allow cooling down to the required temperature before being discharged into the
spreader hopper. Reject the hot-mix if temperature falls below 130°C on arrival.
Supply two small accurate thermometers of 100 mm length for checking the
temperature of the newly laid premix and two large accurate thermometers for
checking the temperature of the premix on the tippers. The large thermometers are to
consist of a weatherproof dial head of diameter not smaller than 62 mm and a
stainless steel stem of length 600 mm.
4.2.5.3 Spreading and Finishing
Tip the plant mixture onto the hopper of the paver and spread, level, tamper and
finish to the correct profile, camber or cross-fall without causing segregation,
dragging, burning or other surface defects or irregularities. Feed the mixture to the
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
paver at such a rate as to permit continuous laying. Rectify all the irregularities and
surface defects while the surface is still hot and before the final rolling is completed.
Do not place the Asphaltic concrete mix when weather conditions prevent proper
handling, compaction and finishing.
On areas where the use of mechanical spreading equipment is impracticable, spread,
rake, level and compact the mixture by hand tools.
4.2.6 Compacting
Use self-propelled rollers capable of reversing without backlash. The following types
are acceptable:
a. Static three-steel-wheeled, smooth-roll roller having a weight between 8 to 12
tonnes and a weight per mm width of rear wheel between 5.4 kg and 7.2 kg.
b. Two-steel-wheeled, smooth-roll tandem roller having a weight of between 8 and
12 tonnes and a weight per mm width of rear wheel between 3.5 kg and 7.2 kg.
c. Self-propelled vibratory tandem roller with a net weight of 10 tonnes and static
linear load in both drums of 30 N/mm. The roller is to be capable of transmitting
vibrations at a rate between 2000 to 3000 vibrations per minute and giving
amplitude of 0.4 to 0.8 mm.
d. Self-propelled pneumatic rubber wheel tyre roller having a weight between 10
and 30 tonnes and with tyre pressure varying between 545 and 827 kN/m².
Commence compaction of the Asphaltic concrete as soon as it will bear the weight of
a roller without undue movement, cracking or shoving. Carry out initial rolling with a
three-wheeled roller followed by intermediate rolling with a pneumatic-tyre roller. Final
rolling is to be done with a tandem roller.
Carry out rolling in the direction of laying. Proceed with the driving wheels leading
and travel slowly enough to avoid displacement of the hot mixture. Commence rolling
at the edge abutting any previously laid surfacing. Lap successive passes so that on
completion all roller marks are obliterated. Check the levels and surface accuracy of
the Asphalt surfacing continuously and correct any displacement by the use of rakes.
Apply water or other approved parting fluid to prevent adhesion in minimum quantities
if necessary.
Start the rolling of a free lane at one of the outer edges, with the drum projecting
about 50 - 100 mm outside the pavement. Subsequently continue rolling in parallel
lanes with overlap of about 100-200mm. If the surface has a transverse inclination,
commence rolling at the lowest side.
On thick Asphaltic concrete layers carry out the initial passes about 300 - 400 mm
inside the edges, allow the mix to cool and provide for a stable bearing area for the
roller before the outer edges are compacted.
Continue rolling for no less than 45 minutes after the last mix has been laid until all
roller marks are eliminated, no further compression is possible and the surface is of
uniform texture and true to grade and level.
4.2.7 Joints
Form joints by cutting back on the previous day’s run to expose the full depth of the
course; Provide for a proper bond with the adjacent course by applying a light coat of
bitumen emulsion at the exposed edge. Rake the fresh mixture against the joint and
thoroughly tamp and roll. Place the course at a transverse joint as continuous as
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
possible. (See Fig. 4.2.7-1). Place longitudinal joint staggered with that in the base,
binder, or existing surface course by at least 0.5 m (See Fig. 4.2.7-2).
In two-layer construction, offset the longitudinal joint between layers by about 150
mm. Place the joint in the top layer at dividing lane lines if the roadway is two-lanes or
more in width.
Saw-cut transverse joints to form a wedge-shaped groove of 25 mm depth and 75
mm width to enable the newly laid Asphaltic concrete to be flush with the existing
surface.
FIG. 4.2.7-1: CONSTRUCTION OF A TRANSVERSE JOINT
MINIMUM 0.5 m
2nd LAYER OF
ASPHALTIC
CONCRETE
1st LAYER OF
ASPHALTIC
ONCRETE
4.3.1 Forms
Use forms to achieve the prescribed edge thickness without horizontal joint. For
curves of 30 m radius or less, use flexible or curved forms to SO’s acceptance.
Secure forms so as to withstand the impact and vibration of the consolidating and
finishing equipment. The top face of the form is not to vary from a true plane more
than 3 mm in 3 m. Use repaired forms or built-up forms only with the agreement of
the SO.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
set has taken place at the bottom layer before being covered with the top layer,
remove and replace with freshly mixed concrete.
When the concrete is placed in one layer, position the reinforcement in advance of
concrete placement or place in plastic concrete by mechanical or vibratory means
after spreading.
Keep reinforcing steel free of mud, oil, or other organic matter that may adversely
affect or reduce bond.
4.3.5 Joints
4.3.5.1 General
Construct all joints true to line with their faces perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement. Joints are not to vary more than 13 mm from a true line or from their
designated position. Finish the vertical surface of the pavement adjacent to all
expansion joints to a true plane and edge to a radius of 6 mm or as shown in the
drawings. Test the surface across the joints with a 3 m straight edge as the joints are
finished and correct any irregularities in excess of 6 mm before the concrete has
hardened. When required, accurately form keyways with a template of metal or wood.
4.3.5.2 Tie Bars and Dowels
Place tie bars at intervals of 750 mm, unless otherwise specified. Hold in position by
agreed means. Tie bars may be bent at right angles against the form at longitudinal
construction joints, unless threaded bolt or other assembled tie bars are specified.
Ensure these bars are not painted, greased, or enclosed in sleeves.
Place dowel bars or other load-transfer units and hold rigidly in the middle of the slab
depth by an approved assembly device to be left permanently in place.
The maximum permissible tolerance on dowel bar alignment in each plane, horizontal
and vertical, is not to exceed 2% or 6 mm per 300 mm of a dowel bar.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.3.6 Finishing
For side-form construction, use internal type vibrators with immersed tube initially and
finish with surface pan type for the full width of the concrete slab. Vibrators may be
attached to the spreader or the finishing machine or they may be mounted on a
separate carriage. Do not allow vibrators to come in contact with the joint, load-
transfer devices, subgrade, or side forms. Ensure the frequency of the internal type
vibrators are at least 7000 vibrations per minute and the surface vibrators are at least
3500 vibrations per minute. Check by using a tachometer. Use hand vibrators to
consolidate the concrete along forms and other isolated areas.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.3.9 Curing
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed, cure the entire
surface of the newly placed concrete using one of the materials below. Do not expose
the concrete for more than half an hour during the curing period.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
4.4.1 General
Lay precast concrete flags in accordance with BS 7533: Part 4.
Lay clay and concrete block paving in accordance with BS 7533: Part 3.
Lay paving on a bedding of sand compacted to thickness of 50mm in accordance with
BS 7533: Part 2. On an existing paved area, lay bedding to 39-44mm thickness. Do
not leave bedding exposed to adverse weather and/or overnight.
Lay paving up slopes and/or away from edge restraints to avoid creep and damage to
the bedding layer.
4.4.2 Laying
Lay paving blocks hand tight to the pattern shown in the drawings. Bed blocks with a
vibrating plate compactor using 2-3 passes as necessary, until no more compaction is
evident.
Brush-fill joints with masonry sand joint filler and vibrate surface to assist joint filling. If
necessary, top-up joints during early life by brushing with loose masonry sand.
For setts, fill joints with limestone dust and ram down 3-4mm. Alternatively, use weak
dry sand/ cement mix, 1:9 mix. Keep setts dry during joint filling to prevent mortar
staining. Sweep clean then moisten with a watering can fitted with a medium rose.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
5.1 Submissions
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
5.2.2.2 Admixtures
Furnish all relevant technical information on any admixture intended for use and
provide certification from approved body that the admixtures will comply with the
specified requirements.
In addition, conduct further tests at the direction of the SO to justify consistency in
complying with specified requirements.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standard and Technical Reference 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 7
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 7
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Driveway Markings 8
3.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail 9
3.3 Retro-Reflective Sheeting for Traffic Signs 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Road Markings 14
4.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail 14
4.3 Installation of Retro-Reflective Sheeting 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for common types of road ancillaries used for
estate roads and driveways of buildings, including:
a. Driveway Markings
b. Vehicular Impact Guard-rails
c. Retro-reflective Sheeting for Traffic Signs
For other types of street furniture such as traffic signals and Street-lights etc. refer to
specifications from the LTA and other relevant authorities.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C7-30 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C7-30 with the same clause title.
1.3.1 Standard
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore standards
SS 221 Road marking paint
SS 498 Hot-applied thermoplastic road marking materials.
Other standards
BS 381C Specification for colours for identification coding and special purposes
BS 7371 Coatings on metal fasteners
BS EN 1423 Road marking materials – drop on materials – glass beads, antiskid
aggregates and mixtures of the two
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
BS 7371: Part 8 Coatings on metal fasteners. Specification for sherardized coatings
ASTM A153 Standard specification for zinc coating (hot-dip) on iron and steel
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
hardware
ASTM A307 Standard specification for carbon steel bolts and studs, 60.000 psi tensile
strength
ASTM A653 / Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
A653M Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A563 Standard specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts
ASTM D4956 Standard specification for retroreflective sheeting for traffic control
AASHTO M232 Zinc coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
1.4.7 Warranty
1.4.7.1 Warranty For The Reflective Sheeting and Vinyl Films
Provide a warranty in accordance with contract conditions to cover the quality and
performance of the reflective sheeting and vinyl films in respect of colour fungus
resistance and adhesion, for the period stipulated below. Submit the Warranty from
the sheeting manufacturer covering the same.
Period of warranty for different sheeting
Types of Period of Warranty
Sheeting
Engineering Grade Three (3) years
High Intensity Grade Seven (7) years
Diamond Grade Seven (7) years
For reflectivity sheeting, the warranty is to also cover its retro-reflective elements for
the warranty period.
1.4.7.2 Other road ancillary items
Provide a warranty in accordance with contract conditions for road markings and
guard rails for a minimum period as listed in the PSD against all defects from the date
of completion.
Warrant the following items for a minimum period as indicated against all defects from
the date of completion:
Item Period of warranty
Road Marking Paint 3 Months
Vehicle Guard Rails 1 Year
1.4.8 Safety
Provide safety precautions in compliance with all current legislations and regulations.
Provide and maintain sufficient proper and efficient life-saving appliances. These are
to be conspicuous and available at all times.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
Ensure that all personnel understand the use of the appliances and carry out drills to
ensure that all necessary procedures are understood and followed.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
3. MATERIALS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
3.1.1.5 Reflectorisation
Where reflectorisation is required, provide solid glass beads which comply with BS
EN 1423. Apply the beads to the wet surface of the marking at the rate of 400-500
g/m².
3.1.1.6 Flow cups and Wet Film Gauges
Provide approved flow cups (ISO Flow Cup or Equivalent) for measuring the
consistency or viscosity of the paint used. Provide wet film gauges with a measuring
range of 0 to 600 microns having an accuracy of 25 microns for the determination of
the wet film thickness of paint laid. Supply six aluminium plates 200 x 200 mm of 15
SWG (1.83 mm) for the purpose of testing the thickness of the road line paint.
3.2.1 General
For material requirement refer to section C5-10 “Structural Steelwork”, clause 3.1.
3.2.2 Fasteners
Unless otherwise specified or agreed, bolts and nuts are to be of carbon steel
complying with the requirements of ASTM A307 Grade A and ASTM A563 Grade A
respectively.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
All bolts are to have a tensile strength of at least 414 N/mm² tested in accordance
with ASTM A307.
3.2.7 Galvanising
In general comply with the requirements of BS ISO 1461.
Hot-dip galvanise the guardrail elements after fabrication using zinc coating with total
weight on both sides of beam not less than 1220 g/m². When subject to Single Spot
Test, test specimen is not to have a coating weight less than 1100 g/m².
Hot-dip galvanise all bolts, nuts and washers for use with guardrail as specified in
ASTM A153 or AASHTO M232 or sheradize as specified in BS 7371: Part 8.
3.2.8 Painting
All primer, undercoat and finishing coats are to be materials and paints
recommended/ manufactured by the same manufacturer, unless otherwise accepted
by the SO.
3.3.1 General
The sheeting is to be:
a. Suitable for the manufacturing of traffic signs, directional signs and miscellaneous
signs for road guidance.
b. Highly reflective when normal to vehicle headlight depending on the angle of
incidence. The reflectivity is to be sharp and glareless.
c. Free from dirt, solid lumps, scales, ragged edges and non-uniformity of colour,
etc.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
The surface of the sheeting is to be smooth and flexible. No cracking is to occur when
bent.
The reflective layer of the sheeting is not to delaminate, crack, peel or chip during the
manufacturing process.
3.3.2 Colour
The colour of the sheeting is to be even and free from all spots or decolorization. The
colour is not to easily fade under local weather conditions.
Colours of the sheeting are to be compatible to the colours of the sample sheeting to
SO’s acceptance.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
3.3.5 Markings
All completed signs are to have a coloured sticker at its rear/underside/post indicating
the month and year of manufacture, which constitutes the start of the warranty.
Use stickers of various colours to indicate the different year of manufacture.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2.1 Fabrication
Fabricate in accordance with methods as proposed by the manufacturer and
accepted by the SO.
Do not punch, drill, cut or weld in the field unless agreed by the SO for special
reasons and for sampling.
The beam is to be of uniform section, straight or curved as required and so designed
that when installed it will not hold water. The edges are to be rolled or rounded to
eliminate sharp edges. Reject warped, kinked or bent sections.
Beams erected on a radius of less than 45m are to be shop-curved.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
4.2.2 Installation
Erect the guardrail after placing the finished wearing course unless otherwise
accepted by the SO.
Erect to the alignment as shown in the Drawings.
When erecting adjacent to live traffic, assemble in the direction of traffic flow in order
to avoid vehicles striking rail ends.
4.2.4 Painting
When painting is required, clean the guardrail elements from all grit and dirt by
thorough rinsing with clear water. Wipe off greasy deposits with paint thinners. Dry
the surface thoroughly prior to painting.
Apply one coat of approved etching primer (mordant solution) to the galvanised
surface followed by one coat of zinc chromate primer, one undercoat and two
finishing coats.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
5.1 Submissions
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit all warranties for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C7-30 Road Ancillaries
5.2.3.1 Sampling
Select one piece of guardrail, backing plate and terminal section from each lot of 200
pieces for testing to determine that specification requirements have been complied
with. If the lot is less than 200 pieces, select one piece each of guardrail, backing
plate and terminate section for testing. If the selected piece fails to meet the
requirements, then test two additional pieces. If either one of these pieces fail to
conform again, then reject the lot represented by these samples and propose
remedial measures to the satisfaction of the SO.
17
Version 1.0
Architectural General Specifications
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Project Particulars 3
1.2 General Description of the Works 3
1.3 Codes, Regulations, Standards and Technical Reference 3
1.4 Work Preambles 4
1.5 Abbreviations and Definitions 6
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 General Requirement 8
2.2 Environment 8
3. MATERIALS 9
3.1 Materials Generally 9
3.2 Ordering of Materials 9
3.3 Certificates for Materials 9
3.4 Storage of Materials 9
3.5 Rejected Materials 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Workmanship Generally 10
4.2 Co-Ordination of Drawings 10
4.3 Setting Out and Levels 10
4.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling 10
4.5 Protection of Products and Components 11
4.6 Suitability of Conditions at the Start of Works 11
4.7 Existing Services 11
4.8 Execution of the Works 12
4.9 Holes, Chases, Inserts and Fixings 13
4.10 Protection of Works 13
4.11 Defective Work 13
4.12 Cleaning Up 13
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
1. GENERAL
This section sets out the general requirements for carrying out any works for the
project and shall be read in conjunction with all relevant work sections and other
contract documents.
1.3.1 Regulations
The whole of the Works and materials are to be in accordance with the Building
Control Regulations, other regulations as set out by the authorities having jurisdiction
over the works, and the relevant bylaws unless otherwise stated.
Ensure that the requirements in the Specification are strictly adhered to when
carrying out the Works, unless otherwise directed.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
1.4.1 Ambiguity
Before commencing any works, obtain clarification or instructions in relation to any
discrepancy or ambiguity, which is discovered within and between the Specification
Work sections, and / or other contract documents issued by the various parties.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
The maintenance manual and logbook are to describe the procedures for the
satisfactory long-term care and regular maintenance of the materials and
components identified in the work sections, to be carried out by the building owners.
Include the following information, where appropriate:
a. An outline description of the installation and detailed description of specific items
with product names, types, serial numbers, etc.
b. The name, address and telephone number of each supplier, fabricator,
finisher, installer etc. involved in the Works.
c. Recommendation on maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance
procedures.
d. Copies of manufacturers’ warranties or guarantees, service manuals, brochures,
recommendations, etc.
e. Copies of test and approval certificates.
f. One original copy of documents showing “As Built” information and the like,
relevant to the installation. Submit the “As-Built” information in soft copies where
directed by the SO. The Contractor shall compile one single set of the information
from various sub-contractors for submission.
g. Compilation of a list of parts to be replaced periodically and the names and
contacts of the suppliers.
h. Realignment and adjustment instructions where relevant.
i. Procedures for dismantling and reassembling.
j. Details of finishes, including colour and required maintenance.
k. Logbook pages set up for recording the times of performance of the above
procedures, sufficient in number to receive the entries for a minimum of ten years
or otherwise directed. Show examples of typical entries by recording any
maintenance procedures (such as cleaning) performed during the contract and or
defects liability periods.
The forms of the maintenance manual and logbook are to be in A4 size, printed or
typed on durable printing paper, each page consecutively numbered, neatly bound in
durable vinyl or similar hard cover, and permanently labelled with the project name
and date of issue. The Contractor shall compile one single set of the information
from various sub-contractors for submission.
b. Ensure a number of checks and verification are put in place in the work process
to enable the delivery of the brief.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
c. Ensure the works are carried out based on proper operating instructions.
d. Ensure feedback and poor / defective works is picked up and attended to,
and corrective / preventive action is in place.
e. Ensure prior approvals are obtained from SO for any deviations from
the specifications before works commence.
f. Ensure documents of all tests and quality checks as specified are properly
done and kept as records.
1.5.1 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are applicable when referred to in the specifications:
AS Australian Standard
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
BCA Building and Construction Authority
BMS Building Management System
BMU Building Maintenance Unit (Also known as Gondola system,
Façade Maintenance Unit)
BS British Standard
CFC Chlorofluorocarbon
ETTV Equivalent thermal transfer value
HCFC Hydro-chloro-fluoro-carbon
OH&S Occupational Health and Safety
OTTV Overall thermal transfer value
PE Professional Engineer
PSD Project Specific Data
PVC Polyvinylchloride
SAA Standards Association of Australia
SS and SS CP Singapore Standard and Code of Practice
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
M&E Mechanical and Electrical
RH Relative Humidity
SO Superintending Officer
UV Ultraviolet
More to be added
1.5.2 Definitions
Wherever the following terms are used they shall have the following meaning:
“The Works” The whole of the Works envisaged by the Contract including the
works of the Local Authority and Public Undertakings unless
specifically stated otherwise.
"Directed" Directed by the SO.
"Inspected" Inspected by the SO.
"Submitted" or Submitted to or submit to the SO for review and acceptance.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
“Submit”
"Accepted" or Accepted or acceptance by the SO.
"Acceptance"
"Approved" or Approved by or approval from the SO.
“Approval”
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.2 Environment
Ensure the carrying out of the works will not cause un-acceptable pollution, noise,
erosion and vibrations to the environment as stipulated by the NEA and other relevant
authorities.
3. MATERIALS
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
4. WORKMANSHIP
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
4.3.1 Accuracy
4.3.2 Levels
Site levels, either spot or contour, and all other levels shown in the drawings are
established with respect to the datum of 100.00 m at mean sea level. Check and
verify all existing and proposed levels as indicated in the drawings, highlight and
resolve any discrepancy prior to the commencement of the works.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
Version 1.0
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
4.8.1 Methods
Carry out the works in accordance with accepted methods and equipment.
Provide suitable packings at screwed and bolted fixings to take up tolerances and
prevent distortion.
Adjust the location and fixing of components and products so that joints which are
opened to view are even and regular.
Ensure that all moving parts operate properly and freely. Do not cut, grind or plane pre-
finished components and products to remedy binding or poor fit without approval.
All work classified as defective are to be cut out and removed from the works and
replaced or otherwise dealt with in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Propose and carry out suitable remedial measures to SO’s satisfaction.
The extent and nature of any measures required as a result of defective work are to
be determined by the SO.
4.12 Cleaning Up
Remove all protection, surplus materials, empty containers, rags, dirt and other
debris. Remove daubs and spatters from coatings and materials, and leave surfaces
clean.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
A1-20 Windows
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preamble 4
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 17
4.1 Fabrication 17
4.2 Installation 18
4.3 Protection and Cleaning 20
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for windows with Aluminium, Steel or Timber
frames. It does not cover windows with PVC frame or panes, which are to proprietary
manufacturer’s specification. Windows forming parts of a curtain wall or cladding
system are regarded as operable openings within the system, refer to work sections
A1-10 Curtain Walls and A1-40 Metal Cladding for requirements.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 212 Specification for Aluminium Alloy Windows
SS Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (Human impact
341.1989 considerations)
Other Standards
BS 6262 Code of practice for glazing for buildings
BS 6375 Performance of Windows
BS 6213 Guide to the selection of constructional sealants
BS 5889 Specification for one-part gun grade silicone-based sealants
BS 8118 Structural use of aluminium
BS 6339-2 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for wind loads
BS 5250 Code of practice for control of condensation in buildings
BS EN ISO Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles -
1461 specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures - zinc
14713 and aluminium coatings – guidelines
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the performance of the
following items:
a. Five-Year warranty for the general window systems and other accessories
components.
b. Ten-Year indemnity for aluminium and glazing works.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Prevent leakage of water into the interior of the building from the outer face of the
assembly, resulting from wind pressure, gravity, surface tension, or capillary
action with wind and precipitation likely to be experienced, up to 600 Pa static
pressure for any period of 5 minutes, and 600 Pa dynamic pressure for 3 second
periods at random intervals.
c. Prevent water entering into those parts of the windows that would be adversely
affected by the presence of water.
d. Where the system requires water to appear on the inside surfaces of the window,
such as in a track of a sliding door or window, any water must drain unassisted
within 10 minutes.
e. Maintain such weather-tightness under reasonably anticipated imposed loads and
thermal, structural or other movements.
Account for additional requirement for weather resistance as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Thermal Performance and Solar Gain
Achieve at least the performance levels as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.3 Condensation
Resist the formation of condensation on visible surfaces, interstices or locations
where it is unable to drain.
Provide air and vapour barriers if necessary to eliminate dampness and condensation
around the windows.
2.1.1.4 Thermal Stress
Resist cracking to glass caused by thermal stress.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
Expansion and contraction of the window frames must not cause unacceptable noise
or induce significant stresses to any components.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
Junctions between the window systems and adjacent work by others are to be formed
to accommodate possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent element
without distortion to the works, or disintegration of joints between the works.
Refer to the PSD for design movements and deflections to account for.
2.1.3.2 Structure Tolerances
Accommodate tolerances on structure and window openings as indicated in the PSD
to the respective works.
2.1.6 Functionality
2.1.6.1 Appearance
a. Achieve the geometry presented in the drawings and schedules.
b. Achieve colours and appearances as per samples approved by the SO.
2.1.6.2 Operability
a) Meet the recommendations of SS 212 and BS 8213-1 in respect of reach
distances to ensure the safe operation of opening vents by users.
b) Meet the requirements for force required to operate the sash of a window set out
in SS 212 and BS 6375-2, for the type(s) of windows concerned.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
2.1.6.3 Security
Resist wilful dismantling in order to gain unauthorised entry or vandalism.
2.1.6.4 Infestation
Resist attack or infestation by micro-organism, fungi, insects, reptiles, birds or bats
and rodents.
Have no openings in the windows that permit entry of insects, reptiles, birds or bats
and rodents.
2.1.7 Durability
2.1.7.1 Design Life of Components
Achieve the following minimum design life requirements:
a. IGU’s 10 years
b. PVF2 coating 15 years
c. All metal components 10 years
d. All gaskets 10 years
e. Hinges, stays, locks and other ironmongery – 50,000 cycles
2.1.7.2 Corrosion
In locations subject to wetting or condensation, do not use material susceptible to
corrosion; or cause rust staining, or bi-metallic action.
2.1.7.3 Maintenance and Replacement
Identify materials and components which under normal service conditions cannot
meet the specified design life and allow for their monitoring and replacement.
Detail the components such as to permit removal and replacement of individual
assemblies without affecting adjacent assemblies or supporting framework.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.2 Glazing
3.2.1 General
All glass must:
a. Comply with the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2.
b. Be clean cut, without significant edge faults (including feathered edges, shells or
other imperfections) and free from bubbles, inclusions, cracks, rippling, dimples,
sleeks or other defects.
c. Be cut to accurate sizes in the factory.
d. Be assessed for optical and visual faults as described in BS EN 572-2. Spot faults
to be no worse than category C. Ensure there are no linear/extended faults.
Optical faults to be within the limits set in BS EN 572-2.
e. Have no local defects producing irregular reflections.
3.2.2 Lamination
Laminated panes must:
a. Comply with SS 341.
b. Have PVB interlayer complying with BS 6206 Class A.
c. Have edge steps less than 0.5mm in toughened or heat-treated glass.
d. Bear identification marks indicating its nature and processor.
Protect the interlayer material from the effects of moisture absorption in service
including clouding, shrinking back, degassing and delamination.
Ensure that the interlayer is compatible with glazing sealants.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Nominally neutral in colour and uniform in tone, hue, colour, texture, pattern and
opacity
c. Consistent appearance to the glazed units.
3.3.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS 1474 unless otherwise agreed with the SO
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 1.2mm
Platforms, webs, flanges, races and screw flutes of sufficient size to satisfy all
structural requirements and eliminate distortion of elements in the works.
3.4.1 General
Comply with structural specifications for requirements relating to secondary steel
framing.
Where used, comply with one of the following:
a. Hot rolled steel complying with the requirements of BS EN 10025.
b. Hot rolled sections to BS 4: Part 1, BS EN 10210-2 and BS EN 10021-1, tubes to
BS 6323: Parts 1, 2 & 3 and angles to BS 4848: Part 4.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.5.1 General
Stainless steel components to be austenitic, complying with BS EN 10088 grades:
a. X2CrNi18-10 (formerly grade 304 S11) for concealed locations
b. X8CrNi18-9 (formerly grade 304 S31) for concealed locations
c. X2CrNiMo17-12-2 (formerly grade 316 S11) for exposed locations
d. X2CrNiMo18-14-3 (formerly grade 316 S13) for exposed locations
3.6 Timber
Unless otherwise specified all timber to be Kapur, Chengal or Balau
Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content between
adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.
Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of the SO.
Fire retardant treatment system to the approval of the SO. Season and kiln dry timber
after treatment.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.8.1 Anchors
Use stainless steel, galvanised steel or aluminium anchors and stainless steel fixings
wherever wetting may occur (including condensation).
3.10 Sealants
Select and install in accordance with BS 6213.
Silicone sealants to comply with BS 5889.
Polyurethane sealants to comply with BS 5215
Design sealant geometry (and cross section) to accommodate the anticipated
substrate movement.
Do not use acid curing sealants.
Non-structural sealants-approved low modulus silicone (exposed or concealed) or
approved polyurethane sealant (concealed)
Use in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, particularly relating to the use
of primers.
Sealants are to have:
a. Backing rods- Non-gassing polyethylene closed cell foam
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.11 Accessories
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
4.1.1 Methods
a. Select methods used for fabrication that will achieve the specified performance.
b. Use jigs and computer controlled tools wherever appropriate to achieve accuracy.
c. Use the correct tools for each task and equipment that is well maintained. Do not
use blunt and worn tools.
d. Carry out grinding, cutting, shaping and finishing materials using tools, techniques
and ancillary materials that will not contaminate windows components with
particles or substances which could disfigure, stain or corrode them.
e. Undertake the assembly of components under factory controlled conditions.
4.1.2 Marking
Mark strong points on components and materials for lifting, or to permit assembly or
installation in a particular sequence;
Clearly mark upper and lower faces, left and right handed pieces, top and bottom,
components and materials or lengths close but critically different from one another.
Ensure marks are removable or concealed when installed.
4.1.3.2 Glazing
Achieve the following maximum allowable tolerances for individual panes of glass:
a. ±2.0 mm on height and width
b. ±1.0 mm on straightness of edges
c. Tolerances on insulating glazed units allowed by BS 5713.
b. Remove any protective tapes from the edges of insulating glazed units.
c. All roller wave to be horizontal
d. Install glazing units with at least 5mm clearance at the sides and top from the
framing, and 6mm at the bottom with allowance for water to drain freely.
e. Install gaskets without incorrect distortion such as stretching or compression of
length, or folding back of wiper seals.
4.2 Installation
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
5.1 Submissions
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit the warranty for the SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit one sample of each window type including glazing and proposed hardware for
the SO’s acceptance prior to ordering material. All approved samples to be kept in
site store for reference.
Submit also sample of hinges and handles and other ironmongeries for acceptance
prior to fabrication.
5.3 Inspections
No items.
5.4 Tests
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations 4
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 General 9
4.2 Delivery, Storage and Handling 9
4.3 Preparation 9
4.4 Application 11
4.5 Protection 11
4.6 Making Good Defects 12
4.7 Cleaning Up 12
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on exterior surfaces of
buildings and other external elements as described. For the requirements relating to
painting and coating for external structural steelwork refer to structural specifications.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS ISO 1248 Iron oxide pigments for paint
SS ISO 3262 Extenders for paint
SS CP 22 The painting of buildings
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
SS 7 Paint: finishing, gloss enamel
SS 34 Undercoat paint for gloss enamel
SS 37 Aluminium paint
SS 38 Aluminium wood primer
SS 82 Bitumen based primer for cold or hot application
SS 88 Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) for
paints and other purposes
SS 90 Glossary of paint and related terms
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 150 Emulsion paints for decorative purposes
SS 269 Paint colours for building purposes
SS 345 Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes
SS 494 Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
Other Standards
BS 4652 Zinc rich priming paint (organic media)
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
1.4.4 Warranty
Submit a five-year warranty in accordance with the contract conditions for all external
sprayed coating system.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
2.1.3 Appearance
Ensure the paintworks achieve uniform colour and texture as that accepted in a
mock-up panel, with no defects that would impair appearance.
Provide joints as indicated in the drawings if any.
2.1.4 Fire
Take into account, that the works are to be non-combustible throughout.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
Note that the products listed have been selected for the types of surfaces or
substrates, and the standard of quality particularly applicable to the specific surfaces
to be painted or coated.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Only apply paint to firm and dry surfaces, prepared in accordance with good trade
practice. Paint to be evenly and thoroughly applied, using clean brushes, rollers or
spraying equipment.
Make edges of completed paintwork adjoining other materials, building elements and
different coloured paintwork clean and sharp without overlapping.
4.3 Preparation
4.3.1 Generally
Clean all surfaces to be painted of all oil, grease, dirt, mould, mildew, loose or flaking
paint and all other material deleterious to achieving a good paint finish prior to filling,
sanding or painting.
Smooth surface irregularities. Fill and patch up all joints, cracks, holes and other
depressions with appropriate non-shrink, ultra violet resistant fillers suitable for the
substrate. Finish off flush with surface and abrade to a smooth, even finish. Make
good defects to the satisfaction of the SO prior to any coating work being carried out.
Use the types of preparation materials as recommended by the material
manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being
prepared.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
4.4 Application
4.4.1 Conditions
Apply paint only to surfaces prepared in accordance with this work section.
Maintain adequate ventilation during painting and drying periods.
Apply materials at the rate as recommended by the manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for drying times between coats.
Ensure that each coat is dry before the next coat is applied
4.5 Protection
Protect all surfaces not to be coated, by covering with dust sheets, masking or other
suitable materials. Provide adequate signage and barriers to protect the general
public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
4.7 Cleaning Up
Remove all protection, surplus materials, empty containers, rags, dirt and other
debris. Remove daubs and spatters from coatings and materials, and leave surfaces
clean.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the paint manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating
to paints to be used.
b. Name of Sub-Contractor – (if sub-contracted).
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the Warranty upon completion of the works.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples for SO’s acceptance prior to ordering material:
a. A 1.0m x 1.0m panel of each of the paint or coating systems noted in clause 3.1
in a location to be agreed upon with the SO.
b. A 1.5m long sample of the paint system on any frame or tube or other building
element/component to be agreed upon with the SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for requirement of mock-up of the paint system for the project.
5.3 Inspection
Upon completion of the first section of any paint type, inform and request an
inspection from the SO. Proceed only after approval from the SO.
The SO will determine the extent of the ‘first section’.
5.4 Tests
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS 8
3.1 Types of Applied Finishes System 8
3.2 General Material Requirements 8
3.3 Substrate Preparation Materials 8
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes 9
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed 9
3.6 Skylights 9
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components 10
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds 10
3.9 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints 10
3.10 Insulation 11
3.11 Surfacing Materials 11
3.12 Rainwater Goods 12
3.13 Fall Arrest System 12
4. WORKMANSHIP 13
4.1 General Workmanship Requirements 13
4.2 Preparation 13
4.3 Application of Membranes 14
4.4 Waterproof Screed 17
4.5 Insulation 17
4.6 Skylights 17
4.7 Installation of Rainwater Goods 18
4.8 Protection 18
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION 19
5.1 Submissions 19
5.2 Samples and Mock-ups 20
5.3 Inspection and Tests 21
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the general requirements for applied finishes for flat roofs,
including various combinations of:
a. Waterproofing
b. Insulation
c. Surfacing
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS CP 26 Drainage of Roofs
SS CP 33 Lightning Protection
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of Reinforced Concrete Buildings
SS 133 Bituminous emulsion for Roof Waterproofing
SS 141 Unplasticized PVC pipe for cold water services and industrial uses
SS 374 Preformed Waterproofing Membranes for Concealed Roof
Other Standards
BS EN 363 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height – Fall
Arrest Systems.
BS EN 10088 Stainless Steels
BS 460 Cast iron for rainwater goods
BS 3837 Expanded Polystyrene Boards
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the following items:
a. Waterproofing and watertightness of the roofs.
b. Insulation systems of the roofs.
c. Surfacing screed, other accessories and components.
Refer to the PSD for warranty requirements.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete applied finishes
system shall not exceed the assumed design value as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the Live Loads as stipulated in the Building
Control Regulations, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having
jurisdiction over the works if any.
2.1.1.3 Wind Uplift
Account for possible wind uplift effects for loosely laid systems.
2.1.1.4 Thermal Stress and Structural Movement
Account for all thermal stress and other structural movement.
2.1.1.5 Structural Fixing
Structural fixings shall be able to resist the worst combination of the applied loads, as
well as foreseeable vibration transmitted to the roofing system.
2.1.1.6 Maintenance Loads
For accessible areas allow for maintenance loadings including loadings from
personnel, plant and equipment, Include the dynamic effects of such plants and
equipments. Refer to PSD for maintenance loading requirements.
2.1.1.7 Secondary Building Movements
Take into account, movements from secondary support structures, including vibration
and thermal movement from M&E equipment and related works.
2.1.3 Environmental
2.1.3.1 Thermal Performance
Comply with the applicable OTTV or U-value referred to in the PSD.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
2.1.3.3 Watertightness
The completed roof shall be in-penetrable to water and not give rise to any
observable dampness on visible surfaces under the normal environmental conditions
expected.
2.1.4 Maintenance
2.1.4.1 The roof system shall be maintainable and replaceable in parts or whole
from the outside.
2.1.4.2 Allow routine cleaning to be conducted with minimal disruption to the
building occupants.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
Provide galvanised wire mesh reinforcement when the screed is thicker than 50 mm.
3.6 Skylights
Refer to section A2-40, clause 3.0 for general requirement of materials for skylights.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
3.8.1 Primer
Primer shall be proprietary type, compatible with the membrane used and
recommended for the intended purpose by the membrane manufacturer, to be
submitted to the SO.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
3.9.4 Gaskets
Natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special properties
such as resistance to oils are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics materials have to
be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be solid or hollow
sections of various profiles formed from cellular or non-cellular material or
combinations of these materials or sections. Submit suitable product to the SO.
3.9.7 Baffles
Materials for baffles shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.10 Insulation
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
3.11.4 Ballast
Ballast materials to be of stone, aggregate, gravel, pre-cast concrete pavers and clay
pavers. Refer to section A3-10 “Hardscape” clause 3.4, for general requirement of
materials.
Submit to the SO, suitable products, able to resist the expected wind uplift, protect
the membrane from surface pedestrian traffic and other imposed loads.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2 Preparation
4.2.4 Cracks
Seal all cracks and movement joints, with reinforcement and sealant, and allow to
cure. Repair all structural cracks to SO’s approval.
4.2.6 Priming
Apply primer to substrate, ensuring full coverage and allowed to dry prior to
application of membrane.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
4.3.5 Surfacing
Where required, apply a 20 mm thick waterproof screed over the membrane.
Apply surfacing material over the waterproof screed.
Where tiles are laid directly onto the waterproof screed or membrane, use a
compatible proprietary adhesive recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Where the surfacing material is a RC topping slab or ballast materials, add a
proprietary recommended slip sheet in between the membrane and surfacing
material.
4.5 Insulation
Lay rigid insulation boards to accepted methods and in accordance with supplier’s
recommendations.
4.6 Skylights
Install skylight(s) in accordance with section A2-40, clause 4.0.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
4.7.1 Flashing
Flash all exposed vertical edges of membrane above the finished roof level.
Seal all membrane edges around upstands with pressure seal, protrusions and
services penetrations with fillet beads or other sealant materials, to be submitted to
the SO.
4.8 Protection
Ensure that from completion of the waterproofing works until Practical Completion:
a. The waterproofed area is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to
the satisfaction of the SO.
b. Do not allow petroleum based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to
come into contact with the waterproofed surface.
c. Protect the waterproofed areas from damage by subsequent building operations.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the waterproofing membrane manufacturer and inclusion of copies of
technical data relating to system.
b. Name of Sub-Contractor – (if sub-contracted).
c. Information of current or similar jobs completed during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
5.1.6 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
5.2.1 Samples
For each system type specified provide samples of each component to permit
approval of material quality, thickness, finishes and profile.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Within timeframe as directed, provide mock-up panel of sufficient size to permit
approval of the intended construction. Include the following elements where
applicable:
a. Typical composition of roof system
b. Upstand
c. Vent pipes / other building services protrusions
d. Rainwater outlet
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
5.3.1 Inspections
Carry out inspections at the following stages, ensuring that the work is carry out in a
proper and orderly manner:
a. Preparation of the slab deck, ready for the application of the waterproofing
membrane.
b. Application of the waterproofing membrane.
c. Commencement of any required testing, on or off site.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
A3-30 Softscape
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 3
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
2.1 Requirements for Contractor’s Proposal 5
4. WORKMANSHIP 19
4.1 Supply of Plants 19
4.2 Preparation Prior to Planting 19
4.3 Planting 21
4.4 Turfing 24
4.5 Maintenance 26
4.6 Chemicals 28
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This specification covers soft landscaping works for building projects, involving the
planting and care for:
a. Mature trees.
b. Turfing.
c. Hedge material
d. Ground cover
It also covers associated works such as subsoil drainage etc.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
Other Standards
BS EN 10244-2 Steel and wire products-zinc alloy coating
BS 3998 Recommendations for tree work
BS 4031 Recommendations for transplanting semi-mature trees
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
1.4.1.1 Temporary supports and maintenance to all trees and plants until
established.
1.4.1.2 Select sources of supply for the plants and soil as required.
1.4.4 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.2 Stability
The Works shall remain rigid and un-deteriorated when subjected to normal use.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.1 Soil
3.1.1 Subsoil
Subsoil shall be:
a. A free draining soil, to be used as fill materials.
b. Generally taken from a level of 300 mm below the original surface, either
excavated from the site, or imported from accepted sources.
c. Free from all impurities including chemicals, oils, cement, unworkable clays and
stones exceeding 50 mm in diameter.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.1.4.3 Conductivity
a. Avery & Bascombe - 3.0 mΩ/cm
b. Not more than 1500 micro Siemens using a 1:2.5 extract
3.1.4.5 Acidity
pH: 5 – 7.5
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.1.8 Mulch
Mulches shall be:
a. Approved friable-composted organic material such as Oil Palm husks, organic
composts or an approved mix.
b. Coco Peat will not be allowed on its own unless mixed into a proportion of 50-50
with another mulching material
c. Free from soluble salts or toxic materials
d. Resistant to rapid decay.
e. Have a pH of between 5.5-7.0
Submit samples and pH values for approval, before use.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.2 Sand
Sand shall be:
a. Clean, washed sharp sand free from any contamination
b. Conform to SS 31.
Submit sample for approval by the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.7.1 Selection
Refer to the PSD for list of plants selected for the project.
Refer to drawings and schedules for location.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.7.8 Palms
3.7.8.1 Single Stem Palms
Single stem palms shall have a clear straight trunk.
Heights shall be as measured from root collar to based of lowest leaf sheath, and
shall be as specified in the plant schedule.
Acceptable tolerances to variations in stem height shall be plus or minus 200 mm.
Heads of palm shall be well balanced with minimum 7 leaves and a healthy growing
apical shoot, all free from pest and disease.
Root Ball dimension shall be in proportion to stem heights as follows:
Stem Height Root Ball Diameter Depth
1m 400mm 400mm
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
2m 750mm 600mm
3m 900mm 600mm
4m 1200mm 750mm
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.8 Turfs
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.9 Drainage
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Edge to drainage trench shall be lined with sacrificial timber segregating strip, 100
mm x 12 mm thick, level with established landscape platform for ease of grass
cutting.
Submit to the SO, preliminary survey of drainage pattern and invert levels prior to
commencement of work.
3.9.2 Pipes
For Precast concrete or cast iron pipes, refer to structural specifications.
3.10 Supports
3.10.1 Staples
Staples for fixing wire to timber shall be 40 mm x 4 mm zinc coated to BS EN 10244-
2.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.11 Water
Water shall be free from impurities.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4. WORKMANSHIP
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.2.5 Deadman
Set out and install timber deadmen anchors as indicated in the drawings.
4.3 Planting
4.3.1 General
No planting allowed when the ground is waterlogged.
Protect roots of plants to prevent drying out while waiting planting.
Adopt proper horticultural practice.
Use only approved mechanical aids, otherwise execute planting by hand.
4.3.2 Setting-out
Peg out individual tree positions in accordance with agreed planting plan.
Figure dimensions in planting plan by the SO to take precedence, where dimensions
are not shown setting out to be guided by defined paths, paving or other works.
Scaled dimension may be used.
Minor refinement to the design with adjustments to lines, levels and grouping of
plants during planting process is required.
Planting shall not commence until sets out positions have been approved. Any
planting where positions were not approved prior to planting may require adjustment.
Trees shown at regular spacing shall be accurately and evenly spaced in true lines
and true to level.
Where planting is likely to take place prior to hard landscape construction works,
setting out dimensions will be critical and must be done in strict agreement with other
trades.
Plants shall be spaced evenly so that when established they will completely fill the
areas indicated.
Extent of the area to be filled by each species shall first be defined by plants spaced
around the perimeter.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Heeled in plants delivered to site in containers in specially prepared trench if not used
within 3 days of delivery. Trench to be covered with clean sand and plants to be well
watered thoroughly and regularly until required.
Containerised and pot grown plants which are not planted on arrival on site shall be
watered frequently to prevent drying out.
Replaced all plants, which have dry out to the extent that their health or visual
appearance is affected.
Water all containerised plants before planting, unless directed otherwise.
Allow for protection of top soiled areas, stacking of materials, tracking and trampling
over top soiled areas are not allowed.
Replaced any topsoil that becomes unsuitable due to contamination, loss of structure,
or for any other reason during site operations.
Plant only when the soil is reasonably dry to prevent damage to the soil structure.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.3.7 Pruning
Allow for canopy reduction and pruning of trees and shrubs after planting.
4.3.8 Fertiliser
Spread fertiliser on the finished surface of each shrub planting station in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.3.9 Mulching
Apply mulches in a 50 mm layer over the entire surface of shrub and ground cover
beds.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Mulching to be reapplied to all plating areas every 3 months after initial installation
until the end of the Maintenance Period or until complete surface cover by vegetation
is achieved.
Initial mulching is to take place within 2 days of installation of planting.
4.3.11 Watering
Maintain a watering program for all plant material, especially those in containers to
keep plants in a healthy state for successful establishment.
Lack of availability of water will not release the Contractor from his obligations to
replace all dead or dying plants at the end of the first season of growth after planting
or any plants which have suffered visually.
4.4 Turfing
4.4.1 Cultivation
Ripped grass beds at 300mm centres to 200mm depth and rotated to a depth of
100mm incorporating pre-seeding fertiliser, thereafter raked or harrowed to produce a
fine seed bed tilth approximately 25mm deep and lightly consolidated with an
approved roller.
Remove stones over 50mm in diameter to tip.
Shape and grade subsoil to finished formation levels. Remove surplus subsoil.
Remove subsoil considered unsuitable in any way for use in making up formation
levels to grass areas.
Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 300mm over finished subsoil formation levels
or drainage levels. Topsoil shall be rotated to a depth of 250mm incorporating
fertiliser or other soil improvement measures to be agreed with the SO.
Raked out or harrowed to produce a fine bed of approximately 25mm deep and lightly
consolidated with an approved roller. Stones over 50mm shall be removed to tip.
Finely grade grass beds during cultivation to remove all minor hollows or ridges, such
operations being carried out when the soil is dry and friable. Final finished surface
shall have a smooth and even fall or gently rolling curves between the finished level
and the boundary of the areas.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Arrange levels to give gentle falls for drainage and any ponding developing after
completion of cultivation shall be made good.
Use wooden planks or plywood boards for access during turfing operations to prevent
compaction of soil. Incidental compression of completed graded topsoil shall be
racked over before laying of sods. Re-cultivate all compacted areas.
Water and complete within same working day all areas of completed turf.
4.4.4 Rolling
When the grass has grown 50mm high the areas are to be lightly rolled in two
directions with a roller not exceeding 0.25 tonne. All bare patches to be re-turfed.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.5 Maintenance
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.5.3 Re-firming
All plant material shall be re-firmed periodically.
Ensure that all plants remain firm in the ground, and any plants loosened due to
strong winds or surface water movement shall be re-firmed as required.
4.5.4 Pruning
Remove dead twigs or water shoots occurring on the clear stems of trees.
Cut back any species requiring pruning to encourage bushiness.
Allow for topping/crowning reduction to all trees.
Employ skilled operatives for pruning without any brushing or tearing of the bark.
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.6 Chemicals
Employ only qualified and experienced staff when using herbicides and fungicides
and shall ensure that applications are carried out in accordance with current safety
regulations and manufacturer’s instructions.
Inform building owner and user at all times of which chemical is used the specific
conditions to maintained effectiveness and safety.
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Company profile and track record
b. Name and contact number of intended supervisor
c. CV of intended supervisor
d. Name of the tree and plant supplier
e. Name of the grass supplier
f. Name of the topsoil supplier
g. Method statement, showing installation quality assurance
h. Maintenance approach to be adopted after completion
i. Name of sub-contractor(s), if any
j. Method of supports for intended planting materials, both horizontal and vertical
methods of supports.
k. Brief program showing times for procurement and installation.
l. Information of landscaping contracts current or completed during the previous 5
years and details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
m. Confirmation of acceptance and allowance or all requirements in the specification
n. Sample of deed of warranty
o. Samples and mock-ups
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
5.1.3 Maintenance
Submit for approval:
a. A written programme of Aftercare – Continuing Works prior to completion and
throughout the 24-month maintenance period.
b. Date for submission of monthly activity report indicating record of maintenance
carried out during contract period.
Maintain a record of all visits with reference to those maintenance tasks carried out
and submit this record as required.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.4.
5.2.1 General
Agree source of planted material with S.O. at tender stage, and arrange visit to the
nursery to agree quality of planted material.
In the case of grass and turfing a one meter square of sample grass or turf to be
submitted with documentation certifying origin of sample and sufficiency of quantity
for intended work.
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Tag and mark plant selected for project at nursery and agreement to schedule and
method of deliveries.
5.3 Inspections
5.3.1 Grass
Inspection with the SO shall be conducted after 28 days or as agreed within
contractor’s program, after laying of turf looking for evidence of green healthy growth
and to the satisfaction of the SO.
The following shall be evident:
a) Even cover of at least 90% of turf area with leaves and spreading shoots of
Axonopus Compressus.
b) Free of perennial weeds or disease
c) Healthy, vigorous and showing a strong developed root system.
Any settlement due to lack of compaction to be corrected by application of top
dressing with finely sifted soil to a maximum depth of 25 mm. For depression greater
than 25 mm the affected area shall be lifted and the depression filled with sifted
topsoil and lightly compacted and the affected area re-turf to desired grade.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 6
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 8
4. WORKMANSHIP 15
4.1 Fabrication 15
4.2 Grinding, Polishing and Finishing 15
4.3 Joints 15
4.4 Shims 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the fabrication and installation of external
metalwork which are generally meant for gates and fences, railings etc. This section
does not cover metal fixtures and fittings and furniture such as lamp post, benches,
bins etc. which shall be to specialist suppliers’ specifications.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submit to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 470 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine
grain structural steel
Other Standards
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles - specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506-2 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners. Nuts
BS EN 485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 499 Welding consumables – covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels - classification
BS EN 895 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – transverse
tensile test
BS EN 910 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – bend tensile
test
BS EN 1172 Sheet & strip for building purposes
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
BS EN 10258 Cold-rolled stainless steel and narrow strip and cut lengths -
tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10259 Cold-rolled stainless steel wide strip and plate/sheet -
tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10268 Flat products. High yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold
forming
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 12163 Rod for general purposes
BS EN 12166 Wire for general purposes
BS EN 12167 Profiles & rectangular bar for general purposes
BS EN 12449 Tube for general purposes
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection of metals - Electrodeposited coatings
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 1052 Wire: Mild steel for general engineering purposes
BS 1449-1-1.15 Narrow strip (1). General engineering purposes
BS 1449-1-1.8 & BS Narrow strip (1). Formable & general engineering purposes
1449-1-1.14
BS 1453 Specification for filler materials for gas welding (AMD 5363)
(AMD 10840) (AMD Corrigendum 13107)
BS 1703 Refuse chutes and hoppers
BS 2901 Fillers and rods for gas shielded arc welding
BS 2994 Steel sections
BS 3692 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 3830 Vitreous enamelled steel building components
BS 3987 Specification for anodic oxide coatings on wrought aluminium
for external architectural applications (AMD 10944)
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4464 Spring washers for engineering work
BS 4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel
work. Metric series
BS 6323-1 to 7 Tubes. Seamless & welded
BS 6363 Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow
sections
BS 7668 Weather resistant steels. Hot finished
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 3715 Metal finishing: Thermoset powder coating
ASTM 2605.2 Organic coatings on aluminium extrusions
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the performance of the
following items:
a. A ten-year indemnity for all aluminium works and glazing.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
3.2.1 Sections
Stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10088-1. Stainless steel sections shall comply with
BS EN 10088-3.
Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel grade shall be 1.4401 (previously 316
external grade).
3.2.1.1 Finishes
a. 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
b. 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
1G/2G; low reflectivity.
c. 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and external
architectural applications.
d. 1P/2P (7 or 8) Bright buffed/polished: Nondirectional finish with high degree of
reflectivity. Achieved by mechanical polishing.
Note the references in brackets are the nearest equivalent finishes to the superseded
BS 1449-2.
The finish is achieved on the exposed surface only unless specified otherwise.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
Butt welds made by spot welding strips under beams and filling in the voids with
solder and finishing by grinding will not be acceptable
Wherever welds occur on surfaces not finished by grinding and polishing, such welds
and the accompanying discolouration shall be suitably coated in the factory by
means of metallic base paint to prevent the possibility of progressive corrosion to
such joints.
3.3.1 Generally
Steel components to be hot dip galvanised after fabrication unless alternative
corrosion protection is approved.
Do not cut, drill or work galvanised members.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
3.6.1 Generally
Submit suitable fasteners to the SO.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
3.6.2 Methods
Concealed fixings are to be adopted unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Locate face fixings in unobtrusive positions.
3.6.3 Strength
Allow minimum safety factor of 2.5 in addition to the anchorage design safety factor.
Where requested on drawings supply a torque setting for bolted or screwed
fastenings.
Structural anchorage to be by two or more fixing devices.
3.7 Grout
Grout between base/face plates and concrete is to have a minimum compressive
strength at 28 days of 40 N/m²
3.8 Timber
Timber accessories such as handrails etc shall be formed of species as noted in the
drawings.
Timber handrails to be finished as set out in Section A1-80-3 “External Painting and
Coating” clause 3.1.
3.9.1 Generally
Apply coats after completion of fabrication and drilling of all fixing holes.
Remove all burrs and sharp arrises prior to coating.
3.9.2 Galvanizing
To BS EN ISO 1461.
Provide all necessary vent and drain holes in approved locations and seal to approval
after galvanizing.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
3.9.7 Anodizing
Anodizing to aluminium surfaces shall be 25 micron thick to BS 3987
3.9.9 Anodizing
Comply with AS1231 thickness grade 25.
3.9.10 PVF2
Wet applied fluoropolymer to comply with ASTM 2605-2.
Resin content minimum of 70%, minimum coating 25 microns.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site prior to shop fabrication.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. Locate joints
only as indicated on the architectural drawings.
4.3 Joints
Butt joints and contact joints, wherever they occur, shall be close fitting and shall not
require solder as filler.
Sheared edges are to be free of burrs, fins or irregular projection.
Neatly finish mitres or bull nose with under edges of material ground to uniform
condition. Do not overlap materials.
4.4 Shims
Separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducing pads. Pads shall have/be:
a. minimum 3 mm thickness,
b. sufficiently reduce friction to permit movement,
c. resistant to wear,
d. positively retained in position ( open ended slots are not acceptable ).
e. not be subjected to heat damage from welding , cutting or to excessive pressure
from over tightening of bolts.
Plastic shims are acceptable at static connections for which the shims transfer only
compressive forces.
Wood shims shall not be used.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Technical details for the manufactured items noted in clause 3.1.
b. Details of fabricators for items set out on drawings
c. Details of PVF2 applicator
5.1.6 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-40 External Metalwork
5.3 Tests
No items unless otherwise noted in the PSD.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Plastering Works 10
4.2 Rendering 11
4.3 Patching 12
4.4 Cleaning 13
4.5 Protection 13
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the application of plaster and render to
internal reinforced concrete, masonry and plasterboard surfaces.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS CP 56 Internal plastering
SS 477 Portland blastfurnace cement
SS 483 Ceramic floor and wall ties
SS CP 68 Ceramic wall and floor tiling
Other Standards
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes
12944
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures – zinc
14713 and aluminium - guidelines
BS EN 197-1 Specification for Portland cement
BS EN 459-1 Building lime – Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel-Lists of stainless steel
BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar
BS 146 Specification for Portland-blast furnace cement
BS 1369-1 Specification for expanded metal and ribbed lathing
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
1.4.1.2 Submit suitable mix and application methods taking into account of the
performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1.
1.4.4 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.2 Environmental
Take into account the environment for which the Works are to be applied, paying
particular attention to the following environmental effects:
a. Daily variations in humidity and temperature resulting from air-condition
operations within the building.
b. For non air-conditioned areas, daily and seasonal variations in rainfall, humidity
and temperature in the Tropics.
c. Humidity or damp variations or other consequences resulting from the activities
occurring within the spaces for which the Works are applied or in proximity.
2.1.3 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to ensure that the surface finishes are uniform in
colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Achieve surface level tolerance as set out in SS CP 56.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
3.2 Cement
Portland Cement: Grey or white to SS 26. Coloured cement for integral coloured
plaster may have colouring additive not exceeding 5% of the cement by weight
incorporated. Colours are to be directed by the SO.
3.4 Sand
To be a naturally occurring material, conforming to BS EN 13139.
3.5 Water
Potable, clean, fresh and free from mineral and organic substances.
3.6 Beads
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
3.7 Lathing
Lath shall be galvanised, self-furring diamond mesh, standard diamond mesh and flat
rib. Metal gauge and size to manufacturers recommendations.
Corner lath shall be best to form 75mm wide wings, or as indicated on tender issue
drawings.
Rib lath shall be integrally ribbed galvanised steel expanded with 10mm deep ribs.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 General
At plastered partitions, fill metal, frames, grounds and beads solid with plaster during
plastering application. Cut back base and finish coats where render finishes against
metal bucks or frames.
Extend plaster on vertical surfaces full height, from floor to underside of structural
slab or beam, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate plaster work at end of each day at casing bead, corner, opening, or other
acceptable intersection of surfaces.
All plaster finished surfaces shall be plumb, level, and true, accurately finished to
planes or profiles indicated, without trowel marks or defects.
Angles, intersections, and corners shall be clean, sharp and accurately formed.
Flat surfaces shall be level and true within 4mm in 3 m, checked with a metal straight
edge. Curved, radial, splayed and irregular plaster surfaces shall be true to profile
and shall be formed and verified by means of accurate metal forms and templates.
Test wall surfaces after 10 days to identify any hollow areas in accordance with test
noted in clause 5.0 below.
Do not use or remix partially or wholly set plaster.
4.1.4 Chases
If chases or recesses are more than 50mm wide, cover with metal lath extending
75mm beyond the each side of the recess.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
4.2 Rendering
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
4.3 Patching
Repair, point, cut and patch all plasterwork around all work abutting, setting into, or
extending into plastered surfaces after work of other trades is in place.
1. Repair plaster disturbed or damaged due to installation of work of other trades.
2. Cut out and repair all plaster in which hairline cracks, pits, checks, waves,
blisters, discolouration, or other defects develop.
3. Cut out and replace with new materials all beads or fames which are rusted,
improperly set, out of alignment or otherwise defective.
Repair work shall be thoroughly raked out, or cut out, moistened and filled with
plaster finish coat material, surfaces floated or trowelled flush to match adjoining
work. Use bonding agent on existing plaster edges or surfaces to which new plaster
will be applied.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
4.4 Cleaning
Clean all finishes and adjoining work immediately upon completion of plasterwork in
each room or space. Remove stains, finger marks and writing.
4.5 Protection
Protect plastered surfaces from dust, dirt, and draught during plastering application
and until completely cured.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the any specialist plaster manufacturer, include copies of relevant
technical data.
b. Name of the additive, bead manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.4.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples:
a. 1m length of all beads.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
5.2.2 Mock-Ups
Complete one wall, for the plaster/render finishes as set out in clause 3.1, location to
be agreed with the SO. Do not proceed with other walls until the SO has approved
the mock-ups.
Refer to the PSD for additional mock up requirements if any.
5.3 Inspection
Inform the SO when substrate of sample wall has been prepared ready for plastering.
5.4 Tests
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations 6
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 General 10
4.2 Delivery, Storage and Handling 10
4.3 Preparation 10
4.4 Application 12
4.5 Protection 12
4.6 Making Good Defects 12
4.7 Cleaning Up 13
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on surfaces of building
elements/components not subject to the weather. It covers application of paints on
substrates that may be of cementitious, timber, metal or PVC in nature.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS ISO 1248 Iron oxide pigments for paint
SS ISO 3262 Extenders for paint
SS CP 22 The Painting of Buildings
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
SS 7 Paint: finishing, gloss enamel
SS 34 Undercoat paint for gloss enamel
SS 37 Aluminium paint
SS 38 Aluminium wood primer
SS 82 Bitumen based primer for cold or hot application
SS 88 Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) for
paints and other purposes
SS 90 Glossary of paint and related terms
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 150 Emulsion paints for decorative purposes
SS 269 Paint colours for building purposes
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations
SS 345 Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes
SS 494 Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
Other Standards
BS EN ISO Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
8503 related products – Surface preparation methods
BS EN ISO Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
8504 related products – Surface preparation methods
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes
12944
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures – zinc and
14713 aluminium - guidelines
BS EN 927-1 Paints and varnishes - Coating materials and coating systems for
exterior woods. Classification and selection
BS.EN 971-1 Paints and varnishes. Terms and definitions for coating materials.
BS EN 10169 Specification for continuously organic coated steel flat products
BS 381C Specification for colours for identification, coding and special
purposes
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services
BS 3698 Specification for solvent-based paint remover
BS 3900 Part Determination of film thickness
C5
BS 4310 Specification for permissible limit of lead in low-lead paints and
similar materials
BS 4652 Specification for metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media).
BS 4756 Specification for ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
BS 4800 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes
BS 5589 Code of practice for preservation of timber
BS 5707 Solutions of wood preservatives in organic solvents
BS 6150 Code of practice for painting of buildings
BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and performed sections for
external architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminium alloy
extrusions, sheet and performed sections coated with powder
organic coatings.
BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to hot-dip galvanised hot-rolled steel and preformed steel sheet for
windows and associated external architectural purposes, and for the
finish on galvanised steel sections and preformed sheet coated with
powder organic coatings.
BS 6900 Specification for raw, refined and boiled linseed oils for paint and
varnishes
BS 7956 Specification for waterborne priming paint for woodwork
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
1.4.4 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
2.1.1 Appearance
Ensure the paintworks achieve uniform color and texture as that accepted in a mock-
up panel, with no defects which would impair appearance.
Provide joints as indicated in the drawings if any.
2.1.2 Fire
Ensure that the completed works comply with fire regulations
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
- Or
e. One coat of Polyamide Epoxy primer
f. Two coats Enamel paint
Agree the selection with the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Only apply paint to firm and dry surfaces, prepared in accordance with good trade
practice.
All materials to be applied by skilled trades people. Paint to be evenly and thoroughly
applied, using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment.
Make edges of completed paintwork adjoining other materials, building elements and
different coloured paintwork clean and sharp without overlapping.
4.3 Preparation
4.3.1 Generally
Clean all surfaces to be painted of all oil, grease, dirt, mould, mildew, loose or flaking
paint and all other material deleterious to achieving a good paint finish prior to filling,
sanding or painting.
Smoothen surface irregularities. Fill and patch up all joints, cracks, holes and other
depressions with appropriate non-shrink, ultra violet resistant fillers suitable for the
substrate. Finish off flush with surface and abrade to a smooth, even finish. Make
good defects to the satisfaction of the SO prior to any coating work being carried out.
The types of materials used in preparation must be as recommended by the material
manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being
prepared.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
Prior to application, allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Test the
concrete surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is below
15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
4.4 Application
4.4.1 Conditions
Prior to applying paint ensure surfaces are prepared in accordance with this
specification.
Maintain adequate ventilation during painting and drying periods.
Apply materials at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for drying times between coats.
Ensure that each coat is dry before the next coat is applied
4.4.5 Appearance
Finishing coats to be smooth, and free of, streaks, laps, pile-up of paint, skipped or.
missed areas.
4.5 Protection
Protect all surfaces not to be coated, by covering with dust sheets, masking or other
suitable materials.
Provide adequate signage and barriers to protect the general public, and to prevent
damage to freshly applied coatings.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
4.7 Cleaning Up
Remove all protection, surplus materials, empty containers, rags, dirt and other
debris. Remove daubs and spatters from coatings and materials, and leave surfaces
clean.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the paint manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating
to paints to be used.
b. Name of Sub-Contractor – (if sub-contracted).
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.4.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples to the SO prior to ordering material:
a. A 1.0m x 1.0m panel of each of the paint or coating systems as set out in clause
3.1 in a location to be agreed upon with the SO.
b. A 1.5m long sample of the paint system on any frame or tube or other building
element/component to be agreed upon with the SO.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for requirement of mock-up of the paint system for the project.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
5.3 Inspection
Upon completion of the first section of any paint type inform and request an
inspection from the SO. Proceed only after approval from the SO.
The SO will determine the extent of the ‘first section’.
5.4 Tests
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Preparation 14
4.2 Batching and Mixing 15
4.3 Laying 15
4.4 Finishing 16
4.5 Protection 16
4.6 Hardeners 17
4.7 Curing 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for common floor screeds applied in buildings,
including bonded and un-bonded cement sand screeds, polymer modified toppings
and resin flooring. It also covers the requirement for common floor hardeners.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS 31 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete
SS 32 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing mineral aggregates sand and fillers
SS 78 Testing of concrete
SS 289 Concrete
SS 477 Portland blastfurnace cement
Other Standards
BS EN 934-2 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout
BS EN 12878 Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
and/or lime – Specifications and methods of test
BS 146 Specification for Portland blastfurnace cements
BS 410 Specification for test sieves
BS 1052 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
BS 1521 Specification for waterproof building papers
BS 3837 Expanded polystyrene boards
Part 1: Specification for boards manufactured from expandable
beads
BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
1.4.4 Warranty
1.4.4.1 Floor Hardeners
Provide a ten-year indemnity in accordance with contract conditions for the floor
hardeners where specified in the project.
1.4.4.2 Epoxy Coatings
Provide a ten-year indemnity in accordance with contract conditions for the epoxy
coatings where specified in the project.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
2.1.2 Environmental
Take cognisance to the environment for which the Works are to be applied, paying
particular attention to the following environmental effects:
a. Daily variations in humidity and temperature resulting from air-condition
operations within the building.
b. For non air-conditioned areas, daily and seasonal variations in humidity and
temperature in the Tropics.
c. Humidity or damp variations or other consequences resulting from the activities
occurring within the spaces for which the Works are applied or in proximity.
2.1.3 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to take into account, that the surface finishes are
uniform in colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Achieve surface level tolerance as set out in BS 8204.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
3.2.3.5 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
3.2.3.6 Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B.
3.2.3.7 Maximum Depth of Indentation
As for unbonded screed.
3.2.4.5 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
3.2.4.6 Maximum Depth of Indentation
As for unbonded screed.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
c. 65-75 mm Floating
3.2.5.4 Insulation
Thermal or Acoustic insulation in accordance with performance requirements
3.2.5.5 Manufacturer
Submit to the SO.
3.2.5.6 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
passing sieve size 150 microns.
c. Coarse aggregate: This may be included in the manufacturers list for screed over
75mm. Delete if not appropriate.
d. Mix proportions: 1:4~1:5 total aggregate, proportion of fine to coarse aggregate
40/60, adjusted to facilitate trowelling.
3.2.5.7 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
3.2.5.8 Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B - Not applicable for floating construction.
3.2.5.9 Maximum Depth of Indentation
As for unbonded screed.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
3.2.7.4 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS26 or Portland blastfurnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: Natural sand of uniform colour, to SS 31, grading limit M.
c. Coarse aggregate: To SS 31, 10 mm single sized.
d. Proportions: 1:1:2
3.2.7.5 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
3.2.8.4 Mix
Proportions: To proprietary manufacturer’s recommendations.
Other Requirements: Colour, limitations on bay size etc
3.2.8.5 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
3.2.8.6 Surface Hardness
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: clause 10.7.
Minimum rebounds hammer value in accordance with wearing class defined in the
above BS.
3.2.8.7 Slip Resistance
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: Annex C.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
3.2.10.5 Thickness
Between 0.1-12mm (refer to manufacturers recommendations for appropriate
thickness)
3.2.10.6 Finish
Trowel applied heavy duty floor, self smoothing, or sealant all applied in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Preparation
4.1.6 Conduits
Haunch up in cement/sand 1:4 on both sides of conduits.
Conduits which are to be cast into screeds to be overlaid with 500 mm wide strip of
steel fabric to SS 32 or BS 4483, reference D49. Place the reinforcement at mid
depth between the top of the conduit and the screed surface.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
4.2.1 Batching
Batch proportions of mixes by weight. Batching by volume may be permitted on the
basis of the previously established weight-volume relationship(s) of the particular
materials and using accurate gauge boxes.
Batch proportions of mixes made with lightweight aggregates by volume using
accurate gauge boxes.
4.2.2 Mixing
Keep water content of mixes to the minimum, slump not exceeding 25 mm, necessary
to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent excessive water being brought to
the surface during compaction.
Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be
mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer: do not use a free fall type (drum)
mixer.
Use all mixes within 2 hours or time limit set out by supplier / manufacturer. Discard
all left over mixes.
Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
4.3 Laying
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
Forms to be square edged with steel top surfaces, securely fixed. Compact
thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping.
Alternatively, toppings may be cast continuously, bay joints being formed with
approved plastics or metal dividing strips.
4.4 Finishing
4.4.1 Timing
Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the setting and
hardening of the material. Do not wet surfaces to assist surface working. Do not
sprinkle cement onto surface.
Maximum departure from the datum level over whole floor/surface ±5mm.
4.5 Protection
Adequately protect the surface from construction traffic.
If, because of inadequate finishing or protection, the surface of the screed is not
suitable to receive the specified flooring material, submit to the SO and carry out
remedial measures.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
4.6 Hardeners
4.6.1 Application
Allow concrete floor to cure for 14 days prior to treatment. Remove all loose material,
laitance or grease contamination.
Prepare solution of hardener strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Apply only to dry surfaces. Brush out to prevent ponding, allow the solution to be
absorbed for two hours, do not let the floor dry out during this period.
While the floor is still damp wash with clean water and dispose of surplus solution.
Re-Apply further coat to dry surface after 24 hours ensuring the floor is dry.
4.7 Curing
Unless otherwise specified:
a. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind, draughts and strong sunlight.
b. As soon as screed/topping has set, closely cover with polythene sheeting and
keep in position for not less than 7 days.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating to
each screed system proposal.
b. Name of sub-contractor, if any.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
5.2.1 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for mock-ups to be provided. Each sample to be no smaller than
2mx2m and to include movement joint and skirting when the latter is formed from the
screed material.
5.3 Tests
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Preparation of Wall Substrate 10
4.2 Preparation of Floor Bases for Tiling 10
4.3 Fixing 11
4.4 Sealant 14
4.5 Grouting 14
4.6 Coloured Grout 14
4.7 Protection/Completion 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for adhesive fixed tiling on internal walls and
floors. It covers ceramic, homogenous and stone tiled finishes.
Details of the bedding layer for the semi dry method of laying floor tiles is included
since this is deemed to be undertaken by the tiler.
Details of floor screeds for tile fixing by adhesive methods are set out in section A4-
30 ‘Floor Screeds and Hardeners’.
Details of the render coating for the adhesive fixing of wall tiles are set out in section
A4-10 ‘Internal Plaster and Render’.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS CP 68 Code of practice for ceramic wall and floor tiling
SS 26 Portland cement (ordinary and rapid-hardening)
SS 31 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources of concrete
SS 32 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 483 Ceramic Tiles – Definitions, Classifications, Characteristics and
Marking
SS 485 Slip resistance classification of public pedestrian space surface
materials
Other Standards
ISO 10545 Ceramic tiles
BS EN 1322 Adhesives for tiles – definitions and terminology
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel-List of stainless steels
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide a five-year warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the bonding of
tiles.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
3.2 Tiles
3.3 Sand
Clean and graded natural sand complying with BS EN 13139.
3.4 Cement
Comply with SS26.
3.5 Water
All water to be potable.
3.6 Adhesive
3.6.1 General
Comply with BS 5890 and BS EN 1322.
Use adhesives strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
3.7 Screed
For requirement of screed material refer to section A4-30 ‘Floor Screeds and
Hardeners’, clause 3.0.
3.8 Slurry
Stipple: As for spatterdash plus latex admixture to proportions recommended by
manufacturer.
3.9 Spatterdash
Spatterdash: 1-1.5 parts Portland cement to SS 26 to 2 parts clean sharp sand. Mix
to a thick slurry and keep well stirred.
3.10 Grout
3.11.1 Sealant
Refer to clause 3.1 for proprietary product selected for the project.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
4. WORKMANSHIP
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
Shortly before laying bedding, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well
wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding coat of
creamy consistency.
Lay screeded bed while slurry or bonding agent is still wet to ensure a good bond.
4.3 Fixing
4.3.1 Setting-out
Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps.
Joints on walls to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment round corners.
Joints in floors to be parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
Cut tiles/slabs to be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive
locations.
Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
Where positions of movement joints are not specified they are to be agreed with the
SO.
Before laying tiles obtain approval of setting out drawings.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
Take adequate precautions to protect work from inclement weather, and premature
drying out.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
4.3.6 Tolerance
4.3.6.1 Level of Floor Tiling
Permissible deviation in level from datum for 3mm to be ± 1.0 mm.
4.3.6.2 Flatness/Regularity of Tiling
Sudden irregularities not permitted. When checked with a 2 m straightedge with 3 mm
thick feet at each end, placed anywhere on the surface, the straightedge shall not be
obstructed by the tiles and no gaps shall be greater than 6 mm.
4.3.6.3 Level of Tiling Across Joints
Maximum deviation between tile or slab surfaces either side of a joint, including
movement joints to be:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
4.4 Sealant
4.5 Grouting
Grout tiles as soon as possible after bedding has set sufficiently to prevent
disturbance of tiles.
Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile if less), and are free from
dust and debris.
Fill joints completely, tool to an approved profile, clean off surface and leave free from
blemishes.
Polish wall tiling with a dry cloth when joints are hard.
Check the potential risk of staining by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial
area. If discolouration occurs apply a protective sealer to the tiles and repeat the trial.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
4.7 Protection/Completion
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. The name of the stone and tile manufacturer and other components, include of
copies of technical data relating to each of the tile and component types. Refer to
section A1-60, clause 5.3 for the tests to be selected for the selection of stone.
b. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
A wall approximately 3mx2.4m (location to be agreed with the SO) and adjacent floor
area approximately 2mx2m to be tiled including termination at head, skirting,
movement joint and drainage outlet.
Do not undertake any more internal wall or floor tiling until the SO has approved the
mock-up.
The mock-up may form part of the final building, if not it is to be retained until the SO
agrees for its removal.
Refer to the PSD for any additional requirements and timeframe of mock-up.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-40 Internal Tiling
g. Modulus of rupture
h. Scratch hardness of surface (Moh,s Scale)
i. Resistance to acids and alkalis
j. Water absorption
k. Colour fastness and lightfastness.
l. Reverse staining test.
m. Stain resistance, method as ISO 10545-14, stain resistance to be Class 3.
Submit the test certificate to the SO prior to bulk ordering. Tiles, which do not comply,
are to be rejected. Laid tiles, which do not comply, are to be hacked up and replaced.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT 6
2.1 Contractor’s proposals 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Fabrication 14
4.3 Installation 14
4.4 Fixings and Suspension Systems 15
4.5 Light Fittings & other fixtures 16
4.6 Protective Treatments for folded steel on site 16
4.7 Skim Coat to concrete soffit 16
4.8 Cleaning 16
5. VERIFICATION 17
5.1 Submission 17
5.2 Samples and Mock-Ups 19
5.3 Test 19
2 Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This Specification covers the works on the following types of ceiling systems,
including supports and grid components, and provisions to receive fittings and
equipment in contact with the ceiling:
a. Modular Mineral fibreboard
b. Modular Metal ceiling
c. Seamless fibrous plasterboard with skim coat
d. Skim coating to soffit of exposed concrete slab
This specification does not cover proprietary fire rated ceiling, where these shall be
constructed to specialist supplier’s specifications.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Other Standards
BS EN 1461 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel
BS EN 10152 Steel Finishes
BS EN 20354 Acoustics of sound in reverberation rooms
BS CP 290 Code of Practice for Suspended Ceiling using Metal Fixing
Systems
BS 1191 Gypsum building plaster
BS 5368: Part 3 Methods of testing windows:
Wind resistance test
BS 5821 Sound Transmission
BS 6375: Performance of Windows:
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
1.4.5 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
2.1.3 Noise
Take account of the effects of air movement in the building to eliminate incidental
rattling, creaking or any other noise.
Take account of normal activities in the building (eg footfalls on floors above, doors
closing, thermal movement etc) or operation of the light fittings, loudspeakers, etc and
ensure that these do not result in audible rattles, "buzzing" or other extraneous noise.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
2.1.10 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to take into account, that the surface finishes are
uniform in colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Exposed or conceal grids shall be straight and levelled.
No fixing screws, cleats or other unintended metal part of the system shall be visible
on the underside of the ceiling.
The ceiling systems, in particular ceiling with acoustic performance, shall remain
stable in shape and dimension when subject to:
a. Heat generated by the light fittings or services equipment.
b. The normal building environment during construction and when completed.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
3.3.2 Accessories:
3.3.2.1 Acoustic backing pads
Sound absorbing backing pads, in dark colour, woven or non-woven inert mineral
fibre and installed by manufacturer prior to delivery to site.
3.3.2.2 Gaskets:
9mm x 3mm non-flammable closed cell black gasket fixed at site to grid profiles.
3.3.2.3 Perimeter trims.
Extruded aluminium profile, either straight or curved as necessary. Allow shadow gap
between ceiling perimeter and wall surfaces for neat junction.
Jointing of perimeter trims shall be carried out neatly without lipping or twisting. Use
mitred joints at all internal and external corners and the longest lengths of trims
available from the manufacturer to keep intermediate butt joints to a minimum. Co-
ordinate joints of straight runs to coincide with grid locations.
3.4.2 Soffit
Use approved Gypsum Plaster Skim
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
available from the manufacturer to keep intermediate butt joints to a minimum. Co-
ordinate joints of straight runs to coincide with grid locations.
3.4.4 Suspension
Submit concealed metal grids to the SO.
3.4.6 Sealer
Two coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5.1 Material
Use pre packed plastering compound conforming to BS 1191 and consisting mainly
of gypsum with chemical additives. When accepted by SO include aggregates and/or
fibres for added adhesion and bulk. Unless otherwise agreed apply one finishing coat
3 mm thick plaster conforming to BS 1191 class C & D.
Do not use site mixed skim plaster.
3.5.4 Colour
Colour of skim coat shall be consistent without gradations or stains.
3.5.5 Edging
Use proprietary edge beading to all corners and edges.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Carry out the works in accordance with methods as submitted and accepted by the
SO.
Ensure achievement of the specified performance requirements as set out in clause
2.
4.2 Fabrication
Comply with the recommendations of BS 8290.
4.3 Installation
4.3.2 Pre-Installation
Address and document and submit to SO, the following agenda:
a. Review load-bearing framing conditions, anchorage and interface with other finish
material, penetrations and other preparatory works performed by other building
trades.
b. Review required submittals
c. Review and finalise Construction Programme and resources of Work.
d. Review required inspections and testing procedures.
e. Review procedures for coping with unfavourable conditions including possibility of
temporary protection.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
4.3.3 Acclimatisation
Before installation commence, store the suspended ceiling components on site for at
least 24 hours to allow for stabilisation. Ensure free circulation of air to all surfaces.
Verify that material and components are within dimensional tolerances as set out by
the manufacturers.
4.3.6 Level
The finished ceilings shall be installed within ±3mm from the specified level.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
4.7.1 Edging
Provide accepted proprietary edging and corner beads to all corners and edges
receiving the skim coats. Submit brochures and technical literature of such beading.
4.8 Cleaning
Vacuum completed ceiling, both soffit and surface within ceiling void to remove dust.
Clean completed ceiling works with damp cloth in light detergent solution where
necessary before inspection for hand over.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
5. VERIFICATION
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the ceiling manufacturers and the relevant technical data.
b. General elaboration of installation method.
c. Name & CV of supervisor appointed for the works.
d. Portable sample of ceiling components to be used.
e. PSB product certificates.
f. Fire test certificates by PSB or acceptable equivalent institutes.
g. Details of fire protection treatment (if specified)
h. Brief program showing times for lead-up shop drawings, tests, supply, fabrication
and installation, where applicable.
i. Information of current and previous track records.
j. Confirmation of acceptance and allowance or all requirements in the specification,
and sample of warranty.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.5.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
5.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of part of each ceiling showing face materials, and grid supports and
technical data.
Submit fire and acoustic test certificates and assessments for each type of ceiling
assembly, where applicable.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Install a mock up area complete with all finishes, components and fixtures and fittings
of the ceiling tiles. Unless otherwise agreed, selected area to be 4500 mm x 4500.
Complete the mock up and submit to the SO prior to procurement and fabrication.
Provide additional mock-up as noted in the PSD.
5.3 Test
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 3
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS 7
3.1 Types of Internal Waterproofing System 7
3.2 General Material Requirements 7
3.3 Substrate 7
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes 8
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed 8
3.6 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components 8
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds 9
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints 9
3.9 Surfacing Materials 10
3.10 Drainage 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 General Workmanship Requirements 11
4.2 Preparation 11
4.3 Application of Membranes 12
4.4 Waterproof Screed 15
4.5 Protection 15
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION 16
5.1 Submissions 16
5.2 Samples and Mock-ups 17
5.3 Inspection and Tests 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the design development, application, installation and verification
of waterproofing systems for internal walls and floors of internal wet areas that are
not directly exposed to weather, such as toilets, bathrooms and kitchens. It covers
various combinations of:
a. Waterproofing Membranes
b. Waterproof Screeds
c. Floor Screeds and Wall Renders
d. Surfacing Materials
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 133 Bituminous emulsion for Roof Waterproofing
SS 374 Preformed Waterproofing Membranes for Concealed Roof
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of Reinforced Concrete Buildings
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the performance of the
following items:
a. Ten-Year warranty for waterproofing and watertightness of walls and floors of wet
areas.
b. Ten-Year warranty for waterproofing additives.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete water proofing
system shall not exceed the assumed design value as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the Live Loads as stipulated in the Building
Control Regulations, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having
jurisdiction over the works if any.
2.1.1.3 Thermal Stress and Structural Movement
Take into account, all thermal stress and that the performance, appearance and
proper functioning of the Works are not affected by any movements, settlement or
deflection in the building structure, which can reasonably be expected to occur. Also
take into account the construction accuracy of works by others to which the applied
finishes works are attached.
2.1.1.4 Secondary Building Movements
Take into account, forces resulting from secondary support structure movements,
including vibration and thermal movement from M&E equipments and related works.
2.1.3 Construction
Achieve the following construction accuracy:
a. The overall thickness of the waterproofing assembly shall not exceed that as
indicated in the design drawings.
b. Fall shall be within tolerance of the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations
and specifications.
2.1.4 Durability
The floor and adjacent walls to which the waterproofing system is applied shall
remain in-penetrable to water and moisture under the normal conditions that are
expected over the design life of the waterproofing system.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS
3.3 Substrate
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
3.7.1 Primer
Primer shall be proprietary type, compatible with the membrane used and does not
affect metal fittings, PVC and other plastics, and recommended for the intended
purpose by the membrane manufacturer, to be submitted to the SO.
3.8.4 Gaskets
Natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special properties
such as resistance to oils are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics materials have to
be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be solid or hollow
sections of various profiles formed from cellular or non-cellular material or
combinations of these materials or sections. Submit suitable product to the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
3.8.7 Baffles
Materials for baffles shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.10 Drainage
For requirements of waste pipes, valves and fittings refer to the drawings and
mechanical specifications.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2 Preparation
4.2.4 Cracks
Seal all cracks and movement joints, with reinforcement and sealant, and allow to
cure. Repair all structural cracks to SO’s approval.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
4.2.6 Priming
Apply primer to substrate, ensuring full coverage and allow to dry prior to application
of membrane.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
Protect the applied flexible cementitious membrane surfaces from rain, ponding of
water, wind and direct sunlight, with plastic sheeting, during the curing period.
4.3.5 Surfacing
Where required, apply a 20 mm thick waterproof screed over the membrane.
Apply surfacing material over the waterproof screed.
Where tiles are laid directly onto the waterproof screed or membrane, use a
compatible proprietary adhesive recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Where the surfacing material is a RC topping slab or ballast materials, add a
proprietary recommended slip sheet in between the membrane and surfacing
material.
4.5 Protection
Ensure that from completion of the waterproofing works until Practical Completion:
a. The waterproofed area is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to
the satisfaction of the SO.
b. Do not allow petroleum based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to
come into contact with the waterproofed surface.
c. Protect the waterproofed areas from damage by subsequent building operations.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Waterproofing system
I. Name
II. Information of contracts, current or completed over last 5 years and details
of Quality Control Procedures adopted
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
5.1.6 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
5.2.1 Mock-ups
Prepare 1 x 1 metre panel sample of each internal floor and wall waterproofing type,
clearly showing compositional materials and components from structural slab to
finished surface. Include a sample of the floor /wall junction, the flashing around a
50mm diameter pipe and the drain outlet.
Keep at least one panel of each respective sample on site, for use as a site quality
standard for the remainder of the works.
Refer to the PSD for additional mock-up requirement if any.
5.3.1 Inspections
Carry out inspections at the following stages, ensuring that the work is carried out in a
proper and orderly manner:
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
3. MATERIALS 7
3.1 Metal Roof System 7
3.2 General Material Requirements 7
3.3 Metal Sheeting 7
3.4 Protective Coatings 7
3.5 Roof Deck (Liner) 8
3.6 Sk yl igh t s 8
3.7 Acc es so ri es 8
3.8 Pu r lin s 8
3.9 Underlay and Insulation System 8
3.10 Rainwater Goods 8
3.11 Safety and Maintenance 8
3.10 Cavity Barriers
8
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 General Workmanship Requirement 10
4.2 Supporting Members 10
4.3 Underlay and Insulation System 10
4.4 Installation of Metal Roof Sheeting 12
4.5 Sk yl ig h ts 12
4.6 Installation of Rainwater Goods 12
4.7 Protection 12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1. GENERAL
Read this Section with G01-010 "General Requirements" and all other contract
documents.
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for the construction of metal roofing systems
including metal sheets, finishes and insulation. The following types of metal sheets are
covered:
(a) Profiled Metal Sheets
(b) Standing Seams
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO, provided it
can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted. In the event that the standards or
codes are partially superseded or have become obsolete, refer to the current edition or
the approved substitution for the relevant clauses
Singapore Standards
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Other Standards
BS EN 363 Personal fall protection equipment. Personal fall protection
systems
BS EN 485-2 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Part 2: Sheet, strip and
plate. Mechanical properties
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Part 3: Sheet, strip and
plate. Tolerances on dimensions and form for hot-rolled
products
BS EN 485-4 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Part 4: Sheet, strip and
plate. Tolerances on shape and dimensions for cold-rolled
products
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Chemical composition and
form of wrought products – Part 3: Chemical composition and
form of products
BS EN 1396 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Coil coated sheet and strip
for general applications. Specifications
BS EN 10088 Stainless steels
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip – Tolerances
on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10223 Steel wire and wire products for fencing and netting
BS EN 13162 Thermal insulation products for buildings – Factory made
mineral wool (MW) products. Specification
BS EN 13501-1 Fire classification of construction products and building
elements – Part 1: Classification using data from reaction to fire
tests
BS EN 13501-5 Fire classification of construction products and building
elements– Part 5: Classification using data from external fire
exposure to roofs test
BS EN 13523 Coil coated metals – Test methods
BS EN 13823 Reaction to fire tests for building products – Building products
excluding floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single
burning item
BS ISO 4998 Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated and zinc-iron alloy-coated
carbon steel sheet of structural quality
BS ISO 9364 Steel sheet, 55 % aluminium-zinc alloy-coated by the
continuous hot-dip process, of commercial, drawing and
structural qualities
BS 460 Cast iron rainwater goods – Specification
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 1449-1.1 Steel plate, sheet and strip – Carbon and carbon-manganese
plate, sheet and strip – General specification
BS 6399-3 Code of practice for imposed roof loads
BS 8000-0 Workmanship on construction sites – Introduction and general
principles
EN ISO 1182 Reaction to fire tests for products – Non-combustibility test
EN ISO 1716 Reaction to fire tests for products – Determination of gross heat
of combustion (calorific value)
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1.3.2 Regulations
Refer to the following regulations for compliance in carrying out the Works”
Building and Construction Authority â Approved Document ("Approved Document")
Building and Construction Authority â Building Control Regulations
Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings ("Fire Code")
Code for Environmental Sustainability of Buildings
Code of Practice on Environmental Health
Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings
Guidelines on Envelope Thermal Transfer Value for Buildings
The above regulations refer to the latest edition (including any amendments) that are
currently in use.
1.3.3 Technical References
Refer to the following technical references for guidance in carrying out the Works:
Building and Construction Authority â CONQUAS 21 Enhancement Series, Good
Industry Practices Guide Books
Chartered Institution of Building Services â Guide A: Environmental Design
Shop drawings with all necessary details, including interfaces with other works.
Deliver to site in appropriate protective packaging marked for identification, and store
where directed by the Architect, the following spare components and materials for future
replacement and repair:
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide the following warranties in accordance with the specimen warranty, or otherwise
as approved agreed with the SO:
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor s Brief
When carrying out the proposals as set out in Section A05-010: Clause:1.4.1, take
account of the following requirements:
2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The loads shall be supported and transferred to the main building structure at the
appropriate locations as indicated in the drawings.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the live loads as stipulated in the Approved
Document, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over
the Works, if any.
2.1.1.3 Wind Loads
Allow for wind loads computed based on SS EN 1991-1 to 4 with a basic wind speed
of 35 m/s, and as recommended in SS 631.
2.1.1.4 Thermal Stress and Structural Movement
Allow for all thermal stress and other structural movement.
2.1.1.5 Structural Fixing
Structural fixings shall be able to resist the worst combination of the applied loads, as
well as foreseeable vibration transmitted to the roofing system.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
2.1.4.4 Durability
Provide necessary corrosion protection to roofing sheets, components and
accessories, appropriate to the location, use and design life of the building.
2.1.5 Acoustic Integrity
2.1.5.1 Sound Insulation
Attain acoustic rating as specified in Section A05-010: Clause:3.1.
2.1.6 Maintenance
Comply with the Workplace Safety and Health Act (Cap. 354A) and relevant safety
requirements of statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the Works.
The roof system shall be maintainable and replaceable in parts or whole
from the exterior. Allow routine cleaning to be conducted with minimal
disruption to the building occupants.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3 MATERIALS
3.1 Metal Roof System
The metal roofing system may be assembled on site with the individual components, or
supplied and installed as a composite system incorporating one or more components.
The metal roofing (MR) system(s) shall consist of the following types:
Metal Sheeting . .
Protective Coating . .
- Profile fillers/ Rib End System to be used for all end and expansion joints, to
Stops manufacturer's details
- Sealants Neutral-cure silicone sealant to Manufacturers details
Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal
- Acoustic Treatment:
sheet
- Underlayment and
Insulation System
- Waterproof Underlay
High tensile strength radiant and vapour barrier manufactured
with a high density core with cross linked polymer
reinforcements. The self-supporting foil is able to span up to 1.4
meter lengths across purlins. All metallic surfaces shall be
- Radiant/Vapour Barrier uniformly coated so that the low emissivity properties of the
surface are not harmed by atmospheric contaminates.
Tensile Strength (MD): 4.8 kN/m Elongation (MD): 101.5 % Tear
Resistance (MD): ≥2.0 N
Rainwater Goods
- General Flashing
- Penetration Flashing
- Miscellaneous
- .
Components
Flashing, ridge caps, valleys, fascia etc. shall be of similar material
- Component(s) .
and colour to match the selected roof material
Lifeline The anchor and cable systems shall be a horizontal lifeline system
that allows continuous uninterrupted access to all areas of a roof.
.
It can span up to 12m between anchors and provides continuous
hands-free access for all users of the fall protection system.
Anchor Modular multi-directional system design which activates and absorbs
energy no matter which orientation the load is applied, providing total
freedom and flexibility in system design.
Unique energy absorbing system reduces the overturning
.
movement on the bolts by 50%, enabling the use of fewer fasteners,
therefore, reducing the number of roof penetrations. Conforms to
EN 795, OSHA, ANSI, AS/NZS standards and has been tested to
both EN795 Class A and C standards
- Base Plate The base plate design incorporates several fixing holes to allow
the same plate to be fitted on different roof types Approx. .
405x405mm in size.
- Components A. Anchor
B. Hex swage tensioner
C. 8mm 7x7 SS cable
D. Traveler
E. Anchor intermediate guide .
3.3.1 Materials
3.3.1.1 Steel
To BS 1449-1.1.
3.3.1.2 Stainless steel
To BS EN 10088. Grad e 316 shall be used, unless otherwise specified in Section
A5-010: Clause:3.1.
3.3.1.3 Aluminium
To BS EN 485-2, 3, 4.
3.3.2 Form of Sheeting
Acceptable forms are as follows:
(a) Corrugated sheet in sinusoidal or trapezoidal profiles
(b) Standing seams
(c) Concealed fix profile
3.3.3 Base Metal Thickness
As specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1.
3.3.4 Pitch
Pitch shall be as indicated in drawings and shall comply with the minimum roof pitch
recommended by the manufacturer.
Joint widths shall vary by not more than 2 mm or 10%. Adjacent "flush" surfaces separated
by "hair line" joints to step by not more than 0.5 mm.
4.1.4.2 Installation
Level: ±2 mm
Camber .
Bow .
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
4.2 Supporting Members
Install supporting members in accordance with structural drawings and specifications.
Comply with SS 631 and take into account the following:
(a) The spacing of supporting members is within tolerances recommended by the roof
sheeting manufacturer.
(b) Any vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ends does not exceed 2 mm.
(c) The top of the supporting members is substantially in a plane parallel to the specified
roof pitch.
4.3 Underlay and Insulation System
4.3.1 Waterproof Underlay
Lay the waterproof underlay to comply with the following requirements:
(a) In direction of falls
(b) Fixed to structural support
(c) Allow for drainage of any water to the outside, or into gutter area
(d) End and side laps are at least 150 mm
4.3.2 Vapour Barrier
Locate and lay vapour barrier to comply with SS 631, in accordance with
manufacture’s recommendations, and to prevent interstitial condensation on visible
surfaces. Where condensation is expected, ensure adequate drainage provision is
made.
4.3.3 Thermal Insulation and Wire Mesh Support
Locate and lay thermal insulation and wire mesh support to comply with SS 631 and
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.4 Installation of Metal Roof Sheeting
Carry out the installation of metal roof sheeting, including any roof deck (liner)
materials, to comply with SS 631, in accordance manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where possible, minimize site work by using sheets cut to length in the factory.
Comply with the following requirements.
4.4.1 Laying the Sheeting
Support sheets as near to their ends as practicable, notwithstanding that the sheet
end shall always positively overhang the full width of the supporting surface to
prevent water intrusion by capillary action. Ensure compliance with manufacturer’s
recommended maximum and minimum unsupported end overhang for the sheet.
4.4.2 Fixing of Metal Roof Sheeting
Fix sheeting to manufacturer’s recommendation.
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, install fasteners normal to the plane
of the roof.
Pay particular attention to combinations of internal and external wind pressures
and frictional drag.
Where non-returnable movement is allowed to take place during fixing, make
provision for anchoring of the sheets.
Give consideration to the anchoring of roofing against movement down the slope due
to vibration and thermal movements.
4.4.2.1 Pierce Fixing
Where pierce fixing is used, always place screws through the crown of a rib, and
adequately seal all fasteners which pierce the roofing to prevent leakage.
4.4.2.2 Concealed Fixing
Use clips provided by the roof sheeting manufacturer.
For steep pitches, pierce fix through each sheet under the flashing or capping,
along the top of the sheets.
4.4.3 Projections
Adequately flash any projections through roofs such as pipes, ducts and conduits
and to approved details.
4.4.4 Vibration Proofing of Fixings
Vibration proof all fixings subject to vibrating loads by the use of locking nuts, locking
washers or other methods approved by the Architect.
4.4.5 Prevention of Bimetallic Corrosion
Prevent corrosion of dissimilar metals in contact from galvanic action by:
(a) separating or isolating the dissimilar metals with separator
(b) appropriate detailing of the overlapping of metal sheets to avoid crevice
corrosion.
4.4.6 Drilling, Piercing and Cutting
When making holes, mask the area around the hole to protect the paint from damage
by swarf. Remove swarf, nails, screws, other metallic particles, etc. immediately after
drilling, piercing and cutting of metal roof sheeting. If swarf becomes stuck to
sheeting, remove without damaging paint coating of the sheeting.
Do not punch holes, unless it can be done without causing local distortions to the
metal roof sheeting.
4.4.7 End and Side Laps
4.4.7.1 Planning
Plan and lay metal roof sheeting to minimize end and side laps. Avoid formation of
laps at roof protrusions and attachments.
4.4.7.2 End Laps
Provide two strips of manufacturer’s recommended profile fillers and sealant, one at
the low end of the lap to prevent capillary and the other at the high end to prevent
condensation from entering the lap. Mechanically fasten when recommended by the
manufacturer.
4.4.7.3 Side Laps
For pierced fastened roof sheeting, form side laps with the lap cavity on top of the
sheet with profile filler or sealant such that any moisture build-up in this cavity can be
drained down the roof slope unobstructed by the filler or sealant.
4.4.8 Sealant Jointing
Apply sealants and jointing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Carry out the following in respect of the sealant jointing works:
(a) Clean and prepare joint surfaces before application and ensure that joints are free
from dust, grease and other contaminants.
(b) Apply jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made watertight and
are in accordance with details in shop drawings approved by the Architect. Ensure
backing rods, when needed, are installed at the correct depths.
(c) Apply sealant on the same day as joint surfaces are cleaned.
NPQS
NPQS
4.5 Skylights A5-10
A5-10 Metal
Metal Roof
Roof
4.7 Protection
4.7.1 Completion of Roof
Ensure that from completion of the roof until contractual completion:
(a) The roof is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
(b) Do not allow solvents or other harmful chemical to come into contact with the
roof surface.
(c) Protect the finished roof areas from damage by subsequent building
operations.
4.7.2 Wet Weather
In wet weather, carry out the following:
(a) Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep unfinished areas of the
roof dry.
(b) Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary
roof is provided over the working area.
(c) If unavoidable wetting of the construction occurs, take prompt action to minimize
and make good any damage.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
5 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Technical Submissions
Include in the construction programme, events for submission of the following
information:
(a) Name of the metal roof manufacturer and all components of the roofing system,
and relevant technical data.
(b) Name of Subcontractor â (if any).
(c) All other submissions specified in this Section.
5.1.1.1 Computation Submissions
Where only performance values are specified, submit computations as follows:
(a) Structural calculations for fixing system
(b) Thermal performance calculation
(c) Sound transmission performance data
(d) Temporary support system calculation (if necessary)
5.1.2 Work Submissions
5.1.2.1 Method Statements
Prior to commencing construction work, submit a detailed method statement to the
Architect. Include at least the following information:
(a) Sequence of construction.
(b) Acceptance of structure and substrate.
(c) Fixing and installation of the roof system.
(d) Method of forming laps, joints and penetrations, and application of sealant
and fillers.
(e) Accommodation of lightning protection systems.
(f) Accommodation of all penetrations and other trades/items which impact the
roof.
5.1.2.2 Shop Drawings
Where specified, prepare shop drawings, and include:
(a) Typical and non-typical details of roof system and associated components
including interfaces and flashings with adjacent structure and/or other cladding
elements.
(b) End and side lap details and details at scales agreed with the Architect, of
ridge, eaves, gutters, valley, hips and any changes in roof pitch.
(c) Provision and supports for insulation, underlay and vapour barriers.
(d) Waterproofing of penetration through roof, including lightning protection points
and/or tapes, and vent pipes etc.
(e) Details of roof drainage system
(f) Penetrations to roof
Do not commence fabrication until shop drawings have been reviewed and
permission to proceed has been obtained from the Architect.
Steel Roof sheeting ASTM E108 Surface Flame Spread (Class 0 or Class A)
Structural support
. .
members
Fasteners . .
EN 13501-1/ BS EN 1182
Insulation Non-Combustibility Thermal Conductivity
ASTM C518
(b) Certificates
Provide certificates as follows:
5.2.2 Mock-Ups
Within the timeframe shown in the construction programme, provide mock-up panel of
sufficient size to obtain agreement on the intended construction. Also include the following
elements, where applicable:
(a) Eaves
(b) Ridge
(c) Edge/gutter
(d) Upstand
(e) Vent pipes / other building services protrusions / penetrations
If approved by the Architect, this mock-up panel may form part of the Works. Provide
additional mock-ups as follows:
Mock-up Requirement
- -
- -
5.3 Inspections
Inform the Architect on completion of the substrate / roof structure and each stage of
installation for each roof system specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1. Proceed to next
stage after approval by the Architect.
5.4 On-Site Tests
5.4.1 Water Tests
Carry out on-site water tests upon completion of a part of the Works, in accordance with the
following procedure:
(a) Spray with a continuous water jet from a water hose with normal tap pressure. Hold
the hose at 1.2 m
away from the roof surface. Place the hose at the level of horizontal joints so that the
jet cone scatter will cover the joints.
(b) The test is deemed as passed if there is no water seepage or dampness observed
from the underside of the roof.
(c) Any areas showing water seepage or other defects to be made good after a
method statement for
reinstatement has been approved by the Architect.
Use tested areas as a site quality standard for the remainder of the project.
Carry out on-site water test at the following area and frequency:
- -
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Frame Construction 11
4.2 Door Construction 11
4.3 Installation of Ironmongery 12
4.4 Installation of Doors 13
4.5 Completion 14
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for internal doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Household shelter doors are not included. External Doors
are covered in section A6-20 and Roller Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-30.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS CP 1 Use of timber in buildings
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic wood
preservative
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire doors
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
Code of Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings 2002
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on
thermosetting resins. Determination of properties.
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
Tolerances on shape and dimensions for hot-rolled products
BS EN 486 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extrusion ingots
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical composition
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
3.3 Timber
Unless otherwise specified, all timber to be Kapur, Nyatoh or Meranti.
Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content between
adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.
Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of SO.
Season and kiln dry timber after treatment.
Select timber and construct timber doors in accordance with SS 347
3.4 Plywood
All plywood is to be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance with
SS 347.
Grade 1 for use in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains.
Grade 2 for painting or similar treatment.
Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood to be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random matched.
On double doors veneer pattern to be mirrored or as set out in clause 3.1.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
3.6 Facing
3.7.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020 unless otherwise agreed with SO.
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755.
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 2.5mm.
Platforms, webs, flanges, races and screw flutes of sufficient size to satisfy all
structural requirements and eliminate distortion of elements in the works.
3.8 Glass
3.8.1 General
Glass to comply with ASTM C1172 and bear marks indicating its nature and
manufacturer.
3.8.1.1 Fire Rating
Where specified provide fire rating to comply with SS 332 and FSSD requirements.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
Achieve class 1 of BS 476 for surface spread of flame unless otherwise specified.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588.
3.8.2 Laminated
Thickness as stated in clause 3.1. Use identical or approximately equal glass
thicknesses and type (non identical glass types strictly to SO approval only) on both
sides of the laminate. Submit glass combination to SO.
Protect inter layer from effects of moisture absorption in service including clouding,
shrinking back and de-lamination.
3.9 Gaskets
3.9.1 Gaskets
Extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45.
3.10 Seals
3.11 Ironmongery
3.11.1 General
All ironmongery to be at least half-hour fire rated.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
In the case of fire door, provide ironmongery with the same fire rating integrity as the
doorset and comply with SS 332.
Where a brand name is specified, this is a guide to the respective quality, design and
profile required. Submit suitable ironmongery products to the SO.
All ironmongery for public communal areas and other specific locations is to comply
with the Code on Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Ironmongery including door closer(s) to conform to requirements of endurance test as
recommended by selected manufacturer.
3.11.2 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, hinges to be fully mortised grade 1.4301 stainless steel
with non-removable stainless steel pins and comply with BS EN 1935, classification
as set out in clause 3.1. All doors to have minimum 1.5 pairs of hinges.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 General
Unless otherwise specified or shown in drawings, construct timber door frames with
tight fitting mortice, mitre or tenon joints, wedged and fixed with 10mm diameter
hardwood pins.
4.2.1 General
Connect framing of flush doors with corrugated metal fasteners or other jointing
method approved by the SO.
Unless other specified or shown in drawings, provide 6-15mm hardwood lipping,
mechanically or adhesive fixed to all faces of door.
Install hardwood blocking within doors to receive installation of ironmongery.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
4.2.8 Storage
Store doors and frames in a dry protected area. Provide appropriate wrapping for
protection and racks to prevent twisting and warping during storage.
Protect veneered doors from direct sunlight during storage.
4.3.1 General
Assemble and carefully fix using fasteners supplied by the manufacturer with
equivalent corrosion protection and matching finish.
4.3.2 Fixing
Holes for components to be no larger than the minimum required for satisfactory fit /
operation.
Ensure that when fixed the ironmongery does not compromise the integrity of the
assembly as established by testing /assessment.
Do not use through bolt fixing for face fixed items.
Ensure that acoustic stripping is not interrupted by ironmongery.
Where intumescent strips are interrupted by ironmongery provide additional
intumescent paste around ironmongery to maintain fire rating.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
4.3.3 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, install one and a half pair or 3 hinges per door.
Install panic bolts and latches in accordance with BS EN 1125
4.3.3.1 Location
Mounting height to be as the manufactures recommendations and comply with the
requirements of the FSSD. Where not specified, position hinges 250mm from top and
bottom of the door leaf.
4.4.1 General
Maintain moisture content to suit specified moisture content during delivery, storage
and fixing to completion of works. When instructed by the SO test components with
an approved moisture meter.
Prime or seal surfaces of timber frames that will be inaccessible after fixing.
Allow sufficient tolerance for steel doors to expand due to temperature increase and
timber doors to moisture changes.
Include 25mm rebate in frame for all fire doors.
4.4.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±1.5mm
Fix timber frames 150mm from each end, adjacent to each hanging point and at a
maximum of 600mm in between.
Method of fixing to be demonstrated on the sample doors, do not fix doors until
approval of method has been received.
Install fire rated door complete with ironmongery in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and in compliance with requirements of FSSD and SS 332.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation during the door swing.
4.4.3 Sealants
4.4.3.1 Non-fire doors
For non fire doors, seal all junctions between walls and doors with silicone sealant.
Allow for insertion of bond breaker tape or backing rod and apply primer to face of
surfaces when recommended by manufacturer of sealant.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
4.5 Completion
At completion, hand over three sets of all keys (or other quantity as specified), each
to be marked/labelled.
Present confirmation from manufacturer of the number of keys supplied.
Maintain agreed security protocol for items such as master keys or common keys.
These to be officially hand over without opportunity for deliberate or accidental breach
of security.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the door manufacturer and include of copies of technical data relating to
each of the door types, where specified include Fire rating certificates for both
doors and door sets.
b. Names of the ironmongery, intumescent strip, smoke baffles and acoustic seals
manufacturer/s, include copies of technical details of all the items. Wherever
possible all ironmongery and inserts are to be obtained from the same
manufacturer.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted. Convenient
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
a. Doors
b. Frame finish
c. Ironmongery finish
5.1.6 Certificates
Submit test certificates and documents for installed fire doors required by SO and or
Building Authority.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is to be
submitted by the manufacturer for each type of Fire door. Submit certificates of
conformity issued by PSB.
Submit documentation of endurance test for ironmongery.
5.2.1 Samples
Refer to the PSD for sample submission requirements.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for any mock-ups required for the project.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests
No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Site Measurement 11
4.2 Door Construction 11
4.3 Installation of Ironmongery 13
4.4 Installation of Doors 13
4.5 Completion 14
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for external doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Internal Doors are covered in section A6-10 and Roller
Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-30.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic
wood preservative
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire doors
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
Code of Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on
thermosetting resins. Determination of properties.
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
Tolerances on shape and dimensions for hot-rolled products
BS EN 486 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extrusion ingots
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to carry out and submit the following
items to the SO.
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the doors based on the design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Submit names of manufacturer’s for door leaves, door sets (if specified)
and ironmongery.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
3.3 Timber
Unless otherwise specified all timber to be Kapur, Chengal or Balau
Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content between
adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.
Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of SO.
Fire retardant treatment system, to be submitted to the SO. Season and kiln dry
timber after treatment.
3.4 Plywood
All plywood is to be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance with
SS 347
Grade 1 for use in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains.
Grade 2 for painting or similar treatment.
Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood to be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random matched.
On double doors veneer pattern to be mirrored or to be as set out in clause 3.1.
Timber doors exposed to sheltered external environment, such as open corridors or
car porches, to be marine grade plywood.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
3.6 Facing
3.7 Aluminium
3.7.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020 unless otherwise agreed with SO.
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755.
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 2.5mm.
Platforms, webs, flanges, races and screw flutes of sufficient size to satisfy all
structural requirements and eliminate distortion of elements in the works.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
3.8 Glass
3.8.1 General
Glass to comply with ASTM C1172 and bear marks indicating its nature and
manufacturer.
3.8.1.1 Fire Rating
Where specified provide fire rating to comply with SS 332 and FSSD requirements.
Achieve class 1 of BS 476 for surface spread of flame unless otherwise specified.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588.
3.8.2 Laminated
Thickness as stated in clause 3.1. Use identical or approximately equal glass
thicknesses and type (non identical glass types strictly to SO approval only) on both
sides of the laminate. Submit glass combination to SO.
Protect inter layer from effects of moisture absorption in service including clouding,
shrinking back and de-lamination.
3.9 Gaskets
3.9.1 Gaskets
Extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45.
3.10 Seals
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
3.11 Ironmongery
Unless otherwise specified, all ironmongery to be at least half-hour fire rated and
suitable for external use. Where fire doors of a higher rating are to be provided all
ironmongery to comply with SS 332 at 800°C or compa tible requirement as agreed
with SO.
Any brand name specified is a guide to the respective quality, design and profile
required. Submit suitable ironmongery products to the SO.
All ironmongery for public communal areas and other specific locations is to comply
with the Code on Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Ironmongery including door closer(s) to conform to requirements of endurance test as
specified by selected manufacturer.
3.11.1 Hinges
To be fully mortised grade 1.4401 stainless steel with non-removable stainless steel
pins and comply with BS EN 1935, classification as set out in clause 3.1. All doors to
have minimum 1.5 pairs of hinges.
3.12.1 Fixings
Fixings to manufacturers recommendations and be galvanised or grade 316 stainless
steel.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.2.1 General
Fire doors to comply with SS 332.
Door faces to be flush with seamless edges.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
Form laminated cores with timber battens adhesive fixed together. Lay battens with
grain in alternate and opposite direction to balance stress and reduce distortion.
4.2.7 Storage
Store, doors and frames in a dry protected area. Provide appropriate wrapping for
protection and racks to prevent twisting and warping during storage.
Protect veneered doors from direct sunlight during storage.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
4.3.1 General
Assemble and carefully fix using fasteners supplied by the manufacturer with
equivalent corrosion protection and matching finish.
4.3.2 Fixing
Holes for components to be no larger than the minimum required for satisfactory fit /
operation.
Ensure that when fixed the ironmongery does not compromise the integrity of the
assembly as established by testing /assessment.
Do not use through bolt fixing for face fixed items.
Ensure that acoustic stripping is not interrupted by ironmongery.
Where intumescent strips are interrupted by ironmongery provide additional
intumescent paste around ironmongery to maintain fire rating.
Adjust all ironmongery and doors to achieve the following:
a. Door frame gap 5 mm max
b. Door floor finish gap 6 mm max
c. Door closing in accordance with SS 332
4.3.3 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, install one and a half pair or 3 hinges per door.
Install panic bolts and latches in accordance with BS EN 1125
4.3.3.1 Location
Mounting height to be as the manufactures recommendations and comply with the
requirements of the FSSD. Where not specified, position hinges 250mm from top and
bottom of the door leaf.
4.4.1 General
Maintain moisture content to suit specified moisture content during delivery, storage
and fixing to completion of the works. When instructed by the SO test components
with an approved moisture meter.
Prime or seal surfaces of timber frames that will be inaccessible after fixing.
Allow sufficient tolerance for steel doors to expand due to temperature increase and
timber doors to moisture changes.
4.4.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±1.5mm
Fix timber frames 150mm from each end, adjacent to each hanging point and at a
maximum of 600mm in between.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
Method of fixing to be demonstrated on the sample doors, do not fix doors until
approval of method has been received.
Install fire rated door complete with ironmongery in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and in compliance with requirements of FSSD and SS 332.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation during the door swing.
4.4.3 Sealants
4.4.3.1 Non-fire doors
For non fire doors, seal all junctions between walls and doors with silicone sealant.
Allow for insertion of bond breaker tape or backing rod and apply primer to face of
surfaces when recommended by manufacturer of sealant.
4.4.3.2 Fire doors
For fire doors, fill all voids between fire door frame and wall with 1:3 cement sand mix
or proprietary grout or pack and seal with mineral fibre, submit proposal for void filling
to SO.
4.5 Completion
At completion hand over three sets of all keys (or other quantity as specified), each to
be marked/labelled and provide a metal lockable key box to hold all keys.
Present confirmation from manufacturer of the number of keys supplied.
Maintain agreed security protocol for items such as master keys or common keys.
These to be officially hand over without opportunity for deliberate or accidental breach
of security.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the door and acoustic seals manufacturer and include copies of
technical data relating to each of the types. Include certificates of compliance for
all fire doors.
b. Name of the ironmongery manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details
of all the ironmongery items. Wherever possible all ironmongery is to be obtained
from the same manufacturer.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
a. Doors
b. Frame finish
c. Ironmongery finish
5.1.5 Warranty
No item.
5.1.7 Certificates
Submit test certificates and documents for installed fire doors required by SO and or
Building Authority.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is to be
submitted by the manufacturer for each type of Fire door. Submit certificates of
conformity issued by PSB.
Submit documentation of endurance test for ironmongery.
5.2.1 Samples
Refer to the PSD for sample submission requirements.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for any mock-ups required for the project.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests
No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Installation of Doors 10
4.2 Installation of Ironmongery 10
4.3 Fire Shutter Markings 10
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for roller shutters and their associated
ironmongery. Requirements for internal and external doors are covered in sections
A6-10 and A6-20.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic
wood preservative
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire doors
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
SS 489 Fire shutters
Other Standards
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dip metal coated steel sheet and strip
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel: Lists of stainless steel
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in
alloys EN AW 6060 and EN AW 6063
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures.
BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-manganese plate,
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
1.4.6 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
3.2.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020.
Junctions, hangers, bracing and fixings to satisfy all structural requirements and
eliminate distortion of the units.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
3.6 Accessories
3.6.1 Fixings
Fixing for fire rated shutters, to comply with FSSD requirements.
Fixings for face fixed frames are to be recessed into the frame and concealed with a
metal face cap fabricated from metal finished to match the frame.
3.6.4 Laths
Design, material and finish of Interlocking laths as set out in the drawings.
Provide steel endplates to alternate laths.
Provide T section bottom rail of the same material as the laths.
3.7 Ironmongery
All ironmongery to be at least half hour fire rated. Where fire dors of a higher rating
are to be provided the ironmongery must comply with this requirement.
Any brand name specified is a guide to the respective quality, design and profile
required.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
3.9 Sealants
Insert Intumescent sealant at the wall/roller shutter channel and head junction of all
fire rated shutters. Submit intumescent sealant to the SO.
Inset silicone sealant at junction of all external walls and roller shutter channel and
head.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±2mm. Fix
with stainless steel self tapping screws at 300mm centres.
Fill all voids between frame and adjacent wall, beams or soffits with 1:3 sand cement
mortar.
Seal external face of junction with polysulphide sealant set on bond breaker tape or
polyethylene rod. Apply primer to face of joint.
Method of fixing to be demonstrated on the sample doors, do not fix doors until
approval of method has been received.
Install fire rated doors in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the
FSSD requirements to achieve the required fire rating.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the roller shutter door manufacturer and include of copies of technical
data relating to each of the door types.
b. Name of the ironmongery manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details
all the ironmongery items. Wherever possible all ironmongery is to be obtained
from the same manufacturer.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
Provide a Schedule of Evidence of compliance that the installation complies with this
standard and contains records and required information listed in Clause 9.4 of SS
489.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.6.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples to the SO prior to ordering material:
a. Lath construction -300mmx 300mm of all door types
b. Side channel frame- 600mm length
c. Install one door of each type for SO approval before proceeding Door panel
300mmx 300mm of all door types.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
5.3 Inspection
Inform the SO on completion of the installation and organise a demonstration for the
SO. This to include the opening and closing of the doors, the activation of the fusible
link if specified and a water test for external roller shutters to confirm that water will
not flow under the doors and seep into the building.
5.4 Tests
No item.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 5
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 7
2.1 Contractor’s Brief 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General Requirements 14
4.2 Construction of Fixtures 14
4.3 Sanitary-ware Installation 15
4.4 Fixing Proprietary Fitting Items 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for fixtures and fittings in building projects. It
broadly covers three categories of works as follows:
a. Fixed furnitures such as cabinets and wardrobes etc.
b. Sanitary fittings and closets etc.
c. Other fixtures/ wall hangings etc.
This section does not cover kitchen hobs and sculptures etc., which are specialist
works to supplier’s specification and detail.
1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS CP 1 The use of timber in building construction
SS 1 Plywood
SS 16 WC Seats (plastic)
SS 68 WC flushing cisterns, including dual flush cisterns and flush
pipes
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic
Wood preservative
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 222 Stainless steel slab urinals
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations)
SS 347 Timber Doors
SS 378 Low capacity WC flushing cistern up to 4.5L maximum
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
Other Standards
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles
- specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506-2 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners. Nuts
BS EN 179 Emergency exit devices
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on
thermosetting resins. Determination of properties.
BS EN 485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 1011: Welding – Recommendation for welding of metallic materials.
Part 1 General guidance for arc welding (AMD 13981)
Part 2 Arc welding of ferritic steels
Part 3 Arc welding of stainless steel
Part 4 Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
Part 5 Welding of clad steel
BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices for swing doors
BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks-requirements and test methods
BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges
BS EN 3506 –1 Stainless steel fasteners
BS EN 3506-2 Mechanical properties of stainless steel fasteners
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel .Lists of stainless steel
BS EN 10088-3 Technical delivery conditions for semi finished products,
sheet/plate, strip for general purposes
BS EN 10113 Hot rolled products in Weldable fine grain structural steel
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dipped metal coated steel sheet and strip –
tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10152 Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products
BS EN 10259 Cold rolled stainless steelstrip and cut lengths
BS EN 12051 Door and window bolts
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection-nickel, copper, chromium coatings
BS 438 Decorative high pressure (HPL) laminate sheet based on
thermosetting resins
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 1186-2 Timber for and workmanship in joinery. Specification for
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
workmanship
BS 1186-3 Timber for and workmanship in joinery. Specification for wood
trim and fixing
BS 1449 Steel plate sheet and strip
BS 1453 Specification for filler materials for gas welding
BS 1461 Galvanising
BS 2901 Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding
BS 2989 Continuous hot dipped metal coated steel sheet and strip
BS 3830 Vitreous enamelled steel building components
BS 3987 Anodic oxide coating-external aluminium anodising
BS 4190 Black hexagonal bolts
BS 4255 Non cellular gaskets
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4604 High strength friction grip bolts
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered panels
BS 5889 One part silicone sealant
BS 6363 Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow
sections
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodized coatings for
architectural applications
AS 3715 Metal finishing:Thermoset powder coating
ASTM 2605-2 Organic coatings on aluminium extrusions
ASTM C 509 Elastomeric cellular preformed gasket and sealing material
ASTM C 1172 Laminated architectural flat glass
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
1.4.5 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Loading
The self-weight and other associated loads of the fixtures and fittings are to be
supported and transferred to the main building structure.
Make allowance for the normal loading exerted on the items e.g. Cabinet loads or
occasional loads from users or maintenance workman using fitting for temporary
foothold.
2.1.4 Environmental
Take into account the environment for which the Works are to be applied, Paying
particular attention to the Daily and seasonal variations in humidity and temperature
in the Tropics.
Established with the SO, the operational environment of each fitting, particularly if the
fitting is used in a wet, damp or humid environment. Make proposals to take into
account, that the fitting is suitable for the established usage and environment.
2.1.5 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to ensure that the surface finishes are uniform in
colour and texture and appearance throughout.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
3.2 Timber
3.2.2 Plywood
All plywood shall be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance
with SS:347.
Use Grade 1 in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains
Use Grade 2 for elements with painting or similar treatment.
Use Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood shall be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random
matched.
On double doors to wardrobes, veneer pattern shall be mirrored unless otherwise
indicated in the drawings or directed.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
3.3.1 Sections
Stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10088. Stainless steel sections shall comply with
BS EN 10088-3.
Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel grade shall be 1.4401 (previously 316
external grade).
3.3.1.1 Finishes
a. 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
b. 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
1G/2G; low reflectivity.
c. 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and external
architectural applications.
d. 1P/2P (7 or 8) Bright buffed/polished: Non-directional finish with high degree of
reflectivity. Achieved by mechanical polishing.
Take note of the references in brackets are the nearest equivalent finishes to the
superseded BS 1449-2.
The finish is achieved on the exposed surface only unless specified otherwise.
3.4.1 Generally
Steel components to be hot dip galvanised after fabrication unless alternative
corrosion protection is approved.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
3.7.1 Generally
Submit suitable fasteners to the SO.
3.7.1.1 Fasteners to be to the appropriate, as agreed with the SO and unless
otherwise stated, to be of the same metal as the component with matching
coating and finish.
3.7.1.2 Where a particular fixing or fastening is not shown or fully detailed, design
the fixing in order to fulfil the performance criteria.
3.7.1.3 Stainless Steel Fasteners: Fixings and fasteners shall comply with BS EN
ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2. Unless noted otherwise, grade A4
shall be used for visible fasteners, in all other circumstances grade A2
shall be used.
3.7.1.4 Screws: Provide Brass countersunk head screws for all internal items,
provide brass cups for screws that are likely to be removed for access.
3.7.1.5 Nails: No nail heads shall be visible on exposed surfaces. Nails in wet
areas to be corrosion protected or non-corrosive.
3.7.2 Methods
Concealed fixings are to be adopted unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Locate face fixings in unobtrusive positions.
3.7.3 Strength
Allow minimum safety factor of 2.5 in addition to the anchorage design safety factor.
Where requested on drawings supply a torque setting for bolted or screwed
fastenings.
Structural anchorage to be by two or more fixing devices.
3.8.1 Generally
Apply coats after completion of fabrication and drilling of all fixing holes.
Remove all burrs and sharp amuses prior to coating.
3.8.2 Galvanizing
Galvanizing shall be to BS EN ISO 1461.
Provide all necessary vent and drain holes in approved locations and seal to approval
after galvanizing.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
3.8.7 Anodizing
Comply with AS1231 thickness grade 25.
3.8.8 PVF2
Wet applied fluoropolymer to comply with ASTM 2605-2 1998.
Resin content minimum of 70%, minimum coating 25 microns.
3.9 Facings
3.10 Glass
3.10.1 General
Provide glass to conform with type and properties as set out in clause 3.1 or as
indicated in the drawings.
3.10.2 Laminated
Comply with ASTM C 1172.
Bear marks indicating its nature and processor.
Protect inter layer from effects of moisture absorption in service including clouding,
shrinking back and de-lamination.
Refer to clause 3.1 for type and thickness to be used on both sides of the laminate.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
3.11 Ironmongery
Comply with:
a. BS EN 179 Emergency exit devices
b. BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
c. BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
d. BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices for swing doors
e. BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks-requirements and test methods
f. BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges
g. BS EN 12051 Door and window bolts
h. BS EN 3506 –1 Stainless steel fasteners
Location and type as set out on drawings/schedule. Provide proprietary products or
performance specified items as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to
the SO.
Ironmongery in kitchens, bathrooms and wet areas shall be corrosion resistant.
Hinges on kitchen unit doors to open to 90 °.
3.12 Accessories
3.12.1 Gaskets
Use extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45,
Cellular rubber to ASTM C 509.
Provide Silicone free dry PVC push-in gaskets mitred at corners.
3.12.2 Sealants
Use Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. Where specified provide
proprietary products as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to the SO.
3.12.3 Adhesives
Use Proprietary products as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to the
SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site prior to shop fabrication. Raise to SO’s
attention, discrepancies and deviations and submit adjustments to be made to
accommodate these discrepancies and tolerance.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. Locate joints
only as indicated on the architectural drawings.
4.2.2 Trims
Wherever possible fabricate in un-jointed lengths between angles or ends of runs.
Where running joints are unavoidable obtain approval of location and method of
jointing. Use Mitre angle joints unless otherwise specified.
4.2.3 Completion
Ensure that doors and drawers are accurately aligned within tolerances of the hinges
and runners as established by cabinetry ironmongery manufacturers. Adjust as
necessary to ensure smooth operation.
Check, adjust and lubricate hardware as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
Neatly finish mitres or bull nose with under edges of material ground to uniform
condition. Do not overlap materials.
4.2.4.3 Shims
Separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducing pads. Pads shall have/be:
a. minimum 3 mm thickness,
b. sufficiently reduce friction to permit movement,
c. resistant to wear,
d. positively retained in position ( open ended slots are not acceptable ).
e. not be subjected to heat damage from welding , cutting or to excessive pressure
from over tightening of bolts.
Plastic shims are acceptable at static connections for which the shims transfer only
compressive forces.
Wood shims shall not be used.
4.2.5 Doors
Where timber lipping is specified, provide12mm hardwood lipping, mechanically or
adhesive fixed to all faces of door.
4.2.5.1 Facing
a. Veneer facing: provide balancing veneer in all instances.
b. Laminate facing: Bond laminate facing to face of door with adhesive
recommended by the laminate manufacturer. Provide balancing laminate in all
instances. Laminate to be terminated 12mm from face of door at hardwood lipping
unless shown otherwise on drawings.
4.3.1 Taps
Fix securely, making a watertight seal with the appliance. Place hot tap to left of cold
tap as viewed by user of appliance.
4.3.2 Waste/Overflows
Bed in waterproof jointing compound and fix with resilient washer between appliance
and backnut.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the manufacturer of the fittings and include of copies of technical data
relating to each of the items listed.
b. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.5.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Provide mock-ups for items as indicated in the PSD.
5.3 Inspection
If directed by the SO, allow access for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication
areas of fittings for the fabrication or treatment procedures, e.g. timber treatment,
glass treatment, painting process.
5.4 Tests
No item.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 Standards, Codes, Regulations and Technical References
1.4 Trade Preamble
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations
2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor’s Brief
3 MAT E RI AL S
3.1 Types
3.2 Materials
3.3 Finishes
3.4 Fixing and Fasteners
3.5 Facings
3.6 Accessories
4 WO RKMANS HIP
4.1 General Requirements
5 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submissions
5.2 Samples and Mock-ups
5.3 Inspections
5.4 On-Site Tests
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
1 GENERAL
Read this Section with G01-010 "General Requirements" and all other contract documents
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for signage in building projects and includes the
following:
(a) Main building signage
(b) Room signage
(c) Directional signage
(d) Statutory signage
(e) Graphics
(f) External road signs
(g) Any other Signage and Graphics Works described in the contract
documents and drawings.
Read this Section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following sections:
In the event that the standards or codes are partially superseded or have become
obsolete, refer to the current edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Singapore Standards
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
1.3.2 Regulations
Refer to the following regulations for compliance in carrying out the Works:
The above regulations refer to the latest edition (including any amendments) that are
currently in use.
Refer to the following technical references for guidance in carrying out the Works:
Engage experienced and qualified personnel for detail development based on the design
intent indicated in the drawings and schedules. Allow a minimum of 14 days for the review
of each submission, mock-up and associated resubmissions/amendments.
Submit the following to the SO for review:
(a) All necessary details for the fabrication and installation of the fixtures and
fittings, including interfaces with other works and connections.
(b) Manufacturers and products for fixtures and fitting items when called for.
(c) Method of fabrication and erection/installation.
(d) Site and actual size of components shall be measured and recorded in the shop
drawings. Adjustments shall be proposed as required and explained to the SO for
review and acceptance.
Liaise and co-ordinate all mechanical and electrical services, exposed, or concealed,
without compromise on the performance integrity of each individual service/system.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Deliver to Site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store where
directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair.
Supply the following spare material and store in an area agreed with the SO:
Quantity
Item
The confirmation of the requirement for the spare material shall be made at the time of the
completion of the Works. If the SO chooses to omit the requirement, then the full cost
omission shall be made to the Employer.
Prepare and submit a quality control plan for the SO’s review and acceptance,
including the following:
(a) Preparation and installation procedures
(b) Co-ordination with related works
(c) Construction programme related to this Works
Compliance to required inspections, testing, certificate, calculations and material
usage. Competent technicians shall be provided to check and co-ordinate the
installation.
The SO is the sole judge on the acceptance in quality of works.
1.4.5 Warranty
No item.
No item.
1.1.2 Definitions
No item.
1.1.3 Abbreviations
1.1.3.1 CNC
1.1.3.2 RI
Registered Inspector
1.1.3.3 TOP
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Drawings provided by the Consultant are to illustrate design intent only and shall not be
used for fabrication and construction.
Prepare shop drawings, samples, mock-ups, etc., and submit to the SO for review
and acceptance. Works can proceed only when such items have been approved
by the SO.
2.1.3 Co-ordination
Co-ordinate and review all drawings by Consultant along with related specifications.
Such coordination includes necessary connections to work of other trades and potential
conflicts.
Provide all work required for complete fabrication and installation of all approved
signage and graphics.
Include temporary signs that need clearance from authority. These signs shall be for BCA
TOP or FSSD RI inspections. Temporary signs shall be printed on laminated paper to
actual size, or other material as required by the SO.
3 MATERIALS
3.1 Types
For schedule of signage works for this project, refer to the details shown in the
architectural drawings and relevant cut sheets.
3.2 Materials
3.2.1 General
Provide materials as shown and detailed in the drawings and as specified in this Section.
Exterior signs shall be provided with protective coating to ensure colour integrity and
abrasion resistance. All hinged openings shall be weatherproofed to prevent moisture,
excessive dust, insects, and debris from accumulating within cabinet areas.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
psf wind loads, or otherwise stated in the local building codes and authority. Thermal
movements shall be considered in the design to minimise distortions and excessive
deflections.
3.2.2 Aluminium
Aluminium sheet and plate: ASTM B209 alloy and temper recommended by producer
and finisher suitable for type of use and finish indicated. Properties for strength and
durability shall be at least alloy 5005-H32.
Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B221, allow and temper recommended by producer and
finisher suitable for type of use and finish indicated. Strength and durability properties
shall be at least that of alloy 6063-T5.
3.2.3 Glass
Use galvanised steel sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either
commercial or forming steel.
Use stainless steel sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, type 304, stretcher-
leveled standard of flatness.
Steel members fabricated from plate or bar stock: ASTM A 529/A 529M or ASTM A 572/A
572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength.
For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials with flat, smooth surfaces
without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
3.2.4.1 Finishes
(a) 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
(b) 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
1G/2G; low reflectivity.
(c) 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and
external architectural applications.
Bright buffed/polished: Non-directional finish with high degree of reflectivity achieved by
mechanical polishing.
All cutting and finishing shall be done using a CNC router. Graphics must be made
using 12- colour high definition printing technology.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Vendor shall provide a sample from a supplied file to confirm quality. Panels must be
entirely made locally.
3.2.6 Acrylic
Acrylic shall be made with methyl methacrylate polymers, premium quality. All acrylic
materials shall be medium impact grade.
Provide solid sheet, laminated sheet or cast acrylic in size, thickness, clarity, opacity,
texture and colour required for work as indicated in drawings.
Sheet thickness shall not vary by more than 5%. All plastic used in outdoor or semi-
outdoor environment shall be able to withstand the local outdoor condition well, in
properties such as UV-resistance, fading-resistance and discoloration-resistance.
Applied inks, paints, and coatings shall be compatible with the acrylic material so as
not to cause chipping, cracking, fading, peeling, delaminating or other such
deformation.
Polycarbonate sheet shall have crystal transparency and be of the best quality and free
from specks, air bubbles, wanes, scratches, air-hole and other defects. Polycarbonate
sheet damaged or discoloured shall be removed and replaced with new polycarbonate
sheet or similar colour and texture at the expense of the Sub-Contractor.
Typography and other graphic elements shall be 0.003 – 0.004 inch thick, permanent,
self-adhesive vinyl, in the colours as specified for each specific sign by the SO.
Coloured vinyl shall be translucent for use in internally lit signs. Coloured translucent
vinyl shall be applied to flat polycarbonate sheets and shall be durable, dimensionally
stable and suitable for use on internally illuminated sign faces. The vinyl shall have
uniform colour in both reflected and transmitted light, with a low gloss to eliminate glare.
3.3 Finishes
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Aluminium
Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer’s standard class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or
thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
3.3.3 Steel
Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.
Expose steel to allow to rust.
Use an ultraviolet inhibited aliphatic, acrylic polyurethane system engineered for extreme
colour and gloss retention. Paint shall be free from lead and heavy metals.
Adhere strictly to the application specifications of the manufacturers of paint and ink
components, including, but not limited to, solvent wipes, metal pre-treatment, metal
activators, paint reducers and catalysts.
Provide photo processed screening, arranged to furnish sharp and solid images without
edge build-up or bleeding of the coating.
Pattern-cut screens may be used for non-repeat copy, provided that final image copy is
equal to photo screen in quality.
Provide only weather and UV-resistant coating materials, compatible with intended
substrates.
Aluminium surfaces shall receive the specified polyester powder organic coating
meeting the minimum requirements of BS EN 12206-1.
Surface quality of the coating shall be smooth and free of imperfections such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, orange peel effect, inclusions, craters, blisters, scratches,
or any other unacceptable flaws. Coating shall be opaque and uniform, within the range of
approved upper and lower limit samples when viewed under a uniform light source such as
indirect daylight.
3.4.1 General
(a) Fasteners shall be as appropriate, and as agreed with the SO and unless
otherwise stated, shall be of the same metal as the component with matching
coating and finish.
(b) Where a particular fixing or fastening is not shown or fully detailed, design the
fixing in order to fulfil the performance criteria.
(c) Joining methods shall be in accordance with best practices and recommendations
made by the manufacturer of the materials to be joined, using fasteners and
adhesives that will not fade, discolour or delaminate as a result of continued
exposure to sunlight, heat, cold or moisture.
(d) Stainless steel fasteners: Fixings and fasteners shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1
and BS EN ISO 3506-2. Unless noted otherwise, grade A4 shall be used for visible
fasteners, in all other circumstances grade A2 shall be used.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
(e) Screws: Provide brass countersunk head screws for all internal items, and brass
cups for screws that are likely to be removed for access.
(f) Nails: No nail heads shall be visible on exposed surfaces. Nails in wet areas
shall be corrosion-protected or non-corrosive.
(g) Additional frame support shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary, at no
extra cost to ensure stability and durability of the signs.
(h) Avoid using aluminium mounting elements for stainless steel signage to prevent
galvanic corrosion.
(i) Avoid using stainless steel signage at area exposed to frequent chemical wash.
3.5 Facings
All laminates shall be installed in the similar "grain" direction between different
interfacing sections or parts of the similar fitting.
3.6 Accessories
3.6.1 Gaskets
Use extruded ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) complying with provisions
of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45, cellular rubber to ASTM C 509.
3.6.2 Sealants
Use silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. Where specified, provide
proprietary products as indicated in Section A12-020:Clause:3.1 or submit suitable
product to the SO.
3.6.3 Adhesives
4 WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site, prior to shop fabrication. Bring to the SO’s
attention, discrepancies and deviations, and propose adjustments to be made to
accommodate these discrepancies and tolerances to the SO for review.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. All signs shall be flat, true and free
of waviness.
All mechanical fasteners shall be countersunk, filled, ground smooth and painted so as to
render the fasteners visually imperceptible, unless otherwise specified as exposed. The
heads of exposed mounting fasteners shall match the colour and finish of the sign area
where the fasteners are.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural adequacy of signs mounted, and
shall submit structural calculations for framing, fastening and fixing details with the PE’s
certifications for SO’s approval, at his own expense.
4.1.2 Delivery
Store on site all signage materials only when the Works is completely enclosed and
generally dry. Materials shall not be exposed to sunlight or subjected to wetting.
4.1.3 Protection
All materials shall be protected with plastic sheets during storage or completion of
part installation whilst awaiting installation of adjacent/intersecting components.
4.1.4 Installation
All signs shall be installed per mounting standards in the designated locations as indicated
in the shop drawings or as determined on site and shall be set plumb, level, and square
and at the proper elevations and planes, and placed in accurate alignment with adjacent
work.
Verify the dimensions shown in the shop drawings at the Site and shall allow for
necessary tolerances.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with other trades for proper
installation of signage works.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
4.1.5 Checks
Ensure meticulous, close control and monitoring of workmanship and quality. Any
defective, unsightly or improperly fabricated or installed components which cannot be
satisfactorily corrected shall be replaced with new components at the Contractor's own
expense. Any physical damage including scratches, dents, abrasions, pitting, etc., shall
be made good to the SO’s satisfaction.
5.1 Submissions
Prepare and submit co-ordinated shop drawings incorporating works from all relevant trades
and adjoining parts of the building. A minimum of 14 days shall be allocated for review
following each submission/ resubmission until the acceptance of the SO.
Include the following:
(a) Plan, elevation, sections
(b) Details, including at scale 1:1 and 1:5
(c) Plan location of all items
(d) One sample of each proposed type
Shop drawings shall incorporate elevations, letter spacing and dimensions of letter
heights, details of fabrication and erection, including all materials, shapes, dimensions,
finishes, wind loads and method of connections. Include full size details of all exposed
edges, joints between materials and details which affect the appearance.
Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been reviewed and
permission to proceed has been obtained.
Submit the loading permitted of all fittings and fixtures, which shall comply with
normal expectations of use in relevant categories including provision of
maintenance loads.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer of the following materials/
components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade, strength, size,
finish, etc. and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified.
Competent technicians shall be engaged to check and co-ordinate the installation. The
SO is the sole judge on the acceptance in quality of Works.
5.1.5 Warranty
No selection or Works shall commence prior to the acceptance of warranty by the SO.
5.2.1 Samples
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Provide a full-size mock-up for each sign type as directed by the SO. Utilise the same
materials and installation methods for the prototype as intended for the final Work.
Final location of signs: Location of signs as shown on the drawings is for general
information only and is not representative of the exact final location. The exact final
locations of signs shall be directed by the SO at the Site or by previous arrangement. The
Contractor shall arrange for meetings at the Site to accommodate the SO’s direction for
final locations.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
5.3 Inspections
Allow for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication areas as directed by the SO.
Allow for inspection on site by technical officer following each preparation and fix.
If directed by the SO, allow access for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication
areas of fittings for the fabrication or treatment procedures, e.g., timber treatment,
glass treatment, painting process.
No item.
Version 1.0
Architectural Particular Specification
NPQS
General Requirements
General Requirements
Version 1.0
NPQS
General Requirements
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Project Particulars 3
1.2 General Description of the Works 3
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 8
2.1 General Requirement 8
2.2 Environment 8
Version 1.0
NPQS
General Requirements
1. GENERAL
This section sets out the general requirements for carrying out any works for the
project and shall be read in conjunction with all relevant work sections and other
contract documents.
1.2.6 Supply and installation of electrical cabling works from control room of respective
area of the Layer Houses and Pullet Houses.
1.2.7 Supply and installation of propriety human disinfectant booth for Clean Area
Preparation Entrance, Front Entrance and Drive Reception Area of GP Plant.
1.2.8 Supply and install Air compressors with ancillary piping to the respective
equipment for GP Plant and Combustion Plant.
Version 1.0
NA to
MC1
NPQS
A1-80-1 External Painting and Coating
7Version 1.1
NPQS
A1-80-1 External Painting and Coating
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles
7Version 1.1
NPQS
A1-80-0 External Painting and Coating
1.0 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
This document is supplementary to Section A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating of the NPQS
and sets out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All
modifications and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the
NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on exterior surfaces of buildings
and other external elements as described. This section also includes all requirements relating to
painting and coating for external structural and nonstructural steelwork. Notwithstanding this
section, all structural steelwork shall be undercoated with an anti-rust inhibitor in strict accordance
with the structural specifications.
All exterior surfaces including, but not limited to:
d. Exterior Signage.
g. Access ladders
1.3 Standards
a. SS 5: All Parts Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
h. SS 494: Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
c. Samples for Selection: Submit two paper chip samples illustrating range of colours
and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. Submit two paper
samples 300 x 300 mm in size for colours requested by Architect
d. Samples for Review: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colours and textures for
each colour and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on actual receiving
substrate, 600 x 600 mm in size
e. Product List: Provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color-coding
for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance
f. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces
NPQS
A1-80-2 External Painting and Coating
1.4.4 Warranty
Low sheen
Gloss
The primer shall be oil-modified Phenolic vehicle with aluminium pigment as its primary
pigment. It is aluminium colour in semi-gloss finish.
The undercoat shall be high opacity and high solid undercoat that will effectively hide the
substrate and impart a good film build to the overall coating system. It is available in
standard range as per Nippon Paint colour card in matt finish
The finishing coat shall be an oil-modified alkyd paint with good durability and a good anti-
fungus property. It comes in various colours in full gloss finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following:
Solid Content, % 65 ± 2 SS 7
Opacity, % > 98 SS 7
Drying Time at 30 , Touch Dry 120 SS 7
mins Hard Dry 270
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 17 -
Dry Film Thickness, microns 30 -
Gloss (60° specular reflection), units 91 SS 7
Bend test, diameter mandrel, mm 3 SS 7
Xenon-arc accelerated weathering 500 passed SS 7
hrs
3.2.4 Hi-Pon 20-03 Epoxy Red Oxide Primer
The primer is a two-pack amine-adduct cured epoxy primer designed for use as a high-
performance primer for ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces. It is red oxide colour in matt
finish.
The finishing coat shall be a two-pack, aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish coat. It provides
high durability, excellent gloss and colour retention with good abrasion, chemical and
impact resistance. It comes in various colours in high sheen finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):
The topcoat is a premium 100% acrylic solar reflective cool coating that offers superior
weathering & algae resistant. The coating reflects a large amount of solar energy from the
sun and is able to reduce the surface temperature by up to 5°C*. It comes in various
colours in low sheen finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):
The texture coat shall be a premium grade decorative sand texture coating. It consists of
fine aggregate bound by water-based weather resistant modified acrylic binder suitable for
external and internal surfaces. It is available in white colour card in matt finish
The performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:
The texture coat shall be a special acrylic emulsion giving three-dimensional polymeric
surface coating by spraying. It is available in white colour card in matt finish
The performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:
The sealer shall be water based formulated with a special acrylic polymer for excellent
alkali and efflorescence resistance properties. It is light grey colour in matt finish.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Mock-up: Provide mock-up(s) to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
a. Paint one 1200mm by 2400 mm mock-up area in location approved by Architect for each paint
type, colour, and sheen specified
b. Approved mock-up(s) may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Completion Certificate
5.4 Tests
Carry out the following tests at locations selected by the SO through the progress of
the works:
1Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.3 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles
2Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
This document is supplementary to Section A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating of the NPQS
and sets out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All
modifications and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the
NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on surfaces of building
elements/components not subject to the weather. It includes, but not limited to, the furnishing
and installing of the following:
a. Surface preparation and field application of paints and finishes to interior and exterior
surfaces and designated items
b. Substrate and material compatibility testing
c. Protection of adjacent and adjoining surfaces
d. Primer, paint, wood varnish, stains and other finishes
e. Painted finishes: Shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following items. Refer to
the Finish and Painting Schedule at the end of this section for designated paint
finishes
f. Any other Painting Work described in the Contract Drawings and Documents
1.3 Standards
a. SS 5: All Parts Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
h. SS 494: Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
c. Samples for Selection: Submit two paper chip samples illustrating range of colours
and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. Submit two paper
samples 300 x 300 mm in size for colours requested by Architect
d. Samples for Review: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colours and
textures for each colour and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit
on actual receiving substrate, 600 x 600 mm in size
e. Product List: Provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and
color-coding for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance
f. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and
coated surfaces
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
Water-based acrylic emulsion with Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
low Volatile Organic Compound, project
low odour and quick drying, to SO
approval.
Two-component, moisture Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
tolerant, penetrating epoxy project
primer
Heavy duty, high thermal shock 3 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
resistant, seamless anti-microbial project
polyurethane coating system
A power troweled, self-sealing, high 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
impact resistance non-pigmented or project
pigmented polyurethane system
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide the following warranty in accordance with contract conditions:
IP4 Internal Timber 3 to 4-coat system Primer: 1 to 2 coats Aqua Primer Sealer
substrate SGBP certified Undercoat
Anti-bacteria
Finishing: 2 coats Aqua PU
Anti-mould and mildew
Stain resistant Gloss
Non-yellowing
HPV resistant
following types:
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
IP5 Internal 3 to 4-coat system Primer: 1 to 2 coats Aqua Primer Sealer
Ferrous metal SGBP certified Undercoat
Anti-bacteria Finishing: 2 coats Aqua PU
Anti-mould and mildew
Stain resistant Gloss
Non-yellowing
HPV resistant
The primer undercoat shall be a water-based one step pre-coat formulated with special
acrylic polymer for good adhesion on multi-purpose substrates. It is available white colour
in matt finish.
The finishing coat shall be a water-based modified polyurethane with anti-bacterial and
anti-fungal properties excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour (HPV) This
environmental-friendly paint is specially formulated for interior use on suitably primed
masonry wall, timber and metal. It comes in various colours in gloss finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the followings (Based on
White Colour)
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD
Solid Content, % 50 ± 2 -
Opacity (contrast ratio), % Min. 95 SS 5
Drying Time at Touch Dry 30 ASTM D1640
30 , Hard Dry 120
mins
Theoretical Co`verage, m²/L 9-10 -
Dry Film Thickness, microns 40 -
Gloss (60° specular reflection), Min. 70 SS 5
units %
VOC, g/L < 75 ISO 11890-2
Alkali Resistant passed SS 5
Acid Resistant passed SS 5
Wet Scrub Resistance, 5000 cycles passed SS 5
Anti-bacterial Staphylococcus
aureus
passed
Escherichia coli JIS Z 2801
Methicillin-
resistant
Mildew Aspergillus
Resista niger- SS 150: 2021
passed
nce Aureobasidium (Annex
pullulan A)
s
Adhesion test (X-cut) Min. 4A ASTM D3359
Abrasion Resistance (500g
Max.100mg/1000 cycles ASTM D4060-14
load/1000/#17), mg
Accelerated weathering, 1000 hrs passed SS 5
Pencil Hardness Min F SS 5
SGBP 4 Ticks -
3.2.6 EvoMedico Interior Sheen
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic elastomeric emulsion for interior use which
is washable with anti-bacterial property and excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide
Vapour (HPV). It is available in a wide range of colours in sheen finish
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following:
The sealer shall be water based formulated with a special acrylic polymer for excellent
alkali and efflorescence resistance properties. It is light grey colour in matt finish.
The primer undercoat shall be a water-based one step pre-coat formulated with special
acrylic polymer for good adhesion on multi-purpose substrates. It is available white colour
in matt finish.
The finishing coat shall be a water-based modified polyurethane with anti-bacterial and
anti-fungal properties excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour (HPV) This
environmental-friendly paint is specially formulated for interior use on suitably primed
masonry wall, timber and metal. It comes in various colours in gloss finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the followings (Based on
White Colour)
13Version 1.0
Anti-bacterial Staphylococcus
aureus
passed
Escherichia coli JIS Z 2801
Methicillin-
resistant
Mildew Aspergillus
Resista niger- SS 150: 2021
passed
nce Aureobasidium (Annex
pullulan A)
s
Adhesion test (X-cut) Min. 4A ASTM D3359
Abrasion Resistance (500g
Max.100mg/1000 cycles ASTM D4060-14
load/1000/#17), mg
Accelerated weathering, 1000 hrs passed SS 5
Pencil Hardness Min F SS 5
SGBP 4 Ticks -
3.2.3 Crystalux Aluminium Wood Primer (SS:38)
The primer shall be oil-modified Phenolic vehicle with aluminium pigment as its primary
pigment. It is aluminium colour in semi-gloss finish.
The undercoat shall be high opacity and high solid undercoat that will effectively hide the
substrate and impart a good film build to the overall coating system. It is available in
standard range as per Nippon Paint colour card in matt finish
The finishing coat shall be an oil-modified alkyd paint with good durability and a good anti-
fungus property. It comes in various colours in full gloss finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following:
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic elastomeric emulsion for interior use which is
washable with anti-bacterial property and excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour
(HPV). It is available in a wide range of colours in sheen finish
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following:
The primer is a two-pack amine-adduct cured epoxy primer designed for use as a high-
performance primer for ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces. It is red oxide colour in matt
finish.
The finishing coat shall be a two-pack, aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish coat. It provides
high durability, excellent gloss and colour retention with good abrasion, chemical and
impact resistance. It comes in various colours in high sheen finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):
PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD
Solid Content, % 60 ± 2 -
Drying Time at 25 , Touch Dry 60 -
mins Hard Dry 420
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 7.5 – 12.0 -
Dry Film Thickness, microns 50 – 80 -
Pull-off Adhesion Test, MPa ≥5 ISO 4624
Abrasion Resistance, weight loss ≤ 50 ASTM D522
(mg/1000cycles) Method A
Fire Propagation Index of < 12 BS 476 Part 6
performance, I
Sub-index <6
performance, i1
Surface spread of Flame Class 1 BS 576 Part 7
Carbon Dioxide Permeability, g/m².day < 4.0 BS EN 1062-6
Accelerated Weathering QUV A, min Passed 80% gloss ISO 16474-2
1500 hrs retention
Water Vapour Transmission, g/m².day < 2.70 ISO 7783-2
Chemical Resistance 10% H2SO4 168 ISO 2812-1
(Spot Test), hrs 10% NaOH
3.2.9 Hi-Vinyl 1102 CF Etching Primer
3.2.10 Max
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic emulsion paint with good resistance to fungal
growth. It comes in various colours in matt finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):
The topcoat is a premium 100% acrylic solar reflective cool coating that offers superior
weathering & algae resistant. The coating reflects a large amount of solar energy from the
sun and is able to reduce the surface temperature by up to 5°C*. It comes in various
colours in low sheen finish.
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):
The texture coat shall be a premium grade decorative sand texture coating. It consists of
fine aggregate bound by water-based weather resistant modified acrylic binder suitable for
external and internal surfaces. It is available in white colour card in matt finish
The performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:
The texture coat shall be a special acrylic emulsion giving three-dimensional polymeric
surface coating by spraying. It is available in white colour card in matt finish. The
performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:
The sealer shall be water based formulated with a special acrylic polymer for excellent
alkali and efflorescence resistance properties. It is light grey colour in matt finish.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Mock-up: Provide mock-up(s) to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
a. Paint one 1200mm by 2400 mm mock-up area in location approved by Architect for
each paint type, colour, and sheen specified
b. Approved mock-up(s) may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Completion Certificate
5.4 Tests
Carry out the following tests at locations selected by the SO through the progress of
the works:
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.4 Trade Preambles
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor’s Brief
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Metal Roof System
3.3 Metal Sheeting
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submissions
5.4 On-Site Tests
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1. GENERAL
Read this Section with G1-10 "General Requirements" and all other contract
documents.
This document is supplementary to Section A5-10 Metal Roof of the NPQS and sets out Project
Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All modifications and additions
noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for the construction of metal roofing systems including
metal sheets, finishes and insulation. The following types of metal sheets are covered:
(a) Profiled Metal Sheets
(b) Standing Seams
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide the following warranties in accordance with the specimen warranty, or otherwise as
approved agreed with the SO:
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.4 Environmental
2.1.4.1 Thermal Performance
Comply with the following: ETTV shall not exceed 50W/m2
The U-value of the roof shall not exceed the limit prescribed in the table below.
3 MATERIALS
3.1 Metal Roof System
The metal roofing system may be assembled on site with the individual components, or
supplied and installed as a composite system incorporating one or more components.
The metal roofing (MR) system(s) shall consist of the following types:
Version 1.0
- Manufacturer LCP Building Product Pte Ltd or equivalent .
Hi-Tensile steel bold ribbed profile with min 700 mm cover width
- Form of Sheeting and 45 mm min rib height, capable of allowing min falls of 3 .
degree, in clean pre-coated steel (colour to Architect’s selection).
Protective Coating . .
- Profile fillers/ Rib End System to be used for all end and expansion joints, to
Stops manufacturer's details
- Sealants Neutral-cure silicone sealant to Manufacturers details
Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal
- Acoustic Treatment:
sheet
- Underlayment and
Insulation System
- Waterproof Underlay
High tensile strength radiant and vapour barrier manufactured
with a high density core with cross linked polymer
reinforcements. The self-supporting foil is able to span up to 1.4
meter length across purlins. All metallic surfaces shall be
- Radiant/Vapour Barrier
uniformly coated so that the low emissivity properties of the
surface are not harmed by atmospheric contaminates.
Tensile Strength: G550
Rainwater Goods
- General Flashing Flashing, ridge caps, valleys, fascia etc. shall be of similar material
and colour to match the selected roof material
Lifeline The anchor and cable systems shall be a horizontal lifeline system
that allows continuous uninterrupted access to all areas of a roof.
.
It can span up to 12m between anchors and provides continuous
hands-free access for all users of the fall protection system.
Anchor Modular multi-directional system design which activates and absorbs
energy no matter which orientation the load is applied, providing total
freedom and flexibility in system design.
Unique energy absorbing system reduces the overturning
.
movement on the bolts by 50%, enabling the use of fewer fasteners,
therefore, reducing the number of roof penetrations. Conforms to
EN 795, OSHA, ANSI, AS/NZS standards and has been tested to
both EN795 Class A and C standards
- Base Plate The base plate design incorporates several fixing holes to allow
the same plate to be fitted on different roof types Approx. .
405x405mm in size.
- Components A. Anchor
B. Hex swage tensioner
C. 8mm 7x7 SS cable
D. Traveler
E. Anchor intermediate guide .
Steel Roof sheeting ASTM E108 Surface Flame Spread (Class 0 or Class A)
Structural support
. .
members
Fasteners . .
EN 13501-1/ BS EN 1182
Insulation Non-Combustibility Thermal Conductivity
ASTM C518
(b) Certificates
Provide certificates as follows:
- -
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor’s Brief
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Frame Construction
4.2 Door Construction
4.3 Installation of Ironmongery
4.4 Installation of Doors
4.5 Completion
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
This document is supplementary to Section A6-10 Internal Doors of the NPQS and sets
out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All modifications
and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for internal doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Household shelter doors are not included. External Doors
are covered in section A6-20 and Roller Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-
30.
1.4.2 Warranty
Provide the following warranty in accordance with contract conditions:
Item of Works to be Warranted Period of Warranty Required
All Automatic Door System 1 Year
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
Type: Sliding Aluminium Door with Fixed Clear Float Glass Panel
Version 1.0
DS 3 Dexion Sectional Door to Material Store
Dock Leveler
HDPE Bollard
Other Equipment
Stainless material
Tempered glass panel
Automatic door and door sensor
Fan
Infrared sensor
High efficiency filter
Control Panel
Nozzle spray top and sides
W800D1000H1950/
W800D2000H1950
Human Disinfectant Tunnel at Clean Area
Preparation Entrance
Stainless material
Hand free sensor automatic door
Fan
High efficiency filter
Control Panel
4 sets of Nozzle spray top and
sides
W800D3000H1950
Compressor
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Submission of the following information:
a. Name of the door manufacturer and include of copies of technical data relating
to each of the door types.
b. Names of the ironmongery, intumescent strip, smoke baffles and acoustic
seals manufacturer/s, include copies of technical details of all the items.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
Version 1.0
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Tender Specifications
GREEN MARK
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
GM Green Mark
SLE Super Low Energy
BCA Building and Construction Authority
SGBC Singapore Green Building Council
PUB Public Utilities Board
ESD Environmental Sustainability Design
GFA Gross Floor Area
ACMV Air Conditioning & Mechanical Ventilation
VRF Variable Refrigerant Flow
IEER Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio
LPB Lighting Power Budget
MEPS Minimum Energy Performance Standards
WELS Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme
VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
SGBP Singapore Green Building Product
MEP Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing
C&S Civil & Structural
AHU Air Handling Unit
FCU Fan Coil Unit
SRI Solar Reflectance Index
CADR Clean Air Delivery Rate
VAV Variable Air Volume
HVLS High Volume, Low Speed
CUI Concrete Usage Index
RCA Recycled Concrete Aggregates
WCS Washed Copper Slag
GF Granite Fines
Page 2 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction 6
2. General Requirement 7
3. Green Mark Design Requirements 9
4. Energy Efficiency – Performance And Specifications 10
A. Permanent Instrumentation for M&V of Air-side Equipment 10
VRF System 10
B. Electrical Sub Metering 11
C. Envelope Thermal Transfer Value (ETTV) 11
D. Air Conditioning Total System Efficiency 12
E. Lighting Power Budget 13
F. Mechanical Ventilation 14
5. Resilience 15
A. RE1.1b Resources 15
i. Water Efficient Fittings 15
B. RE1.2b Urban heat island mitigation 15
A. Urban Heat Island Mitigation (UHI) 15
C. RE2.2 Circularity 16
i. Provision of Dedicated Recycling Facilities 16
6. Whole life Carbon (WLC) 17
A. CN 1.1b Embodied carbon computation 17
B. CN 2.1 Sustainable Construction 18
i. Design for Low CUI 18
ii. Replacement of Aggregates 19
C. CN 2.2 Sustainable Products & Finishes 19
D. CN2.3 Conservation, Resource Recovery and Waste Management 21
7. Health & Wellbeing 22
A. HW1.1a Mobility 22
B. HW1.2 Low VOC Materials 23
C. HW1.3c Clean Air 24
D. HW2.2 Circadian Rhythm 24
i. Quality of Artificial Lighting 24
E. HW3.2A Restorative and Community Spaces 25
F. HW3.2B Outsourced Workers 25
G. HW3.3b Healthy Eating & Drinking 26
8. Intelligence 26
A. IN1.1 Digital Life Cycle 26
Page 3 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
i. Use of spatial model co-ordination platfrom based on Project Information Model (PIM) for spatial
analysis 26
B. IN1.2 Common Data Environment 27
i. Performance Dashboard to monitor building assets’ performance and operations 27
ii. Data Management and Integration (Interoperability) with a platform based on an open protocol
27
C. IN2.1 Asset Information Model 28
9. Maintainability 29
A. General Requirements 29
B. Architectural Exterior 30
General Facade 30
i. Drip Control for External Face Of Façade 30
ii. Façade Access 31
Masonry and Lightweight Concrete Panels 31
Façade Features / Other Façade Considerations 32
i. Steel Structures 32
Entrance Lobby 33
i. Raised Internal Level 33
ii. Canopy / Overhang Design 33
Concrete Roof 34
i. Design Slope 34
ii. Waterproofing 35
iii. Corrosion on metal roofs 36
C. Architectural Interior 36
Flooring 36
Walls & Partitions 37
False Ceiling 37
Wet Rooms and Storage 38
i. Permanent Storage Space for Toilet Supplies 38
ii. Walls in wet rooms 38
iii. Partition Walls in Washrooms 38
iv. Full vanity wash basin in washrooms 39
v. Soap Dispenser in washrooms 39
vi. Water Basin in Washrooms 40
vii. False Ceiling in wet rooms 41
Loading Bay / Back of house service areas 41
D. Mechanical 42
Unitary Air Conditioning System - VRF 42
i. Access to VRF outdoor units 42
Page 4 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Page 5 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
1. INTRODUCTION
IFH Egg Farm (hereinafter “the proposed building”) is located at Kranji Way with
a GFA of 32,124.33 sqm. There are high goals for sustainability set for the
proposed building, which targets to achieve Building and Construction
Authority, Singapore (hereinafter “BCA”) Green Mark Gold Plus award under
the GM2021 criteria.
Page 6 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
2.1. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Building Control
(Environmental Sustainability) Regulations, Code for Environmental
Sustainability of Buildings (“the Code”) and BCA’s Green Mark Assessment
Criteria including any amendment and revision which may be introduced in
relation thereto, in so far as these apply to the works.
2.2. The Contractor shall provide a copy of its BCA Green and Gracious Builder
(GGBS) certificate (Merit or above) and ISO 14001 accreditation as part of the
Green Mark documentation, if applicable.
2.4. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of any liability, costs,
loss, and expense incurred (including any claims by third parties or any fine or
penalty levied by any statutory authority) arising from the Contractor’s failure
or non-compliance with the targeted Green Mark rating as provided herein.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for extension of time,
payment, or compensation as a result of any non-compliance by the Contractor
of the stipulated Green Mark standards and performance and the
requirements of the relevant authority.
Page 7 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
2.7. Green Mark certification includes site measurement and verification. Prior to
site verification, the Contractor shall perform a preliminary measurement and
verification to make sure all systems meet targeted Green Mark requirement.
The Contractor shall facilitate and attend site visits and audits by authorities
and ensure necessary site preparations to achieve authorities’ compliance
prior to the site visits and audits Contractor and relevant sub-contractors shall
ensure their attendance for the TOP Green Mark Inspections.
2.10. Supporting documents may include, but not be limited to, equipment
specifications, purchase order/delivery orders, testing reports, photographs, as
built drawings, and any other related documents as required and adequate to
obtain corresponding credit in accordance with the Green Mark requirement.
2.11. The Contractor is to consult the ESD consultant for the project regarding any
clarifications and document submission requirements.
Page 8 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
3.2. In the event of discrepancies, the higher / more stringent specifications shall
prevail.
3.3. GM 2021 are the reference criteria. A total score of 32 points has been
targeted. Refer to Appendix A for the GM 2021 scorecard and Appendix B for
the Maintainability scorecard.
3.4. These specifications are to be read alongside the GM 2021 Technical Guide and
requirements. All documents stated in the Technical Guide for the design stage
shall be submitted within 6 months of the tender award and within 6 months
of TOP for Verification Stage 1 and 12 months of TOP for Verification Stage 2.
Contractor is to facilitate the Verification 1 and 2 stages and provide
compliance data to ESD consultant for submission to BCA.
3.5. The contractor’s scope of work consists of all ensuring all the relevant
mechanical equipment such as chillers and cooling towers meet the relevant
energy efficiency requirements.
3.6. The contractor’s scope of work also includes ensuring all Green Mark
documentation, calculations, simulation, energy modelling, and all works as
requested, accepted and approved by BCA during the assessment and
verification stages are duly completed and submitted. This covers the following
criteria below: -
Page 9 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
3.7. Green Mark Certification stages and timeline would include the following: -
Description Stage / Timeline
1 Pre-Assessment Pending
The installed instrumentation must have the capability to calculate the resultant
system efficiency within 10% uncertainty. Each measurement system shall
include sensors, any signal conditioning, data acquisition system and the wiring
connecting these components.
The measurement systems provided shall also comply with the following
requirement:
• Data logging with the capability to trend at 5-minute sampling time interval,
recorded to at least one decimal place.
• Building management system (BMS), standalone energy monitoring system
(EMS) shall have the capability to compute and display the overall system energy
efficiency to facilitate data extraction for verification purpose.
• Dedicated power meters (of IEC Class 1 or better) and metering current
transformers (of Class 1 or better) where applicable, are to be provided for all
condensing units of the VRF system and air distribution sub-systems (i.e. AHUs,
PAHUs, FCUs).
• VRF Suppliers’ in-house monitoring system is acceptable if it’s capable of
monitoring the system efficiency within 10% uncertainty.
Document requirements
Page 10 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Architectural elevation drawings showing the composition of the different
façade or wall systems that are relevant to the computation of ETTV.
2. Architectural plan layouts and elevations showing all the air-conditioned
areas.
3. Sectional or elevation drawings showing the relevant shading devices.
4. Tender specifications or material schedules showing the salient data of
the material properties that are to be used for the façade or external wall
system.
Page 11 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
5. ETTV calculation in excel format as per the BCA Code on Envelope Thermal
Performance for Buildings.
Document requirements
1. Proposed building cooling system (for new cooling systems) ➢ mode of
ventilation of spaces ➢ location of the plant room and cooling towers
2. Technical specifications and product information of the various
components of the cooling system (for new cooling systems) and air
distribution system designed and installed
3. Part-load performance curves, pump head (for pumps of new cooling
systems) and fan static pressure calculations
4. Detailed calculations of fan input power for each PAU, AHU and FCU in
the building based on operational design load
5. Detailed calculations of the TSE that include the cooling load profile in the
prescribed format as shown in the worked examples
6. Area and operating hours of the spaces served by the air-conditioning
system
7. Compliance with verification requirements under P.14 Permanent
Instrumentation for the Measurement and Verification of Water-Cooled
Chilled Water Plant where applicable
8. Chilled-water plants: Completed Energy Audit Report endorsed by
PE(Mechanical) or Energy Auditor including the power for the air
distribution system detailing the total operational performance measured
over a 1-week period. (The Report template may be found at
https://www1.bca.gov.sg/docs/defaultsource/docs-corp-
buildsg/sustainability/annexb_energy_audit_report.doc )
9. Unitary/split systems: energy consumption of the unitary systems
Page 12 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Maintenance Areas
Mechanical and Electrical Rooms 4
Manufacturing (General) 5.5
Manufacturing (electronic, fine detail
6
or assembly)
The maximum lighting power budget for landscape lighting shall at minimum
comply with SS 530:2014.
Page 13 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Lighting layout plans and schedules showing the numbers, locations and
types of lighting luminaries used.
2. Technical product information of the luminaries used/data sheets
3. Lighting control circuitry plans showing compliance to the stated
requirements
4. LPB calculation as per the following template
F. MECHANICAL VENTILATION
The Contractor is to ensure that the selected fan system meets the following
requirements as applicable
● Motor Power >= 4kW has an efficiency of 0.25 W/CMH
● Motor Power < 4kW has an efficiency of 0.17 W/CMH
● Mechanical ventilation systems for normally occupied spaces shall be
designed to be at least 10% more energy efficient than the prescribed
standard stated in SS 553
Document requirements
1. As built drawings of the mechanical ventilation system.
2. Mechanical ventilation schematics, data sheets and calculations
3. Mechanical ventilation control strategies
Page 14 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
5. RESILIENCE
A. RE1.1B RESOURCES
The validity of the WELS certifications of all water fittings is based on the PUB
WELS website.
(Reference: https://app.pub.gov.sg/WELSSP/ListOfProducts.aspx)
Document requirements
1. Purchase/ Delivery orders and water fittings schedule showing the
quantity, WELS rating and brands/ models of the installed water fittings.
B. RE1.2B URBAN HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION
A. URBAN HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION (UHI)
The Contractor is to ensure adoption of UHI mitigation measures for >50% of
site coverage:
● Green and blue spaces for landscaping and roof
● Roofing materials or coating or cool paints with high Solar Reflectance
Index (SRI) > 40
● Unshaded hardscape areas with SRI > 39, inclusive of unshaded carparks,
internal roads, plazas, and pedestrian walkways
● Use of permeable paving strategies such as gravel or open paving systems
● Other performance-based strategies that demonstrate UHI effect
mitigation
Document requirements
1. Photographic evidence of the vegetated areas
2. Delivery orders of the hardscape materials and roof finishes supported by
technical specifications providing the SRI or solar reflectance thermal
emittance values
Page 15 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
C. RE2.2 CIRCULARITY
Document requirements
1. Relevant layout plans showing provision of recycling facilities for
collection and storage of relevant recyclables.
Page 16 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
The Contractor must aim to reduce embodied carbon for concrete, glass, and
steel by a minimum of 30% from the following reference value (i.e. 1750
kgCO2e/m2)
Document requirements
1. To submit results of embodied carbon footprint in excel format using
the BCA Embodied Carbon calculation template or embodied carbon
software tools with the relevant supporting documentation and
calculations. Preliminary/proposed concrete mix designs are
acceptable at the design stage but as-built concrete mix designs must
be submitted during verification.
Page 17 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Page 18 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Soft copy extracts of calculations (e.g. PDF format) from BIM software
or calculation showing the quantity of concrete for each floor level
which should include all the concrete building elements, such as non-
load bearing and architectural concrete components;
2. BIM model, architectural and structural plan layout, elevation, and
sectional plans showing the type of building elements/systems used,
the dimensions and sizes of all the building and structural elements.
3. Soft copy extracts of calculations (e.g. PDF format) from BIM software
or calculations supported by detailed design drawings showing the use
of alternative construction methods.
Document requirements
1. Calculation showing the quantity of recycled/ engineered/ alternative
aggregates (e.g. RCA/WCS/GF) to be used for the project
2. SGBC certification of the concrete products/mixes used for the project.
Page 19 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
ii. The Contractor is to use SGBC certified products for Mechanical, Electrical
and Plumbing (MEP) for at least 3 MEP systems. The application of the
materials is to be coordinated with the scope of works in
architectural/landscape design details to meet ≥ 60% (by cost)
Document requirements
Cost
• Estimated cost of all the architectural and landscaping works/MEP
systems* within the project’s cost plan/ bill of quantities (BoQ), preferably
prepared by an accredited cost consultant.
• Estimated cost of the certified architectural and landscaping products
(at least 2 ticks)/MEP systems* within the project’s cost plan/bill of
quantities (BoQ), preferably prepared by an accredited cost consultant.
• Extracts of the tender design specification showing the building
architectural and landscaping works/MEP systems and descriptions of
each systems
• Product certificates and catalogue • Design drawings marking the use of
the certified architectural and landscaping products (at least 2 ticks)/MEP
systems*.
• Delivery order (DO) or Purchase order (PO) of the products with their
corresponding green product certificates
• Photographs and as built drawings showing the use of certified
architectural and landscaping products (at least 2 ticks)/MEP systems
Area
• Extracts of the tender design specification showing:
➢ The building systems which the project targets to score points for, and
descriptions of each
➢ The requirements to use certified environmentally friendly products
for building system(s), where they are used
• Tabulation of the building systems which the project targets to score
points for in a table format
• Design drawings marking the extent of use for each system and the
calculation of the extent of use
• Design details of the systems used, i.e. construction method/ method
statement details
• Product catalogues and certificates (if the product selection is
confirmed)
Page 20 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Details of best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures at
construction and demolition sites
2. Documentary evidence on the appointment of environmental specialists
during construction stage
3. Copy of the main builder’s Green and Gracious Builder award with Merit
and above rating and ISO 14000 certificate
Page 21 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Site plans and dimensioned drawings showing pedestrian and bicycle
pathways and points of connection with public pathways.
2. An Access Statement with details of on people’s movement and access to
the site, outlining the segregation of vehicular traffic from pedestrians
and cyclists. The statement should provide details on how everyone can
get to and move through the place on equal terms.
3. As-built site plans with photographs of showing pedestrian and bicycle
pathways and points of connection, bicycle lots and end of trip facilities.
Page 22 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
● Limits for products are based upon ASTM D5116-90, “Standard Guide for Small-
Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor
Materials/Products”
● Test methods for paints and coatings shall comply with ISO 17895 or ISO 11890
Page 23 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. As-built drawings and calculation of extent of application for each product
/ material
2. SGBP 4 tick certificates or product/ material testing reports that meet the
low VOC emission levels stated above
3. Purchase Orders (POs) and Delivery Orders (DOs) of the low VOC emission
products and materials used
C. HW1.3C CLEAN AIR
The Contractor is to ensure the provision of designated smoking points for
smokers to use, which are located as to allow non-smokers to utilise and gain
full enjoyment of the outdoor spaces in a healthy manner.
Document requirements
1. Design drawings and specifications that show the location, design and
dimensions of the designated smoking area in accordance with Guidelines
on Designated Smoking Area set-up by the National Environment Agency.
2. As-built drawings and photos that show the location, design and
dimensions of the designated smoking area
D. HW2.2 CIRCADIAN RHYTHM
Colour Rendering
● All electric lights (except decorative fixtures, emergency lights and other
special-purpose lighting) meet the minimum colour rendering index in
accordance with Clause 5 of SS 531 – 1 : 2016 (2013) – Code of Practice
for Lighting in Workplaces
Page 24 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Specifications and data sheets of light selections including relevant
simulations and calculations
2. Sensor details, control strategy and electrical drawings indicating the
zoning of lights and control groups
3. As-built drawings, delivery orders, data sheets and photographs.
Document requirements
1. Spaces shall be identified on the plan, with the design intent clearly
articulated.
2. For indoor restorative spaces details should include the separation from
the working environment, the interior design considerations and the soft
furnishings
3. The range of outdoor spaces should be articulated, identifying the primary
user as well ensuring space for care givers where applicable (playgrounds,
water play areas and fitness areas). Planting strategy, soundscape design
considerations should be considered as a part of the sensory experience
where sensory spaces are included.
Document requirements
1. Rest area location marked on plan, the size of the space must be sufficient
to cater for the expected numbers of outsourced workers and come with
the relevant furniture and amenities provided.
Page 25 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Plans identifying the accessible water point locations on the plan and the
areas in which these serve.
2. Submission of as built drawings and photographs of the water points.
8. INTELLIGENCE
A. IN1.1 DIGITAL LIFE CYCLE
i. Use of spatial model co-ordination platfrom based on Project
Information Model (PIM) for spatial analysis
(a) Identifying system clashes through an automatic model checking tool. The
use of BIM clash detection process to model building and facility elements,
equipment access and working spaces as “3D volumes” or “reserved box” can
help to avoid clashes between different disciplines and to accurately allocate
maintenance space for mechanical equipment. 6 Points shall be awarded for
clash-checking between different disciplines, modelling equipment access and
working space of key mechanical equipment (e.g. Chillers, AHU).
Document requirements
1. BIM Execution Plan (BEP) showing the key spatial provisions made to meet
the clash detection requirement.
2. Meeting notes, correspondences with facility management team
reflecting their involvement and inputs during the meeting sessions
Page 26 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
3. Clash report and/or animation to show the spatial issues from the clashes
detected are checked and resolved
4. As-built drawing/model showing the space requirements are fulfilled.
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications stating the connectivity of various facilities
management (FM) systems/subsystems and data to the CDE platform
with open protocol.
2. System write-up on the various FM digital solutions which are integrated
through the CDE with open protocol
Page 27 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications for the AIM including digital handover requirements
Page 28 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
9. MAINTAINABILITY
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
i) Design for maintainability report, as part of the O&M manual, outlining the
key maintainability considerations and provisions. (1 Point)
Document requirements
1. Design for maintainability team structure.
2. Design for maintainability report summarising the maintainability strategies
targeted for the project.
3. Updated design for maintainability report including the evidence for
implementing design for maintainability solutions.
4. Submit as-built drawings, photographs, and/or O&M manuals highlighting
the maintainability features installed on site.
Page 29 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Meeting notes from the design charrette highlighting the systems shortlisted
for outcome-based contracting and the design provisions
2. Tender Specification showing the requirement on outcome-based
maintenance contract and integrated FM contract. OR
3. Contract clauses highlighting the outcome-based maintenance and
integrated FM contract.
B. ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIOR
General Facade
Document requirements
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings showing slope incorporated on top of
wall surfaces.
2. Photographs of incorporated slope after implementation.
3. Detail section drawings showing slope.
Page 30 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Plan/elevation/schematic drawings indicating entire façade is 100 %
accessible through one or a combination of façade access systems.
2. Maintenance strategy report for façade access.
Page 31 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
i. Steel Structures
The Contractor is to ensure that exposed steel bases do not have direct contact
with the ground to mitigate corrosion and entrapment of moisture and dirt, as
per C&S design and specification detail.
Page 32 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings locating all steel structures with steel
base protection
2. Detail drawings for steel base protection (minimum 100 mm above
ground).
3. Photographs of the concrete upstand or concrete curb after
implementation.
Entrance Lobby
The Contractor is to ensure that there is a raised internal level by at least 100mm
from the external datum to prevent water ingress.
Document requirements
1. Plan drawings showing level changes at all building entrances from
external datum.
2. Detail section drawings indicating the level change (minimum 100 mm) at
all building entrances.
3. As-built drawings to show implementation
Page 33 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
to the entrance line and with drop panel if canopy/overhang does not shelter to
entrance line.
Document requirements
1. Plan drawings locating the canopy/overhang at proposed building
entrances.
2. Plan/section/elevation showing canopy/overhang design and slope to fall
at proposed entrance locations
3. As-built drawings to show implementation
Concrete Roof
i. Design Slope
The Contractor is to ensure that all concrete flat roofs have slopes not lesser
than 1:150 and have supper drains and/ or gutters
Document requirements
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings showing minimum 1:150 slope with
scupper drains/gutter for concrete roofs
Page 34 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
ii. Waterproofing
The Contractor is to ensure that waterproofing for concrete roofs is carried out
through either of the following:
● Bitumen/polymer elastomer preformed waterproofing membrane
(designed with overlap and proper termination of membrane)
● Water based/ solvent-based liquid applied waterproofing membrane
Document requirements
1. Plan drawing locating concrete roofs with waterproofing membrane.
2. Detail drawings illustrating overlap and termination of waterproofing
details (if using waterproofing membrane).
3. Photographs showing implementation.
Page 35 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specification indicating use of metal components with similar
properties on the roof system based on manufacturer’s recommendation
or based on compatibility of direct contact of metal and alloys
2. Delivery orders
C. ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR
Flooring
The Contractor is to ensure the following specifications are met for all tile
flooring as per architecture design and specifications.
Page 36 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Plan and typical sectional drawings showing location of coating
application
2. Relevant technical material specifications or product performance test
results for the stain resistant / hydrophobic property of the selected paint
finish
3. Delivery order for the specified paint finish
False Ceiling
The Contractor is to ensure that all newly installed false ceiling systems are
modular and easily demountable OR specify open ceiling design.
The Contractor is to ensure all parts of the ceiling are accessible for general
maintenance.
Document requirements
Page 37 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
The Contractor is to ensure there are design rooms for cleaning tools, carts, and
supplies such as tissue rolls and soap refill for every male and female toilet
cluster as per architectural design specifications.
Document requirements
1. Tender drawings showing the location of storage space within every male
and female toilet clusters for store supplies
2. As-built (interior) drawings to show implementation
3. Photographs of completed works showing the dedicated storage space
Document requirements
1. Tender specification indicating type of tile material used
2. Plan and section drawings showing the extent of wall finish
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show implementation
4. Photographs of completed works showing the dedicated storage space
Page 38 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
The Contractor is to ensure that all partition walls are installed with a minimum
gap of 150mm from finished floor level as per architecture design details.
Document requirements
1. Relevant technical material specification or product performance test
results for the rate of water absorption for the selected product
2. As-built (interior) drawings to show gap between partition panel and
finished floor level
3. Photographs highlighting the implemented raised partition panels.
The Contractor is to ensure that the full vanity wash basin with counter top to
slope away from the user.
Document requirements
1. Tender specification indicating vanity wash basin.
2. Plan, elevation, and sectional drawings showing full vanity washbasin set
that meets the requirements. Verification stage
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show the implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works.
The Contractor is to ensure the soap and tissue dispenser is within arm’s reach
of each faucet AND the soap dispenser location to be vertically mounted directly
above the basin or integrated bin.
Page 39 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specification indicating showing position / location of the soap
dispenser
2. Plan, elevation, and sectional drawings showing full vanity washbasin set
that meets the requirements. Verification stage
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show the implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works.
The Contractor is to ensure that the selection of washroom basin meets the
following requirement
Page 40 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Purchase order for selected washroom basins
2. Relevant technical specification showing the depth of the basin.
Document requirements
1. Tender specification indicating the moisture resistant material and
maximum water absorption rate for suspended ceiling panel.
2. Reflected ceiling plans showing the extent of the moisture-resistant false
ceiling
3. As-built drawings to show extent of implementation
4. Photographs of completed works
Document requirements
1. Plan drawing showing the location of protective measures for columns in
high traffic areas.
2. Tender drawings (plan and typical sections) showing the location of
protective measures for walls, floors and doors.
3. As-built (construction) drawings to show implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works highlighting the protective measures.
Page 41 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
D. MECHANICAL
Unitary Air Conditioning System - VRF
The Contractor is to ensure the necessary access space provided for the
collective VRF outdoor units.
Top Discharge:
- Provide minimum 500 mm to the front for refrigerant piping and
maintenance access.
- Provide minimum 300 mm to the suction side for air intake.
- If there is a wall at both front and back of the unit, provide minimum 1 m
access space for each unit.
Top Discharge:
- The outdoor units must not be stacked.
- Provide minimum 500 mm to the front for maintenance access.
- Provide minimum 300 mm to the suction side for air intake.
- Provide minimum 350mm on the side with refrigerant piping for
maintenance If there is a wall on both sides, provide minimum 1 m clear
access space for at least one side of the unit.
Page 42 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications indicating the exact access requirement.
Document requirements
1. Tender specification showing the requirement for raised platform with
trunking
Page 43 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Cooling coil pipe connection access - Provide minimum 450 mm clear space after
pipe connection from any obstacle
FCU side clearance - Provide minimum 200 mm access space from any obstacle
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications indicating the access requirement.
ii. Reduce Risk of Water Ponding and Algae Growth in the AHU Room
The Contractor is to ensure the AHU drain pipe must be terminated directly
above the floor trap to avoid any water spillage and the drain pipe must have
minimum 1:100 slope to avoid any water choke.
Document requirements
1. ACMV plan /section / typical detail drawings at appropriate scale showing
the typical drain termination and slope requirement.
2. Tender specifications indicating the AHU condensate drain pipe must be
at least 1:100 gradient and terminated directly above the floor trap.
3. As-built drawings/shop drawings (including plan drawing/section)
showing the typical drain termination and slope requirement.
4. Photographs showing implementation.
Page 44 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
• The horizontal drain pipes must have minimum slope of 1:100 for easy
flow of condensate drain
• Provide T-joint before terminating the individual drain pipe from AHU to
the main drain stack for periodic cleaning
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications indicating the condensate drain pipe slope
requirement.
2. ACMV typical detail drawing showing the drain termination and T-joint
arrangement.
3. As-built drawings/shop drawings (including plan drawing/schematic
drawing/typical detailing) showing the condensate drain pipe slope
requirement and T-joint arrangement.
4. Photographs showing the T-joint implementation.
Page 45 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications/ drawings indicating the filter type, initial resistance
for primary and secondary filter
2. Tender specifications indicating the direct drive fans.
Document requirements
1. Plumbing drawing/C&S drawing/specifications capturing the access space
and headroom requirements.
2. Shop/as-built drawing indicting the actual access space provisions.
3. Photographs showing the space provision
Sanitary Systems
Page 46 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
i.Access Provision and Design Detailing for Sanitary Pipes for Ease of
Maintenance
The Contractor is to ensure the following:
a. Provide cleaning eyes with viewing panel for better maintenance
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications/drawings capturing the cleaning eye with view
panel requirement.
Page 47 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Sanitary tender drawings/specifications capturing the vertical runs
requirements
Page 48 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Clear and unobstructed access must be provided from the entrance to the
location directly below the fire detectors. This must include the height and width
of entrance door, the clearance along the MEWP access path as well as the
working base for MEWP to carry out the maintenance work. The floor (loading
and finishes) must be able to withstand the MEWP to be deployed for
maintenance work. The deployment and operation of MEWP must comply with
authority requirements. The actual clear access must depend on the proposed
type of MEWP to be used and the manufacturer’s recommended clearances
through the access way
Document requirements
1. Fire alarm system tender drawings showing the sensors installed at high
volume space
2. Tender drawings to capture the access route requirement for MEWP
access or alternative access
3. Indicate the access requirement in the tender specifications
4. Mark-up the actual access route/space in the shop/as-built drawings
Page 49 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
E. ELECTRICAL
Lighting System
The Contractor is to ensure there is clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work
Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby, atrium space from the nearest door
entrance.
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of minimum 1.8 m width x
2.4 m height and working base of minimum 1.8m width x 2m length if the
mounting height is less than or equal to 10.5 m.
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of minimum 2 m width x 2.8
m height and working base of minimum 2 m width x 2 m length if the mounting
height is greater than 10.5m.
Clear and unobstructed access must be provided from the entrance to the
location directly below the luminaires. This must include the height and width
of entrance door, the clearance along the MEWP access path as well as the
working base for MEWP to carry out the maintenance work. The floor (loading
and finishes) must be able to withstand the MEWP to be deployed for
maintenance work. The deployment and operation of MEWP must comply with
authority requirements. Refer to Figure 47 below for recommended clear
access. The actual clear access must depend on the proposed type of MEWP to
be used and the manufacturer’s recommended clearances through the access
way.
The Contractor is to ensure the use of reliable light fixtures such as LED light
(LM80 B30 L70 @ L50,000) which requires less maintenance.
Document requirements
1. Tender drawings to capture the access route requirement for MEWP
access or indicate the requirement in the tender specifications.
2. Mark-up the actual access route and space in the shop/as-built drawings.
3. Drawings/lighting specifications showing the light fixture specifications
4. Technical data sheet and cut-sheet showing the light fixture specifications
Page 50 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
The Contractor is to ensure the use of constant DC output type LED driver
complying with the following IEC standards to minimise flickering:
a. IEC 62384
b. IEC 61347 Part 1 and Part 2-13
For non-LED light fixtures, use electronic ballast to cut off power supply to
prevent flickering due to lamp failure
Document requirements
1. Tender drawings/specifications highlighting the compliance to IEC
standards for LED light fittings and provisions of electronic ballast for non-
LED light fittings.
2. Technical data sheet of LED light fittings stating the compliance to IEC
standards and third-party test certificates. Technical data sheet of
electronic ballast for non-LED light fittings.
The Contractor is to ensure that LEDs are tested to ANSI/IES LM-79-19 and LM-
80-15 to ensure LED performance
Document requirements
1. Tender drawings/specifications highlighting the requirements including
the test standards IESNA LM-79-19 and LM-80-15.
2. Technical data sheet, cut-sheet and third-party test certificates indicated
with the compliance with the specified standards/requirements.
Power Distribution
Page 51 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications indicating the requirement.
2. Drawings indicating the electrical room location and level with respect to
passageway.
3. Shop drawings/as-built section drawings indicating the electrical room
location and level with respect to passageway.
4. Photographs showing implementation.
ii. Reduce Risk of Unnoticed Failure of Surge Arrestor Located in the LT Main
Switchboard
The Contractor is to ensure the use of surge arrestor with discharge indicator.
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications/drawings showing the discharge indicator
requirement
i. Provide Flexibility for Future Expansion for CCTV and Access Control
System
The Contractor is to ensure there is design that allows for future addition of data
storage (either local or cloud base data storage).
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications/drawings indicating the spare capacity requirement
2. Shop drawing/as-built drawing indicating 20% spare capacity in the
network switch for future expansion
3. Tender specifications/drawings showing the requirement of future
addition of data storage
4. As-built drawings/shop drawings, technical data sheet, T&C forms etc.
showing the implementation.
Page 52 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
ii. Reduce Risk of Damage to Outdoor Camera and Other Equipment due to
Lightning Surge
Note: The surge protection shall be provided at power source and/or at network
switch.
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications showing the surge arrestor requirement.
2. As-built schematic drawing showing the surge arrestor requirement.
The design of gondola system which must prevent its parts (be it fix structure or
suspension steel rope) from damaging the lightning tape which is mounted on
the parapet wall. It is recommended to provide sufficient if any of the gondola
structure or supporting system is to be installed over the lightning tape.
Document requirements
1. Tender specifications/façade access system drawings showing the
requirement
2. As-built lightning protection system and façade access system drawings
indicating the lightning protection strip interfacing with façade access
systems.
3. Photographs showing the implementation
Page 53 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
F. LANDSCAPE
Standalone Structures
Document requirements
1. Tender drawing (plan) showing the location of the standalone structure.
2. Detail drawings/specifications showing the roof slope of the outdoor
standalone structure.
3. Tender specification indicating the open ceiling system for the selected
areas.
4. Reflected ceiling plans showing the extent of open ceiling.
10. OTHERS
A. WINDOW TO WALL RATIO
The Contractor is to ensure that the building envelope design and glazing
specifications meets the criteria stipulated in the following Table C1.
Document requirements
Page 54 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
Document requirements
1. RTTV computation for roofs with skylight in prescribed forms and formats
2. Architectural plan layout and sectional details of different roof types as
well as the roof composition and respective U-values
3. Technical material or product information and relevant calculation of U-
value of the roof
Document requirements
1. Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement for air
permeability tests for windows and curtain walls
Page 55 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
2. Air permeability test results and report for windows and curtain wall
system (mock-up) from an accredited laboratory
Note: The use of highly efficient air-curtain system with its performance tested
in accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 220 to ensure a minimum of 2.0m/s
airstream velocity at the floor.
Document requirements
1. Plan layout showing the vestibules and details of the automated
technology or self-closing devices provided for the doors and other
appropriate measures, where relevant.
2. Photographs showing the provision of vestibules or other appropriate
measures implemented
Document requirements
1. Purchase order for relevant sensors/controls
Page 56 of 56
GM: 2021 - New Non-Residential Buildings
Project Details
GM Reference No
Building name
Type of Building
GFA (m2)
Carpark Area (m2)
Air-conditioned Area (m2)
SUMMARY
MAX POINTS SCORING POINTS REMARKS
Resilience 15 3
Whole Life Carbon 15 8
Health&Wellbeing 15 6
Intelligence 15 5
Maintainability 15 10.08
TOTAL 75 32
(ii) (a) >10% Reduction from the reference embodied carbon (for Concrete, Glass and Steel)
(b) >30% Reduction from the reference embodied carbon (for Concrete, Glass and Steel) 1 point for (a)
30 Input (%) 2.0
2 points for (b)
Reference Values
(kgCO2e/m2)
Non-Residential 1000
Residential 1500
Industrial 2500
(Reference values based on A1-A4 emissions for superstructure)
SUB-TOTAL FOR CN 1.1b 2.5
CN1.2 2030 Transition Plan
Carbon and Energy transition plan - delineates steps to deliver a net zero carbon building
from 2030 for the asset under assessment, based on scope 1 and 2 emissions N Y/N 1 point 0.0
Active Furnishing
Provision of active furnishing to discourage sedentary behaviour (e.g. standing tables and
0.5 points for (a)
(ii) height-adjustable desk) Input (%) 0.0
1 point for (b)
(a) at least 50% of all workstations with active furnishing
(b) at least 90% of all workstations with active furnishing
Sub-Total for HW1.1b 0.0
HW1.2 Material Emissions
Material Finishes to be SGBC 4 tick OR meet following emission levels stated in Table
HW1.2.1:
Materials include paints, floor coverings, wall coverings, ceiling coverings such as carpets,
paints, adhesives, engineered timber (including laminates), for carpentry works and
furniture where provided.
Table HW 1.2.1
Material Emissions Requirements for non SGBC 4 tick labelled products
• TVOC emissions rate shall be ≤ 0.25 mg m-3 h-3 after 24
For products, finishes and hours
furnishings • Formaldehyde emission rate shall be ≤ 0.02 mg m-3 h-1 after
48 hours
• VOC content for trim, stains and varnishes shall be ≤ 75gL-1
Paints, Varnishes, lacquers • VOC content for paints (water-based) shall be ≤ 25gL-1 for
matt, ≤ 30gL-1 for low sheen, ≤ 75gL-1 for semi-gloss
Limits for products are based upon ASTM D51 16-90, "Standard Guide for Small-Scale
Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor
Materials/Products"
Test methods for paints and coatings shall comply with ISO 17895 or ISO 11890
(a) at least 60% of all areas* with acceptable material finishes
A A/B 1 point for (a)
(b) at least 80% of common areas with acceptable material finishes 1.0
*includes lettable areas for non-residential developments and dwelling units for residential developments 0.5 points for (b)
60 Input (%)
Sub-Total for HW1.2 1.0
HW1.3 Air Quality and Comfort
HW1.3a Thermal Comfort
Air-Conditioned Non-residential Buildings:
Zonal temperature and air speed controls. The building can adjust temperature and air
speed so that parts of the building can have a thermal variation within it.
Strategies include
• The use of hybrid cooling systems with elevated temperatures with provision of ceiling fans
and/or individual desk fans. Where comfort can be controlled by the temperature of conditioned
air and the windspeed variation.
• Spatial and zonal temperature monitoring with occupant feedback, controls to allow for
(i)
adjustable air speeds and temperatures in discrete zones in open areas or by room.
Control zones should not exceed 100m2 Y/N
Controls should provide the logic to modify the operation of the VAV box, FCU, Passive
Displacement System coil temperature, Ceiling fan speed or other system employed, which Y/N
0.5 points for (a)
will adjust thermal comfort in that zone. 0.0
1 point for (b)
The strategies cover
(a) at least 50% of regularly occupied functional spaces Input (%)
(b) at least 90% of regularly occupied functional spaces
Residential Buildings and Non Residential non Air-Conditioned functional spaces.
A. Thermal comfort simulation: -0.5<PMV<0.5 Input (#) 1 point 0.0
B. Effective cross ventilation: 70% of habitable areas to meet area weighted average wind
Input (%) 1 point 0.0
velocity of 0.6m/s
C. Prescriptive performance
0.1 point for every
• Openings towards prevailing wind directions Input (%) 10% 0.0
Max 0.5 point
• Depth of Room vs Openings
A. Single sided ventilation:
the limiting depth(W) for effective ventilation is twice the floor-to-ceiling height (H)
(ii)
[W≤2H]
B. Cross Ventilation:
the limiting depth(W) for effective ventilation is five times the floor-to-ceiling height (H)
[W≤5H] 0.5 points for (a)
Input (%) 0.0
C. Atria/ event space: 1 point for (b)
Atria to have an effective opening >10% floor area:
Atria can be 1.5x the depth of room (A and B), or up to 2x depth where the use of fixed air
movement technologies are employed (e.g. HVLS fans).
Designated indoor and/or outdoor space for restorative practices (minimum 16m2 per
(i) space, and large enough for meditation/yoga or just quiet respite) which are accessible for N Y/N 1 point 0.0
all building occupants
Provision of community spaces and facilities, within the development, including physical
(ii) exercise facilities, playgrounds, communal gardens/allotments/sensory spaces Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
Sub-Total for HW3.2a 1.0
HW3.2b Outsourced Workers
Provision of proper and reasonable rest areas for Outsourced workers (e.g. security
officers, cleaners) to rest, recuperate, and eat. Refer to the ‘Tripartite Advisory on
Provision of Rest Areas for Outsourced Workers’ (Dec 2019): Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
(i) Locations that afford privacy and provides a pleasant environment and
(ii) Provision of amenities such as tables, chairs, water coolers, lockers.
Sub-Total for HW3.2b 1.0
HW3.3 Health and Wellness programmes
HW3.3a Physical Activity and Mental Wellness Programmes
(i) Structured, regular fitness and mental wellness programmes for all staff, or occupants (at
least 6 sessions a year) through engagement of external facilities and resources e.g.
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
subsidised gym memberships health assessments, personal training, fitness classes, mass
workouts, talks and workshops, counselling.
Sub-Total for HW3.3a 0.0
HW3.3b Healthy Eating & Drinking
Create a healthy food environment through provision of facilities, programmes and policies
(ii) On site eateries with HPB’s healthier dining programme N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
(iii) Corporate policies on healthy eating including catering procurement policies. Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5 To be discussed
Sub-Total for HW3.3b 1.0
INNOVATION 2 0.0
Projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific Resilience indicator or In the Remarks column, please
outcome innovation points can be awarded on a case by case basis. Points shall be provide the evidence of benefits
Capped at 2 points
awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and potential impact. & potential impact of your
Innovation:-
Where projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific Resilience indicator Points shall be Innovation no. 1:
or outcome innovation points can be awarded on a case by case basis. Points shall be awarded based on
awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and potential impact. the strength of
Process: Input (#) evidence of 0.0
At Design / Pre-retrofit stage benefits and
The project team is to submit a concise summary that articulates: potential impact.
• The nature of the environmental benefit of their intervention
• Justify the impact of the intervention through detailed calculations and comparisons with Please do a self
Innovation no. 2:
industry norms scoring for each
• Substantiate the calculations and comparisons with evidence and data. Innovation & input
At Verification (As Built/ In Operation): either 0.5, 1, 1.5 &
Details of the implemented intervention including measurements and monitoring of the Input (#) 2 points. 0.0
environmental performance including lessons learnt if the intervention does not perform
as expected. (Capped at 2
points)
Input Available points for Points
CRITERIA FOR INTELLIGENCE SECTION Data Input Remarks
Required New Buildings Scored
Intelligence 15 5.0 -
IN 1 Integrated 5 4.0
IN 1.1 Digital Life Cycle
PIM (example: BIM) developed in accordance with Singapore CDE Data
(i) Y/N 2 points 0.0
Standard that align with the Principles of ISO 19650-2018
Use of spatial model co-ordination platform basing on PIM for spatial
analysis including identifying:
(ii) a. System clashes through an automatic model checking tool Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
b. Spatial analysis for effective construction, maintenance and future
Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
alteration or replacement.
Digital building commissioning, performance and defect co-ordination
platform basing on PIM to track, co-ordinate and manage the
(iii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
commissioning of systems and the tracking of defects and their
rectification
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 1.1 2.0
IN 1.2 Common Data Environment
Performance Dashboard to monitor the different aspect of building assets’
(i) performance and operations from a single dashboard built on top of the Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
CDE.
Data Management and Integration with a platform that connects and
manages asset and facility data, operational data, and real-time
(ii) Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
equipment data extracted from different sub-systems based on an open
protocol
Data Accessibility and Security - information stored in the CDE platform
(iii) can be accessed by facilities teams in a secured manner to facilitate Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
operation and maintenance activities from anywhere and anytime.
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 1.2 2.0
IN1.3 Voluntary Disclosure of Building Energy Performance Data
Share basic information – follow Common Energy Dashboard data
(i) Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
requirements to share basic information and data.
Share additional information – follow Common Energy Dashboard data
(ii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
requirements to share additional information and data.
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 1.3 0.0
IN 2 Data Driven 5 1.0
IN 2.1 Asset Information Model
Development and handover of an accurate spatial model of the building or
(i) asset which complete and fully up to date inclusive of renovations that Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
would impact building services or layout alterations.
Physical and virtual asset information tagging system aligned with
common data environment that allows for tracking of maintenance work,
(ii) repairs, refurbishments or upgrades, replacement, decommissioning, risk Y/N 1 point 0.0
assessments, and performance evaluations of the physical asset to be
captured.
Adoption of a common international standard for asset ontology. For
(iii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
example, Brick Schema or Project Haystack.
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 2.1 1.0
IN 2.2 Digital Twins
Asset Digital Twin – the digital twin of the building asset as a whole to
analyse the building performance under various scenarios (design and
(i) Y/N 2 points 0.0
retrofit as well as adaptation plans) as well as ensure predictive asset
management and continuous optimisation of building systems as a whole.
System Digital Twin – detailed model based on operational data of
(ii) individual systems to deep dive into its performance, conduct virtual stress Y/N 3 points 0.0
tests and detailed analytics.
Process Digital Twin – To model processes and scenarios to find the
(iii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
optimum solution based on actual and simulated data.
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 2.2 0.0
IN 3 Responsive 5 0.0
IN 3.1 Real Time Performance
Energy - Breakdown of energy consumption by system, such as air
(i) conditioning, lighting, ventilation, transportation, receptacle loads. Y/N 1 point 0.0
Efficiency metrics tracking and analytics for real time optimisation.
Health & Comfort – Provision of permanent calibrated air quality
(ii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
monitoring system with zonal controls
Adoption of a common international standard for asset ontology. For
(iii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
example, Brick Schema or Project Haystack.
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 3.1 0.0
IN 3.2 User Experience
Proactive collection and use of data to understand, track and manage the
user experience within the building to improve performance including:
• Use patterns.
• Comfort (thermal, visual, aural and olfactory, including locational
information)
• Service requests and time for resolutions
For the following groups:
(i) Building Occupants Y/N 1 point 0.0
(ii) Visitors Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 3.2 0.0
IN 3.3 Data Ethics
A data ethics plan shall be detailed for the building that identifies the
various opportunities for the collection, analysis and use of data as well as
a risk register that looks at the following risks and how they will be
managed and mitigated.
• Personal Privacy
• Risks including data governance, monetarisation of data and data Y/N 1 point 0.0
permissions
• Workforce transitioning
• Transparency Y/N 1 point 0.0
• Data bias and data quality
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 3.3 0.0
INTELLIGENCE INNOVATION AND SMART PRODUCT 3 0.0
In the Remarks column, please
provide the evidence of benefits
Innovation
& potential impact of your
Innovation:-
Where projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific
Intelligence indicator or outcome innovation points can be awarded on a
case by case basis. Points shall be awarded based on the strength of
evidence of benefits and potential impact.
Process: Input (#) 2 points 0.0 Innova on no. 1:
At Design / Pre-retrofit stage
The project team is to submit a concise summary that articulates:
• The nature of the environmental benefit of their intervention
• Justify the impact of the intervention through detailed calculations and
comparisons with industry norms
• Substantiate the calculations and comparisons with evidence and data.
At Verification (As Built/ In Operation):
Details of the implemented intervention including measurements and
monitoring of the environmental performance including lessons learnt if
the intervention does not perform as expected. Input (#) 2 points 0.0 Innovation no. 2:
Example:
Encourage the Use of Singapore Green Building Council certified smart
building products or product with equivalent certification that allows
integration with the Common Data Environment (CDE).
Important Note - Please use embedded Maintainability Section Scoresheet below to generate scoring
1) Please ensure that this excel file is named as Green Mark 2021_Scoresheet (NRB).xlsx
2) The Maintainability Section scores should be automatically populated here once the embedded scoresheet is
saved and closed.
3) If the scores are not automatically populated, it is likely due to MS Office version issues. Please input the scores
manually in the beige coloured cells and all these cells must be filled up.
4) If the scores have been automatically populated from the embedded scoresheet, please do not input the scores
manually in the beige coloured cells.
Note to assessors: Please save and close the embedded scoresheet to automatically populate the score.
Available points for Points Scored from Manual input of
CRITERIA FOR MAINTAINABILITY SECTION
New Buildings Embedded Scoresheet Points
Maintainability 91.00
SECTION 0 - GENERAL 7 0 4.00
0.1 General Project Requirement 7 0 4.00
SECTION 1 - ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIOR 10.5 0 6.10
Part A - General Façade 0.5 0 0.50
1.1 General Façade 0.5 0 0.50
Part B - Façade System 4 0 3.00
1.2 Cladding system: Tile/ Stone/ Metal/ Others
1.3 Curtain Wall: Glazing/ Others 4 0 3.00
1.4 Masonry and Lightweight Concrete Panels
Part C - Others 6 0 2.60
1.5 Façade Features/ considerations 3 0 1.00
1.6 Entrance lobby 3 0 1.60
1.7 Roof Pre-req 0
SECTION 2 - ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR 21 0 12.08
2.1 Floors 2.5 0 2.50
2.2 Walls and Partitions 1 0 0.75
2.3 Ceiling 4 0 0.50
2.4 Wet Rooms and Storage 8 0 7.50
2.5 Basements 4 0 0.00
2.6 Loading Bay/ Back of House Service Areas 1.5 0 0.83
SECTION 3 - MECHANICAL 18.5 0 3.00
Part A - Cooling Systems 9.5 0 1.00
3.1 Chiller Plant 9.5 0 0.00
3.2 VRF 1 0 1.00
Part B - Other systems 9 0 2.00
3.3 Air Distribution System 4 0 0.50
3.4 Domestic Water Supply Pre-req 0
3.5 Sanitary System 2 0 1.50
3.6 Fire Protection System 2 0 0.00
3.7 Building Management System 1 0 0.00
SECTION 4 - ELECTRICAL 10.5 0 6.00
4.1 Lighting System 2 0 2.00
4.2 Power Distribution System 2 0 1.00
4.3 Extra Low Voltage System 3 0 2.00
4.4 Lightning Protection System 1 0 1.00
4.5 Vertical Transportation System 2 0 0.00
4.6 Solar PV System 0.5 0 0.00
SECTION 5 - LANDSCAPE 10.5 0 1.50
5.1 Softscape 1.5 0 0.00
5.2 Hardscape 3.5 0 0.00
5.3 Vertical Greenery Pre-req 0
5.4 Roof and Sky Terraces 1.5 0 0.00
5.5 Water Retaining Structures 2 0 0.00
5.6 Standalone Structures 2 0 1.50
SECTION 6 - SMART FM 13 0 0.00
6.1 Good Practices 2 0 0.00
6.2 Cybersecurity 1 0 0.00
6.3 Innovation 3 0 0.00
6.4 Advanced Smart FM 4 0 0.00
6.5 Robotics & Automation 3 0 0.00
Bonus Points 4.5 0 0.00
Section 1 BONUS POINTS 2 0 0.00
Section 5 BONUS POINTS 2.5 0 0.00
TOTAL Maintainability Section Points Scored 32.68
Maintainability Prorated Points 0.00 32.00
Bonus scored 0.00 0.00
w/o Bonus 0.00 50.40
TOTAL Maintainability Section Points Scored After Pro-rating
w Bonus 0.00 50.40
Total No. of Pre-Requisites Not Complied 0 7.00
Total Number of Green Mark 2021 Points 10.08
Attained Maintainability Badge? Yes
SECTION 0 - GENERAL
Maintenance contract
c. Use of outcome-based contracts and integrated facilities
management (IFM) contracts to improve labour efficiency.
Projects demonstrating outcome-based maintenance
contract for the following services:
(1 point for each item, up to 2 points)
1.7 Roof 0 0
1.7.1 Reduce risk of water ponding on roofs -
For concrete flat roofs - design slope not gentler than 1:150
a. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
and with scupper drains/gutter.
For metal sheet profiles –
Design slope to manufacturer’s specifications
(OR)
Design slope for different sheet profiles based on the roof
b. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
pitch table (refer to table in technical guide)
(OR)
Design slope for different sheet profiles determined by
rainwater drainage capacity calculation.
Sub-total (1.7.1) -
a. Water spill on floor – Design for full vanity washbasin with Y Y/N 1.5 1.5
counter-top to slope away from the user.
Water spill on floor – Design for soap and tissue dispenser
b. within arm’s reach of each faucet. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
(points can be scored only after scoring for solution (a))
Soap dripping on counter/floor – Design of soap dispenser
c. location to be vertically mounted directly above basin or Y Y/N 1 1
integrated bin.
Water splash on counter/floor – Specify depth of basins to
d. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
be minimally 175 mm to avoid excessive splashing.
Sub-total (2.4.4) 3.5
2.5 Basement 0 4
2.5.1 Reduce risk of water ingress/seepage in basement 4
Specify positive side waterproofing on the retaining wall, e.g.
a. NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
sheet-membrane systems, vapour barriers or equivalent.
3.1.3 Reduce risk of corrosion and dust invasion in cooling tower 1.5
All components in contact with condensing water or air
a. stream shall be corrosion-protected. The construction
material shall be either:
i) FRP (fiberglass reinforced polyester with UV inhibitors). Y/N
(AND)
6.2 Cybersecurity 0 1
Lack of cyber security leading to data theft and economic
6.2.1 1
impact
Implement a risk-based cyber security assessment
a. conducted by building owner’s IT department/cyber security NA Y/N/NA
consultant
The organisation is assessed by an independent party and
certified to comply with 1 of the following certifications.
0 1
i) ISO 27001, the International Information Security
b. Standard NA Y/N/NA
ii) SOC 2 certification, American Institute of Certified Public
Accountants.
iii) IEC 62443, Industrial communication networks - IT
security for networks and systems.
Sub-total (6.2.1) 0
6.3 Innovation 0 3
Adopt innova ve technologies that improve FM labour
6.3.1 3
efficiency and service delivery. (Up to 3 points)
Adopt at least one Smart FM solution (Type 1 or 2) within
a. N Y/N NOK Pre-req
project. Score at least 1 point from 6.3.1b or c.
Type 1 – Use of digitised workflow automation to optimize
b. the workflow, productivity and service delivery: (1 point # of applications
each) 0 3
Type 2 – Use of data analytics and artificial intelligence for
c. system optimization and predictive maintenance: (1 point # of applications
each)
Sub-total (6.3.1) 0
This BIM Execution Plan (BEP) developed for this project is made up of consultants and
contractor. Each discipline will work and coordinate to facilitate the accuracy and effectiveness of
information in the model. The BEP document is updated by the BIM Manager. Should there be
any alterations to the BIM process, uses or deliverables, the BIM Manager is required to amend
the document when necessary to carry out effective exchange of information.
The BEP specifies the roles and responsibilities of each project member when using Building
Information Modelling (BIM) at different stages of a project. It contains details with regards to the
BIM deliverables and the process through which the deliverables are created, maintained and
shared, in order to meet a set of project goals. The Main Contractor will update the BIM model
progressively during the construction and shall provide a final as-built BIM model suitable for
Farm Operation Management.
SECTION A: PROJECT INFORMATION
Note: Main Contractor to liaise with FM and to ensure as built models are compatible with Farm Operation
Management’s BIM platform & data format
(II) QUALITY ASSURANCE
When there is a slope in the Slab or the Slab with a special shape
and the BIM authoring tool does not have the functionality to
create such Slabs, then create the slab geometry using other tools
and define the ‘Type’ as a “slab”.
Beam Top of Beam = As per design (Up stand Beam or Down Hang
Beam)
Create objects for Beams with special shapes and cross sections,
e.g. Tapering and haunch.
Truss Model with multiple elements and group them as a truss. Note:
Some BIM authoring tools have a function to automate this
process.
Column Model from the Structural Floor Level to Structural Floor Level of
Slab below.
If the Walls are between floors then model from Structural Floor
Level to Structural Floor Level of Slab below else the Walls need
to model to the correct levels.
When the Wall spans across different heights, if the BIM authoring
tool permits model as a single Wall with varying height then model
as one Wall. Alternative is to model multiple Walls.
Staircase, Model only the structure part of the Staircase, Steps and Ramps.
Step and
Ramps Create objects for Staircases, Steps and Ramps with special
shapes when it is not available in the BIM authoring tool.
Model the structural Opening for the MEP elements like Ducts
based on the location and size information from the MEP
Engineers.
Model the Floor openings based on location and Size from the
Architects and MEP Engineers.
Special Model using Wall, Slab, Column, Beam and Opening or placed as When the design
Structure an Object and assign the “Type” accordingly. Check the specific is not confirmed
elements for their modelling guideline. the elements can
Civil defence be modelled as
shelter, reference to use in
Tunnel, Link the Schematic
Way, External Design co-
structures, ordination with the
Balcony, Architects and
Canopy, MEP Engineers.
Swimming
pool,
Temporary
structures,
Others
(IV) STRUCTURAL BIM MODELLING GUIDELINES
( The Tenderer will be deemed to have studied the Reports before preparing his tender.
The Employer does not warrant the accuracy of the Report)
201208_K6037_WI03
8_ HDB_(Part 1).docx
(Final Report)
The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the terms of
accreditation under the Singapore Accreditation Council. The reports shall not be
reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of the accredited
organization has given approval in writing.
Certification by PE for SI Report
1. I, Toh Chin Keong the Professional Engineer, PE Registration No. 5293 certify that
the Soil Investigation Report.
comprising all field and laboratory data, tests and results there has been carried out by me or under my supervision or
direction, and I have verified the accuracy of the information given in the site investigation report, and to the best of my
knowledge and belief, all have been prepared in compliance in all respects with the provisions of the Building Control Act
and Regulations, relevant Codes of Practice and Standards.
2. I further certify that I have the appropriate qualifications and experience, and I am familiar with the purpose of the
investigation for which this Site Investigation Report is prepared in reference to Project Ref No: RG/K5728/WA13/NEO
TIEW ROAD
25 September 2021
Professional Engineer for Site Investigation Signature and Stamp Date
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Table of Contents
Chapter No. & Title Page No.
1. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 General 1
1.2 Project Description 1
1.3 Scope of Work 1
4. LABORATORY TESTING 11
4.1 General 11
4.2 Physical Properties 11
4.3 Shear Strength Characteristics 13
4.4 Chemical Contents 14
5. GROUND CONDITIONS 15
5.1 General Geology 15
5.2 Subsoil Condition 18
6. CONCLUSIONS 22
7. LIMITATIONS 24
i
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
REFERENCES 25
APPENDICES
ii
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
This report presents the results of soil investigation works consisting of ten (10) land
boreholes carried out for Soil Investigation Work at Neo Tiew Road (WA13). (See
Figure 1.1).
(b) Client
Singapore Food Agency
The scope of work covering the soil investigation services of this project are
summarised as follows:
Page 1 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
THE SITE
Source : OneMap
Page 2 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Field exploration works consisting of ten (10) boreholes were carried out using rotary
wash boring method for obtaining representative field data and good quality samples.
The field works consisting of boreholes and relevant field tests as summarized in Table
2.1 were carried out under the supervision of a Geologist from M/s Ryobi Geotechnique
International Pte Ltd.
The field exploration program started on 6 August 2021 and completed on 23 August
2021. A total number of ten (10) boreholes were drilled to depths ranging from
31.450m to 35.450m below the existing ground level.
Page 3 of 498
Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511 Tel: 65- 6369 7100 Fax: 65- 6362 5848
Co.Reg.No. 200500891W
Coordinates Borehole Exploration (m) Soil Samples & Field Tests (Nos)
Standard Penetration
Pressuremeter Test
Termination Depth
Borehole No.
Thin-walled Tube
Mazier Sample
Northing (m)
Rock Coring
Easting (m)
Soil Drilling
Sample
Test
BH1 46573.000 16600.000 110.392 35.450 35.450 - 17 3 - 1
The site investigation works consisting of borehole exploration and field tests were carried
out in accordance with BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation and relevant Eurocodes
and also the requirements specified by Client as described in following sections.
The borehole exploration works consisting of borehole drilling, soil sampling and
common field tests (e.g. SPT) conform to British Code of Practice
(BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation), BS EN ISO 22475-1:2006
(Geotechnical Investigation and Testing-Part 1), BS EN ISO 22476-3:2005
(Geotechnical Investigation and Testing-Part 3), local standards (e.g. SAC Inspection
Body) and the requirements specified by Client.
Prior to drilling, cable detection works were carried out at all designated
borehole locations. Trial pits up to at least 1.5m depth followed by hand-auger
hole down to 3.0m depth were done at each borehole location to ascertain the
absence of buried cables and services or any other man-made obstruction that
could hinder drilling works. The technique employed was by rotary wash boring
whereby boring was advanced by rotating drilling bit with cuttings removed by
circulating water as the drilling fluid. Casings were used to support unstable
grounds when soft cohesive soil or loose non-cohesive soil is encountered in the
drilling process. The diameter of the drilled borehole is 100mm. The borehole
was terminated based on the termination criteria specified in the contract. Figure
3.1 shows the schematic diagram of Rotary Wash Boring.
Page 5 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 6 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
into the original soil below the base of borehole at levels before
carrying out Standard Penetration Test (SPT). The sampler possesses
with a sharp cutting edge at its lower end is capable for recovering
samples from soil layers with SPT-N values not exceeding 30 blows
per 30cm penetration using hydraulic means for minimizing soil
disturbance.
For sampling work in hard soil with SPT-N > 30, undisturbed soil
samples were recovered by using Mazier sampler consisting of a
rotary triple tube (PVC tube of 73mm I.D x 1000mm length x
1.5mm thickness) with an outer and an inner barrels, a sampler head,
a cutting shoe and a drill bit which will cut soil and reduce resistance
for advancing the sampler into very stiff to hard soils for the
required sampling works.
Standard Penetration Test (SPT) was conducted in accordance with British Code
of Practice (BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation) and Eurocode of
Practice (BS EN ISO 22476, 3:2005+A1:2011, Standard Penetration Test) and
the requirements specified by Client. The purpose of this empirical dynamic
penetration test is to determine the resistance of soils to the penetration (i.e.
450mm or lesser) of a split barrel sampler of 50 mm external diameter which
was driven by a 63.5 kg automatic drop hammer with a free fall of 760 mm.
(Figure 3.2). The value of penetration resistance, N is the number of blows
required to achieve a 300 mm penetration of the barrel after an initial penetration
Page 7 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Test Procedure:
1. Lower sampler to
bottom.
2. Drive sampler
through 0.45 m.
3. Record number of
blows required to
advance every 75
mm.
4. N = Sum of last
four readings.
Page 8 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
The OYO Pressuremeter used in present study consists Elastmeter 2 & Elast
Logger 2 (Figure 3.4). The “OYO Elastmeter-2” is a horizontal loading tester
with a maximum capacity of 20MPa for the testing of soil and rock in borehole.
The device can perform a series of operation from pressure and displacement
data collection to plotting of the results. Moreover, with the Elast Elastmeter-2,
mechanical information such as the Young’s modulus (i.e. Pressuremeter
Modulus) can be obtained.
The equipment comprises four (4) major components, namely i) Elast Logger-2,
ii) Elastometer HQ Sonde, iii) tubing/cable and iv) high pressure hand pump.
Two (2) types of rubber tubes (i.e. soft and hard) are available for test according
to the stiffness of soil.
The probe was calibrated against pressure at ground surface before its first use
and was then inserted into the borehole and lowered down to the predetermined
test depth for testing. The test was conducted by inflating the probe with water
via pressure generated by the hand pump at suitable pumping rate, e.g. not
exceeding 1.0MPa/min recommended by manufacturer. The pressure and radius
of probe can be automatically captured by the logger at specified intervals (e.g.
0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 & 30 seconds and 1, 2 5 & 10 mins) according to soil type
which can be stored in internal memory or on an external USB palm drive
(excluding 0.5 & 1 sec for USB drive). When a constant creep was noted, the
pressure was unloaded and again reloaded to failure or until the maximum
capacity of the pressuremeter (i.e. 20MPa) or the maximum radius of the
inflated rubber tube (i.e. 90mm) has reached. The test was terminated by
releasing the pressure at minimum 6 pressure decrements to zero pressure.
The co-relationship between pressure and deformation captured by the logger
will allow the determination soil parameters, e.g. At-Rest Earth Pressure, Yield
Pressure and Pressuremeter Modulus (Em) and also the Pressuremeter Cyclic
Modulus (Er).
Page 9 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 10 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
4. LABORATORY TESTING
4.1 General
The laboratory test program scheduled by Client was executed to evaluate the soil
properties in the present investigation. All the tests were carried out by Ryobi
Geotechnique International Pte Ltd, accredited laboratory of SAC-SINGLAS except for
the chemical content tests which were conducted by M/s ALS Technichem (S) Pte Ltd.
Table 4.1 summarizes the types and quantities of laboratory tests performed according
to Client's instruction in this investigation.
The dimensions (circumference and height) and the weight of the soil sample are
measured in accordance with BS 1377 PART 2:1990 Method 7 for the
determination of bulk density.
The particle density (i.e. specific gravity) of the soil grains is determined by
comparing the bulk density of the soil grains with the density of the distilled and
de-aired water. The particle density test is conducted in accordance with BS1377
PART 2:1990 Method 8.
Page 11 of 498
Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511 Tel: 65- 6369 7100 Fax: 65- 6362 5848
Co.Reg.No. 200500891W
Unconsolidated-undrained Triaxial
Grading by Mechanical Analysis
Consolidated-undrained Triaxial
Grading by Hydrometer Method
Sulphate Content
Chloride Content
Borehole No.
Moisture Content
Particle Density
pH Value
Bulk Density
BH1 3 9 10 10 10 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH2 3 2 8 8 8 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH3 2 5 7 7 7 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH4 2 6 6 6 6 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH5 3 6 9 9 9 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
BH6 3 6 8 8 8 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH7 3 1 8 8 7 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH8 3 1 7 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH9 3 7 10 10 10 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
BH10 3 10 10 10 10 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 28 53 83 83 82 28 28 25 22 10 22 10 22 10 22
Atterberg Limits, i.e. Plastic Limit (PL) and Liquid Limit (LL) are water content
where the behaviour of a soil sample changes and is very important in soil
classification. At the water content below the Plastic Limit, the soil behaves like
in a “solid” state. At the water content beyond the Liquid Limit, the soil
behaves as if in the “liquid” state. The difference of water content between the
Plastic Limit and the Liquid Limit is termed as Plasticity Index (PI). The
determination of the Atterberg Limits is conducted in accordance with BS 1377:
PART 2:1990 Methods 4 and 5.
For coarse-soils, the grain size distribution of the soil is determined from
mechanical sieving of the dry soil grains through various aperture sizes
(0.063mm to 50mm) sieve pans. If substantial amount of soil grains (mainly silt
and clay-size particle) passes through the sieve pan with aperture of 0.063mm,
hydrometer test is conducted to determine the percentage of silt and clay
particles. The grain size analysis is conducted in accordance with BS 1377:
PART 2:1990 Method 9.3.
For CU test, specimens were first is tropically consolidated after saturation and
then sheared under undrained condition. The pore water pressures developed in
Page 13 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Selected soil and water samples collected from different boreholes were assigned for
chemical contents tests which include pH value, Sulphate Content, Chloride Content,
Organic Content, and Sea Shell Content in the present investigation. The chemical
content tests are conducted in accordance with BS1377 Part 3:1990.
4.4.1 pH Value
Chloride are extracted with dilute nitric acid and then analyzed by titration using
Volhard’s method.
Page 14 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
5. GROUND CONDITIONS
The subsurface within the vicinity of the project site is classified as the KALLANG
FORMATION and OLD ALLUVIUM (Figure 5.1). The geological formation is
described as follows:
KALLANG FORMATION
It consists of both marine and terrestrial deposits that are found in onshore incised river
valleys, offshore and coastal areas. The deposition period was late Pleistocene to
Present. The distribution of KALLANG FORMATION extensively found in river
valleys, river mouths, river plains, coastal areas and near off shore Singapore.
KALLANG FORMATION is a group, consists of Marine member, Alluvial member,
Transitional member, Reef member and Littoral.
Marine member (Km) : Very soft to soft, pale blue to bluish grey, CLAY. It
comprises upper and lower part.
Alluvial member (Ka) : Fluvial SAND (F1) & Fluvial CLAY (F2)
Transitional member (Kt) : Unconsolidated black to blue, grey Estuarine Mud,
Muddy Sand or Sand often with high organic content
and PEAT Layers.
Reef member (Kr) : Loose, calcareous SAND and corals formed off shore.
Littoral member (Kl) : Loose Clayey SAND and SAND shell fragments
deposited on costal beach.
OLD ALLUVIUM
The OLD ALLUVIUM was probably dominant by fluvial condition with subordinate
marine sediments during Pliocene to Mid-Pleistocene. The deposits of the OLD
ALLUVIUM mainly cover the eastern part of Singapore. The OLD ALLUVIUM was
then deposited as a thick pile of alluvial to deltaic deposits of coarse sand with
occasional incursions of marine sediments. Tectonic activity appeared to have
recommended in late Tertiary time giving rise to a trough which now plunges to the
Page 15 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
south beneath the OLD ALLUVIUM on the eastern side of Singapore. The thickness of
OLD ALLUVIUM in Singapore varies from 10 meters to more than 100 meters.
Page 16 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 17 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
According to the results of present ten (10) boreholes, the subsoils found at the present
site can be classified into nine (9) layers as follows. The soil description was made
based on BS5930 and SPT-N correlation (Terzaghi & Peck) adopted in local practice.
Re-classification of soil and rock from BS to EC (if required) can be referred to Annex
A of “Guide on Ground Investigation and Geotechnical Characteristics Values to
Eurocode 7”GeoSS 2015).
Page 18 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 19 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 20 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Page 21 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
6. CONCLUSIONS
On the basis of the results of field and laboratory tests conducted in the present study, the
findings are summarized as follows for design reference:
1. The subsoils found in the present ten (10) boreholes consist of the following 9 layers.
Layer SPT-N Layer
Geological Formation Soil Description
No. Thickness
Alluvial Member
Silty fine to medium SAND with
3 (KALLANG FORMATION), F1 2.000m
traces of organic materials N=3
(Only found in BH7)
Page 22 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Unweathered
(OLD ALLUVIUM), O(A) Very silty fine to coarse SAND N>100
9 *0.350m
(Only found in BH1)
Page 23 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
7. LIMITATIONS
This factual report on soil Investigation works has been prepared for Singapore Food
Agency to be used solely in the planning and design of the proposed development at Neo
Tiew Road. In performing our professional services, we have used that degree of care and
skill ordinarily exercised, under similar circumstances by our geologists and engineers. No
other warranty expressed or implied is made as to the findings and conclusions included in
this report.
The report has been developed based on the results of field investigation and laboratory
testing of the present study. It should be recognised that subsurface conditions can vary
laterally and with depth at a given site. If before and during construction, conditions are
exposed that differ from those described in this report, those should be brought to the
attention of M/s Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd (RGIPL) to evaluate whether
reassessment of the findings and conclusions contained in this report is necessary. Note that
additional cost will apply if further investigation works are required in the opinion of
RGIPL.
Page 24 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
REFERENCES
3. BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION (1990), “Methods of Test for Soil for Civil
Engineering Purposes, BS 1377:1990”.
Page 25 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
APPENDIX A
LAYOUT OF BOREHOLES
AND CROSS SECTIONS FOR GEOLOGICAL PROFILES
Page 26 of 498
Page 27 of 498
Neo Tiew Road
BH Easting Northing
BH1 16600 46573
A A
E
F BH2 16600 46492
B D BH3 16684 46618
BH3 BH6
BH4 16684 46539
B
BH1 G
BH5 16684 46477
BH6 16812 46628
C
BH4 BH7
BH9 BH7 16812 46550
C BH8 16812 46476
BH2
D BH5 BH8 BH9 16928 46550
BH10 BH10 16928 46452
E F
G
Page 28 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
APPENDIX B
SOIL BORING LOGS
Page 29 of 498
11
Page 30 of 498
BH1
NEO TIEW ROAD 46573..000 m
16600.000 m
110.392 m
3 3.00
3/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
5/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
10/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
14/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
4/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 31 of 498
BH1
NEO TIEW ROAD 46573..000 m
16600.000 m
110.392 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
5/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
3/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
13/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
14/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
16/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
27/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33 33.00
100/220 SPT16
33.35
34
35 35.00
38/300 SPT17
35.45
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 32 of 498
BH2
NEO TIEW ROAD 46492.000 m
16600.00 m
110.657 m
3 3.00
2/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
4/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
8/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
8/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
10/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
52/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
19/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 33 of 498
BH2
NEO TIEW ROAD 46492.000 m
16600.00 m
110.657 m
20.00
MZ1
21 21.00
21.00
26/300 SPT10
21.45
22
23 23.00
26/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
42/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
46/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
57/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
34/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 34 of 498
BH3
NEO TIEW ROAD 46618.000 m
16684.000 m
108.432 m
3 3.00
5/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
6/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
7/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
14/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
10/300 SPT5
11.45
12
13 12.90
10/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
15/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
21/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 35 of 498
BH3
NEO TIEW ROAD 46618.000 m
16684.000 m
108.432 m
20.00
TW2
20.90
21 20.90
25/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
20/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
16/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
20/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
21/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
23/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 36 of 498
BH4
NEO TIEW ROAD 46539.000 m
16684.000 m
108.912 m
3 3.00
9/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
11/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
13/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
11/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
16/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
17/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
34/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 37 of 498
BH4
NEO TIEW ROAD 46539.000 m
16684.000 m
108.912 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
29/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
38/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
46/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
47/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
55/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
43/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 38 of 498
BH5
NEO TIEW ROAD 46477.000 m
16684.000 m
109.304 m
3 3.00
6/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
10/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
2/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
4/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
7/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
2/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
8/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
42/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
26/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 39 of 498
BH5
NEO TIEW ROAD 46477.000 m
16684.000 m
109.304 m
20.00
MZ1
21 21.00
21.00
33/300 SPT10
21.45
22
23 23.00
64/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
52/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
60/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
31/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
42/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 40 of 498
BH6
NEO TIEW ROAD 46628.000 m
16812.000 m
106.352 m
3 3.00
4/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
6/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
5/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
10/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
5/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
23/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
6/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
22/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 41 of 498
BH6
NEO TIEW ROAD 46628.000 m
16812.000 m
106.352 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
24/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
15/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
18/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
30/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
32/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
29/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 42 of 498
BH7
NEO TIEW ROAD 46550.000 m
16812.000 m
106.827 m
3 3.00
2/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
3/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
5/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
29/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
15/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
20/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 43 of 498
BH7
NEO TIEW ROAD 46550.000 m
16812.000 m
106.827 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
27/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
35/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
31/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
24/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
31/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
33/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 44 of 498
BH8
NEO TIEW ROAD 46476.000 m
16812.000 m
107.130 m
3 3.00
7/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
9/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
6/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
12/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
12/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
12/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 45 of 498
BH8
NEO TIEW ROAD 46476.000 m
16812.000 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
13/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
38/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
36/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
57/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
50/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
78/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 46 of 498
BH9
NEO TIEW ROAD 46476.000 m
16812.000 m
105.715 m
3 3.00
3/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
2/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
4/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
3/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
4/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
6/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
20/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 47 of 498
BH9
NEO TIEW ROAD 46476.000 m
16812.000 m
105.715 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
25/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
25/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
25/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
16/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
21/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
43/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64
25 September 2021
Page 48 of 498
BH10
NEO TIEW ROAD 46452.000 m
16928.000 m
106.013 m
3 3.00
9/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
11/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
16/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
11/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
13/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
13/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
17/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
18/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 49 of 498
BH10
NEO TIEW ROAD 46452.000 m
16928.000 m
106.013 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
37/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
58/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
67/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
38/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
71/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
69/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 50 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
APPENDIX C
GEOLOGICAL PROFILES
Page 51 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
SECTION BOREHOLES
Page 52 of 498
Page 53 of 498
Page 54 of 498
Page 55 of 498
Page 56 of 498
Page 57 of 498
Page 58 of 498
Page 59 of 498
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
APPENDIX D
RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTS
This laboratory is accredited under the Singapore Accreditation Council-Singapore Laboratory Scheme (SAC-SINGLAS) and has met the requirements of
ISO /IEC 17025 : 2017. The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the laboratory’s terms of accreditation under the SAC-SINGLAS
This document shall not be reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of the accredited Laboratory has given approval in writing.
Page 60 of 498
-
2.66
Page 61 of 498
Page 62 of 498
Page 63 of 498
Page 64 of 498
Page 65 of 498
Page 66 of 498
Page 67 of 498
Page 68 of 498
Page 69 of 498
Page 70 of 498
Page 71 of 498
Page 72 of 498
Page 73 of 498
Page 74 of 498
Page 75 of 498
Page 76 of 498
Page 77 of 498
Page 78 of 498
Page 79 of 498
Page 80 of 498
Page 81 of 498
Page 82 of 498
Page 83 of 498
Page 84 of 498
Page 85 of 498
Page 86 of 498
Page 87 of 498
Page 88 of 498
Page 89 of 498
Page 90 of 498
Page 91 of 498
Page 92 of 498
Page 93 of 498
Page 94 of 498
Page 95 of 498
Page 96 of 498
Page 97 of 498
Page 98 of 498
Page 99 of 498
Page 100 of 498
22/09/2021
22/09/2021
APPENDIX E
PRESSUREMETER TESTS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
0.40
0.30
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
0.20
∆P'
Po
∆R
0.10
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 07-08-21
TIME : 11:03:12 AM
HOLE NO. : BH-1
DEPTH[m] : 14.00 - 14.50 m
TUBE : NXS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
5.00
4.00
Pressure, P' [MPa]
3.00
Py
2.00
∆P'
1.00
∆R
Po
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
33 35 37 39 41 43
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 21-08-21
TIME : 2:10:08 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-3
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.50
2.00
Pressure, P' [MPa]
1.50
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 10-08-21
TIME : 9:34:52 AM
HOLE NO. : BH-5
DEPTH[m] : 18.00 - 18.50 m
TUBE : NXS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 18-08-21
TIME : 3:54:41 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-6
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 14-08-21
TIME : 4:02:19 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-8
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Py
Pressure, P' [MPa]
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 12-08-21
TIME : 2:22:51 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-9
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS
APPENDIX F
HAMMER CALIBRATION REPORTS
TEST REPORT
___________________________________________________________________________
TEST REPORT
14th September 2021
___________________________________________________________________________
CLIENT
Submitted by
No. 65 Ubi Crescent #02-1 Hola Centre Singapore 408559 Tel (65) 68968926 Fax: (65) 62212003
The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the terms of accreditation under the Singapore
Accreditation Council. The reports shall not be reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of APS ASIA
PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd has given approval in writing.
Page 480 of 498
APS ASIA PDA ENTERPRISE PTE LTD
________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENTS
__________________________________________________________________
1. INTRODUCTION
2. TEST EQUIPMENT
3. SUMMARY
4. RESULTS
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPT – Hammer Energy Measurement Page 2/6
Test report Ref.: APS/SPT/2021/115
1. INTRODUCTION
This report the results of the standard penetration test, SPT, hammer
energy measurement using the Pile Driving Analyzer, PDA, carried out for
APS ASIA PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd on 14 September 2021. The aim of testing
was to provide an estimate of the hammer energy transferred by the SPT
hammer in accordance to American Standard Test Method ASTM D4633-
16.
The SPT hammer tested was identified as H-49 and was operated by
Aframe YBM drilling machine (Rig-31).
2. TEST EQUIPMENT
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPT – Hammer Energy Measurement Page 3/6
Test report Ref.: APS/SPT/2021/115
3. SUMMARY
Borehole - BH-3019
- Diameter : - 100 mm
- Depth : 16.00 m
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPT – Hammer Energy Measurement Page 4/6
Test report Ref.: APS/SPT/2021/115
APPENDIX I
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPT – Hammer Energy Measurement Page 6/6
Test report Ref.: APS/SPT/2021/115
Conducted By : APS Asia PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd (Joseph Ling Ka Jun)
Conducted For : Ryobi Geotech Pte Ltd (Machine : RIG - 31 / SPT : H-49)
BLOW NO. EMX EF2 DMX FMX TSX CSX VMX AMX
OUTPUT QUANTITIES
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
6 @ 0.3 m
4 @ 1.6 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3551 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.1667 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 8 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 155 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 16.8 MPa
14/9/2021 4:02:37 pm CSX 128.1 MPa
Blow Number 3 VMX 4.13 m/s
AMX 3055 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
7 @ 1.6 m
0 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3816 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2713 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 162 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 19.0 MPa
14/9/2021 4:02:52 pm CSX 133.4 MPa
Blow Number 4 VMX 4.27 m/s
AMX 3503 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
23 @ 1.7 m
9 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3779 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2412 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 10 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 131 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 20.9 MPa
14/9/2021 4:02:58 pm CSX 108.2 MPa
Blow Number 5 VMX 4.23 m/s
AMX 3276 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
48 @ 0.4 m
21 @ 1.6 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3739 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2485 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 10 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 141 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 21.9 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:06 pm CSX 116.5 MPa
Blow Number 6 VMX 4.43 m/s
AMX 2828 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
28 @ 1.7 m
17 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3840 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2413 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 10 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 136 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 20.5 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:10 pm CSX 112.0 MPa
Blow Number 7 VMX 4.34 m/s
AMX 3104 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
33 @ 0.3 m
31 @ 1.6 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3555 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2328 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 118 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 15.6 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:20 pm CSX 97.0 MPa
Blow Number 8 VMX 4.31 m/s
AMX 2857 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
43 @ 0.4 m
21 @ 1.7 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3602 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2321 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 102 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 18.1 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:28 pm CSX 84.1 MPa
Blow Number 9 VMX 4.05 m/s
AMX 2408 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
20 @ 1.7 m
14 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3836 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2495 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 10 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 135 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 24.5 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:37 pm CSX 111.4 MPa
Blow Number 10 VMX 4.63 m/s
AMX 3172 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
36 @ 1.7 m
23 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3339 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2400 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 8 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 101 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 14.6 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:43 pm CSX 83.1 MPa
Blow Number 11 VMX 3.85 m/s
AMX 2506 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
27 @ 1.7 m
22 @ 0.3 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3585 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.2440 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 129 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 19.0 MPa
14/9/2021 4:03:53 pm CSX 106.2 MPa
Blow Number 12 VMX 4.31 m/s
AMX 3026 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
CERTIFICATE OF CALIBRATION
Certificate Number : APS/SPT/0115/2021
Calibration Remarks:
Please refer to Calibration Test Report : APS/SPT/2021/115 for detailed summary and analysis.
This Certificate shall not be reproduced except in full, without the written approval of the laboratory.
1 GENERALLY
1.1 These Preambles for all Trades shall apply to the whole of the works
regardless of the Trade headings under which they have been described and
shall be read in conjunction with the Specification.
1.2 The rates and prices in the Schedule of Unit Rates/ Schedule of Prices are to
include for complying with the requirements and/or cost effects of these
Preambles.
1.3 The following abbreviations have been used in the Schedule of Unit Rates/
Schedule of Prices:-
m³ - Cubic metre
m² - Square metre
m - Linear metre
mm - Millimetres
no - Number
kg - Kilogramme
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/1
Preambles For All Trades
1 GENERALLY (Cont'd)
1.4 P.C. UNIT RATES FOR SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF GOODS AND
MATERIALS
Prime Cost (P.C.) Unit Rates for works to be supplied and installed by a firm
to be selected by the Architect are indicated in the Schedule of Unit Rates/
Schedule of Prices. The Architect on behalf of the Employer shall select a
firm to carry out the works for which P.C. Unit Rates have been allowed and
unless the Contractor has reasonable objection to the appointment of the
firm to execute the works, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the
firms so selected by the Architect in the same way as for his own Sub-
Contractor and the Employer shall in no circumstances be liable to the
Contractor for the default of any firm.
The P.C. Unit Rates shall mean the cost of the works executed by the firm
for the nett area and/or quantity required. The Contractor's overall rate for
the item shall cover for all costs including:-
- entering into a contract with the firm selected and co-ordinating all
their activities so that it complies with the Contractor's order of
work and programme.
- affording free and full use of plant and hoisting facilities, standing
scaffolding and erecting any special scaffolding required, use of
messrooms, sanitary accommodation and welfare facilities
- taking full responsibility for and covering and protecting against all
loss or damage to all executed and part executed work and all
materials and goods properly brought on site for inclusion in the
Works
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/2
Preambles For All Trades
1 GENERALLY (Cont'd)
1.4 P.C. UNIT RATES FOR SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF GOODS AND
MATERIALS (Cont'd)
In principle, P.C. Unit Rates for supply and installation shall be subjected to
adjustment in the final account by substituting the actual costs as confirmed
by the Architect when selecting the firm to execute the works for the items
against the P.C. Unit Rates stated in the Schedule of Unit Rates/ Schedule of
Prices and the cost for overhead and profit shall be adjusted based on the
percentage as allowed for by the Contractor (see examples of price
breakdown at the end of this Preambles). No other adjustment will be made
and the Contractor shall allow for any other costs necessary.
The Contractor shall note that firms selected to execute the works under
P.C. Unit Rates are NOT Nominated Sub-Contractors as defined in Clause 28
of the Conditions of Contract but shall be regarded as the Contractor's
domestic sub-contractors.
In respect of each item for which a P.C. Unit Rate for the supply and
installation of works by a firm to be selected by the Architect is included in
the Bills of Quantities the Contractor shall provide a breakdown of his unit
rate in accordance with the following example:-
b) Profit ( %) $
c) Attendance $
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/3
Preambles For All Trades
1 GENERALLY (Cont'd)
5) Waste of materials.
6) All cutting.
3) All items as stated in Clause 1.6 above and the relevant Preambles for
the particular trades.
All rates and prices wherever applicable, shall include for the submission of
Professional Engineer's Certification for any product or work executed in
order to comply with the current requirements of the relevant Authorities
and/or codes of Practice, and/or Building Regulations, etc. as appropriate.
All rates and prices shall include for all necessary protection of all Trades and
Sections of the Works at all times until the issuance of the Completion
Certificate or Certificates as applicable.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/4
Preambles For All Trades
2 CONCRETE WORK
6) Laying on any type of sub-base and for preparing and leaving surface to
receive screeds or paving.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
All mild steel and high tensile steel bar reinforcement shall be in lengths not
exceeding 12 m (or 40'0") unless otherwise stated.
3) Cutting to lengths.
7) Spacer bars, steel chairs and distance blocks and supporting while
concreting.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/5
Preambles For All Trades
2.4 FORMWORK
Strutting to forms shall not exceed 3,500mm high unless otherwise stated.
3) Splayed edges.
4) Notchings.
6) Battens.
10) In addition to the above, the rates for wrot formwork are to include for
stopping all holes, cracks, etc., in cement mortar and rubbing off all
fins, board marks and other irregularities after removal of formwork.
11) Rates for permanent metal formwork and waffle form and similar
systems are to include for:-
(iii) All necessary additional supports and sealing against units, in the
case of formwork to insitu concrete margins to unit moulds not
requiring support decking.
Egg Farm- Main Contract
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/6
Preambles For All Trades
In addition to Clauses 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4, the rates are to include for: -
(v) The supply of all expendable items such as cones, wedges, anchor
plates, spacers and the like.
(viii) Cores and ducts including cleaning and drying out, temporary
supports required in the formation, forming and grouting air holes
at ends or sides of ducts, straight and curved sleeves or
sheathing.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/7
Preambles For All Trades
2.6 WATERSTOPS
2) All labour and materials for the temporary joints in the concrete walls
and slabs.
The rates for expansion joints are to include for all necessary formwork.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/8
Preambles For All Trades
Contrary to SMM, walls curved on plan are measured and grouped together
regardless of radius.
12) Forming square and rebated reveals, cut squints or birdsmouths and
notches.
15) Raking out joints of external fairfaces walls 19mm deep for specified
mortar pointing.
16) Work around pipework, cables and other items of the like nature.
17) Forming openings and turning arches in walls for drain pipes in
manholes.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/9
Preambles For All Trades
4 ROOFING
5) Timber battens.
6) Chasing the structure for tucking in edges of flashings and the like.
Rates for screeds and waterproofing systems in panel roofing shall include
for:-
2) Temporary rules.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/10
Preambles For All Trades
4 ROOFING (Cont’d)
1) All straight and curved cutting including cutting at square and raking
abutments, top edges, cutting and fitting and making good around
outlets, pipes and any other sundry items of a like nature.
3) Touching up all exposed fixings, cut edges, etc. with approved matching
colour paint.
3) Dressing over glass and glazing bars, corrugated roofing, Roman tiling,
pantiling and similar materials, drips, bolts and the like.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/11
Preambles For All Trades
1) All timber shall be Tanalised and Kiln-Dried to suit the particular use.
6) Temporary supports.
The rates for ceiling and wall boarding are to include for narrow widths,
small quantities and all cutting.
The rates for plugging are to include for drilling all holes in walls, existing
plastered or tiled walls etc., irrespective of the material encountered and
subsequently making good.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/12
Preambles For All Trades
3) Marking out and cutting and fitting tiles around profile of doors and
frames, partitions and all projections and holes for mechanical and
electrical services.
4) All circular, square or rectangular cutting for light fittings including all
necessary supports, edging and trimming pieces.
7) Suspended systems are to include for all metal rails, channels, runners,
cross tee, hanging rods, etc.
10) All extra labour and waste for setting out panels to form equal margins
on all sides.
1) All joinery timber shall be Tanalised and Kiln-Dried to suit the particular
use selected and kept clean for staining, varnishing and polishing or
painting.
2) All joinery timber shall be wrot unless otherwise stated. Sizes stated are
finished sizes.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/13
Preambles For All Trades
1) Short lengths.
10) Priming backs of frames, etc., with one coat of aluminium wood primer
before fixing.
11) Fixing of door frames etc. with galvanised mild steel holdfasts.
Where work is described as "worked to the required shape" shall include for
tongued angles, splayed or rounded edges, chamfers, rebates, grooves,
stopped work and work across grain and any other sundry lineal items of a
like nature.
5.8 OTHERS
1) Rates for plywood shall include for all straight, raking and circular
cutting and waste.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/14
Preambles For All Trades
6 IRONMONGERY
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/15
Preambles For All Trades
7 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
7.1 GENERALLY
3) Shop and site fabrication including drilling, cutting (including holes and
openings for other trades), notching, splicing, welding, machining ends
and bearings.
5) Provision of all necessary plant, temporary bracing supports and the like
required for erection, providing samples and tests required by the
specification, the inspection of welds including the use of any special
radiographic techniques.
9) Welding works including all labour and materials and preparing surfaces
for welding and grinding to a smooth finish.
Rates for bolts shall include for all necessary drilling works, nuts and flat
washers and tapered washers where used on the flange of steel sections.
Rates for steel encased in concrete are to include for cleaning and de-
greasing surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/16
Preambles For All Trades
8 METALWORK
8.1 WELDING
10) Forming access panels as required and openings for fittings, diffusers,
light fittings, speakers and the like including additional supports.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/17
Preambles For All Trades
8 METALWORK (Cont'd)
The rates inserted for each item of aluminium works and stainless steel
works shall be held to include for:-
3) All screws, nuts, bolts, lugs, holes, threading, fasteners, fixing, devices
and any sundry items of a like nature.
5) All other sundry and associated work described in the Specification and
shown on the drawings necessary to complete the works.
7) All necessary welding of stainless steel works, filing smooth and polish
to match the required finishes.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/18
Preambles For All Trades
4) Cramps, dowels, ties, special metal supporting brackets and the like.
10) Internal angles, fair edges, arrises and quirks, grooves, V-Joints,
throats, groin points and other intersections of curved surfaces.
11) Rounded coves and external angles not exceeding 25mm radius.
12) Mitres, stops, etc., on all the foregoing and on cornices, mouldings,
architraves, enrichments, coves, skirtings, gutters, and strings.
14) All making good and any sundry items of a like nature.
Rates for metal lathing are to include for all cutting holes, notching and any
other sundry items of a like nature.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/19
Preambles For All Trades
1) Short lengths.
7) Cramps, dowels, ties, special metal supporting brackets and the like.
10) Cutting and fitting up to or around frames, grilles, air bricks, sanitary
and other fittings, pipes, brackets, cutting holes, notching, and the like.
11) External and internal angles, corners, rebated joints, moulding pieces,
rounded edges, arrises, chamfers, mitres, polished, honed or fair edges,
etc.
12) All making good and any sundry items of a like nature.
13) Selection of tiles and/or slabs including multiple handling and dry laying
of different colours and tones and for setting out and laying to patterns
as directed by the Architect.
14) Filling all defects, blemishes and holes with approved filler containing
matching granite chippings and polishes as directed by the Architect.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/20
Preambles For All Trades
1) Short lengths.
3) Junctions.
4) Ends.
6) Selection of tiles of different colours and tones and for setting out and
laying to patterns as directed by the Architect.
2) Temporary rules.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/21
Preambles For All Trades
10 ROOF PLUMBING
3) Running joints.
4) Brackets.
6) Extra joints.
3) Sockets.
4) Connectors.
5) Backnuts.
7) Fire-bends.
8) Tees.
9) Diminishing pieces.
10) Plugs.
3) Running joints.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/22
Preambles For All Trades
11 GLAZING
3) Springs, blocks, setting blocks, locating blocks distance pieces and the
like.
4) Waste, etc.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/23
Preambles For All Trades
12 PAINTING
In addition to the above rates for painting pipes and gutters are to include
for painting on all tacks, wall hooks, holderbats, brackets, ears, etc.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/24
Preambles For All Trades
13 ALUMINIUM CLADDING
1) Design costs and cost effects of the amplification and pricing factors
contained in the Specialist Specification.
DRAINAGE WORK
2) The rate of each item of pipes shall be deemed to include the following:
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/25
Preambles For All Trades
2) base course shall be deemed to include the supplying, depositing, spreading, levelling,
compacting, ramming and consolidating to the finished thickness.
a) Sweeping and brushing surface prior to applying tack coats or asphalt surfacing.
e) Providing the necessary construction equipment, equipment, tools, etc. and the
subsequent removal upon completion.
4) precast concrete kerbs, channels and drains shall be deemed to include all necessary
moulds, formwork, reinforcement and joints and cutting, all angles, intersections, ends,
outlets, etc.
5) precast concrete kerbs shall include for laying in alignment and finishing fair on all
exposed surfaces.
17 DAYWORKS
Rates
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/26
Schedule of Prices
Section 1 - Preliminaries
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Item Description $ ¢
A SCOPE OF WORKS ( )
The extent of work included in this Contract shall be as described in the Contract
Documents or reasonably be inferred therefrom.
The Works to be carried out under this Contract comprise the following: which included
but not limited to:-
(1) New erection of GP Plant, Dormitories, Offices, Workshop, Guard Houses, Sub-
station and etc. and all as described in the tender drawings
(2) External Works such as premix driveway, concrete drains, boundary fence,
water detention tank, boundary fences and gates and all as described in the
tender drawings
(4) Specialist Works such Layer Houses (12 Nos) & Pullet Houses (7 Nos) including
the specialised equipment, Combustion Plant building including one poultry
litter processing plant & Biofilter room air treatment, Egg Grading and Packing
System, Egg Farm washing wastewater treatment plant; all as described are
included in the Prime Cost Sums.
(5) All other works included in the contract and items as Provisional Sums
(6) External roadworks extension outside the Site boundary including boxed
drains, box culverts and tree plantings works and etc.
(7) Allow for clearing the whole site and disposal of all debris off site.
(8) The Contractor is responsible for the design of all the temporary works and
such permanent works to the extent as identified in the Contract.
The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with the descriptions in the
Contract Documents including all ancillary and other works which may be necessary to
carry out and bring to completion of the Works.
The Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and satisfy himself as to
the full extent, character and nature of the Works to be performed under this Contract.
The Employer shall not entertain any claim arising from the Contractor’s failure to
study these Documents.
B The sites are located Lot 02008x Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall inspect and examine the Site and its surroundings, and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of the ground or site, the
hydrological and climatic conditions, the form and nature of the Site, the quantities
and nature of the works, and materials necessary for the completion of the Works, the
means of access to the Site, the accommodation he may require and in general shall
himself obtain all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other
circumstances which may influence or affect his Tender, regardless of whether the
information is specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings.
A set of the Soil Investigation Report with details of borehole logs and soil samples
may be examined by the Tenderer at the Structural Engineer's office by prior
arrangement for the Tenderer's information only. The Tenderer will be deemed to have
studied the Report and the soil conditions before preparing his tender. The Employer
does not warrant the accuracy of the Report.
If the Tenderer wishes to carry out additional soil investigation which involves
excavation, sounding or boring before submitting his tender at his own expense,
arrangement can be made with the Architect for access to the site.
Immediately after taking possession of the site and before commencing the work, the
Contractor shall check the actual levels and contours against those shown on the
drawings and in the event of any discrepancy, shall immediately notify the Architect.
Unless the above has been complied with, no claim for any discrepancy in the levels
and/or contours will be entertained.
Any claim by the Contractor on the ground of lack of knowledge of site conditions or
Authorities’ requirements and restrictions, etc. will not be entertained.
Words importing the Singular only shall also include the Plural and vice versa where
the context requires.
C SPECIFICATION ( )
The description of Works and materials in the Schedule of Prices are to be read in
conjunction with the “Pricing Preambles” contained in the Schedule of Prices and the
term “as described” shall mean as described in the Specification.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
In this Contract and throughout the Contract Documents following words shall have
the meanings hereby assigned to them:-
(1) Employer shall mean ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
(6) Quantity Surveyor shall mean Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd
(8) His May also mean "her" or "their" and the word "he"
may also mean "she" or "they".
(10) Contract and / or The Articles and Conditions of Building Contract and
Contract Documents Amendments thereto, Drawings, Specification,
Schedule of Prices, Form of Tender and Appendices,
the Architect's Letter of Acceptance and such other
letters and documents as may be agreed between
the parties. All these documents shall be read and
construed as a whole and as being complementary
to one another.
(12) Works The whole of the materials, labour, plant and other
things necessary and requisite for the proper
execution of the Contract as shown on the drawings
and in the Contract Documents and as are required
of the Main Contractor to complete the Contract.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/3
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Item Description $ ¢
(18) Local Authorities The relevant statutory bodies, federal, central and
state government departments, in so far as their
approval and/or consent are material to the
implementation of the Works or anything in
connection therewith.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/4
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Item Description $ ¢
A INSPECTION OF DRAWINGS ( )
The Drawings for this Contract are those listed in the Tender Documents and any
further drawings which may be issued in amplification thereof. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have examined the Drawings prior to submission of his tender. No claim for
extras consequent upon non-examination of Drawings will be considered.
B PREPARATION OF TENDERS ( )
The tenderer shall bear all expenses incurred by him in the preparation and
submission of his tender. The lowest or any tender will not necessarily be
accepted and in no case will any claim for expenses incurred by the tenderer be
entertained.
The tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied him before tendering as to the
sufficiency and correctness of his Tender for the Works.
(d) Pursuant to Clause 5(2) of the Conditions of Contract, the Contract shall indicate
by an appropriate key letter those items in these Preliminaries requiring
adjustment based on the quantities of work carried out (Letter Q), those items
requiring adjustment based on the time required to carry out the work (Letter
T), and those items of expenditure which are of once-for-all or fixed character
and independent of quantities or time (Letter F).
(i) In the pricing of this tender, the Schedule of Prices shall be read in
conjunction with the Specification and other parts of the Contract
Documents.
(ii) Every item in this Schedule of Prices which has a monetary value shall be
priced. Any item which is not priced and is without any remarks indicating
its inclusion elsewhere in the Schedule of Prices shall be deemed to be of
no monetary value.
(iii) The sum of the amounts of all items priced by the Contractor shall truly
represent the Tender Amount for those items.
The price set down by the Contractor against each item, unless expressly
provided to the contrary, shall be held to include for all the design works,
the supply of materials including cutting and waste, unloading, storage,
packing, carriage and cartage, hoisting; all labour for fabricating, setting,
fitting and fixing in position; use of plant, supervision, establishment
charges, duty, profit and any other expense and everything else necessary
for the due and proper completion of each item.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
(iv) All rates and prices in the Schedule of Prices shall be exclusive of Goods
and Services Tax (GST).
(v) The amount appearing, as the total of the Schedule of Prices shall be
transferred to the Form of Tender without any alteration or rounding off.
Should the Contractor make any errors in his extensions and/or casts or in
carrying forward to or in casts of the summary, such errors shall, before the
signing of the Contract, be so rectified and adjusted that, when correctly
calculated, the total of the Final Summary shall represent the same amount as
that tendered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender. The nett aggregate
amount of such errors, whether a nett deduction or a nett addition, will be
calculated as a percentage of the total of the Final Summary of the Schedule of
Prices (excluding Prime Costs and Provisional Sums) and all unit rates
throughout the Schedule of Prices shall be subject to such percentage discount
or premium as the case may be. Provided always that Provisional or Prime Cost
Sums shall be excluded from the calculation and shall not be subject to such
percentage discount or premium.
(i) The Contractor is to note that the Competent Authority will not permit any
work or operations to be carried out on Sundays, Public Holidays and any
other day between the hours of 7.00pm and 7.00am. The Contractor shall
adhere to all prevailing guidelines.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
(iii) The Contractor shall note that the normal working hours of the Employer’s
resident Site Staff are as follows :-
(iv) Should the Contractor refrain from pricing the above items it shall be
deemed that the Contractor has made allowances for all necessary
overtime and expenses elsewhere in the Schedule of Prices? Any
subsequent claim for overtime expenses will not be considered.
A WORKING HOURS ( )
Any work which requires "Standing" supervision e.g., concreting, shall be organised
and programmed in such a way so as to carry out these works within the stipulated
working hours for Consultant's and/or Employer's Site Supervisory Staff. The prior
written permission of the Architect shall be obtained if, in the urgency of the case,
such work is required to be carried out beyond the stipulated hours.
When overtime is carried out, the Contractor shall submit weekly returns to the
Architect showing work done on Sundays/Public Holidays or beyond the normal
working day.
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of all customs,
restrictions, quotas and duties and shall allow in his rates for all such financial
contingencies, as he has to incur at the time of this tender and may have to incur
thereafter.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A SCHEDULE OF RATES ( )
In making adjustments for extra works or works omitted from the Contract, the rates
for such work shown in the Schedule of Rates shall be used, and nothing shall be
added to or deducted from those rates to cover profit, overhead and/or other charges.
In the case of differing rates occurring between rates for identical or similar items in
the various sub-sections of the Schedule of Rates, the rates, or pro-rata rates, in the
respective Sub-sections will be used for the valuation of variations.
The Contractor shall permit the requisite number of copies of his prices, extensions
and casts to be made for the purpose of the Contract.
B LOSS OF PROFIT ( )
No claims for any loss of profit will be considered due to any omission of Works by the
Employer.
C COPIES OF PRICES ( )
The Contractor shall permit the requisite number of copies of his prices, extensions
and casts to be made for the purpose of the Contract.
D ARTICLES AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ( )
The form of Contract to be used shall be as those contained in the SIA Building
Contract 2016 (Without Quantities) – 1st Edition July 2017 published by Singapore
Institute of Architects with its Amendments.
If the Contractor considers that any of the Conditions involves expense, he shall
allow hereunder the monetary value for complying with each of the terms, and any
amendments thereto, of the Conditions of Contract which are as follows:
ARTICLES OF CONTRACT
Article 3. Architect
Article 5. Consultants
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Clause 4. Programme
Clause 6. Administration
Note: The Contractor is to allow for paying all fees, charges, rates and
taxes legally demandable except for fees for permanent connections
to all services and supervision fees due to public authorities.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Note: The Contractor shall allow for carrying out all tests required by
the Architect and/or Engineer.
Note: The Contractor is to allow here or include in his prices for all
costs incurred in the preparation and submission of claims for
Variation and Final Account.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Clause 19. Insurance Against Injury to Persons and Property and Work Injury
Compensation (Amended)
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Work Injury Compensation Policy shall cover all employees of the
Contractor and all Sub-Contractors engaged in connection with the
Contract at the Site and elsewhere whilst engaged in business
connected with the Contract. The following Exceptions of the Policy
shall be deleted:
a) The Insured liability to employees of Independent contractors or
sub-contractors engaged by the Insured.
The Contractor's All Risks Policy shall provide "all risks" cover in
respect of loss of or damage to the Contract Works and third party
liability, including but not limiting to the following covers :
a) Professional Fee Clause (1.5%)
f) Loss-Payee Clause
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses in connection
with the provision of insurance coverage to visitors on site in respect
of personal injuries or death arising out of or in the course of or by
reason of the carrying out of the Works whether due to any
negligence, omission, breach of contract, default of Contractor or
otherwise.
Cover for the Contract Works shall include all unfixed goods and
materials delivered on or adjacent to the Site. The sum insured shall
be the full reinstatement value thereof plus the percentage to cover
professional fees as stated in the Appendix to the Conditions of
Contract plus Goods and Services Tax (GST) at the prevailing rate.
The limit on amount insured for third party liability shall not be less
than $3 million as stated in the Appendix [19(1)(b)] for any one
accident, the number of accidents being unlimited during the period of
insurance.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall extend the third party liability provision to cover
any damage, expense, liability, loss, claim or proceedings which the
Employer may incur or sustain due to injury or damage of any kind to
any property real or personal (other than the Works) arising out of or
in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the Works and
caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of
support or lowering of ground water other than damage caused by the
negligence, omission or default of the Contractor, his servants or
agents or of any sub-contractor, his servants or agents. (amended
Clause 19(2)(a) of the Conditions)
The Contractor shall take out and pay all premiums in respect of the
abovementioned insurance policies and any other insurance policy
which he considers to be necessary to meet his obligations pursuant
to this Contract.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Note: The Contractor must allow here for all costs involved in
preparation and submission of statements of construction costs,
material valuations and statements of completion of work.
Invoices, delivery orders of materials for the Works and which are
properly placed on site shall be submitted together with the
application for progress payment.
Final certificate to the Contractor will only be issued when all the sub-
contractors have submitted the necessary as-built drawings and the
maintenance manuals to the Employer, Architect and M & E Engineer.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Appendix [Note: The description below the heading of the relevant clauses of the
Conditions of Contract are inserted in amplification for the guidance of
the Contractor who will nevertheless be fully responsible for taking
into account all the implications of the SIA Building Contract 2016 and
any Addendum and Amendments thereto]
Prior to the time of every Interim Valuation of the Works the Contractor shall submit to
the Quantity Surveyor the following:-
(a) A detailed statement relating to the items in the Schedule of Prices showing the
Value of the Work executed in an agreed format and adaptable to Microsoft
Excel of other approved spreadsheet programme. All variations must be
submitted in detailed breakdown within one month after completion of the
variations.
(b) The Interim payment application shall be lodged with the Quantity Surveyor not
exceeding seven (7) days before date of the Interim Valuation.
At the time of every valuation for interim certificate the Contractor is to submit to the
Quantity Surveyor a statement from each of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
showing:-
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A SETTLEMENT OF ACCOUNTS ( )
At the time of the settlement of accounts, the Contractor is to obtain a statement from
each of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers that the sums to be included in the
settlement of accounts in respect of each Sub-Contractor and Supplier are accepted in
full and final settlement of their Sub-Contracts.
The Contractor shall at all times give every reasonable assistance to the Architect.
When requested the Contractor shall produce for inspection/ retention all time sheets,
delivery notes, invoices, accounts, receipts, test certificates and such other vouchers
and records as the Architect may require in connection with the Contract in the
preparation of the Final Account.
C REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ( )
Provide at the site one (1) copy of each of the following documents for general
reference:-
a) Contract Documents
e) Inspection Reports
g) Daily report/diary
i) Sub-Contractors' Programmes
D DISCREPANCIES ( )
Before commencement of each part of the works, the Contractor shall ensure that
there are no discrepancies between the drawings. Any discrepancy must be referred to
the Architect immediately. Any remedial work necessitated by the failure of the
Contractor to ensure that there is no discrepancy between the aforesaid drawings shall
be borne by the Contractor.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be followed in all cases. Where dimensions
are omitted or where discrepancies are found the Contractor shall notify the Architect
and seek his written direction.
The Contractor shall check the whole of the dimensions on site and if any discrepancy
is found between the drawings and conditions on site, he shall notify the Architect
immediately and request instructions.
(2) The requisite Insurance Policies, other than policies procured by Employer
together with receipts of premium paid
(11) A safety procedure manual outlining all the 13 elements of the safety
management system as specified by the Factories Act. The manual should
include safety standards (in comparison with MOL’s industry’s target) on
fatality, Loss Time Injury Frequency (LTIF) and Total Recordable Injury
Frequency (TRIF).
The submission of the above documents shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility or obligations under the Contract.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
(i) The Contractor shall submit with his tender a Preliminary Programme
indicating the dates he proposes to commence and complete the various
operations and sections of the Works.
(ii) Upon the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit within fourteen
days an overall Works Programme. The Contractor's Works Programme must
include the Works of all Sub-Contractors and supply of all Suppliers and all the
Specialist Works and Employer’s Direct Contract wrorks.
(ii) The Architect reserves the right to examine and check the feasibility of the
programme, and, if necessary, make suggestions for alterations to the
programme so as to ensure timely completion. The Contractor shall allow for
submission of revised programme as and when required.
(iv) Should the rate of progress of the Works or any part thereof at any time in the
opinion of the Architect be such that the approved programmed and any
agreed revision thereof is not being maintained, the Architect shall give notice
thereof to the Contractor and the Contractor shall thereupon take such steps
as the Contractor may consider necessary (including the employment of
additional labour and acquisition of additional materials, plant, machinery and
equipment), at his own cost, to ensure that progress is maintained in
accordance with the programme and that completion is achieved by the due
date.
The location of all material, major plant, temporary mobile toilets, temporary access,
temporary rubbish disposal areas, and the like shall be submitted for the approval of
the Architect in the form of layout plans clearly indicating the level, load and any
attachment to the permanent structure.
The layout plans (including fire escape route and hoarding layout) must be submitted
for the Architect's approval at least two (2) weeks prior to the commencement of
erection on site.
The Contractor shall take over the ownership of the TOL land at the site from the
Employer. The Contractor shall at his own costs and expenses, pay all TOL fees,
comply with the all the terms and conditions for the use and maintenance of and
access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority. The Contractor shall
reinstate the land to its original condition before handing over the land back to the
relevant Authority and/or Employer.
The Contractor shall bear all the cost implication related to maintain the TOL and to
pay for the fees charged for the duration of the Contract Period and any subsequent
extension to the period of completion.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Provide for all on and off-site management and supervisory costs, including but not
limited to :
(a) A full-time Project Manager with minimum ten (10) years proven management
experience who shall supervise & administrate all works on site. (i.e., must be
fully service for the entire contract period including 12 months maintenance
period).
(b) A full-time Structural Engineer with minimum five (5) years proven experience
(including relevant experience for structural steel works) who shall supervise &
administrate all works on site.
(c) A full-time M&E Engineer with minimum five (5) years proven experience who
shall supervise & administrate all works on site.
(d) A full-time Architectural Co-ordinator with minimum five (5) years proven
experience who shall supervise & administrate all works on site.
(e) A full-time BIM Manager with minimum five (5) years proven experience &
administrate all works on site
(f) A full-time BIM Co-ordinator with minimum three (3) years proven experience
& administrate all works on site
(g) A full-time Safety Officer with minimum five (5) years proven experience who
are familiar with BOWEC specification and other safety specification/
requirements.
(h) A full-time Foreman-in-charge with proven experience who shall co-ordinate all
aspects of Interior Decoration Finishing and Furnishing Works on site.
(i) Other technical staff as listed in the relevant Appendix to the Form of Tender.
ji) The Contractor shall note that should additional staff to those offered be
considered necessary by the Architect to supervise and administer the Works,
the Contractor is to provide such additional staff at no extra cost to the
Employer.
The Contractor shall, by the written request of the Architect or his representative on
the Site, immediately dismiss from the Works any person employed by him thereon
who may in the opinion of the Architect, be incompetent or has misconduct himself,
and such person shall not again be employed on the work without the written
permission of the Architect.
C LABOUR ON-COSTS ( )
Provide for all costs in respect of workmen for Central Provident Fund contribution
and/or Government levy on foreign workers, payroll tax and contribution to Skills
Development Fund, as applicable, Annual and Public Holidays, Travelling Time,
expenses, fares and transport, Non-productive time and other expenses in connection
with overtime, Incentive and bonus payments, accommodation, etc. Any other
disbursements arising from employment of labour.
Allow for any items of expenditure which are not allowed elsewhere such as travelling
time and fares and any other costs due to importing labour and management from
other countries.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Maintain on the Works as large a labour force in the various trades as can be used
with efficiency and consistent with the agreed construction schedule
A THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN ( )
(1) not employ and ensure that its sub-contractors will not employ any Foreign
Worker as defined under the Employment of Foreign Workers Act Cap 91A, its
subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-enactment thereof
(hereinafter collectively referred to as ‘the Employment of Foreign Workers
Act’) unless the Contractor or its sub-contractors has obtained in respect of
the Foreign Worker valid work permit required by the Employment of Foreign
Workers Act which allows the Foreign Worker to work for the Contractor or its
sub-contractors. The Contractor shall ensure that the said employment of the
Foreign Worker is in accordance with the conditions of the work permit;
(2) not harbour or employ and ensure that its sub-contractors do not harbour or
employ any person who has acted in contravention of the provisions of the
Immigration Act Cap 133, its subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-
enactment thereof (hereinafter collectively referred to as ‘the Immigration
Act’);
(3) not contravene any of the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers
Act and/or the Immigration Act;
(4) comply with the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or
Immigration Act in respect of foreign workers/foreigners; and
(5) not permit any person who has contravened the provisions of the Immigration
Act entry or remaining at the work site.
The Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Employer against any
damage, expense, liability, loss, claims, proceedings and/or penal sanction
whatsoever arising out of or by reason of the commission of any offence under the
Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or the Immigration Act or the non-
compliance with any provisions thereof and of any breach or default of the
undertaking to be submitted in accordance with the specimen appended to the Form
of Tender.
Any breach or default by the Contractor of any of the above-mentioned undertaking
shall be construed as a fundamental breach of this Contract which would entitle the
Employer to terminate the employment of the Contractor pursuant to the Conditions
of Contract.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Employer will not consent nor in any way condone
the contravention of any of the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers Act
and/or the Immigration Act. The Employer shall therefore be entitled, but not under
any obligation to, at any time & from time to time, with or without prior notice, carry
out checks and inspections of the Contractor’s workers as well as the workers of the
sub-contractors to ascertain whether there is any contravention of the provisions of
the Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or the Immigration Act.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN (CONT’D)
THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN (CONT’D) ( )
The Contractor shall exercise due diligence to check the passport, document of
identity or travel document of the worker and to prevent illegal foreign workers from
entering and/or remaining at the work site.
Random periodic spot checks of workers’ quarters (especially after office hours)
should also be conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor is required to submit
written confirmation on a quarterly basis that no illegal workers are in their
employment and/or remaining at the work site.
(1) ensure that all its workers as well as its sub-contractors’ Foreign Workers
and/or workers who are non-Singapore citizens shall have in their possession
the respective valid work permits as required under the Employment of
Foreign Workers Act and/or permits and/or passes as required under the
Immigration Act;
(2) give written confirmation that they have verified with the Immigration
Authorities/Controller of Work Permits on the validity and currency of the
passports, work permits and other related documents of the foreign workers
in their employment.
(3) maintain and update the foreign workers’ Register at all times, such
Register to contain the particulars as required by the Employment of Foreign
Workers Act;
(4) take appropriate physical measures such as posting of clear and bold
prohibition notices at all entrances and appropriate locations on the work site.
(5) installation and maintenance of proper fencing and hoarding around the site.
(7) issue serially numbered security passes to all workers on Site, provided that
for foreign workers and/or non-Singapore citizens, the security passes shall
only be issued to those who have valid work permits, and/or permits and/or
passes;
(8) cancel the issue of the security passes upon the cessation of the employment
of the foreign worker or withdrawal/cancellation of the work permit;
(9) ensure that such security passes must be worn at all times by all the
workers on Site. Photographs and appropriate identification details of the
workers should be prominently displayed on these passes.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall be responsible for the strict compliance and observance of all
requirements of the Workplace Safety and Health Act 2007 (WSHA) and any
subsequent amendments. The Contractor shall attend the DFS Workshop and
involvement in DFS Guide 3 prior to the Commencement of the works.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all costs & expenses incurred
resulting from any infringement of the Act by the Contractor. (e.g., fines imposed by
the Authorities, etc.)
The Contractor shall provide safety helmets, safety boots, safety harness, etc. for his
workmen (including those employed by his Sub-Contractors) employed on the site,
including consultants and visitors, and to fully comply with all the requirements laid
down in the Workplace Safety and Health Act (WSHA) and any subsequent
regulations or bye-laws with regard to safety requirements applicable in the Republic
of Singapore.
The Contractor shall provide and install temporary warning lights and lightning
conductors where required and to strictly comply with the requirements of the
relevant Authorities.
The Contractor shall employ safety officer(s) who shall be responsible to ensure that
all requisite safety requirements and measures have been satisfactorily implemented
and observed by everyone on Site.
The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for any delays due to stoppage
works on site by the Authorities for any non-compliance with the Workplace Safety
and Health Act 2007 (WSHA) and any subsequent amendments.
The Contractor shall hold fortnightly site safety meetings and shall submit a
fortnightly Safety Report to the Architect in a format to be approved by the
Architect.
B SAFETY AUDIT ( )
The safety inspection and audit shall not, in any way whatsoever, relieve the
Contractor of his duty to comply with all requirements of any statutory act or
regulation and any amendment or re-enactment thereto or any additional measures
that may be required to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions
at the site.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary protection and safety helmets,
safety boots, safety belts and equipment for all the workmen, Contractor’s Site Staff,
Resident Supervisory Staff, Consultants and their representatives and all authorised
visitors to site.
The Contractor shall provide the Resident Supervisory Staff and Consultants a
minimum number of the following:-
Provide adequate storage and maintenance facilities for the above and replacement
batteries for torch lights as and when required.
The Contractor shall provide adequate first aid facilities suitable to the size and
composition of his staff and labour force. The Contractor shall afford the Site
Supervising team full use of the services and facilities when required.
C PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS ( )
Within three (3) days of the award of the Contract or such date as directed by the
Architect, a meeting shall be held to discuss and resolve administrative procedures
and responsibilities and scheduling.
d)Requirements for temporary facilities, offices storage sheds utilities and their
locations on site.
e)Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
g)Record drawings
l)Supply of concrete
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
o)Delivery schedule of the Contractor’s safety procedure manual outlining the safety
management system as specified in the Factories Act, a loss control programme and
safety standards to be achieved using MOL industry targets.
p)Others as directed by the Architect.
A SITE MEETINGS ( )
Site meetings for the purposes of programming and co-ordinating the works will be
held at intervals as directed by the Architect. Attend all site meetings and ensure
attendance by sub-contractors as directed by the Architect.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance at Site Meetings including the provision of
drinks as directed by the Architect.
B PROGRESS REPORTS ( )
1) Monthly Reports
The Contractor shall submit within the first week of every month to the Architect five
(5) copies of a monthly progress report indicating individual component progress
made in the preceding month signed by the Project Manager. Such reports shall show
cumulative progress towards scheduled completion, expressed as a percentage, of all
items shown in the approved Works Programme and shall also include a summary of
the progress achieved through every phase of the Contract.
Monthly reports shall relate to key date achievement and indicate the degree of
criticality on each activity. Any delays or potential delays shall be clearly identified,
and a statement given as to the measures to be taken to maintain the key dates.
2) Weekly Reports
In addition to the monthly reports the Contractor shall also prepare and submit to the
Architect the weekly reports on the progress of the Works.
These reports should elaborate on the daily activities of the site and must
include the following
(k) Visitors
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
These records must be entered daily by the Contractor and countersigned weekly by
the Architect/Resident Engineer or his authorised representative.
A PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS ( )
Provide progress colour photographs in 4R size, high resolutions with indication of date
and locations of the photographs taken, to be submitted before commencement of the
Works and thereafter monthly together with report on construction status verse
planned schedule. Each set to consist of minimum twenty-four (24) different views
taken as directed by the Architect including the photographs of the overview of the
site progress. The Contractor shall email the progress photographs to all parties on
monthly basis and to submit to Employer in thumb drive at the end of every month.
The ownership and copyright of all photographs and thumb drive shall be vested in the
Employer.
B SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE ( )
Indicate dates of submission, review time, resubmission time, float time, last date for
meeting fabrication schedule.
Include dates when delivery will be required for Employer furnished products.
Include dates when review submittals will be required from the Architect.
C CONSTRUCTION PLANT ( )
Allow for the installation, maintenance, operation and subsequent removal of all
necessary Construction Plant and Equipment required for the carrying out and
completion of the Works.
All construction plant provided by the Contractor shall, when brought on to the site, be
deemed to be exclusively intended for the construction of the Works. The Contractor
shall not remove the construction plant from the site without the consent in writing of
the Architect which shall not be unreasonably withheld.
If the Contractor proposes to use cranes, lifts or any other types of construction plant
which places any load on the reinforced concrete structure, he must furnish full details
of such construction plant to the Architect for approval before the construction plant is
installed. Loads for such construction plant shall only be imposed on completed
structures where the concrete has attained the minimum 28 days strength. If
necessary and structurally acceptable the structure shall be strengthened, in order to
carry such loads and the Contractor shall be responsible for the extra costs. The
Contractor shall be responsible and make good to the satisfaction of the Architect any
damage to the permanent structure which may be caused by his plant.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the suitability, safety and security of all
plant and temporary works and shall take all precautions to ensure that the same are
fully secured and made safe for as long as may be necessary against all risk of
damage thereto by falling debris, water and wind action or theft or otherwise.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
(Note: The Tenderer shall submit with this Tender the list of Construction Plant which
he proposes for this project as per specimen appended to the Form of Tender.)
A ORDERING MATERIALS ( )
The Contractor shall place orders for his materials as soon as possible after the
Contract is awarded and he shall be responsible for any delay in completion of the
Works resulting from late ordering or delivery.
The Contractor is to examine, the drawings, taking measurements and verifying on
site the actual quantities of materials required for the Works including the materials
supplied by Suppliers.
The Architect has the right to order materials from other sources and deduct the
amount from the Contract Sum, if the Contractor fails to bring the materials in time in
accordance with the requirements of the Works Programme.
B SAMPLES OF MATERIALS ( )
The Architect shall be at liberty to call for the submission of samples and/or test
certificates of materials of the execution of samples or workmanship for approval and
for further samples as required until the samples submitted or executed are, in his
opinion, in accordance with the Specification.
All samples materials shall be signed by the Architect and marked “Approved” and
kept in a safe place in locations as directed by the Architect.
C PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS ( )
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout the
specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and
of the best quality (compatible with specifications) and fit for the purpose intended. If
requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
Defective products will be rejected regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does
not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility but is a precaution against oversight or
error. The Contractor shall remove and replace defective products at his own expense
and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of products, the decision rests
strictly with the Architect based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Immediately upon signing the Contract, review product delivery requirements and
anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are
foreseeable, notify the Architect of such, in order that substitution or other remedial
action may be authorised in ample time to prevent delay in performance of the Works.
In the event of failure to notify the Architect at commencement of Works and should it
subsequently appear that Works may be delayed for such reason the Architect
reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at
no additional cost to the Contract.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Should the Contractor desire to substitute another material, item, article or product for
one specified by name, he should apply in writing to the Architect for such permission
stating the savings involved and providing supporting data and samples. Unless
written approval is obtained, no substitution is permitted.
The Architect shall decide whether the substitution is similar and equal in quality to
that specified, and this decision shall be final and binding.
Where the phrase “or other approved”, or “other equal and approved” or “approved
equivalent” appears after a material, item, article or product specified by trade name,
manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference, the same procedure as stated in the
three preceding paragraphs shall also apply should the Contractor desire to use a
material, item, article or product other than that specified by name.
B TESTS ( )
The Architect may, whenever he considers it desirable test any materials before they
leave the maker’s/manufacturer’s premises as well as after delivery to the Site, and
the Architect shall be at liberty to reject any materials after delivery should he
consider them unsatisfactory, notwithstanding the preliminary test and approval of the
materials at the maker’s/manufacturer’s premises. All costs in connection with these
tests are to be borne by the Contractor.
When directed by the Architect, samples of materials (the samples being taken by
approved sampling methods) are to be supplied by the Contractor for laboratory tests
and shall be delivered by the Contractor at his own cost to the approved Laboratory
for testing.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs relating to any testing
and re-testing of a product, material or work executed that may be necessary in order
to comply with the current requirements of the relevant Authorities and/or Codes of
Practice and/or Building Regulations etc as appropriate.
C CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS ( )
The Contractor shall pre-plan the execution and completion of the Works and inter
alia, co-ordinate and checks for discrepancy in or divergence between all the drawings
issued to the Contractor prior to the execution of the Works. Only competent technical
personnel shall be designated to execute the co-ordination of drawings, and the
Contractor shall designate at least one competent technical personnel for each of the
category of works or services. If the Contractor shall find any discrepancy or
divergence or any lack of information or details for him to proceed with any work, he
shall immediately give to the Architect a written notice specifying his "Request for
Information" as stipulated herein under the heading of "Construction Drawings".
Provided always that such request shall have been given to the Architect at least four
(4) weeks before such information is due for him to proceed with the works.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs in connection with the aforementioned
co-ordination and bear all costs due to failure to co-ordinate the various requirements
or to request for instruction in time.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Before any work commences in connection with the services installation, the
Contractor shall prepare fully co-ordinated drawings showing the proposed location of
all services including services that require to be diverted for the purposes of
co-ordination of the services as well as their relation to and implication on the
structural and architectural work. The co-ordination drawings shall also include for all
areas where services have to be installed within confined and congested space and
also any other areas and/or works which the Architect/ Engineer deem accurate
co-ordination is necessary. Such drawings shall show all works including the building
structure, penetrations, and ceiling and associated supporting systems mechanical and
electrical services, light fittings, etc. Such drawings shall also include plans and
sectional details.
The drawings shall either be enlarged or properly coloured to differentiate the various
services and subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit all co-ordination drawings as soon as possible to the
Architect/Engineer for his review and in any case submitted either before or
simultaneously with the shop drawings of the various services sub-contractors to
permit modifications to be made thereto if such are deemed necessary by the
Architect/Engineer, so that any delay to the progress of the works could be avoided.
The drawings submitted shall be modified as and when necessary and re-submitted for
further review. For each submission or re-submission the Contractor shall submit
drawings by email and in thumb drive with Autocad format. Consultants will reply to
Contractor by email after each review. The Contractor shall be required to print paper
prints upon the Architect/ Engineer’s request for the distribution by the Contractor to
Resident Engineer and email the approved drawings to all parties.
For each submission of drawings, a minimum time of four (4) weeks shall be allowed
for the review thereof by the Architect/ Engineer. The Architect/Engineer’s review of
such drawings does not exonerate the Contractor from any of his responsibilities and
obligations under the Contract.
B PENETRATION DRAWINGS ( )
The Contractor shall read this item together with "Co-ordination Drawings for Services
Diversion as described in the previous item.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs in providing co-ordinated penetration drawings
in the reinforced concrete and all other structural work, i.e., beam, wall, slab, etc. for
the Engineer's approval.
For each submission or re-submission the Contractor shall submit drawings by email
and in thumb drive with Autocad format. Consultants will reply to Contractor by email
after each review and thereafter, the Contractor shall be required to print paper prints
upon the Architect/ Engineer’s request for the distribution by the Contractor to
Resident Engineer and email the approved penetration drawings to all parties. The
endorsed one (1) copy paper print and thumb drive (Autocad format) of the drawing
shall be retained by the Contractor.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A SHOP DRAWINGS ( )
The Contractor shall also submit for the Architect’s approval shop drawings by email.
The Contractor is required to print in paper print (1 copy) for the Resident Engineer
and one thumb drive copy in Autocad format to Employer of the approved proposed
setting out and laying patterns of all finishing works.
After the Architect’s review the drawings, Architect will email the commented drawings
to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not commence work, unless and until the shop drawings have
been approved and signed by the Architect.
The signing of such drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for the correctness of all dimensions and compliance with the
requirements of the Contract.
The programming of the production of shop drawings to be submitted by
Sub-Contractors shall be co-ordinated by the Contractor and included in the Works
Programme allowing adequate time for the Architect, the Engineers and the Contractor
to check the drawings, have amendments incorporated and checked again before final
approval by the Architect/Engineer.
For each submission of drawings, a minimum time of four (4) weeks shall be allowed
for checking and approval of all drawings by the Architect/ Engineer. Delays caused by
late submission of drawings or non-approval of drawings due to repeat errors will
under no circumstances are construed as reasons for extension of time.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him, whether such drawings and particulars
have been approved by the Architect/ Engineer or not. Approval is given for general
suitability on layout only and does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual
responsibility.
Provide protection for finishes and partially finished building finishes and equipment
during performance of work.
Provide screens, covers, hoardings, etc. as required.
Safeguard the Works, materials and plant against damage or theft including all
necessary watching and lighting for the security of the Works and the protection of the
public. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of all materials
delivered for the Works. This shall apply equally to materials and plant intended for
the Works, but which are stored elsewhere.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures, including but not limited to
temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, to facilitate the carrying out of
excavation Works and/ or for heavy vehicular movement within the Site. The cost of
such temporary structures, shoring and/ or sheet piling, etc. shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding such provisions, the Contractor shall, in
the course of excavation Works, take great care to prevent earth movements and/ or
upheavals in the excavation. The Contractor shall also take precaution to prevent
displacement and/ or damage to the piles due to any traffic movement from heavy
machinery employed on the Site. If any pile in the excavated pit is displaced or if the
pile is damaged by earth movement and/ or upheavals, the Contractor shall be held
accountable for the displacement and/ or damage to the piles and shall bear all cost
and expenses incurred in remedial works.
The Contractor may, if he wishes to, make reference to the Soil Investigation Report
available from the Architect to facilitate the Contractor in ascertaining the temporary
structures, shoring and/ or sheet piling required. However, the Soil Investigation
Report shall not form part of the Contract or to be taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take note
that all information in the Soil Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil
conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable to the
Contractor for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil
Investigation Report. The Contractor shall ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall
conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all cost and
expenses whatsoever arising from and/ or out of any inaccuracy, inadequacy or
incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.
Provide and maintain during the execution of the Works all shoring, strutting, needling
and other supports, and take all necessary steps to preserve the stability of adjoining
buildings, the Works and of all other property including that of adjoining Owners that
may in any way be endangered or affected by the Works required to be executed
under this Contract. The Contractor shall also protect all the same against damage
and/or settlement, and no part of these protective measures shall be taken down or
removed until the Contractor is satisfied that such measure is no longer needed. All
works involving risk of damage and or settlement to the building is to be executed by
the Contractor in such portions as will minimise risk as far as possible. The Contractor
shall obtain his P.E.’s endorsement for all temporary works design, calculations and
proposals.
Indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims arising out of inadequate precautions
and shall make good all damages arising therefrom.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary firefighting facilities to comply with the
full current requirements of the Local Authorities. Ensure that all such firefighting
facilities installed temporarily are maintained in an operational state at all times to the
requirements of the relevant Authority.
Open fires and burning of rubbish will not be permitted on the site.
Take all necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and instruct a Superintendent
to make periodic inspections to ensure proper preventive measures are being complied
with by all personnel working on the site.
Paint and/or oil covered rags shall be stored in covered metal containers. Rubbish shall
be removed daily, from building and site.
When torch cutting and electric welding are required by the Work, the trade concerned
shall observe the hot work permit systems as provided by the safety section and take
all necessary measures to protect facilities from fire. A sample copy of the hot work
permit is attached at the Appendix for reference.
Take all necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and to ensure proper
preventive measures are being compiled with by all personnel working on site.
"No Smoking" painted signs shall be erected where volatile fumes or liquids are
present.
Provide, erect and maintain adequate temporary barricades, fans, gantries, safety
netting, planked footways, warning signs and lights for the protection of the public at
all closures, detours and points of danger where the Work occurs outside the hoarding
area. Such protection shall be to the requirements of the Local Authorities having
jurisdiction.
Remove and replace such guard rails and barricades as necessary to accommodate the
Works.
Provide, maintain and adjust any other guard rails, barricades or safety platforms
required by law and authorities having jurisdiction for protection of Work and the
workmen and for protection of the public.
Take necessary precautions to minimise the spread of dust, dirt and noise from the
project site onto adjacent properties, including streets. Be responsible for cleaning
operations necessary through failure to exercise such precautions, to regulations of
Authorities having jurisdiction.
Pay all costs and charges in connection with all of the above, alter, shift and adapt
from time to time as necessary and remove up on completion of the Works.
C TEMPORARY ACCESSES ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary accesses to (complete with approved
directional signs) including public access to all areas at all times, clear away these
temporary accesses and make good all works disturbed on completion of the Works.
Apply and give all necessary notices to the relevant Authorities and pay all costs in
connection therewith including whatever charges imposed by any relevant Authorities.
The provision of temporary access for traffic diversion during work is in progress to
ensure undisrupted movement of traffic at all times
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A TEMPORARY HOARDING ( )
Provide and erect temporary hoarding to perimeter of the construction area for the
protection of the public and for the proper execution of the Works in accordance with
Authority requirements. Such protection shall meet the requirements of the relevant
Local Authorities. Paint and repaint the whole of the hoarding to the Architect’s and/or
Employer’s satisfaction. Pay all costs and expenses in connection therewith.
Pay all costs and charges in connection with all of the above, alter, shift and adapt
from time to time as necessary and remove all temporary works on completion of the
Works.
(a) The Contractor shall define, mark and maintain safe passages throughout the
Works for all workmen, visitors and Consultants to gain access to any and every
part of the Works safely. The safe passages shall have adequate headroom and
lighting, free of all obstructions and shall be properly enclosed against falling
objects.
(b) The Contractor is solely responsible for the complete adequacy of the protective
provisions that are necessary for the safety of all workmen and the public at all
times of construction. In this connection the Contractor is to provide timber
barricades and platform covers to openings at lift cores, ducts, edges of
unenclosed floors etc. at positions were deemed necessary by the Architects.
The Architect's approval of any temporary protective system or safety measures shall
not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to ensure the safety of his own and
Sub-Contractor's workmen, all the Consultants, all the Resident Supervisory Staff and
the public from all risks of injury.
B VISITORS ( )
The Contractor shall take all precaution not to allow any unauthorised visitors onto the
site of the works.
All necessary signs shall be displayed on site directing all visitors to the site office prior
to entering the construction area.
C TRESPASSING ( )
Provide an efficient temporary lightning protection system for the structure during
construction and for all the hoists and cranes. The lightning protection system shall be
of the type which facilitates lightning discharge safely to the ground without danger to
the building, machinery or occupants, and to the requirements of the relevant
Authorities.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Provide all necessary temporary working earth bunds, earth fill, boarded platforms,
staging, gantries, bridging, etc. for the Works. Adapt and shift as necessary during the
progress of the works and remove on completion.
Contractor shall construct the temporary metal platform over the manholes and /or
openings at the driveway access while Work is in progress to ensure undisrupted
movement of the traffic at all times. The Contractor shall obtain his P.E.’s
endorsement for all temporary works design, calculations and proposals. Pay all costs
and expenses in connection therewith.
Indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims arising out of inadequate precautions
and shall make good all damages arising therefrom.
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary scaffolding and staging required for the
proper execution and completion of the Works, including those of all sub-contractors,
and pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The design and construction of scaffolding and staging must comply with all safety
requirements of the relevant Authorities and approved by the Architect.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact some Nominated Sub-Contractors will
require the use of the temporary scaffolding for carrying out their works. He shall liaise
with these Sub-Contractors to ensure the proper execution and completion of the
Works. Before dismantling the Contractor is to ensure that all works requiring the use
of temporary scaffolding are completed.
If the Contractor should strike any of his scaffolding before ascertaining whether it is
required by any Sub-Contractor or Local Authorities, he must re-erect it, if so required,
at his own expense.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and remove on completion of the
Works.
C SITE SECURITY ( )
Provide all necessary and adequate watching by day and night for the whole period of
the Works. Guards shall be stationed at all ingresses and exits and areas where the
occurrence of theft or damage to materials, executed works, etc. will hinder the
progress of the Works and/or delay the completion of the Works.
Guards patrolling of the site and inside the building shall be carried out at approved
intervals during hours of darkness.
A system of control shall be set up to control the entry and exit of all vehicles and
pedestrian traffic. No unauthorised vehicles or persons shall be allowed to enter the
site. A complete record of all authorised visitors to the site shall be maintained by the
duty guards.
Notwithstanding the above which shall be held to be the minimum watching and
security services to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be held solely
responsible for the security of the Works and the safety of all his own materials, fixed
or unfixed, and all the materials of other suppliers or Contractors whether under Sub-
Contract to him or not, plant, machinery and tools, scaffolding, etc.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any losses that may be suffered
as a result of theft or damage to materials, executed works, etc.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/33
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Item Description $ ¢
A SIGNBOARD ( )
Details of the signboard for which the Contractor has allowed shall be submitted with
the Tender.
Allow for repairing, repainting, adapting and maintaining all the existing signboards.
Obtain all permits and pay all local authority fees in connection with the provision of
signboards.
Allow from time to time, for adding the names of Nominated/Designated
Sub-Contractors and Suppliers to the signboards. All colour, shape of letters, etc shall
match the existing. The list of Nominated/Designated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
to be added on to the signboard, the colour and lettering etc. shall be subject to the
prior approval of the Architect. Maintain this signboard and for the duration of this
Contract.
Remove all signboards and associated footings and planter boxes from site on
completion of the Works and make good all works disturbed.
The Contractor shall allow the Employer to erect the big panel signboard with graphics
and light fittings (by Employer) and provide the necessary attendance.
Provide and maintain, at locations to be agreed with the Employer, temporary office
for the Contractor's staff and provide all necessary additional watertight sheds for the
storage of materials, tools and equipment for the use of workmen on site. Pay all costs
and charges in connection therewith
The Contractor is to allow in their Tender sum for all additional expense incurred in
setting up their site office out of the Site including storing and protecting undelivered
Goods off site and insuring them against loss and damage however caused from the
time the Goods are stored until delivery to site.
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary workmen's accommodation and facilities
at the Site for the use of all persons employed on the Works including Sub-Contractors
in accordance with the requirements of the Health Authorities.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as directed and remove prior to completion of
the Works. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
Provide and maintain all necessary modern sanitary accommodation and facilities for
the use of all persons employed on the Works including Sub-Contractors in accordance
with the requirements of the Health Authorities.
To maintain the sanitary accommodation clean and no odour smell at all times.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as directed and remove prior to completion of
the Works. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A
TEMPORARY OFFICE FOR THE EMPLOYER, THE CONSULTANTS AND
EMPLOYER'S RESIDENT SITE STAFF ( )
Allow for the construction of a Site Office of adequate size at a location to be agreed
with the Employer for the sole use of the Employer's site supervisory staff and
Consultants. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The Site Office to cater for minimum 6 persons’ working tables, one big meeting room
with meeting tables and chairs for 30 persons, one sample room and 2 attach toilet
cubicles and shall be constructed to the Architect's approved design prepared by the
Contractor and equipped with adequate furniture, lighting, power and air-conditioning
units. To allow daily cleaning to the site office and toilets.
The Site Office shall be constructed under the supervision of a registered Professional
Engineer and one (1) set of design and construction drawings shall be kept on site at
all times.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and maintain the Site Office until
completion of this Contract and remove same on Completion.
The Contractor is to allow in their Tender sum for all additional expense incurred in
setting up site office out of the Site.
B
EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE FOR SITE OFFICE ( )
The Contractor is to read this item in conjunction with "Protection, helmets, boots,
etc." included elsewhere in the Preliminaries.
Provide and maintain the following office equipment and furniture for the sole use of
the Employer's Supervisory Staffs ( i.e., One (1) RE and three (3) RTOs)-
a) 6 nos of Working tables
d) 1 No. Meeting table with sufficient chairs (meeting table must be large enough
to cater for at least 30 persons).
e) Sufficient nos of white board and pin-up boards
i) 1 no. Photocopier with A4 and A3 cassettes and sort function for minimum 10
no. copies with unlimited supply of laser cartridge and with scanner function
q) Sufficient stationery
r) Sample room
In addition to the above items, the Contractor shall provide and replenish the requisite
items of stationery and office consumables (including drinking water) for use by the
Employer, Consultants and Employer's Supervising Staff.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
TEMPORARY TELEPHONES ( )
A
Provide and maintain temporary telephone, facsimile facilities including making all
necessary arrangements with the relevant Authorities, and pay all charges and
expenses in connection therewith, for the full period of the contract.
Two service lines for local dialling, with minimum 2 No. extensions per line, and one
service line for facsimile transmission (including facsimile machine) shall be provided
for the sole use of the Employer's Supervisory Staff.
B
TEMPORARY CAR PARKING LOTS ( )
Provide and maintain minimum 6 nos of temporary car parking lots including making
all necessary arrangements with the relevant Authorities, and pay all charges and
expenses in connection therewith, for the full period of the contract. To provide
sufficient car parking lots during the VIP site visits and attending the site meetings.
Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
C
TRANSPORTATION FOR SITE WALK ROUND ( )
Provide vehicle transport for the Employer, Consultants and their representatives
during the site walk round and site inspection and pay all charges and expenses in
connection therewith, for the full period of the contract.
WATER ( )
D
Provide all necessary clean fresh water for use on the Works including all temporary
connections, pipes, fittings, storage tanks, etc. and water supply for firefighting
systems such as hosereels, as well as water supply points and clear away and make
good on completion and pay all costs and charges in connection therewith including
deposits and other charges for water drawn from the permanent supply for the testing
and commissioning of all works including Sub-Contract Works.
E Provide all necessary artificial lighting and power for use on the Works and to the
project signboard including all temporary connections, mains, leads, fittings, etc. and
pay all costs and charges in connection therewith, including deposits and demand
charges for electricity drawn from the permanent supply for the testing and
commissioning of all works including Sub-Contract Works.
The Contractor shall provide temporary supply points terminating at 30 amperes TPN
isolators and 13 amperes SPN sockets outlets, the numbers and locations shall be
sufficient and suitable for the execution of all works including works of domestic and
Sub-Contractors.
All temporary electrical installation shall be carried out under the responsibility of
licensed electrical workers and shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
Authority.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and clear away and make good
on completion of the Works.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all regulations and
requirements as imposed by the various relevant Government Authorities.
D TRANSPORTING OF MATERIALS ( )
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent spillage along public
roads. All washing of lorries, trucks and other construction equipment shall be done on
properly constructed washing bay within the site. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Employer against any claims, summons and other orders of the Authorities affecting
the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking immediate steps to make good and shall
bear the cost of remedying the effects of any pollution, flooding or other nuisance
caused by the commissioning of his works under this Contract, to neighbouring
properties, roads, drains, etc. all to the satisfaction of Local Authorities and the
Architect.
The Contractor shall also allow here for keeping the basements completely dry and
free from water by providing sufficient pumps, and allow for all necessary temporary
M&E Services (lighting, mechanical ventilation and electrical services, etc.)
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A ANTI-MALARIAL MEASURES ( )
Take all necessary measures to prevent the breeding of mosquitoes on the site.
(2) Larviciding all stagnant water using insecticides or anti-mosquito oil at least
once a week;
Comply with and pay all charges levied by any Government or Public Authority with
jurisdiction on matters of mosquito control.
Two (2) sets of the reports together with the colour photographs with imprint date and
time; must be submitted to the Employer’s Representative within two weeks from the
date of award of the Contract and emailed the colour photographs to all Consultants
and Employer.
C RECORDS AND PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING ADJACENT BUILDINGS ( )
The Contractor shall prior to commencement of work on site, at monthly intervals and
on completion of the Works engage an independent licensed surveyor and professional
photographer to prepare records and attach colour photographs of the adjacent
buildings; imptint with date and time; showing levels of floors, existing wall or floor
cracks if any, etc and hand them over to the Architect.
The Contractor shall also carry out periodical checks as and when required to see that
there is no damage to existing buildings. He shall be responsible for any damage and
for all making good at his own expense.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor is solely responsible for injury or damage caused to adjacent property
or facilities.
Any assistance or advice which the Employer or the Architect may provide shall not
absolve the Contractor of any of his responsibility.
He shall indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims due to subsidence, collapse
or other damage to adjacent buildings and facilities caused by or arising out of the
Works in addition to providing and maintaining such temporary shoring and/or other
safety measures which he thinks fit. The Contractor will bear all mitigating cost
necessary to alleviate the damage to adjacent buildings and facilities. The costs of
installing monitoring devices such as plate glass gauges etc. For the monitoring of the
movement of cracks of adjacent building and facilities shall be borne by the
Contractor.
B COVERING UP ( )
No work shall be covered up until it has been examined by the Architect.
In the case of work executed against provisional quantities or sums in the Schedule of
Prices (and therefore subject to measurement) the Contractor shall notify the Quantity
Surveyor before proceeding to cover up the Works.
If the Contractor considers that work has been executed in accordance with the
Architect’s Instruction and which would not normally require remeasurement, he shall
provide the Quantity Surveyor with at least 48 hours’ notice in writing before covering
up such work.
Failure by the Contractor to inform the Quantity Surveyor on time before covering up
the work may render this null and void.
C
INTERFERENCE WITH TRAFFIC AND ADJOINING PROPERTY ( )
All operations necessary for the execution of the Works and for the construction of any
temporary works shall, so far as compliance with the requirements of the contract
permits, be carried out so as not to interfere unnecessarily or improperly with traffic
and adjoining properties.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, court charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in
relating to any such matter.
The Contractor shall at the request of the Architect within such time as the Architect
shall name, open up for inspection any work covered up, and should the Contractor
refuse or neglect to comply with such request the Architect may employ other
workmen to open up the same. If the said work has been covered up with
contravention of the Architect’s instruction or if being opened up, it is to be found not
in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications or the instructions of the Architect,
the expenses of such opening and covering it up again, whether done by the
Contractor or such other workmen, shall be borne by and recovered from the
Contractor.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
If the work has not been covered up in contravention of such instructions and is found
to be in accordance with the said Drawings and Specifications or instructions, the
expenses aforesaid shall be borne by the Employer and be added to the Contract Sum
provided always that in the case of urgent work so opened and requiring immediate
work the Architect shall within a reasonable time after receipt of notice from the
Contractor that the Work has been so opened up, make or cause the inspection
thereof to be made and at the expiration of such time, if such inspection shall not have
been made, to open it up again for inspection except at the expense of the Employer.
A OPENING UP PUBLIC ROAD FOR THE LAYING OF PIPES,ETC ( )
In the event that the Contractor needs to open up public road to carry out the Works
then it is the Contractor’s responsibility to apply and submit to the various government
departments all the forms, fees and supervision needed to carry out the Works. All
fees in connection with the opening up of the public road shall be borne by the
Employer. The Contractor is to ensure that his insurance company is informed of such
work and see to it that his liabilities are fully insured prior to undertaking such works.
The Contractor is to note that the Authorities will not normally allow the disturbance of
newly surfaced roads within a year of surfacing.
The Contractor shall, however, not be relieved of his responsibilities of verifying with
the Public Works Department (and/or Land Transport Authority) and any other
Authorities having jurisdiction on this matter and shall allow for all additional costs and
expenses arising therefrom.
B GROUND MONITORING AND INSTRUMENTATION ( )
Supply, install, maintain, monitor and remove all inclinometers, surface settlement
markers, piezometers and tilt plates as described in the Specification and/or shown in
the drawings as directed by the Architect.
The amount included in the Tender Sum against this item shall be fixed and non-
adjustable with the exception only of variation instructions issued and/or extensions of
time granted by the Architect under the Contract
C NUISANCE ( )
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the various operations of the
Works in such a manner as to avoid any excessive noise, annoyance or nuisance which
may be caused to adjoining Owners and Occupants of existing and adjoining
properties. Generators, compressors and other plant which are likely to emit excessive
noise are to be muffled by means of silencers, screens and the like.
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with laws, rules and regulations of
the Ministry of Environment or any other relevant authority.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any claims, summons, etc.
arising therefrom.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Provide adequate temporary drainage all-round the site dry during the works,
particularly linking anti-flood arrangement including the provision of pumps, sumps to
keep the site free of water at all times.
Where the water is discharged into drains, a setting tank or other means of removing
sediment is to be provided. Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and
remove on completion of works.
Engage Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) for Earth Control Measures
(ECM) submission. QECP should plan, design and supervise the implementation of the
ECM to meet the legal requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public
drains by implementing effective Earth Control Measures (‘ECM’) for the construction
site to meet the requirements under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294.
(Information on ECM requirements can be found in the Code of Practice on Surface
Water Drainage and the website www.pub.gov.sg/ECM). The Contractor shall note that
the ECM is for the containment and treatment of silty discharges due to the impact of
rainwater. ECM is not meant for the treatment of wastewater due to construction
activities (such as slurry from tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works) which
shall be treated to comply with the requirements under Environmental Protection and
Management Act (Chapter 94A).
In his tender submission, the Contractor shall submit his schematic ECM plans of the
construction site for the whole duration of the contract period taking into account the
different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the
Qualified Erosion Control Professional (‘QECP’) who will be endorsing the ECM plan
after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor
aware of the ECM requirements and the cost to implement an effective ECM.
Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the Contractor shall be
fully responsible for the effectiveness of the ECM plan and the Contractor shall deem
to include all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the compliance of the
ECM requirements.
Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to
plan and design the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP’s design.
The ECM plan and design shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract.
During the course of the construction works, the Contractor together with his QECP
shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the
construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his QECP.
The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated
and in accordance with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the contract to ensure
that it is effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works,
supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. The
Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the
advice of his QECP.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall maintain public and private roads, footpaths, culverts, drains,
kerbs, etc., and keep the approaches to the site clear of materials and debris. The
Contractor is to make good any damage caused by his own or any sub-contractor's or
suppliers' transport at his own expense or pay all costs and charges in connection
therewith.
The Contractor must comply with the latest Government requirements for keeping the
haulage route clean. The wheels and under-carriage of all haulage vehicles shall be
washed and cleaned before the vehicle leaves the site. It is also the Contractor's
responsibility to obtain approval from the Traffic Police or other relevant Authority the
location of a suitable dumping ground for the spoil from the work site.
The Contractor shall submit all proposed temporary diversion drains and silt control
measures, if any, to the Local Authorities. Drainage Department, for approval before
commencement of the diversion work. The proposals shall comply with the current
Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall provide adequate drainage facilities including lined temporary
perimeter drains with 1 metre wide close turfing adjoining both sides of the cut-off
drains, silt trapping devices, turfing, wash bay incorporating silt trap with proper
discharge outlet etc to control silt and mud from site.
Provision of drainage facilities such as the temporary perimeter drains, close turfing
etc and fees to the Authorities if required shall be borne by the Contractor.
Discharge from de-watering of trench excavation shall be channelled into silt trapping
devices before reaching public surface drains.
The Contractor shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow,
existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains and shall
regularly maintain the temporary drains to ensure their effectiveness and to desilt all
affected watercourses until completion of the Works. The Contractor shall take
adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the site and
existing public drains and shall ensure that building materials are not discharged or
washed into the drains.
Protect and maintain any existing pipes, ducts, sewers, electrical and telephone cables
and the like during the execution of the works. The Contractor is to make good any
damage caused by his workmen at his own expense or pay all costs and charges in
connection therewith.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
As time is the essence for completion of the Works, the Contractor is responsible for
determining by means of trial holes whether underground services (be it known
existing or unknown existing) are obstructing the Works and report to the Architect
conclusively within six (6) weeks from the date of issuance of The Letter of
Acceptance. This is to ensure that sufficient time is available for the timely diversion of
the underground services (if so required and directed by the Architect/relevant
Authorities).
It is deemed that the Contractor has allowed in his Tender Price the cost of such trial
holes to ascertain the exact position/invert level of the underground services (be it
known or unknown) that may obstruct or affect the construction of the Works.
At all stage of the Works the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the site in
a clean and orderly fashion at all times. Materials, scaffolding, etc., shall be kept
neatly stacked on the site with all access-way kept clear. All dust, debris and rubbish,
etc. arising out of his own work and that of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers shall be
continually cleared and removed from the site.
The Contractor will collect all refuse and discharge them down the chutes mentioned
below.
The Contractor is required to provide proper bulk bins of adequate size at site for the
storage of construction waste and debris and to make necessary arrangements for the
disposals of waste and debris to approved disposal grounds in conformity with the
rules and requirements of the Ministry of Environment.
The completed building floor space may be used, subject to Architect's approval, as
storage and working space by the Contractor. The Contractor is to check with the
Engineer as to the permissible working loads on the structure. This space may also be
used by the Employer for storage when necessary.
Should the permission for the above not be granted, the Contractor is deemed to have
allowed for any storage and working space off the site.
The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused to the structures arising out of or
in the course of carrying out works/storage in the Buildings, keeping it free from
mortar dropping etc. and making good any damage at his own cost to the satisfaction
of the Architect.
"No building or part of a building where any building works have been carried out or
completed shall be occupied in any way by any party unless the Building Authority has
issued the relevant occupation permit".
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
No loading in excess of the design loading shall be placed on any portion of the
structure without the prior written permission of the Architect or Structural Engineer.
If such permission is granted all structural members subject to loading other than the
design loading shall be strengthened and supported to the satisfaction of the Architect
or Structural Engineer and the Contractor shall bear all additional expenses in
connection therewith.
The permission of the Architect or Structural Engineer does not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility of bearing all costs arising out of the making good of any damage
to the permanent structure caused by excess loading.
The Contractor shall construct the Works in accordance with areas/dimensions shown
on the approved Building Plans/Contract Drawings or any other approved drawings
issued to vary the Works.
In respect of the accuracy of sizes of the units, the permissible deviation in the
"as-built" areas/dimensions including external finishes as established under the rules
of measurement to be carried out by a Registered Surveyor for application of vertical
strata Title areas shall not exceed -3% of the intended areas determined from the said
drawings used in construction of the Works.
As soon as the walls and partitions of every floor are completed, the Contractor shall
forthwith provide the Consultants with three copies of certified "as-built" survey plans
bearing all relevant dimensions of the walls and partitions. This is necessary in order
to monitor the Works progressively.
During construction, the Contractor shall keep accurate records of the exact size and
location of all pipes, ducts, etc. including all branches, changes in direction, fittings,
points of access, cocks, sumps and junctions, etc. This information shall be supplied to
the Architect and shall form the basis of an “as-built” drawing and shall include but not
limited to the following services:-
(i) Electrical Services Installation
Keep one (1) set of white prints of all contract drawings and all addenda, revisions,
clarifications, and reviewed shop drawings at the site office; identify them as “Project
Record Copy” and have them available at all times for inspection by the Architect.
As the work proceeds, record clearly and indelibly in red pencil, as-built conditions
whenever they deviate from the original intention of the Contract Documents.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Present the as-built prints for scrutiny at each project meeting and as may be required
by the Architect.
All record drawings shall be fully dimensioned.
Prior to substantial completion of the Works, transfer all deviations, including those
called up by addenda, revisions, clarifications, shop drawings and Architect’s
Instructions, to a set of reverse print sepia tracings. The sepias may be purchased
from the Architect and/or the Engineer. Each as-built sepia shall bear the Contractor’s
identification, the date of record and the notation, “We hereby certify that these
drawings represent the work “as-built”’. The Contractor’s signature shall be placed
below that notation.
The deviations that are to be recorded shall include, in general but not necessarily be
limited to, things that are hidden from view and things of major importance to future
operations and maintenance and to future alterations and/or additions.
Three (3) nos thumb drive of AutoCAD as-built drawings and two (2) paper copies of
co-ordinated (including services indicated in different colours) progress records and
drawings and as-built survey drawings shall be submitted to the Architect within one
(1) months of the Completion of the Works.
At completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer the
approved and complete set of "as-built" survey plans of the whole Works and also a
set of intermediate prints of the above described certified "as-built" survey plans,
suitably bound in black hard covers with gold text (total 2 sets) for easy storage and
retrieval and one thumb drive for the soft copies’ submission. The format of the
submission of as-built documents shall subject to Employer’s approval.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken note of all conditions and requirements
for construction of works as detailed in the Civil, Structural and M&E Services
Specifications and have included all the costs and expenses in connection therewith.
Two months before commencement of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall
submit in triplicate comprehensive draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the
Architect for approval.
At completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer the
approved and complete set of Operation and maintenance manuals, suitably bound in
ring files (total 2 sets) for easy storage and retrieval and one thumb drive for the soft
copies’ submission. The format of the submission of as-built documents shall subject
to Employer’s approval.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A NOTICE ON COMPLETION ( )
When a section is completed, the Employer reserves the right to take over a section
should he require it for his own use and the Contractor shall forthwith hand over as
complete that section of the Work. The Contractor is also required to give three (3)
weeks’ notice in writing to the Architect before a section of work is completed.
Provide for carefully covering up and protecting the Works and materials from
inclement weather.
The Contractor shall provide full and adequate protection for all finished surfaces and
for all materials subject to injury or staining and shall be responsible for making good
all damage done to such finished surfaces and materials until the Works are handed
over complete.
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with all the requirements and
satisfaction/approval of the relevant authorities on protective measures for this
project. Any additional cost incurred for compliance of additional requirements by the
authorities having jurisdiction shall be borne by the Contractor.
D COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall provide electricity and water from his own sources for carrying
out the testing of M&E installation and making good of defects and the watering of
roadside turf and trees during the Maintenance Period. Should these be taken from the
Employer’s or the occupants’ source, the Contractor shall reimburse all cost and
expenses in connection to the Employer’s or the respective occupants.
E COMPLETION ( )
The Contractor shall when the Works appear to be complete, request the Architect to
carry out a joint inspection of the Works, or any part of the Works, as the case may
be. Such request must be in writing at least 7 days prior to the commencement of the
inspection.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall programme and complete the Works (including all designated/
Nominated Sub-Contractors’ work) in such a manner that the Architect can apply for a
Temporary Occupation Permit (TOP) for the Building.
All works to enable the various submissions to be made for the application of a TOP by
the Architect must be completed to his satisfaction at a date not later than eight (8)
weeks prior to the Completion Date of the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses arising therefrom.
The Contractor shall allow here for providing all necessary attendance, assistance and
co-operation for all relevant Authorities to make CSC inspections as and when
required. He shall arrange for all concerned parties of Sub-Contractors, Suppliers, etc.
to attend the inspections.
The Architect shall give the Contractor a reasonable notice before every inspection.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses arising therefrom.
C FINAL CLEANING ( )
When the Works have been substantially performed, remove surplus materials, tools,
construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the
remaining works.
Remove waste materials and debris and leave the Works clean and suitable for
occupancy by the Employer.
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from Authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
Clean and polish glass, hardware, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked
enamel, plastic laminated, mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken,
scratched or disregarded glass.
Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from finishing work, electrical and mechanical
fixtures, walls and floors, etc.
For avoidance of doubt, ‘clean’ is defined as the condition where any material that
remains could be easily removed by use of water to the Architect’s satisfaction.
Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation. Sweep and wash clean site paved areas.
Make arrangements with the Employer and give reasonable notice of the precise dates
for access to the various parts of the Works for the purposes of making good defects.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A ADVERTISING ( )
The sole right of advertising upon or adjacent to the Works is reserved to the
Employer and the Contractor shall not allow any advertisement to be displayed without
the consent in writing of the Employer.
All publicity relating to this project is subject to the approval of the Employer and no
mention of the project in advertising or articles in any publication will be permitted
unless cleared through the Employer. Publicity or advertising implying endorsement of
a product by the Employer will not be permitted.
B MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ( )
C PERFORMANCE BOND ( )
Provide a Performance Bond from a Bank (to be approved by the Employer) in favour
of the Employer in a sum equal to ten (10) percent of the Accepted Tender Sum for
the due performance of the Contract. The terms of the Bond shall be exactly similar to
the specimen appended to the Form of Tender.
The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for the duration of the
Works inclusive of the Maintenance Period as stipulated in the Contract or until the
issuing of the Maintenance Certificate by the Architect, whichever is the later.
The Contractor shall permit and provide all facilities to the Employer and other
Contractors to be employed directly by the Employer to enter upon and install fixtures
and equipment on site during the construction of the Works. No claims will be
entertained in respect of any inconvenience caused to the Contractor in this regard.
E DEED OF NOVATION ( )
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A DIRECT CONTRACTS ( )
Together with the Contractor, there will be other contractors and/or specialists
employed directly by the Employer (“Direct Contractors”) who will be working on the
Site during the course of the Contract for the purpose of carrying out works under
Direct Contracts.
The Contractor shall be responsible for inquiring into the nature, scope, scheduling and
all requirements of the Works of the Direct Contracts and allow for any impact which
these may have on the carrying out of the Works of this Contract.
The Direct Contractors are independent contractors and the Employer shall not be held
in any way responsible for their acts or omissions. For the avoidance of doubt, the acts
or omissions of the Direct Contractors shall not be construed as acts of prevention by
the Employer for the purpose of this Contract and the Contractor shall not be entitled
to proceed against the Employer for any damage, loss or expense arising from any
effect which the works of the Direct Contracts may have on the Works of this Contract.
The Contractor agrees to save the Employer harmless from any dispute, suit or action
between the Contractor and the Direct Contractors.
(a) allow for the attendance for the works of the Direct Contractors under this
Section and shall ensure that the same are coordinated with the Works under this
Contract
(b) interface, plan, coordinate and organize the Works with the Direct Contractors,
prepare the co-ordination drawings and shop drawings for the works related to
the Direct Contract works and to obtain Architect’s approval prior to the
installation works commence at site;
(c) and provide all assistance and access as may be necessary to ensure the proper
and timely sequencing and completion of the works of the Direct Contract and
(d) deal directly with the Direct Contractors on all matters relating to any issue
which may affect in any way the Contractor’s carrying out of the Works.
The Direct Contractors shall not be limited to the following:-
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A BUILDABILITY SCORE ( )
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Code of Practice on Buildability
(“Code”) and the Constructability Appraisal System (“CAS”) including any
amendment and revision thereto. The Contractor shall submit the scoring sheets to
Architect for approval.
The Contractor shall be ensure that the Buildability Score meets the minimum
requirements set out in the Code and ensure timely submission of Buildability Score
to Commissioner of Building Control and obtaining Certificate of Compliance of
Buildability Score
Should the Contractor propose any alternative Architectural and structural members
and components that deviate from the consultant’s design, he shall ensure that the
Buildability Score of his alternative design to be equivalent or higher than the
original design. In such case, the Contractor shall submit calculation details
complying with the Buildable Design Appraisal System (BDAS) guidelines developed
by BCA.
B CONSTRUCTABILITY SCORE ( )
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Code of Practice on the
Constructability Appraisal System (“CAS”) including any amendment and revision
thereto.
The Contractor shall be ensure that the y Score meets the minimum requirements
set out in the Code and ensure timely submission of Constructability Score to
Commissioner of Building Control and obtaining Certificate of Compliance of
Constructability Score.
The Contractor shall keep and maintain proper records on progress, construction
techniques and processes adopted, productivity data including all documented
evidence and any other documents as may be determined by the Commissioner of
Building Control that the Works have been constructed in accordance with the
submitted Constructability Score.
The Contractor shall provide attendance, assistance, unhindered and safe access to
the Architect and Authorities for any site checks.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses for compliance with
this requirement including payment of any fines which may be imposed by the
authorities in the event of any non-compliance.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for any damage or loss suffered in
respect of non-compliance with these requirements.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
The Contractor shall ensure that all domestic sub-contractors employed in respect of
the Works comply with the requirements of the applicable statutory provisions and
regulatory requirements and, where appropriate, are registered under the applicable
categories with the Building and Construction Authority (BCA) or under the Singapore
List of Trade Sub-Contractors (SLOTS) as maintained by the Singapore Contractors
Association Ltd (SCAL). Within 7 days of the Architect’s requirements to do so, the
Contractor shall furnish copies of certificates and other documents evidencing that
each sub-contractor has been duly registered or accredited as provided under this
provision.
This project is designed to achieve Green Mark Gold Plus Certified rating and the
Contractor shall do his part in obtaining the required Green Mark Points from
following site management items and other Green Mark items
a) Monitoring and set target to reduce energy usage on site
b) Monitoring and set target to reduce water use on site
Implement effective construction & demolition waste management
programme including monitoring and setting targets to minimize
construction waste
d) Usage of recycle materials
e) Other Main Contractor’s Green Mark items
The Contractor shall refer to the documentation on Green Mark for Buildings published
by the BCA for detailed information of the scheme.
In order for the assessment to be conducted, the Contractor shall, inter alia:-
a) At his own cost, make available to the BCA assessors all such documents,
drawings, reports, true and accurate information and any other details as may be
required by the assessors;
b) Permit full access to the Site for the assessment and maintain safety on Site;
c) Bear all costs incurred in connection with the same which may include the
provision of utility supplies;
d) Arrange for the site supervisor to be present, co-ordinate and assist relevant BCA
personnel in arranging for assessment on Site;
e) Facilitate the inspection of audits of the in-process work relating to the
assessment criteria;
f) Organize and interface the Programme and his work to liaise with the assessors
and provide any assistance as may be necessary to ensure satisfactory and
timely sequencing and completion of the assessment; and
g) Apply for re-assessment(s), where necessary prior to the Completion Date and
allow for the fees charged payable to the BCA for the service
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses for compliance with
these requirements.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Attend and review with the DFS Professional Consultants on the design review
GUIDE 3: Pre-Construction Review process in relation to the proposed construction
processes and methodologies, including the temporary works design and the sub-
contractors’ design elements, to ensure all potential harms to anyone during the
construction will be avoided or mitigated prior to the commencement of construction
works to the ER and Dfs Professional for assessment and review. The review shall
also include but not limited to the master programme to ensure sufficient and
practical time is allocated in the timeline for works to be carried out in a safe
manner.
Be competent to carry out the work that he is engaged to do in a safe manner.
Discuss with his Sub-Contractors carrying out the works and take reasonable steps
to ensure that risks identified are properly managed.
All sub-contractors are provided with the required information (GUIDE 1, GUIDE 2
and advisory notes) to enable them to carry out the works safely.
Submit and review any outstanding issues discussed during GUIDE 1 and GUIDE 2
with ER and DFS Professional Consultants. Only residual hazards are to be identified
within the SHRAF at the end of construction.
Submit all Safety And Health Register Assessment Form to DFS Professional
Consultants and submit details of how the high
risk operations will be carried out prior to commencement of the relevant works to
ensure any foreseeable safety and health risks are addressed.
Submit drawings to DFS Professional Consultants and the rest of the Consultants.
Attend regular site meetings, mandatory monthly project safety meetings and
employer’s meetings as and when required.
Submit report on site progress in relation to the DFS matters.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tests and measures against COVID
including establishing and implementing a system of Safe Management Measures so
as to ensure and maintain a safe working environment and minimise the risk of
further outbreaks.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
Deliver to the Employer the following Deeds of Joint Warranty and Indemnity as
specified in the Specification (all for a period of 5-year unless otherwise stated) from
the Date of Completion of Works in a form exactly similar to the Specimen appended
to the Form of Tender.
You are required to submit following lists of warranty & indemnity but not limited to
the following:-
1. For Metal Roof (ten (10) years)
To indemnify against any defects, weakness, water seepage, staining, defective
materials & workmanship and defective design of Metal roof system.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A BIM DELIVERABLES ( )
The Contractor shall adopt Building Information Modeling (BIM) for the delivery of
the Project, and produce the BIM Deliverables for the Project, in accordance to
Building and Construction Authority Singapore BIM Guide (therein known as SG BIM
Guide). Documents and Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor in the
Preliminaries of this Contract shall be read in conjunction with this Preliminaries
Item for BIM.
In conjunction with the delivery of BIM Services for the Project, the Contractor
and/or its Sub-Contractors shall make reference to the prevailing version of the
following documents, as of the effective date of Project Commencement set out in
this Contract:-
(a) Building and Construction Authority Singapore BIM Guide (therein known as SG
BIM Guide) – published in
http://www.corenet.gov.sg/integrated_submission/bim/BIM_Guide.htm
In the event of any inconsistency between the Contract and the SG BIM Guide
and/or the Contractor BIM Requirements, the provisions of the Contract shall
prevail.
The Contractor shall produce its BIM Deliverables in the manner of delivery, content
and standards, set out in the Contractor BIM Requirements and the BIM Execution
Plan. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the
submitted BIM Deliverables
The Contractor shall re-submit any BIM Deliverables as required by the Architect
and/or the Employer, should any of the requirements are not met. The Contractor
shall rectify the Model(s) to the Architect’s satisfaction without any claim on
extension of time and additional cost. The Contractor shall consult the relevant
consultants on the standards should queries arise.
Building Information Models are to facilitate the progress and coordination of the
Works, which shall serve as a production medium for drawings prior to
commencement of works on site and shall be one of the final deliverables after
physical as-built conditions are surveyed, captured and updated into the Model(s).
The Contractor shall carry out the BIM coordination meeting to resolve all technical
matters and submit the coordinated services drawings generated from their
construction BIM model integrating all the key trade works for Employer and
Consultants' review and approval before carrying out the Works on Site.
The Contractor shall facilitate the BIM Deliverables to the Employer and the
Consultants, free of charge and in the appropriate/accepted software application file
format stated in the Contractor BIM Requirements and the BIM Execution Plan, for
the purpose of collaboration, coordination and/or submission. The use of the BIM
Deliverables shall be limited to project-specific purposes and shall not be considered
a license to place the BIM Deliverables to any use not necessary for and specific to
the project.
The Employer shall have the ownership and exclusive rights to all BIM Deliverables
of the Project
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A BIM COORDINATORS ( )
The Contractor shall appoint the following BIM personnel to manage and coordinate
the Contractor’s execution of BIM for the Project :-
(a) One (1) competent BIM Manager, with at least five (5) years’ relevant
experience to serve as the main lead for BIM execution by the
Contractor.
(b) at least one (1) competent BIM Coordinator, with at least three (3) year’s
relevant experience, to assist the Contractor’s Senior BIM Coordinator.
The Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) shall undertake the role and responsibility as
provided in the SG BIM Guide and Contractor BIM Requirements and ensure the
delivery of the Contractor’s BIM Deliverables are in accordance with the standards
and requirements in the Contractor BIM Requirements unless expressly agreed
otherwise.
For the avoidance of doubt, all compensation and related costs associated with the
appointment of the Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) in connection with works to be
done in the Project shall be borne by the Contractor, and no reimbursement,
compensation and/or related costs shall be paid to the Contractor
The Contractor and its BIM Coordinator(s) shall convene a BIM Kick-off meeting, at
least one (1) month before the production of the BIM Deliverables, involving the
Project BIM Manager and the Consultants’ BIM Coordinators involved in the
execution of BIM to coordinate efforts to develop, update and implement the BIM
Execution Plan for the Construction Stage of the Project.
The BIM Execution Plan shall be reviewed and accepted by the Architect at least 14
days before the production of the BIM Deliverables.
Prior to the production of drawings for coordinated services for the Architect’s
approval, the Contractor shall submit the Individual / Combined Services Model(s)
for the Architect’s and relevant Consultant’s review and comments, until satisfaction
with approval in principle. The Contractor shall always ensure that the Architect and
the Project BIM Manager and Coordinators will have adequate time for such review.
Individual / Combined Services Model(s) are to facilitate the progress of the Works
and will be reviewed by the Architect for general design requirements only. As such,
review by the SO of the Individual / Combined Services Model(s) will not constitute
checking of detailed measurements or acceptance of auxiliary units or materials.
The review of the Individual / Combined Services Model(s) by the Architect shall not
be construed as allowing :-
(a) Any departure from Contract requirements except as specifically
approved in writing by the Employer.
(b) The relief of the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, omissions
or discrepancies in details or dimensions in the shop and
coordination drawings.
(c) Any Departure from additional details provided or instructions issued
by the Architect.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
A BIM COORDINATION ( )
The Individual / Combined Services Model(s) are to be updated and re-submitted for
review by the Architect whenever modifications are required to the coordinated
drawings for services, prior to approval of the drawings. Delay caused by the re-
submission or modifications thereto from repeated errors, non-conformance to
standards, unacceptable details, unclear or insufficient information shall not be
reasons for a request for any extension of time
The Contractor and its BIM Coordinator(s) shall actively engage in weekly Model
Coordination Review sessions, as part of the quality assurance protocol, to achieve a
coordinated design prior to the commencement of construction works.
The Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) shall document the findings in a report format,
three (3) working days after each Model Coordination Review session. This report
shall be submitted to the BIM Manager, Architect and the Employer.
Upon completion of all Works and within two (2) months after Substantial
Completion, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, submit the As-Built
Model(s) – (Architecture, C&S, M&E, etc.), containing the as-built drawings together
with the other As-Built deliverables specified in the Preliminaries of the Main
Contract, in four (4) sets to the SO on a separate CD-ROM / DVD-ROM for the SO’s
approval
The Contractor shall provide sufficient technicians/staff on site for the maintenance
period and for longer period if deemed necessary by the Employer.
To Collection $
Item Description $ ¢
COLLECTION
Page 1/12 … …
Page 1/13 … …
Page 1/14 … …
Page 1/15 … …
Page 1/16 … …
Page 1/17 … …
Page 1/18 … …
Page 1/19 … …
Page 1/20 … …
Page 1/21 … …
Page 1/22 … …
Page 1/23 … …
Page 1/24 … …
Page 1/25 … …
Page 1/26 … …
Page 1/27 … …
Page 1/28 … …
Page 1/29 … …
Page 1/30 … …
Carried Forward $
Item Description $ ¢
COLLECTION
Brought Forward
Page 1/31 … …
Page 1/32 … …
Page 1/33 … …
Page 1/34 … …
Page 1/35 … …
Page 1/36 … …
Page 1/37 … …
Page 1/38 … …
Page 1/39 … …
Page 1/40 … …
Page 1/41 … …
Page 1/42 … …
Page 1/43 … …
Page 1/44 … …
Page 1/45 … …
Page 1/46 … …
Page 1/47 … …
Page 1/48 … …
Page 1/49 … …
Page 1/50 ……
Page 1/51 … …
Page 1/52 … …
Page 1/53 … …
Page 1/54 … …
Page 1/55 ……
Page 1/56 … …
NOTES:-
All P.C. and Provisional Sums are to be expended at the discretion and
under the instruction of the Architect and may be omitted wholly or in
part. The Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever on any omission.
The words “Sub-Contractor” where used in this Bill shall mean NSC and
the Employer’s Direct Supplier and Employer’s Direct Contractor
The Contractor is responsible for and shall make available to the Sub-
Contractor on the following facilities for the carrying out of the Sub-
Contract Works:-
To Collection S$
To Collection S$
14) Provision of all necessary filling, grouting and making good works
under around doorways, windows and all openings, chasing, holes
cut out by the Sub-Contractors.
A RESPONSIBILITIES OF SUB-CONTRACTOR
The Sub-Contractor shall include in the Sub-Contract Sum for all costs in
connection with the following:
5) Remove all waste and debris arising from the Sub-Contract Works
to locations designated by the Contractor.
To Collection S$
12) Sealing between sleeves built-in by the Main Contractor and the
pipe, duct, trunking, etc. using materials and methods of suitable
fire rating and to the approval of the Building Authorities, Architect
and Engineer.
The amounts inserted by the Contractor against the item "Allow for Profit
and Attendance" shall include for all the Contractor's responsibilities
including full co-operation and co-ordination with all Nominated Sub-
Contractors and Suppliers to ensure maximum efficiency in the progress
and completion of the works in order to avoid delays.
The amount priced for the attendance of the PC Sum items must include
for co-ordinating with several Nominated Sub-Contractors or Suppliers and
Employer’s Direct Contractors and Suppliers.
Should the Contractor be awarded work under any PC Sum for which he
has tendered, the amount for profit and attendance allowed by him
against the PC Sum shall be deducted.
Should work stated as a PC Sum be omitted from the Contract and the
Employer chooses to carry out such work as a direct contract then the
allowance for "profit and attendance" shall be omitted, save that any
attendance, required to be provided by the Contractor shall be valued by
the Quantity Surveyor as a variation in accordance with the Terms of the
Contract.
The amounts inserted by the Contractor against the item "Allow for
Attendance" shall include for all the Contractor's responsibilities including
full co-operation and co-ordination with all Employer’s Direct Contractors
and Suppliers to ensure maximum efficiency in the progress and
completion of the works in order to avoid delays.
The Contractor will be held responsible for whatever other expenses to
which he deems he is entitled. The Attendance shall be adjusted against
the awarded contract sum for the Employer’s Direct contracts.
To Collection S$
Solar Panels
J Provide the P.C Sum of S$3,500,000.00 (Singapore Three Million and Five
Hundred Thousand Dollars Only) for Solar Panels Works to be executed - 3,500,000 00
complete by a Designated Sub-Contractor.
To Collection S$
G Provide the P.C Sum of S$100,0000.00 (Singapore One Hundred Thousand 100,000 00
Dollars only) for Kitchen Equipment to be executed complete by a
-
Designated Sub-Contractor.
PROVISIONAL SUMS
Loose Furniture & FFE Items
Built-In Cabinets
K Provide the P.C Sum of S$50,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Fifty Thousand 50,000 00
Only) for Built-In Cabinets -
Signages
To Collection S$
Notes:-
(State______%)
(State______%)
(State______%)
To Collection S$
COLLECTION
GENERAL NOTES
A This This Section is to be read in conjunction with other Item
documents/drawings/Specifications in the tender documents.
Allow in the Tender Price all necessary machinery, plant, tools,
scaffolding, materials, labour and all temporary works for the
proper protection and the execution of the Works.
C The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in Item
this tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and
the method statement illustrating how the works shall be carried
out.
D All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, Item
pipe sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and
Electrical Services are deemed to be included.
E The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, Item
telephone cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site
have been properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to
commencement of any works. Failure to comply with this
condition and thereby resulting in damage inclusive of any
consequential claims shall be borne fully by the Contractor.
H No claims will be entertained by the Employer for any extra cost, Item
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any
interruptions by any late approvals and any delay in the works of
the relevant Authorities.
TO COLLECTION
A Allow for cutting, clearing and removal of trees, plants and Item
shrubs and the like, grubbing up roots, backfilling and
compacting holes with approved earth including removal all
debris off site.
Earthworks
B Excavation to form cutting commencing from ground level; Item
including forming of levels; filling and compaction to the required
platform levels and removal of surplus excavated material
within the site.
_________________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
A Item
B Item
C Item
D Item
E Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
C The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in Item
this tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and
the method statement illustrating how the works shall be carried
out.
D All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, Item
pipe sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and
Electrical Services are deemed to be included.
F Unless otherwise stated, all pipes/conduits and the like are Item
deemed to be concealed. All fittings are deemed to be flushed
with plastering. Tender prices are deemed to include all
necessary boxings, ceiling lining to cover the exposed
pipes/conduits.
H No claims will be entertained by the Employer for any extra cost, Item
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any
interruptions by any late approvals and any delay in the works
of the relevant Authorities.
iii The installation of the above 2 items are under Prime Cost Sum
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
F Low reinforced concrete wall; 700mm high completed with BRC Item
mesh and formworks
G Reinforced concrete encasement to structural steel columns; Item
completed with BRC mesh and formworks; 700mm high
C Cement and sand screed, power floated with floor hardener Item
Sundries
D Hot dipped galvanised chequered plate and hot dipped Item
galvanised cover plate to manure trench as specified; completed
with metal framing and all necessary fitting accessories
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
B Reinforced concrete walls; complete with BRC welded mesh and Item
formwork
Painting
METAL ROOFING
H Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side aluminium
foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be fixed in
strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions as
specified
TO COLLECTION
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Sundries
C Concrete footing for silos including excavation, and removal Item
debris off site; completed with BRC mesh and formworks
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
E Reinforced concrete walls; complete with BRC welded mesh and Item
formwork
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
C Steel suspended platforms and cat ladders with safety cages Item
Painting
METAL ROOFING
E Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side aluminium
foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be fixed in
strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions as
specified; to main building roof and entrance canopy
STAIRCASE
RC Staircase - External
Others
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
Sundries
E Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with metal support, painting to S.O.'s
approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
F Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding adhesive
and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including steel
lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
Sundries
G Low closet wall partition at the Toilets completed with brick wall Item
and homogeneous tiles to walls and removable panel with steel
support on top of wall including all necessary fitting accessories
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
A _____________________________________ Item
B _____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item
float/ tinted glass as specified.
C Sliding aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear float Item
glass as specified.
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
B Swing Metal flush door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
C Swing Metal flush door completed with vision panel, hydraulic Item
door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
D Sliding aluminium door completed with foot touch sensor and Item
ironmongeries as specified
F Swing metal door completed with square mesh screen and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
H High speed sectional door and metal door completed with vision Item
panel, electrical and push button operation model, automatic
sensor and ironmongeries as specified.
I Metal sectional door completed with electrical and push button Item
operated, automatic sensor and ironmongeries as specified.
J Metal sectional door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model, automatic sensor and
ironmongeries as specified.
K Metal sectional door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model and ironmongeries as specified.
L Zipper quick door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model and ironmongeries as specified.
N Fire rated metal swing door completed with vision panel, Item
hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
FLOOR FINISHES
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by S.O.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
J _____________________________________ Item
K _____________________________________ Item
L _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
A Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
H Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
I 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion paint Item
in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water resistant
gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to specification and
drawings - internally
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
E Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
F Supply and install toilet cubicles including doors with 2 nos of Item
coat hooks and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance
with drawings.
G Supply and install stainless steel shoe box and all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
H Supply and install horizonal, vertical and foldable grab bars Item
including all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
I Supply and install solid surface vanity top complete with Item
structural metal support; to S.O.'s satisfaction.
J Supply and install urinal partition including plywood backing and Item
all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
K Supply and install drain trench including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
TO COLLECTION
D Supply and install dock shelter including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
E Supply and install dock leveller including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
F Supply and install impact rubber bumper including all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
G Supply and install safety guard rail including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
H Supply and install rotating HDPE bollards including all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
K
_____________________________________ Item
L
_____________________________________ Item
M
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Sundries
C Concrete foundation for egg conveyor including excavation, and Item
removal debris off site; lean concrete, hardcore, BRC wire mesh,
formwork
D BRC welded mesh fence enclosure completed with metal mesh Item
door with non-duplicate lock according to PUB approved type; for
domestic water tank and pump area, as specified on M&E
drawing; 2.50m high
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
To raft foundation/ ground slabs/ ground beams
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
METAL ROOFING
F Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck
@700" or other equivalent metal roof, completed with
50mm thick fibreglass rockwool insulation
(80kg/m3), double side aluminium foil, wire mesh
3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to
be fixed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's
printed instructions as specified; to main building roof
and lower roof
Others
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Sundries
Others
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above
but shown in the drawings and specifications and
necessary for the successful completion of the Works.
Otherwise it shall deem to be included elsewhere in
the tender price
J Item
_____________________________________
K _____________________________________ Item
L _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
External Finishes
Tile Finishes
Others
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
D Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
Painting
F 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC
emulsion paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster
board in ceiling accordance to specification and
drawings - internally
Others
G _____________________________________ Item
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
(State Brand -
Washer_____________________________)
(State Brand -
Dryer_____________________________)
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above
but shown in the drawings and specifications and
necessary for the successful completion of the Works.
Otherwise it shall deem to be included elsewhere in
the tender price
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above
but shown in the drawings and specifications and
necessary for the successful completion of the Works.
Otherwise it shall deem to be included elsewhere in
the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
Carried Forward S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side aluminium
foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be fixed in
strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions as
specified
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
Sundries
D Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with metal support, painting to S.O.'s
approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding adhesive
and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including steel
lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item
float/ tinted glass as specified.
A Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
FLOOR FINISHES
Internal Finishes
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by S.O.
External Finishes
E Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
A Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
B Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of emulsion
paint to walls and columns
Tile Finishes
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by S.O.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
D Access panels to all false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
F 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion paint Item
in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water resistant
gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to specification and
drawings - internally
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
Sundries
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
G Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with Item
concrete, reinforcement and formwork including the
concrete copings to walls and columns
TO COLLECTION
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700"
or other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side
aluminium foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
Others
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Sundries
D Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with metal support, painting to
S.O.'s approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
Others
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Others
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
A Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
E Solid timber swing door completed with paint finishes and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
F Solid timber swing door with glass panel completed with Item
laminated finishes, hydraulic door closer and
ironmongeries as specified.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
FLOOR FINISHES
Waterproofing System
Tile Finishes
J Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and
border with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and
pointed with approved colour grout; and to be selected and
approved by S.O.
Others
K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
D Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
Painting
F 1 undercoat and 2 finishing coats of approved emulsion Item
paint in approved colour to plastered/ skim coated surface
in accordance to specification and drawings - internally
Others
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
D Supply and install horizonal, vertical and foldable grab bars Item
including all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance
with drawings.
E Supply and install solid surface vanity top complete with Item
structural metal support; to S.O.'s satisfaction.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
C Item
_____________________________________
D Item
_____________________________________
E Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
METAL ROOFING
C Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side
aluminium foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
Others
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
Sundries
D Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with metal support, painting to S.O.'s
approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
Others
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
D Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES
Paving
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border
with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed
with approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved
by S.O.
Tile Finishes
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border
with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed
with approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved
by S.O.
Others
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
B Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
C 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion
paint in approved colour to moisture resistant gypsum plaster
board in ceiling accordance to specification and drawings -
internally
Others
D Item
_____________________________________
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary Item
fittings and accessories all in accordance with drawings
(Installation priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
C Supply and install drain trench including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
EXTERNAL WORKS WITHIN PLOTS
B Reinforced concrete kerb for Foot bath; complete BRC mesh, Item
formwork, cement and sand screed with PU paint finishes;
and all necessary works for completion of works
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
LAYER PULLET
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Carried Forward S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
Painting
METAL ROOFING
D Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, including all necessary Colourbond
metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be
fixed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed
instructions as specified; to Main building and to the Tank
Sundries
F Concrete plinth completed with BRC mesh and formwork for the Item
equipment
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
METAL ROOFING
C Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side
aluminium foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
Others
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel with Item
1 Hr fire rated or other equivalent specification, filled with
Joe joint bonding adhesive and Joe crack shield and all fixing
accessories; including steel lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed
in strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions
as specified
F Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with structural metal support, painting
to S.O.'s approval and all necessary fitting accessories
Others
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
D Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
I Fire rated metal swing door completed with hydraulic door Item
closer and ironmongeries as specified.
Roller Shutter
TO COLLECTION
FLOOR FINISHES
B Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border
with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed
with approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved
by S.O.
Tile Finishes
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border
with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed
with approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved
by S.O.
Others
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
Sundries
C Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
D 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion
paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster board in ceiling
accordance to specification and drawings - internally
Others
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary Item
fittings and accessories all in accordance with drawings
(Installation priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
D Supply only the water taps including all necessary fittings and Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings (Installation
priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
STAIRCASE
RC Staircase
C Reinforced concrete staircase including landing slabs and steps; Item
completed with reinforcement, formwork, cement and screed
paving, with nosing tiles to treads, plastering and painting to
exposed surface of staircase hot dipped galvanised railing with
approved paint finishes and all necessary fitting accessories
Painting
METAL ROOFING
G Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified; to Main building
and canopy
TO COLLECTION
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
F Swing metal door completed with square mesh screen and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
TO COLLECTION
A Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding adhesive
and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including steel
lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
E Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of emulsion
paint to walls and columns
F Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by S.O.
Sundries
G Supply only the wate taps including all necessary fittings and Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings (Installation priced
under M&E Schedule of Works).
H Supply and install motorised roller curtain completed with track Item
guided system, motor; structural steel support and all neccssary
fitting accessories
I Supply and install impact rubber bumper including all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
J Supply and install rotating HDPE bollards including all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
A Item
_____________________________________
B Item
_____________________________________
C Item
_____________________________________
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS
Walls
G Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with Item
reinforcement and formwork
TO COLLECTION
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side
aluminium foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified; to Main
building and to canopy
Others
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
C Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish Item
to external wall and columns including gutter
G Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with structural metal support, painting
to S.O.'s approval and all necessary fitting accessories
TO COLLECTION
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item
float/ tinted glass as specified.
D Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
FLOOR FINISHES
B Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by
S.O.
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish Item
to walls and columns
Tile Finishes
F Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by
S.O.
Others
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
Suspended Ceiling
A Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel furring Item
system including forming of drop/ pelmet and access panel,
edge trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories fixed
strictly in accordance to specification and drawings - internally
Sundries
C Access panels to all false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
Painting
D 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion Item
paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water
resistant gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to
specification and drawings - internally
Others
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary Item
fittings and accessories all in accordance with drawings
(Installation priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
C Supply and install granite counter top completed with all Item
necessary fixing accessories; all in accordance with drawings.
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
I _____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS
Walls
A Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with concrete, Item
reinforcement and formwork
F Fixed and removable hot dipped galvanised railing with approved Item
paint finishes and all necessary fitting accessories
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
ROOF
A Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; completed Item
with concrete, reinforcement and formwork
D 50mm thick precast concrete slab in maximum panel size not Item
exceeding 1000 x 1000mm; complete with 1 layer of BRC wire
mesh, infilled joints with approved PU sealant
E Cement & sand levelling screed including all necessary insulation Item
works, etc
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
D Hollow glass block laid in cement mortar (1:4) with approved Item
plasticiser and mesh reinforcement at every fourth course;
100mm thick
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding adhesive
and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including steel
lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
TO COLLECTION
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
A Cement and sand screed, power floated with floor hardener Item
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
C Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of emulsion
paint to walls and columns
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
slab soffit and beams
E Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of emulsion
paint to slab soffit and beams
F Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
slab soffit and beams
Sundries
I Aluminium cat ladder completed with metal support including all Item
necessary fitting accessories
TO COLLECTION
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
A _____________________________________ Item
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
SUMMARY
GENERAL NOTES
C The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to examine and Item
ascertain the true nature and extent of the work under this section
before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be held to include clearing or
removal of all types of materials so as to facilitate proper execution of all
works.
D The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in this Item
tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and the method
statement illustrating how the works shall be carried out.
E All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, pipe Item
sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and Electrical Services
are deemed to be included.
F The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, telephone Item
cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site have been
properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to commencement of
any works. Failure to comply with this condition and thereby resulting in
damage inclusive of any consequential claims shall be borne fully by the
Contractor.
G Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, liaising with Item
the relevant Authorities and all necessary attendance and pay all licence
fees, levies/charges in connection with the Works and all works carried
out by the relevant Authorities.
H No claims will be entertained by the Employer for any extra cost, Item
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any interruptions
by any late approvals and any delay in the works of the relevant
Authorities.
I Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Tenderers, the Item
Conditions of Contract and its Amendments, Specification and Drawings.
TO COLLECTION
B Flexible pavement road completed with asphaltic wearing course and Item
asphalt base course, well compacted base course, sub base, sub grade,
road kerb, all as specified
C Precast aeration slab for open car parking lot and the handicapped Item
parking lot completed with well compacted base course, sub base, sub
grade, 50mm thick sand bedding, road kerb, all as specified
F Directional sign at three Entrances completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
steel steel pipe with approved paint, reinforced concrete footings
including excavation and removal debis off site, and all necessary
fittings; to S.O. approval
H Hot dipped galvanised mild steel railing and swing gate with with Item
approved painting completed with P.E. design and endorsement
K Hot dipped galvanised mild steel railing and swing gate with with Item
approved painting completed with P.E. design and endorsement
TO COLLECTION
PIPE CROSSING
A 650mm diameter concrete pipe complete with excavation, removal Item
debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore, concrete bed and concrete
haunching, reinforcement, formwork left -in and all necessary fitting
accessories
B 700mm diameter concrete pipe complete with excavation, removal Item
debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore, concrete bed and concrete
haunching, reinforcement, formwork left -in and all necessary fitting
accessories
C Allow the connection of the new drainage discharge to the existing Item
Monsoon drain to the acceptance of relevant authorities including
vertical grating, excavation and temporary works
D Making good all the affected works to match the existing finishes; Item
subject to S.O.'s approval
BOX CULVERT
Reinforced concrete Box Culvert complete with excavation, well
compacted hardcore, lean concrete, BRC welded mesh, geo-composite
subsoil drain, non-woven heat bonded geo-textile memebrane, cement
and sand screed to internal surfaces, precast concrete channel drain
(type C3), forming weepholes and all necessary fixing accessories
G Heavy duty vehicular grating completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
steel grating, angle frame and all necessary fitting accessories; to
Box culvert
H 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories to Box culvert
BOX DRAIN
TO COLLECTION
M Heavy duty vehicular grating and pedestrian grating completed with hot Item
dipped galvanised steel grating, angle frame and all necessary fitting
accessories; to Box drain
N 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories; to Box drain
OPEN DRAIN
M 300mm wide reinforced concrete open U-drain complete with excavation, Item
well compacted hardcore, lean concrete, reinforcement bar, geo-
composite subsoil drain, non-woven heat bonded geo-textile, concrete
channel drain (type C3), weepholes, aluminium rung, and all necessary
fixing accessories
CONCRETE SUMP
D 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories; to Sumps
TO COLLECTION
A BRC mesh fence with swing gates completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
mild steel frame in paint finish, structural support, motor system,
concrete footing, excavation and removal of debris off site including P.E.
calculation and endorsement and all necessary fittings accessories
ENTRANCE GATE
B Auto sliding entrance gates completed with hot dipped galvanised steel Item
with paint finishes, ironmongeries; electrical wiring and motor system,
metal support including P.E. calculation and endorsement and all
necessary fittings accessories
LANDSCAPE WORKS
C Supply and installation of the trees, shrubs, ground covers and the like Item
[Trees = 1000 x 1000 x 1000mm pit; Shrubs = 300 x 300 x 300mm] all
as specified including excavation and backfilling of pits with approved
soil mix as specified, staking, watering and mulching with 50mm
approved specified mulch and all other maintenance up to DLP or as
instructed by the Architect.
D Supply and plant good quality and approved Axonopus Compressus all Item
as specified to ground level in roll of 600mm wide x 50mm grass sods
[attached with roots] including ground preparation, top soiling * to
100mm depth, top dressing, weeding, rolling and replacement when
necessary until grass sward is established up to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
TO COLLECTION
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
GENERAL NOTES
C The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to examine and Item
ascertain the true nature and extent of the work under this section
before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be held to include clearing
or removal of all types of materials so as to facilitate proper execution of
all works.
D The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in this Item
tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and the method
statement illustrating how the works shall be carried out.
E All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, pipe Item
sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and Electrical Services
are deemed to be included.
F The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, telephone Item
cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site have been
properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to commencement
of any works. Failure to comply with this condition and thereby resulting
in damage inclusive of any consequential claims shall be borne fully by
the Contractor.
G Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, liaising with Item
the relevant Authorities and all necessary attendance and pay all licence
fees, levies/charges in connection with the Works and all works carried
out by the relevant Authorities.
H No claims will be entertained by the Employer for any extra cost, Item
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any interruptions
by any late approvals and any delay in the works of the relevant
Authorities.
I Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Tenderers, the Item
Conditions of Contract and its Amendments, Specification and Drawings.
TO COLLECTION
ROAD EXTENSION
A Allow for cutting, clearing and removal of trees, plants and Item
shrubs and the like, grubbing up roots, backfilling and
compacting holes with approved earth including removal all
debris off site.
B Flexible pavement road completed with asphaltic wearing course and Item
base course, well compacted base course, sub base, sub grade, road
kerb, all as specified
C Road marking and the like in Thermoplastic paint Item
DRAINAGE
I Allow for provision of drainage diversion with and including keeping Item
whole temporary and permanent drainage well drained and free from
debris including regular desilting as directed and make good any
damaged drainage system; all to the Architect's satisfaction and to Local
Authority's approval
SUNDRIES
J All parts of the existing finishes affected by the external road extension Item
works are to be make good and reinstate to match the existing finishes
condition.
TO COLLECTION
OTHERS
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
COLLECTION PAGE
For
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities on Lot 02008x
Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
3
Section 3 –Earthworks
Address: Address:
Date: Date:
For
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities on Lot 02008x
Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
... ...
C Sub-Total:
E Sub-Total:
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Signature of Contractor Signature of Witness
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Name in Block Letters Name in Block Letters